Introduction to Creo Parametric 2.

PT

In

te rn

al
T3902-390-02

Fo r

Authored and published using

U se

nl y

Copyright 2012 Parametric Technology Corporation. All Rights Reserved. Copyright for PTC software products is with Parametric Technology Corporation, its subsidiary companies (collectively PTC), and their respective licensors. This software is provided under written license agreement, contains valuable trade secrets and proprietary information, and is protected by the copyright laws of the United States and other countries. It may not be copied or distributed in any form or medium, disclosed to third parties, or used in any manner not provided for in the software licenses agreement except with written prior approval from PTC. UNAUTHORIZED USE OF SOFTWARE OR ITS DOCUMENTATION CAN RESULT IN CIVIL DAMAGES AND CRIMINAL PROSECUTION. User and training guides and related documentation from PTC is subject to the copyright laws of the United States and other countries and is provided under a license agreement that restricts copying, disclosure, and use of such documentation. PTC hereby grants to the licensed software user the right to make copies in printed form of this documentation if provided on software media, but only for internal/personal use and in accordance with the license agreement under which the applicable software is licensed. Any copy made shall include the PTC copyright notice and any other proprietary notice provided by PTC. Training materials may not be copied without the express written consent of PTC. This documentation may not be disclosed, transferred, modified, or reduced to any form, including electronic media, or transmitted or made publicly available by any means without the prior written consent of PTC and no authorization is granted to make copies for such purposes. Information described herein is furnished for general information only, is subject to change without notice, and should not be construed as a warranty or commitment by PTC. PTC assumes no responsibility or liability for any errors or inaccuracies that may appear in this document. For Important Copyright, Trademark, Patent and Licensing Information see backside of this guide.

Fo r

PT

In

te rn

al

U se

nl y

About PTC University

Welcome to PTC University!
With an unmatched depth and breadth of product development knowledge, PTC University helps you realize the most value from PTC products. Only PTC University offers: An innovative learning methodology PTCs Precision Learning Methodology is a proven proprietary approach used by PTC to develop and deliver learning solutions. Flexible Delivery Options PTC University ensures you receive the same quality training programs regardless of the learning style. Our extensive experience, innovative learning techniques, and targeted learning modules facilitate the rapid retention of concepts, and higher user productivity. Premier Content and Expertise A thorough instructor certification process and direct access to the PTC product development and PTC consulting organizations means that only PTC courses can give you highly-qualified instructors, the most up-to-date product information and best practices derived from thousands of deployments. Global Focus PTC University delivers training where and when you need it by providing over 100 training centers located across 35 countries offering content in nine languages. Delivering Value A role-based learning design ensures the right people have the right tools to do their jobs productively while supporting the organizations overall performance goals. The course you are about to take will expose you to a number of learning offerings that PTC University has available. These include: Instructor-led Training (ILT) The ideal blend of classroom lectures, personal demonstrations, hands-on workshops, assessments, and post-classroom tools. Pro/FICIENCY This Web-based, skills assessment and development-planning tool will help improve your skills and productivity. eLearning Libraries 24/7 access to Web-based training that will compliment your instructor-led course. Precision LMS A powerful learning management system that will manage your eLearning Library and Pro/FICIENCY assessments.

Fo r

PTC University additionally offers Precision Learning Programs. These are corporate learning programs designed to your organizations specific goals, current skills, desired competencies, and training preferences. Whatever your learning needs are, PTC University can help you get the most out of your PTC products.

PT

In

te rn

al

U se

nl y

PTC Telephone and Fax Numbers

North America
Education Services Registration Tel: (888) 782-3773 Fax: (781) 370-5307 Technical Support (Monday - Friday) Tel: (800) 477-6435 Fax: (781) 707-0328 License Management and Contracts Tel: 877-ASK-4-PTC (877-275-4782) Fax: (781) 707-0331

Technical Support, License Management, Training & Consulting Tel: +800-PTC-4-HELP (00-800-78-24-43-57)

Asia

Fo r

PT

In addition, you can access the PTC Web site at www.ptc.com. Our Web site contains the latest training schedules, registration information, directions to training facilities, and course descriptions. You can also reach technical support, and register for online service options such as knowledge base searches, reference libraries, and documentation. You can also find general information about PTC, PTC Products, Consulting Services, Customer Support, and PTC Partners.

In

te rn

Please refer to http://www.ptc.com/services/training/contact.htm for contact information.

al

U se

Europe

nl y

Precision Learning
Precision Learning in the Classroom
PTC University uses the Precision Learning methodology to develop effective, comprehensive class material that will improve the productivity of both individuals and organizations. PTC then teaches using the proven instructional design principal of Tell Me, Show Me, Let Me Do: Topics are introduced through a short presentation, highlighting the key concepts. These key concepts are then reinforced by seeing them applied in the software application. You then apply the concepts through structured exercises. After the course, a Pro/FICIENCY assessment is provided to enable you to assess your understanding of the materials. The assessment results will also identify the class topics that require further review. At the end of the class, you will either take a Pro/FICIENCY assessment via your PTC University eLearning account, or your instructor will provide training on how to do this after the class.

Each student that enrolls in a PTC class has a PTC University eLearning account. This account will be automatically created if you do not already have one. As part of the class, you receive additional content in your account: A Pro/FICIENCY assessment from the course content that generates a Recommended Learning Report based on your results. A Web-based training version of the course, based on the same instructional approach of lecture, demonstration, and exercise. The Recommended Learning Report will link directly to sections of this training that you may want to review. Please note that Web-based training may not be available in all languages. The Web-based training is available in your account for one year after the live class.

Fo r

PT

In

te rn

Precision Learning After the Class

al

U se

nl y

Precision Learning Recommendations

PTC uses a role-based training approach. The roles and the associated training are graphically displayed in a curriculum map. Curriculum maps are available for numerous PTC products and versions in the training section of our Web site at http://www.ptc.com/services/edserv/learning/paths/index.htm.

Fo r

Please note that a localized map may not be available in every language and that the map above is partial and for illustration purposes only. Before the end of the class, your instructor will review the map corresponding to the course you are taking. This review, along with instructor recommendations, should give you some ideas for additional training that corresponds to your role and job functions.

PT

In

te rn

al

U se

nl y

Training Agenda
Day 1
Module 01 Module 02 Module 03 Module 04 Module 05 Module 06 Introduction to the Creo Parametric Basic Modeling Process Understanding Creo Parametric Concepts Using the Creo Parametric Interface Selecting Geometry, Features, and Models Editing Geometry, Features, and Models Creating Sketcher Geometry

Day 2
Module 07 Module 08 Module 09 Module 10 Module 11 Module 12

Using Sketcher Tools Creating Sketches for Features Creating Datum Features: Planes and Axes Creating Extrudes, Revolves, and Ribs Utilizing Internal Sketches and Embedded Datums Creating Sweeps and Blends

Day 4
Module Module Module Module Module Module

Fo r

Day 5
Module 25 Module 26 Module 27 Module 28 Investigating Parent/Child Relationships Capturing and Managing Design Intent Resolving Failures and Seeking Help Project II

PT

19 20 21 22 23 24

Module Module Module Module Module Module

13 14 15 16 17 18

Creating Holes, Shells, and Draft Creating Rounds and Chamfers Project I Group, Copy, and Mirror Tools Creating Patterns Measuring and Inspecting Models

Assembling with Constraints Assembling with Connections Exploding Assemblies Drawing Layout and Views Creating Drawing Annotations Using Layers

In

te rn

Day 3

al

U se

nl y

Fo r C In te rn al U se O nl y

PT

Table of Contents Introduction to Creo Parametric 2.0

Introduction to the Creo Parametric Basic Modeling Process . . . . . . 1-1 Creo Parametric Basic Modeling Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Understanding Creo Parametric Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Understanding Solid Modeling Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Understanding Feature-Based Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Understanding Parametric Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Understanding Associative Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Understanding Model-Centric Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Recognizing File Extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 2-2 2-3 2-4 2-6 2-7 2-8

Fo r

Using the Creo Parametric Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 Understanding the Main Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Understanding the Folder Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 Understanding the Web Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 Setting the Working Directory and Opening and Saving Files . . . . . . 3-9 Understanding the Ribbon Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13 Customizing the Ribbon Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19 Working with Multiple Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24 Managing Files in Creo Parametric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26 Understanding Datum Display Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30 Understanding Display Style Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33 Analyzing Basic 3-D Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36 Understanding the View Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41 Creating and Managing View Orientations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42 Creating Style States Using the View Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46 Managing and Editing Appearances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-50 Setting Up New Part Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57 Selecting Geometry, Features, and Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Understanding Creo Parametric Basic Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 Using Drag Handles and Dimension Draggers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 Using Keyboard Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6 Understanding the Model Tree. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8 Understanding Model Tree Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10 Understanding Basic Model Tree Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12 Selecting Items using Direct Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14 Selecting Items using Query Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19 Using the Search Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23 Using the Smart Selection Filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28

PT

In

te rn

al

U se

nl y

Understanding Selection Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32 Selecting Multiple Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35 Editing Geometry, Features, and Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1 Renaming Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Utilizing Undo and Redo Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 Understanding Regeneration and Auto Regeneration . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 Editing Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 Editing Features using Edit Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 Activating and Editing Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14 Deleting and Suppressing Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18 Editing Feature and Component Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22 Creating Sketcher Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Reviewing Sketcher Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Understanding Design Intent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Modifying the Sketcher Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 Utilizing Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7 Sketching with On-the-Fly Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13 Sketching Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15 Sketching Centerlines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19 Sketching Rectangles and Parallelograms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22 Sketching Circles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27 Sketching Arcs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30 Sketching Circular Fillets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34 Sketching Chamfers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-37 Using Sketcher Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 Understanding Construction Geometry Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 Sketching Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4 Using Geometry Tools within Sketcher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5 Manipulating Sketches within Sketcher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10 Dimensioning Entities within Sketcher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14 Modifying Dimensions within Sketcher. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21 Sketcher Conflicts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26 Creating New Sketch Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29 Placing Sections into Sketcher. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32 Creating Sketches for Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1 Creating Sketches ('Sketch' Feature). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2 Specifying and Manipulating the Sketch Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4 Utilizing Sketch References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10 Using Entity from Edge within Sketcher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14 Thickening Edges. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17 Creating Datum Features: Planes and Axes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1

Fo r

PT

In

te rn

al

U se

nl y

Creating Datum Features Theory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Creating Datum Axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Creating Datum Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7 Creating Extrudes, Revolves, and Ribs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1 Creating Solid Extrude Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 Adding Taper to Extrude Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4 Common Dashboard Options: Extrude Depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8 Common Dashboard Options: Feature Direction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12 Common Dashboard Options: Thicken Sketch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16 Creating Solid Revolve Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19 Common Dashboard Options: Revolve Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23 Automatically Adding and Removing Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27 Creating Profile Rib Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31

Creating Holes, Shells, and Draft. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1 Common Dashboard Options: Hole Depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2 Creating Coaxial Holes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6 Creating Linear Holes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8 Creating Radial and Diameter Holes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11 Exploring Hole Profile Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15 Creating Shell Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-19 Creating Draft Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-21 Creating Basic Split Drafts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-25 Analyzing Draft Hinges and Pull Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-28 Creating Rounds and Chamfers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1 Creating Rounds Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2 Creating Rounds by Selecting Edges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3 Creating Rounds by Selecting a Surface and Edge. . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6 Creating Rounds by Selecting Two Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-9 Creating Full Rounds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-12 Creating Round Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-15 Creating Chamfers by Selecting Edges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-18

Fo r

PT

In

Creating Sweeps and Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1 Creating Sweeps with Open Trajectories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2 Creating Sweeps with Closed Trajectories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8 Analyzing Sweep Feature Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-13 Creating Blends by Selecting Parallel Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-15 Creating Blends by Sketching Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-20 Analyzing Blend Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-26

te rn

al

U se

Utilizing Internal Sketches and Embedded Datums. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 Creating Internal Sketches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2 Creating Embedded Datum Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7

nl y

Analyzing Basic Chamfer Dimensioning Schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-21 Creating Chamfer Sets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-24 Project I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Air Circulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Piston Assembly Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Crankshaft, Engine Block, Impeller, and Impeller Housing . . . . . . . The Frame and Bolt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1 15-2 15-3 15-4 15-5

Measuring and Inspecting Models. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-1 Viewing and Editing Model Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-2 Investigating Model Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-4 Analyzing Mass Properties. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-8 Using the Measure Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-12 Using the Measure Summary Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-20 Creating Planar Part Cross-Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-23 Measuring Global Interference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-28 Assembling with Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-1 Understanding Assembly Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-2 Creating New Assembly Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-4 Understanding Constraint Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-9 Understanding Assembly Constraint Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-11 Assembling Components using the Default Constraint . . . . . . . . . 19-13 Orienting Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-16 Creating Coincident Constraints using Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-21 Creating Coincident Constraints using Datum Features . . . . . . . . 19-26 Creating Distance Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-31

Fo r

PT

In

Creating Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-1 Direction Patterning in the First Direction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-2 Direction Patterning in the Second Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-6 Axis Patterning in the First Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-11 Axis Patterning in the Second Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-15 Direction Patterning with Multiple Direction Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-19 Creating Reference Patterns of Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-22 Creating Reference Patterns of Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-26 Deleting Patterns or Pattern Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-29

te rn

al

U se

Group, Copy, and Mirror Tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-1 Creating Local Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-2 Copying and Pasting Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-6 Moving and Rotating Copied Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-10 Mirroring Selected Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-15 Mirroring All Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-18 Creating Mirrored Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-21

nl y

Creating Parallel, Normal, and Angle Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-37 Assembling using Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-41 Utilizing the Accessory Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-48 Assembling with Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-1 Understanding Connection Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-2 Dragging Connected Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-3 Assembling Components using the Slider Connection . . . . . . . . . . 20-6 Assembling Components using the Pin Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-9 Assembling Components using the Cylinder Connection . . . . . . . 20-12 Analyzing Collision Detection Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-14 Exploding Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-1 Creating and Managing Explode States. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-2 Creating Explode Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-8 Animating Explode States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-12 Drawing Layout and Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-1 Analyzing Drawing Concepts and Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-2 Analyzing Basic 2-D Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-3 Creating New Drawings and Applying Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-5 Creating and Orienting General Views. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-9 Utilizing the Drawing Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-12 Managing Drawing Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-15 Adding Drawing Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-19 Creating Projection Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-23 Creating Cross-Section Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-27 Creating Detailed Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-31 Creating Auxiliary Views. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-35 Creating New Drawings using Drawing Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-36 Modifying Drawing Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-40 Creating Assembly and Exploded Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-44 Creating Drawing Annotations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-1 Analyzing Annotation Concepts and Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-2 Creating Tables from File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-4 Creating BOM Balloons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-8 Showing, Erasing, and Deleting Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-13 Cleaning Up Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-18 Manipulating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-21 Creating Driven Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-25 Inserting Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-29 Analyzing Drawing Associativity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-33 Publishing Drawings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-37 Using Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-1

Fo r

PT

In

te rn

al

U se

nl y

Understanding Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-2 Creating and Managing Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-4 Utilizing Layers in Part Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-6 Creating Layer States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-9 Utilizing Layers in Assembly Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-12 Investigating Parent/Child Relationships . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-1 Understanding Parent/Child Relationships . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-2 Viewing Part Parent/Child Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-5 Viewing Assembly Parent/Child Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-9 Viewing Model, Feature, and Component Information . . . . . . . . . . 25-13 Capturing and Managing Design Intent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-1 Handling Children of Deleted and Suppressed Items . . . . . . . . . . . 26-2 Reordering Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-7 Inserting Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-10 Redefining Features and Sketches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-14 Capturing Design Intent in Sketches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-18 Capturing Design Intent in Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-20 Capturing Design Intent in Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-22 Capturing Design Intent in Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-24 Resolving Failures and Seeking Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-1 Understanding and Identifying Failures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-2 Analyzing Geometry Failures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-5 Analyzing Open Section Failures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-9 Analyzing Missing Part Reference Failures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-12 Analyzing Missing Component Failures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-16 Analyzing Missing Component Reference Failures . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-20 Analyzing Invalid Assembly Constraint Failures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-24 Understanding Resolve Mode Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-29 Recovering Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-31 Using Creo Parametric Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-32 Project II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Air Circulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Piston Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine Block and Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Blower Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine Blower Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Completing the Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Fo r

PT

In

te rn

al

U se

nl y

28-1 28-2 28-3 28-4 28-5 28-6 28-7

Student Preface Using the Header

Course Handbook Layout: Modules Topics Concept Theory Procedure Exercise (if applicable) Procedure / Exercise Header:

Fo r

Course Handbook Layout

The information in this course handbook is organized to help students locate information after the course is complete. Each course is organized into modules, each covering a general subject. Each module contains topics, with each topic focused on a specific portion of the module subject. Each individual topic in the module is divided into the following sections: Concept This section contains the initial introduction to the topic and is presented during the class lecture as an overhead slide, typically with figures and bullets.

PT

In

te rn

al

U se

nl y

In this topic, you learn about the course handbook layout and the header used to begin each lab in Creo Parametric.

Procedure / Exercise Header

The following items are indicated in the figure above, where applicable: 1. Procedure/Exercise Name This is the name of the lab. 2. Scenario This briefly describes what will be done in the lab. The Scenario is only found in Exercises. 3. Close Windows/Erase Not Displayed A reminder that you should close any open files and erase them from memory:

Fo r

4.

5.

and then click OK. Click Erase Not Displayed Folder Name This is the working directory for the lab. Lab files are stored in topic folders within specific functional area folders. The path to the lab files is: PTCU\CreoParametric2\functional_area_folder\topic_folder In the example, Round is the functional area folder and Variable is the topic folder, so you would set the Working Directory to PTCU\CreoParametric2\Round\Variable. To set the working directory, right-click the folder in the folder tree or browser, and select Set Working Directory. Model to Open This is the file to be opened from the working directory. In the above example, VARIABLE_RAD.PRT is the model to open. The model could be a part, drawing, assembly, and so on. If you are expected to begin the lab without an open model, and instead create a new model, you will see Create New. To open the indicated model, right-click the file in the browser and select Open.

PT

Click Close

In

until the icon is no longer displayed.

te rn

al

To make the exercises and procedures (referred to collectively as labs) as concise as possible, each begins with a header. The header lists the name of the lab, the working directory, and the file you are to open.

U se

The first module for certain courses is known as a process module. Process modules introduce you to the generic high-level processes that will be taught over the span of the entire course.

nl y

Theory This section provides detailed information about content introduced in the Concept, and is discussed in the class lecture but not shown on the overhead slide. The Theory section contains additional paragraphs of text, bullets, tables, and/or figures. Procedure This section provides step-by-step instructions about how to complete the topic within Creo Parametric. Procedures are short, focused, and cover a specific topic. Procedures are found in the Student Handbook only. Not every topic has a Procedure, as there are knowledge topics that contain only Concept and Theory. Exercise Exercises are similar to procedures, except that they are typically longer, more involved, and use more complicated models. Exercises also may cover multiple topics, so not every topic will have an associated exercise. Exercises are found in the separate Exercise Guide and/or the online exercise HTML files.

6. 7.

Task Name Labs are broken into distinct tasks. There may be one or more tasks within a lab. Lab Steps These are the individual steps required to complete a task.

Two other items to note for labs: Saving Saving your work after completing a lab is optional, unless otherwise stated. Exercises Exercises follow the same header format as Procedures.

Setting Up Creo Parametric for Use with Training Labs

Before you begin a lab from any training course, it is important that you configure Creo Parametric to ensure the system is set up to run the lab exercises properly. Therefore, if you are running the training labs on a computer outside of a training center, follow these three basic steps: Extract the class files zip file to a root level drive such as C: or D:. The extracted zip will create the default folder path automatically, such as C:\PTCU\CreoParametric2\. Locate your existing Creo Parametric shortcut. Copy and paste the shortcut to your desktop. Right-click the newly pasted shortcut and select Properties. Select the Shortcut tab and set the Start In location to be the same as the default folder. For example, C:\PTCU\CreoParametric2\. Start Creo Parametric using the newly configured shortcut. The default working directory will be set to the CreoParametric2 folder. You can then navigate easily to the functional area and topic folders.

Fo r

PT

In

te rn

al

U se

nl y

PROCEDURE - Student Preface Using the Header

In this exercise, you learn how to use the header to set up the Creo Parametric working environment for each lab in the course. Close Window Erase Not Displayed EXTRUDE_1.PRT

SampleFunctionalArea\Topic1_Folder Step 1:

Configure Creo Parametric to ensure the system is set up to run the lab exercises properly.

Step 2:

Fo r

1. If you currently have files open, click Close toolbar, until the icon no longer displays.

PT

Close all open windows and erase all objects from memory to avoid any possible conflicts. from the Quick Access

2. Click Erase Not Displayed from the Data group in the ribbon. Click OK if the Erase Not Displayed dialog box appears.

In

3. Start Creo Parametric using the newly configured shortcut. The default working directory is set to the CreoParametric2 folder. You can then navigate easily to the functional area and topic folders.

te rn

2. Locate your existing Creo Parametric shortcut. Copy and paste the shortcut to your desktop. Right-click the newly pasted shortcut and select Properties. Select the Shortcut tab and set the Start In location to be PTCU\CreoParametric2.

al

U se

1. Extract the zipped class files to a root level drive such as C: or D:. The extracted ZIP will create the default folder path automatically, such as C:\PTCU\CreoParametric2.

Perform this task only if you are running the labs on a computer outside of a training center, otherwise proceed to Task 2.

nl y

Step 3:

Browse to and expand the functional area folder for this procedure and set the folder indicated in the header as the Creo Parametric working directory.

1. Notice the SampleFunctionalArea\Topic1_Folder as indicated in the header above. 2. If necessary, select the Folder Browser navigator. tab from the

Fo r

PT

3. Click Working Directory to view the current working directory folder in the browser. Double-click SampleFunctionalArea.

In

te rn

al

U se

nl y

4. Right-click the Topic1_Folder folder and select Set Working Directory. 5. Click Working Directory from the Common Folders section to display the contents of the new working directory in the browser.

Fo r

2. You are now ready to begin the first task in the lab: Read the first task. Perform the first step, which in most cases will be to set the initial datum display for the procedure or exercise. Perform the remaining steps in the procedure or exercise.

Step 5:

1. The instruction for setting the datum display indicates which Datum Display types to enable and disable. For example, Enable only the following Datum Display types: . 2. To set the datum display, first click the Datum Display drop-down menu from the In Graphics tool bar.

PT

Set the initial datum display options.

In

1. Notice the lab model EXTRUDE_1.PRT is specified in the header above. Double-click extrude_1.prt in the browser to open it.

te rn

Step 4:

Open the file for this procedure.

al

Alternatively you can use the cascading folder path in the browser to navigate to the topic folder, and then right-click and select Set Working Directory from the browser.

U se

nl y

3. Next, enable and disable the check boxes as necessary. For example you could disable the Select All check box, and then enable only the desired datum types.

4. The model should now appear as shown.

This completes the procedure.

Fo r

PT

In

te rn

al

U se

nl y

Fo r C In te rn al U se O nl y

PT

Module

1
U se O nl y

Introduction to the Creo Parametric Basic Modeling Process

Module Overview
In this module, you learn about the basic modeling process that is typically used to scope, model, assemble, and document a Creo Parametric solid model. This simplified process is fundamentally used at most companies, although your specific company process may differ. The process is supported throughout the course modules and again followed in a course project. This module also introduces you to various fundamental Creo Parametric concepts, including feature-based modeling and associativity between part models, assemblies, and drawings. You will learn more details about these and other concepts in subsequent modules.

After completing this module, you will be able to: Prepare for a part model design by scoping the design parameters of an adjoining part. Create a new part model by following the required design parameters. Create an assembly by assembling the new part model with existing part models. Create a 2-D drawing of the new part model that includes views, dimensions, and a title block.

Fo r

2012 PTC

PT

Objectives

In

te rn

al

Module 1 | Page 1

Creo Parametric Basic Modeling Process

The Basic Modeling process can be summarized in four high-level steps.

Figure 1 Preparing for Part Model Design

Figure 2 Creating a New Part Model

Preparing for Part Model Design

Fo r

Before you create a new part model design, it is often necessary to acquire information about the components that surround it in an assembly. Consequently, you may want to open and inspect these parts before beginning the new design. At your company, this preparation stage may occur at the same time as the new part model design, or it may not occur at all. In either case, establishing knowledge of adjoining parts can be helpful in the new part model design.

Creating a New Part Model

A new part model accurately captures a design from a concept through solid feature-based modeling. A part model enables you to graphically view the product before it is manufactured. A part model can be used to: Capture mass property information. Vary design parameters to determine the best options. Graphically visualize a model before it is manufactured.
Module 1 | Page 2 2012 PTC

PT

Figure 3 Creating a New Assembly by Assembling the Part Models

In

te rn
Figure 4 Creating a Drawing of the New Part Model

al

U se

nl y

Creating a New Assembly by Assembling the Part Models

An assembly is created from one or more parts. The parts are located and assembled with respect to one another, just as they are on a real product. An assembly can be used to: Check for fit between parts. Check for interference between parts. Capture bill of material information. Calculate the total weight of an assembly.

Creating a Drawing of the Part or Assembly

Once a part or assembly has been modeled, it is often necessary to document that part or assembly by creating a 2-D drawing of it. The 2-D drawing usually contains views of the part or assembly, dimensions, and a title block. The drawing may also contain notes, tables, and further design information. Not every company requires model drawings.

Fo r

2012 PTC

PT

In

te rn

al
Module 1 | Page 3

U se

nl y

PROCEDURE - Creo Parametric Basic Modeling Process

Objectives
After successfully completing this exercise, you will be able to: Scope the design parameters of an existing part. Create a new part model using required design parameters. Create a new assembly by assembling part models. Create a new drawing of the new part model. Before you can begin modeling the key handle, you need to scope the design on the adjoining key base model. You know from experience that the hole in the key base is not large enough in diameter for a strong key handle, and the key base does not provide enough clearance to use the tool. Once you have properly scoped the design, you can create the key handle part and assemble it with the key base. Finally, you can document the key handle design by creating a 2-D drawing. Step 1:

Preparing for part model design Open and edit the dimensions of an existing part model to watch the geometry update automatically.

from the ribbon Click Open at the top of the interface. In the File Open dialog box, . click Working Directory Double-click the Process folder to view its contents. Right-click the BasicModeling folder and select Set Working Directory. Double-click the Basic-Modeling folder to view its contents. Select KEY_BASE.PRT. Click Open.

Fo r

Module 1 | Page 4

PT

In

te rn

1. To open the KEY_BASE.PRT part model, do the following:

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

2. In the In Graphics toolbar at the top of the graphics window, clear the check boxes for Axis Display , Point Display , and to disable

, Csys Display Plane Display their display.

4. Click Named Views from the In Graphics toolbar at the top of the graphics window and select FRONT.

Fo r

2012 PTC

PT

3. To edit the hole diameter from 3.5 to 5, do the following: Click the hole in the model to select it. Notice that it highlights in green. Right-click and hold, and then select Edit. Double-click the 3.5 value to edit it. Edit the value from 3.5 to 5 and press ENTER. Click twice in the graphics window to update the model geometry to the new diameter value.

In

te rn

al
Module 1 | Page 5

U se

nl y

Fo r

7. From the In Graphics toolbar at the top of the graphics window, select the check boxes for Plane and Axis Display Display to enable their display.

Module 1 | Page 6

PT

In

te rn

6. Click Named Views from the In Graphics toolbar at the top of the graphics window and select Standard Orientation.

al
2012 PTC

U se

5. To edit the shaft height from 25 to 35, do the following: Click the shaft in the model to select it. Notice that it highlights in green. In the graphics window containing the model, right-click and hold, and then select Edit. Double-click the 25 value to edit it. Edit the value from 25 to 35 and press ENTER. Click twice in the graphics window to update the model geometry to the longer shaft value.

nl y

8. To save the KEY_BASE.PRT part model and close the window, do the following: Click Save from the Quick Access toolbar near the top of the interface. In the Save Object dialog box, click OK. from the Quick Access toolbar to close the window Click Close containing KEY_BASE.PRT. Step 2: Creating a new part model Create a new part model named KEY_HANDLE.PRT and model its geometry.

Fo r

3. To start a new Sketch feature, do the following: Click Sketch from the Datum group in the ribbon at the top of the interface. In the model tree located on the left side of the interface, click datum plane FRONT to select it. Click Sketch in the Sketch dialog box.

2012 PTC

PT

2. In the New File Options dialog box, select mmns_part_solid as the template and click OK.

In

Click New from the Quick Access toolbar near the top of the interface. In the New dialog box, select Part as the Type and Solid as the Sub-type. Type key_handle in the Name field. Clear the Use default template check box and click OK.

te rn

al
Module 1 | Page 7

U se

1. To create a new part model, do the following:

nl y

5. Click OK from the dashboard at the top of the interface.

Fo r

Module 1 | Page 8

PT

In

te rn

Click One-by-One from the Operations group in the ribbon. A diameter dimension appears for the circle. Double-click the diameter dimension, edit its value to 5, and press ENTER.

al
2012 PTC

U se

4. To sketch a circle and edit its diameter to 5, do the following: Select Center and Point from the Circle types drop-down menu in the Sketching group in the ribbon. In the graphics window, cursor over the intersection of the vertical and horizontal lines. The cursor snaps to the center. Click to place the circle at the intersection, drag your mouse outward to start sketching the circle, and click again to complete the circle.

nl y

6. To create an Extrude feature using the sketch you just created, do the following: Ensure that the Sketch feature is still selected. If it is not highlighted in green, you must click it to select it. from the Click Extrude Shapes group in the ribbon at the top of the interface. In the dashboard at the top of the interface, edit the depth from Blind to Symmetric . In the dashboard, edit the depth value to 12 and press ENTER. The orange geometry depth increases. Orange geometry is preview geometry and is representative of how the feature should appear when it is completed. Click Complete Feature from the dashboard. 7. To start a second new Sketch feature, do the following: Click Sketch from the Datum group in the ribbon at the top of the interface. In the graphics window, click the front surface of the cylinder geometry to select it as the sketching plane for the new Sketch feature. Click Sketch in the Sketch dialog box.

Fo r

2012 PTC

PT

In

te rn

al
Module 1 | Page 9

U se

nl y

9. Click OK

from the dashboard.

Fo r

Module 1 | Page 10

PT

In

Click Refit from the In Graphics toolbar at the top of the graphics window. Double-click the diameter dimension, edit its value to 7, and press ENTER.

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

Click One-by-One from the Operations group in the ribbon. A diameter dimension appears for the circle.

8. To sketch a circle and edit its diameter to 7, do the following: Select Center and Point from the Circle types drop-down menu in the Sketching group in the ribbon. In the graphics window, cursor over the intersection of the vertical and horizontal lines. The cursor snaps to the center. Click to place the circle at the intersection, drag your mouse outward to start sketching the circle, and click again to complete the circle.

nl y

10. To create a second Extrude feature using the second sketch you just created, do the following: Ensure that the Sketch feature is still selected. If it is not highlighted in green, you must click it to select it. from the Click Extrude Shapes group in the ribbon at the top of the interface. In the dashboard at the top of the interface, click Change to flip the Depth Direction orange preview geometry into the existing geometry. In the graphics window, click and drag the small white, square drag handle to edit the depth to 5. Click Complete Feature from the dashboard.

11. In the In Graphics toolbar at the top of the graphics window, clear the check boxes for Plane Display disable their display.

In

te rn

al
and Axis Display

U se
to
Module 1 | Page 11

Fo r

2012 PTC

PT

nl y

12. To round two edges of the geometry, do the following: from the Select Round Round types drop-down menu in the ribbon at the top of the interface. In the graphics window, press CTRL and click the two edges to be rounded to select them. In the dashboard, edit the round radius to 0.5 and press ENTER. Click Complete Feature from the dashboard. 13. Click in the background of the graphics window to de-select the completed round feature.

14. To mirror the part, do the following: In the model tree located on the left side of the interface, press CTRL and click the Extrude 2 and Round 1 features to select them.

from the Click Mirror Editing group in the ribbon at the top of the interface. In the model tree, click the FRONT datum plane to select it as the datum from which you mirror the geometry. Click Complete Feature from the dashboard.

Fo r

Module 1 | Page 12

PT

In

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

from the In Click Refit Graphics toolbar.

PT

1. In the In Graphics toolbar at the top of the graphics window, select the check box for Plane Display to enable their display.

Fo r

2012 PTC

In

Step 3:

Creating a new assembly by assembling the part models Create a new assembly CHUCK_KEY.ASM and assemble the KEY_HANDLE.PRT and KEY_BASE.PRT.

te rn

Click Save from the Quick Access toolbar near the top of the interface. In the Save Object dialog box, click OK.

al

16. To save the KEY_HANDLE.PRT part model, do the following:

U se
Module 1 | Page 13

15. To modify geometry dimensions to their proper length and regenerate the model, do the following: In the model tree located on the left side of the interface, right-click the Extrude 1 feature and hold, and then select Edit. In the graphics window, double-click the 12 dimension, edit it to 60, and press ENTER. Click twice in the graphics window to update the geometry. Notice that the model geometry grows long.

nl y

2. To create the CHUCK_KEY.ASM assembly model, do the following: Click New from the Quick Access toolbar near the top of the interface. In the New dialog box, select Assembly as the Type and verify that Design is the Sub-type. Edit the Name to chuck_key. Clear the Use default template check box and click OK. Select mmns_asm_design as the template and click OK.

You must resize the new assembly window that appears. 3. To assemble the KEY_BASE.PRT, do the following:

Select Assemble from the Assemble types drop-down menu in the Component group at the top of the interface. In the Open dialog box, select component KEY_BASE.PRT and click Open. In the dashboard, edit the constraint in the drop-down list

Fo r

to Default from Automatic . Click Complete Component from the dashboard.

4. In the In Graphics toolbar at the top of the graphics window, clear the check box for Plane Display to disable their display.

Module 1 | Page 14

PT

In

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

5. To start assembling KEY_HANDLE.PRT by creating the Coincident constraint, do the following: Select Assemble from the Assemble types drop-down menu in the Component group at the top of the interface. In the Open dialog box, click the component KEY_HANDLE.PRT to select it and click Open. In the graphics window, click the inside hole surface on KEY_BASE.PRT to select it as the assembly reference. Click the shaft surface on KEY_HANDLE.PRT to select it as the component reference. The KEY_HANDLE.PRT repositions itself through the hole in KEY_BASE.PRT, and the Coincident constraint is created. 6. To continue assembling KEY_HANDLE.PRT by creating the Distance constraint, do the following: In the graphics window, click the flat surface on KEY_HANDLE.PRT to select it as the component reference. Cursor over the upper left of the top surface of KEY_BASE.PRT to pre-highlight it. Right-click to query the back, flat surface of KEY_BASE.PRT and click to select it as the assembly reference. The Distance constraint is created.

Fo r

2012 PTC

PT

In

te rn

al
Module 1 | Page 15

U se

nl y

8. To edit the shaft length of KEY_HANDLE.PRT within the assembly, do the following: In the model tree, right-click KEY_HANDLE.PRT and select Activate. In the graphics window, select the rounded shaft of the KEY_HANDLE.PRT, right-click and hold, and then select Edit. In the graphics window, double-click the 60 dimension to edit it. Edit the 60 dimension value to 45 and press ENTER.

Fo r

from the Click Regenerate Operations group in the ribbon to update the geometry to the new length. In the model tree, right-click CHUCK_KEY.ASM and select Activate.

Module 1 | Page 16

PT

In

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

7. To edit the Distance constraint value and complete the assembly of KEY_HANDLE.PRT, do the following: In the graphics window, click and drag the small white, square drag handle to edit the offset value of the Distance constraint to 6. Click Complete Component from the dashboard.

9. To verify the geometry length change in the KEY_HANDLE.PRT, do the following: Click Windows from the Quick Access toolbar and select KEY_HANDLE.PRT to switch windows from the CHUCK_KEY.ASM assembly to the KEY_HANDLE.PRT part model. In the model tree, right-click Extrude 1 and select Edit. Notice that the shaft length is now 45, even though it was edited in the assembly. Click in the background of the graphics window to clear the dimensions. Step 4:

Click New from the Quick Access toolbar. In the New dialog box, select Drawing as the Type. Edit the Name to key_handle. Clear the Use default template check box. Click OK. In the New Drawing dialog box, verify that the Default Model is KEY_HANDLE.PRT. Select the Use template option and click Browse to browse for the drawing template. In the Open dialog box, select the student_template.drw template and click Open. Click OK in the New Drawing dialog box.

Fo r

2012 PTC

PT

In

1. To create the new KEY_HANDLE.DRW drawing, do the following:

te rn

Creating a drawing of the new part model Create a new drawing KEY_HANDLE.DRW for the part model KEY_HANDLE.PRT.

al

U se
Module 1 | Page 17

nl y

2. The input window prompts you for the drawn_by parameter. Type your first initial, followed by your surname, and press ENTER. Your name is entered into the title block as the drawing displays in the graphics window. 3. To edit the drawing scale, do the following: In the bottom-left corner of the graphics window, double-click the Scale value to edit it. The input window prompts you to enter the new value for Scale. Type 5 as the new Scale value and press ENTER. The drawing views automatically rescale to the new value of 5. 4. To move the 7 diameter dimension to the other drawing view, do the following: Click the 7 diameter dimension in the right drawing view to select it. It highlights in green. Right-click in the graphics window and select Move Item to View. Select the left drawing view. The dimension is moved to this new drawing view.

Fo r

Module 1 | Page 18

PT

In

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

Fo r

7. To edit the KEY_HANDLE.PRT shaft length and save it, do the following: Right-click Extrude 1 in the model tree and select Edit. In the graphics window, double-click the 45 dimension to edit it. Edit the 45 dimension value to 60 and press ENTER. Click twice in the graphics window to update the geometry.

8. To save the KEY_HANDLE.PRT and close the window, do the following: from the Quick Access toolbar. Click Save Click OK in the Save Object dialog box. In the Quick Access toolbar, click Close KEY_HANDLE.PRT window. to close the

2012 PTC

PT

In

te rn

al

6. Click Windows from the Quick Access toolbar and select KEY_HANDLE.PRT to switch to the window containing KEY_HANDLE.PRT.

U se

5. To move the 5 diameter dimension to another location in the drawing view, do the following: In the graphics window, click the 5 dimension in the right drawing view to select it. It highlights in green. Cursor over the highlighted dimension. The cursor appears as four arrows. This is an indication that you can now click and drag this dimension to move it to another location on the drawing. Click and drag to move the 5 diameter dimension to the center of the drawing view.

O
Module 1 | Page 19

nl y

9. To activate the CHUCK_KEY. ASM assembly, save it, and close the window, do the following: Click Windows from the Quick Access toolbar and select CHUCK_KEY.ASM to switch to the assembly and activate it. Click Regenerate Operations group. from the

10. To save the KEY_HANDLE.DRW drawing, close the window, and erase all files from session memory, do the following: Click Save from the Quick Access toolbar. Click OK in the Save Object dialog box. to close the In the Quick Access toolbar, click Close KEY_HANDLE.DRW window. Click File > Manage Session > Erase Not Displayed. Click OK in the Erase Not Displayed dialog box.

Fo r

This completes the procedure.

Module 1 | Page 20

PT

In

te rn

al
2012 PTC

Note that the geometry and dimension in the drawing have both updated.

U se

Click Save from the Quick Access toolbar. Click OK in the Save Object dialog box. In the Quick Access toolbar, to close the click Close CHUCK_KEY.ASM window.

nl y

Module

2
U se O te rn al
Module 2 | Page 1

Understanding Creo Parametric Concepts

Module Overview
In this module, you learn about the basic concepts and benefits of solid modeling using Creo Parametric. You then learn how complex models can be easily created using a combination of simple features. Parametric capabilities that are native to Creo Parametric enable you to easily add design intent and make design changes. Associativity means that a change made to your solid model design is automatically propagated to all referenced objects, such as drawings, assemblies, and so on. You also learn how a model-centric modeler enables the creation of downstream deliverables with references to, and driven by, the design model.

After completing this module, you will be able to: Understand solid modeling concepts. Understand feature-based concepts. Understand parametric concepts. Understand associative concepts. Understand model-centric concepts. Recognize basic Creo Parametric file extensions.

Fo r

2012 PTC

PT

Objectives

In

Finally, you learn how to recognize some of the basic file extensions used to identify different types of Creo Parametric objects.

nl y

Understanding Solid Modeling Concepts

Creo Parametric enables you to create solid model representations of your part and assembly models.
Solid models: Are realistic visual representation of designs. Contain properties such as mass, volume, and center of gravity. Can also be used to check for interferences in an assembly.

Fo r

Understanding Solid Modeling Concepts

Creo Parametric enables you to create realistic solid model representations of your part and assembly models. These virtual design models can be used to easily visualize and evaluate your design before costly prototypes are manufactured. The models contain material properties such as mass, volume, center of gravity, and surface area. As features are added or removed from the model, these properties update. For example, if you add a hole to a model, then the mass of the model decreases. In addition, solid models enable tolerance analysis and clearance/interference checking when placed into assemblies.

Module 2 | Page 2

PT

Figure 1 Interference Check

In

te rn
Figure 2 Mass Properties

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

Understanding Feature-Based Concepts

Creo Parametric is a feature-based product development tool.
With feature-based modeling: You build one simple feature at a time. Each new feature can reference previous features.

Figure 1 Connecting Rod Features

Understanding Feature-Based Concepts

Fo r

Individually, each feature is typically simple; however, as they are added together, they form complex parts and assemblies. In this example, we have a connecting rod in seven stages of its creation: First, an extrusion is created, which forms the overall shape and size of the model. An additional extrusion is created at the top of the model. A third extrusion is created at the bottom of the model. A hole is created at the bottom of the model. Another hole is created at the top of the model. A round is created on the four inside edges. A small radial hole is created at the top of the model.

2012 PTC

PT

The geometric definition of a model is defined by the type of features used and the order in which each feature is placed. Each feature builds upon the previous feature and can reference any of the preceding features, therefore enabling design intent to be built into the model.

In

Creo Parametric is a feature-based product development tool. The models are constructed using a series of easy to understand features rather than confusing mathematical shapes and entities.

te rn

al

U se
Module 2 | Page 3

nl y

Understanding Parametric Concepts

The parametric nature and feature-to-feature relationships in Creo Parametric enable you to easily capture design intent and make design changes.
Parametric: Model geometry is controlled by parameters and dimensions. When you modify dimension values, relevant geometry is automatically updated.

Understanding Parametric Concepts

Creo Parametric models are value-driven, using dimensions and parameters to define the size and location of features within the model. If you edit the value of a feature dimension, that feature updates accordingly. The change then automatically propagates through to related features in the model and eventually updates the entire part.

Fo r

Parent/Child Relationships
Relationships between features in Creo Parametric provide a powerful tool for capturing design intent. During the modeling process, design intent is added as one feature is created with reference to another. When creating a new feature, any feature referenced during its creation becomes a parent of the new feature. The new feature referencing the parent is referred to as a child of the parent. If the parent feature is updated, any children of the parent update accordingly. These relationships are referred to as parent/child relationships. This example shows a piston model intersected with a hole feature. In the middle figure, the piston height is modified from 18.5 to 25. Notice that the hole moves upward as the piston height increases. The design intent of the piston is to have the hole located at a specified distance from the top of the piston. The hole maintains that distance regardless of how tall the
Module 2 | Page 4 2012 PTC

PT

In

Figure 1 Parametric Feature Relationships

te rn

al

U se

Features referenced during creation become parents. If parent features change, child features predictably change accordingly.

nl y

Parent/child relationships:

piston becomes. This intent was added by dimensioning the hole to the top surface of the piston. Alternatively, if the intent of the design is to have the hole located at a specified distance from the bottom of the piston, the hole would be dimensioned from the bottom surface of the piston, yielding a different result when the height of the piston is modified. The right most image in the figure shows modifications made to the location and diameter of the hole.

Best Practices
When creating features in your model, try to reference features and geometry that are robust, unlikely to be deleted, and provide the desired design intent. While this is not always possible, striving to do so helps you build robust, easy-to-modify models.

Fo r

2012 PTC

PT

In

te rn

al
Module 2 | Page 5

U se

nl y

Understanding Associative Concepts

Creo Parametric is a bi-directionally associative product development tool.

Figure 1 Associativity

Understanding Associative Concepts

Bi-directional associativity means that all changes made to an object in any mode of Creo Parametric are automatically reflected in every related mode. For example, a change made in a drawing is reflected in the part being documented in the drawing. That same change is also reflected in every assembly using that part model. It is important to understand that the associativity between different modes is possible because the part shown in a drawing is not copied into the drawing, but rather associatively linked to the drawing. Likewise, an assembly is not a large file containing copies of every part in the assembly, but rather a file containing associative links to every model used in the assembly.

Fo r

Best Practices

Because drawing and assembly files have associative links to the models contained in them, these objects cannot be opened without the presence of the models they contain. Essentially, you cannot send your colleague only a drawing file to open. He or she must have the drawing file along with any model referenced in the drawing. For an assembly, he or she must have the assembly file and all models used in the assembly.

Module 2 | Page 6

PT

In

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

Understanding Model-Centric Concepts

In Creo Parametric, the model is the center of all downstream deliverables.
Model-centric: Assemblies reference the models being assembled. The drawing references the model being documented. The FEM model references the model being meshed. The mold tool references the model being molded.

Understanding Model-Centric Concepts

Fo r

In a model-centric product development tool, the design model is the common source for all deliverables utilizing that specific design model. This means that all downstream deliverables point directly to a common design model. The model is referenced as components in assemblies, views in a drawing, the cavity of a mold, geometry meshed in an FEM model, and so on. The benefit of using a model-centric development tool is that a change made to the design model automatically updates all related downstream deliverables.

2012 PTC

PT

In

te rn
Figure 1 Model-Centric

al
Module 2 | Page 7

U se

nl y

Recognizing File Extensions

There is a unique file extension used to identify each Creo Parametric object type.
The following are common Creo Parametric file extensions: .prt Part file .asm Assembly file .drw Drawing file

Figure 1 Part File

Recognizing File Extensions

There are three common Creo Parametric object types: parts, assemblies, and drawings. The following file extensions are used to identify them: .prt This extension represents a part object. .asm This extension represents an assembly object. An assembly file contains pointers and instructions that identify and position a collection of parts and sub-assemblies. .drw This extension represents a 2-D drawing. The drawing file contains pointers, instructions, and detail items for documenting part and assembly models in a drawing.

Fo r

Module 2 | Page 8

PT

Figure 2 Drawing File

In

te rn
Figure 3 Assembly File

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

Module

3
U se O te rn al
Module 3 | Page 1

Using the Creo Parametric Interface

Module Overview

Creo Parametric's user interface is an intuitive, user-friendly experience. The system is designed to make the most of its available space by displaying certain information at the right time, and then using that space to display different information at a different time. This module introduces you to the main user interface and defines each area and how you can use it. You will gain an understanding of basic skills, including file manipulation and management, as well as setting the working directory and saving and opening files. You learn basic Creo Parametric display options for datum display that will aid you throughout this course. You also learn about 3-D view orientations and style states, and understand how to manage and apply appearances.

After completing this module, you will be able to: Understand Creo Parametric's main interface, folder browser, Web browser, and ribbon system. Set the working directory and manage files in Creo Parametric, including how to open and save files. Understand basic Creo Parametric display options, including model display style and datum display. Create and manage basic 3-D orientations. Create style states using the view manager. Manage and apply Creo Parametric appearances. Set up new part models.

Fo r

2012 PTC

PT

Objectives

In

nl y

Understanding the Main Interface

The main interface includes the following areas:
Graphics window Quick Access toolbar Ribbon Dashboard Status bar Message Log Dialog boxes In Graphics toolbar Menu manager

Fo r

Understanding the Main Interface

There are many different areas of the Creo Parametric user interface that you utilize when creating models. The areas that display depend upon the function you are currently performing. Areas of the main interface include: Graphics window The working area of Creo Parametric in which you create and modify Creo Parametric models such as parts, assemblies, and drawings.

Module 3 | Page 2

PT

In

Figure 1 The Main Interface

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

 In Graphics toolbar Located at the top of the graphics window, the In Graphics toolbar contains commonly used tools and filters for the graphics window display. You can customize the tools and filters displayed in the In Graphics toolbar.

Fo r

Dialog boxes Content-sensitive windows which display and prompt you for additional information.

2012 PTC

PT

Dashboard Locked at the top of the user interface, the dashboard appears when you create or edit the definition of a feature. The dashboard provides you with controls, inputs, status, and guidance for performing a task, such as creating or editing a feature. Changes are immediately visible on the screen. Various dashboard tabs are available with additional feature options. Dashboard icons on the left include feature controls while the Pause, Preview, Create Feature, and Cancel Feature options are located on the right.

In

te rn

al
Module 3 | Page 3

U se

Ribbon A context-sensitive menu across the top of the interface that contains the majority of the commands you use in Creo Parametric. The ribbon arranges commands into logical tasks through tabs and groups.

nl y

Quick Access toolbar By default, the Quick Access toolbar is located at the top of the interface. It contains a commonly used set of commands that are independent of the tab currently displayed in the ribbon. These commands are available regardless of the specific mode or ribbon tab in which you are working. You can customize the Quick Access toolbar to add additional commands.

 Status bar Located at the bottom of the interface, the status bar contains icons for toggling the model tree and Web browser panes on and off. It also contains the message log, regeneration manager, 3D box selector, and selection filter.

Message Log The message log provides you with prompts, feedback, and messages from Creo Parametric. Menu manager A cascading menu that appears on the far right of the interface when you use certain functions and modes in Creo Parametric. You typically work from top to bottom in this menu; however, clicking Done is performed bottom to top. Bold menu options are automatically selected when you middle-click.

Fo r

Module 3 | Page 4

PT

In

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

Understanding the Folder Browser

The Folder Browser is a pane in the Navigator that enables you to browse the folders on your computer and network.
The Folder Browser is divided into: Common Folders Folder Tree The Folder Browser enables you to: Browse folders. View In Session objects. View contents of your Desktop, My Documents, and Network Neighborhood. Navigate directly to the Working Directory. Resize the width by dragging the window divider. Click the icon in the status bar to toggle the Navigator on or off.

PT

In

te rn
Figure 1 The Folder Browser Pane

Fo r

Understanding the Folder Browser

The Navigator is a pane in the Creo Parametric user interface that contains a series of tabs across the top. One of those tabs is the Folder Browser. By default, Creo Parametric launches with the Folder Browser open. The Folder Browser enables you to browse the folders on your computer and network. You can resize the Folder Browser width by dragging the window divider or close the Navigator entirely by clicking the icon in the status bar. The Folder Browser is divided into the Common Folders and the Folder Tree.

The Folder Tree

The Folder Tree enables you to browse your computer's folder structure. By default, the Folder Tree is collapsed at the bottom of the Folder Browser window. You can also use the Folder Tree to set a new working directory, add folders to the Common Folders, and add, delete, or rename folders on your
2012 PTC Module 3 | Page 5

al

U se

nl y

computer. The contents of a folder selected in the Folder Tree are displayed in the Web browser.

The Common Folders

The Common Folders area of the Navigator contains folders that, when selected, direct you to the folder location in the Folder Tree or Web browser. To add a folder to this area of the interface, right-click the folder in the Folder Tree or Web browser and select Add to common folders. The six standard Common Folders include: In Session Enables you to view all files currently In Session. Desktop Enables you to view the contents of your Desktop. My Documents Enables you to view the contents of your My Documents folder. Working Directory Enables you to view the contents of the current Working Directory. Network Neighborhood Enables you to view the contents of your Network Neighborhood. Favorites Enables you to view the folders or Web sites you have designated as favorites. Alternatively, you could also select the Favorites tab from the top of the Navigator.

Fo r

Module 3 | Page 6

PT

In

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

Understanding the Web Browser

The Web browser is an embedded Creo Parametric window that enables you to perform context-sensitive tasks.
You can perform the following tasks: Browse the file system. Preview Creo Parametric models. Open Creo Parametric models. Browse and navigate Web pages. Set the Working Directory. Cut/Copy/Paste/ Delete folders and objects.

Figure 1 The Web Browser

File list Displays the contents of a folder selected in the Folder Browser. You can set either List, Thumbnails, or Details display, filter the list based on file type, or display instances and/or all versions of a file. Double-click a folder to view its contents or double-click a file to open it in Creo Parametric. Select a file to preview it in the preview window or drag and drop it into the graphics window to open it. You can also cut, copy, paste, and delete folders and objects in the file list.

Fo r

2012 PTC

PT

The Web browser is an integrated content viewer within Creo Parametric. It works in conjunction with the Folder Browser so you can find files on your computer as well as browse Web pages. The Web browser is embedded in the Creo Parametric interface, and slides over the graphics window. The Web browser is divided into three sections: file list, preview window, and browser controls.

In

te rn

Understanding the Web Browser

al
Module 3 | Page 7

U se

nl y

 Preview window When a model is selected from the file list, you can dynamically preview it by expanding the preview window. You can Spin, Pan, and Zoom in the preview window to observe model geometry. You can also edit the model display. By default, the preview window is collapsed at the bottom of the Web browser. Browser controls The Web browser supports tabbed browsing and contains the following standard control buttons: Back, Forward, Stop, Refresh, Home, and Print. Select a sub-folder to view its contents in the Web browser, or type a Web address in the Address field. The Address field uses breadcrumbs for folder navigation. You can begin typing the name of the desired file or folder in the Search field to dynamically filter the folder's contents in the Web browser. You can switch between tabs by clicking on the desired one, and you can add and close tabs.

You can drag the right vertical edge of the Web browser to adjust its width in the same way you can adjust the size of most other windows. You can

In

te rn

al
also toggle the Web browser on or off by clicking Web Browser status bar. in the

Fo r

Module 3 | Page 8

PT

The Web browser also displays other context-sensitive information, including model and feature information.

U se

nl y
2012 PTC

Setting the Working Directory and Opening and Saving Files

The Working Directory is the designated location for opening and saving files.
Creo Parametric is started in the default working directory. Different working directories can be set. New working directory locations are not saved upon exiting Creo Parametric.

The working directory is the designated location for opening and saving files. Typically, the default working directory is the directory from which Creo Parametric is started. However, there are three methods to define a new working directory:

Fo r

From the Folder Tree or Web browser Right-click the folder that is to be the new working directory and select Set Working Directory. From the File menu Click File > Manage Session > Select Working Directory. Browse to and select the directory that is to be the new working directory. Click OK. From the File Open dialog box Right-click the folder that is to be the new working directory and select Set Working Directory. You can navigate directly to the working directory at any time by selecting the Working Directory common folder from the Navigator. The new working directory setting is not saved upon exiting Creo Parametric.

Opening Files
You can use any of the following methods to open a file:
2012 PTC Module 3 | Page 9

PT

Setting the Working Directory

In

Figure 2 Setting the Working Directory in the Folder Tree

te rn

al

U se

Figure 1 Working Directory Common Folder

nl y

 Browse to the desired folder using the Navigator (either with Common Folders or through the Folder Tree) to display its contents in the Web browser. Then, you can either double-click the file in the file list, or right-click the file in the file list and select Open. You can also drag the file from the file list into the graphics window. from the Quick Access toolbar and Click File > Open or click Open the File Open dialog box appears. Browse to the file, select it, and either double-click it or click Open. The File Open dialog box is the equivalent of the Navigator and Browser combination in the main interface.

Saving Files
You can use any of the following methods to save a file: Click File > Save.

Saving a Copy of Files

Fo r

Module 3 | Page 10

PT

In

You can also save a copy of an existing file by clicking File > Save As > Save a Copy. Saving a copy enables you to create an exact copy of a file, but with a different name. When saving a copy of an assembly, you must also decide how to manage its dependent components. You can save a copy of the dependent components by renaming them with a suffix or specifying new names for all of them, or you can decide not to save them at all.

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

Click Save from the Quick Access toolbar. By default, a file is saved to the current working directory. However, if a file is retrieved from a directory other than the working directory and then saved, the file saves to the directory from which it was retrieved.

nl y

PROCEDURE - Setting the Working Directory and Opening and Saving Files
Task 1: Set the working directory, open a file, and then save it.

Fo r

2. In the Web browser, double-click Sample_Topic to view its contents. Select NUT.PRT. Click Preview at the bottom of the Web browser to expand it. Click the Preview window edge and drag to expand it. In the Preview window, right-click and select Refit. Double-click NUT.PRT to open it. 3. Click Save Click OK. 4. Click Close

PT

2012 PTC

In

from the Quick Access toolbar. from the Quick Access toolbar.

te rn

al
Module 3 | Page 11

For each procedure in this course, the working directory to be set is specified in the top header.

U se

1. In the Folder Browser , click . Working Directory Click Folder Tree to expand it. If necessary, expand the CreoParametric2 folder and click File to view its contents in the Web browser. Right-click the Sample_Topic folder and select Set Working Directory.

nl y

Task 2:

Set a new working directory, open a new model, and then save it.

1. In the Folder Tree, expand the Sample_Topic folder. 2. Right-click Sample_Subfolder and select Set Working Directory.

5. Click the Folder Browser

6. In the Folder Tree, right-click the Sample_Topic folder and select Set Working Directory.

Fo r

. 7. Click Save Notice that even though the working directory is set to Sample_Topic, the file is saved to Sample_Subfolder. Click OK. from the Quick 8. Click Close Access toolbar. 9. Close the Folder Tree in the Folder Browser .

This completes the procedure.

Module 3 | Page 12

PT

In

te rn
.

al
2012 PTC

U se

4. Double-click SCREW.PRT to open it.

3. Double-click Sample_Subfolder to view its contents in the Web browser.

nl y

Understanding the Ribbon Interface

Most modes of Creo Parametric have been reorganized into a ribbon-style user interface.
Ribbon structure: File menu. Tasks organized into a series of tabs. Tabs contain groups of commands. Current features stack up in new tabs. Command Search ALT key shortcuts

Figure 2 Portion of Active Part Ribbon, Model Tab, and Datum Group

Understanding the Ribbon Interface

Most modes of Creo Parametric have been reorganized into a ribbon-style user interface. The ribbon appears above the graphics window. The ribbon structure consists of the following:

Fo r

The File menu, which contains commonly used system commands. Tasks, which are organized into a series of tabs. Tabs, which contain groups of icon commands. Current features being created, which stack up in subsequent ribbon tabs. For example, Extrude > Sketch > Rotate Resize.

Command Search
You can activate the command search by clicking Command Search next to the Creo Parametric Help icon. This activates the Command Search field, which enables you to type commands. As you begin typing a command, a list appears and dynamically filters results as you type. When you cursor over any of the lists results, the system locates and highlights the command in the ribbon. If you select any of the lists results, the command starts.
2012 PTC Module 3 | Page 13

PT

In

te rn

al

U se

nl y

Figure 1 Standby Ribbon and Home Tab

At the bottom of the list, you can click Setup to access the Command Search Settings dialog box. The following options are available: Search in Help Text Match Case Match Criteria The following options are available: Begins with Contains Ends with

ALT Key Shortcuts

If you press and release ALT, shortcut letters display in the UI next to ribbons and icons. You can then type those letters to activate the ribbon tab or desired command.

Fo r

Module 3 | Page 14

PT

In

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

PROCEDURE - Understanding the Ribbon Interface

Close Window Erase Not Displayed CREATE NEW

Enhancements\Ribbon-Interface Task 1:

Investigate the ribbon in Part mode.

1. Start Creo Parametric, if necessary. 2. Notice the standby ribbon that displays by default. 4. In the ribbon, select the Home tab if necessary, and notice the available commands. 5. Click New and click OK in the New dialog box.

6. Notice the Model tab.

7. Enable only the following Datum Display types:

Fo r

9. From the Datum group, expand the Point types drop-down menu.

2012 PTC

PT

8. Locate and click the Datum group to view additional commands.

In

te rn

al
Module 3 | Page 15

U se

O
.

nl y

3. Select the File menu, and notice the commands.

10. In the ribbon, select the Analysis tab. 11. Locate the Measure group. 12. Expand the Measure types drop-down menu.

14. Locate the Model Intent group.

15. Select the View tab.

16. Locate the Model Display group.

Fo r

17. Select the Model tab. 18. Click in the graphics window background.

Module 3 | Page 16

PT

In

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

13. Select the Tools tab.

nl y

19. Press and release ALT. 20. Notice that the Analysis tab has a shortcut of A. 21. Press A on your keyboard. 22. Notice that the Measure types drop-down menu has a shortcut of ME. 23. Press ME on your keyboard. 24. Notice that Angle shortcut of A. has a

25. Press A on your keyboard again. 26. Notice that the Measure dialog box displays. 27. Press CTRL and select datum planes RIGHT and TOP. 28. Close the Measure dialog box. 29. Click Command Search enable it. to

30. In the field, type gr, and notice the commands that display.

34. Click Cancel

PT

33. Notice that the command has started. .

Fo r

35. In the Command Search field, type fam and notice the commands that display. 36. Cursor over each entry, and notice that Family Table is available in two different locations.

2012 PTC

32. Click Graph from the Command Search.

In

31. Cursor over Graph, and notice its location in the Datum group.

te rn

al
Module 3 | Page 17

U se

nl y

37. In the Command Search field, type map and notice that this command is not in the ribbon by default, but can be activated. 38. Click Setup to view the different options. 39. Click Cancel. 40. Click Command Search This completes the procedure. to disable it.

Fo r

Module 3 | Page 18

PT

In

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

Customizing the Ribbon Interface

You can customize the ribbon, Quick Access toolbar, and In Graphics toolbar in numerous ways to personalize it for your work style.
Add or remove icons from the Quick Access toolbar or In Graphics toolbar. There is an individual toolbar for each mode. Ribbon customizations: Create new tabs or reorder them. Create new groups or customize groups. Specify large or small icons, or with/without label. Export settings or restore defaults.

Fo r

You can customize the ribbon, Quick Access toolbar, and In Graphics toolbar in numerous ways to personalize it for your work style. You can drag almost any icon onto the Quick Access toolbar so that it is available. You can also customize commands in the In Graphics toolbar. The different ribbons that display when switching between modes such as Part, Assembly, and Sketcher are independently customizable. Furthermore, the Quick Access and In Graphics toolbars that display with each ribbon are independent as well, enabling you to maintain separate toolbar customizations for each mode. You can perform the following high level ribbon customizations: Collapse or display the ribbon using Minimize the Ribbon . You can also use the CTRL+F1 shortcut to minimize or restore the ribbon. You can even double-click the tabs to minimize or restore it. Create new ribbon tabs. Within the ribbon, you can perform the following customizations to the tabs: Reorder the tabs. Select up to three groups to be included in a tab.
2012 PTC Module 3 | Page 19

PT

Customizing the Ribbon Interface

In

te rn
Figure 2 Collapse Priorities

al

U se

Figure 1 Datum Group and Customized Datum Group

nl y

 Create custom tabs. Within the tabs, you can perform the following customizations on the groups: Customize group contents. Create custom groups. Collapse groups. The first icon in the group is shown as a large icon with a drop-down menu. Customize the collapse priority. As the Creo window is made narrower, groups begin to collapse, and they collapse based on the priority set. For example, priority 7 is collapsed first, and priority 1 is collapsed last. Within the groups, you can perform the following customizations on the icons: Specify small icons or large icons. Specify whether the icon image is displayed. Specify whether the command label is displayed.

Your new ribbon, Quick Access toolbar, and In Graphics toolbar settings can be exported to a *.ui file. These *.ui files are read by Creo Parametric in the following order: 1. <loadpoint>\text\admin_creo_parametric_customization.ui Note the admin_ prefix. 2. <user_profile>\AppData\..\creo_parametric_customization.ui This is the system default location. 3. <working_dir>\creo_parametric_customization.ui This file is read only if the config.pro option load_ui_customization_ run_dir is set to yes.

Fo r

Module 3 | Page 20

PT

You can always restore the default Creo Parametric settings.

In

te rn

al

U se

Saving Customizations and Restoring Defaults

O
2012 PTC

nl y

PROCEDURE - Customizing the Ribbon Interface

Close Window Erase Not Displayed CREATE NEW

Enhancements\Ribbon-Interface Task 1:

Customize the ribbon in Part mode.

1. To ensure the ribbon and toolbars are set to their default state, right-click the ribbon and select Customize the Ribbon.

3. Click Yes > OK. 4. Click New

and click OK in the New dialog box.

5. Enable only the following Datum Display types:

7. Click Close

, select In Session 9. Click Open PRT0001.PRT.

PT

8. Click File > Manage Session, and cursor over Erase Not Displayed. Right-click and select Add to Quick Access Toolbar. , and double-click to

Fo r

10. In the top right of the interface, click Minimize the Ribbon minimize the ribbon. 11. Click Minimize the Ribbon again to restore the ribbon.

12. Right-click over the ribbon and notice the Minimize the Ribbon option. Notice the CTRL+F1 shortcut for this option. 13. In the ribbon, right-click over the Datum group name. Notice the options.

2012 PTC

In

from the Quick Access toolbar.

te rn

al

6. Right-click the Part mode In Graphics toolbar and clear the Datum Display Filters check box. Select the Plane Display, Axis Display, Point Display, and Csys Display check boxes.

U se

O
.
Module 3 | Page 21

nl y

2. Click Restore Defaults and select Restore all Ribbon tabs and Quick Access Toolbar customizations.

14. Click Extrude Shapes group.

from the

in the 15. Right-click Datum far-right side of the dashboard. Clear the Minimize the Group check box. 16. Click Cancel Feature .

20. Right-click Sketch again and select Hide Command Label. 21. Click the Datum group drop-down menu, and drag the Graph up.

22. Notice that the Datum group has a collapse priority of 3.

23. In the ribbon, click the View tab and drag it to just after the Model tab.

Fo r

26. Notice the options in the dialog box. 27. Notice the New Tab, New Group, and New Cascade options as well as the others. 28. Click Import/Export and select Export all Ribbon and Quick Access Toolbar customizations. 29. Notice that this would export a *.ui file. 30. Click Cancel. 31. Click OK in the Creo Parametric Options dialog box.

Module 3 | Page 22

PT

25. These icons could be added to the ribbon if desired.

24. In the Creo Parametric Options dialog box, select Commands Not in the Ribbon from the Choose commands drop-down list.

In

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

19. Right-click Sketch select Small Button.

and

18. In the ribbon, right-click Plane and select Small Button.

nl y

17. Right-click the ribbon and select Customize the Ribbon.

32. Click Close

from the Quick Access toolbar. from the Quick Access toolbar and

33. Click Erase Not Displayed click OK.

34. Right-click the ribbon and select Customize the Ribbon. 35. Click Restore Defaults and select Restore all Ribbon tabs and Quick Access Toolbar customizations. 36. Click Yes > OK.

Fo r

2012 PTC

PT

In

te rn

al
Module 3 | Page 23

U se

nl y

This completes the procedure.

Working with Multiple Windows

The Window group contains commands for activating, opening, closing, and re-sizing Creo Parametric windows. You can also switch between open windows.
A window must be active to use all applicable Creo Parametric features. The word Active appears on the title bar of the active window next to the model name. The active model has a dot next to its name in the Windows drop-down list. You can switch between active windows using the Window group or Quick Access toolbar.

Working with Multiple Windows

Fo r

You can use the Window group in the View ribbon tab to access commands for working with multiple windows.

Switching the Active Model Window

When you switch the active window, you automatically switch the active model to the one in that window. You can switch windows and thus activate a model using either of the following methods: Click Windows in the Quick Access toolbar to select the desired model.

in the Window group of the View ribbon tab to select Click Windows the desired model. If you switch windows using the Windows taskbar, the newly selected window is not made active. In the Window group in the View ribbon tab you can click Activate selected window.
Module 3 | Page 24

PT

Creo Parametric enables you to have multiple windows open at the same time, each containing a different model. This is a common occurrence during the design process. However, at any given moment, all applicable functionality is available only on one active window.

In

Figure 2 Switching Between Open Windows

te rn

al

U se

Figure 1 The Window Group

Figure 3 An Active Window

to activate the newly

O
2012 PTC

nl y

Determining the Active Window

You can determine which window is active in two different ways: The word Active appears on the title bar of the active window next to the model name. The active model has its dot filled in next to its name when you click . Windows

Other Window Group Functions

In addition to activating windows and switching between open windows, the following additional functions are available in the Window group: Create a new window When a part or assembly is open, click the Window to create a new window with group drop-down menu and select New the current object present in the new window. This new window becomes the active window. Close a window Clicking Close from the Window group closes the active window. If there was an object in that window, the object remains in memory. If only one window was open, the object is removed from the window and the window remains open. In addition, you can always click Close toolbar to close the window.

al

Fo r

2012 PTC

PT

In

Resize a window You can resize the Creo Parametric window by clicking the Window group drop-down menu and selecting Maximize , Restore and Default Size. You can also click the maximize or minimize buttons in the window's title bar.

te rn

U se

in the Quick Access

nl y

Module 3 | Page 25

Managing Files in Creo Parametric

Creo Parametric is a memory-based system, meaning that files are stored within RAM while you work on them.
An object in system memory is In Session. Erasing memory (RAM) Erase Current Erase Not Displayed Version numbers are increased by one each time you save the model. Deleting models Delete All Versions Delete Old Versions Renaming models Rename on disk and in session. Rename in session.

Figure 2 The Rename Dialog Box

In

Fo r

Creo Parametric is a memory-based system, which means that files you create and edit are stored within system memory (RAM) while you are working on them. It is important to remember that until you save your files, you risk losing them if there is a power outage or system crash. When a model is in system memory, it is referred to as being In Session. Models are stored In Session (in system memory, or RAM) until you either erase them or exit Creo Parametric. When you close the window that contains a model, the model is still In Session. This is especially important if you are working on files that have the same name but are in various stages of completion, such as in this course. Both the Folder Browser and File Open dialog boxes provide icons which enable you to display only In Session models. There are two different methods to erase models from session: Current Only the model in the current window is erased from system memory (and the window closed). You can click File > Manage Session > Erase Current to erase the current window's contents from system memory. Not Displayed Only erases from system memory those models that are not found in any Creo Parametric windows. You can click File > Manage
Module 3 | Page 26 2012 PTC

PT

Understanding In Session Memory and Erasing Models from It

te rn
Figure 3 Model Versions

al

U se

Figure 1 In Session in the Folder Browser and File Open Dialog Box

nl y

Session > Erase Not Displayed or you can add the Erase Not Displayed icon to the Quick Access toolbar. Erasing models does not delete them from the hard drive or network storage area; it only removes them from that session.

Understanding Version Numbers

Every time you save an object, you write it to disk. Rather than overwriting the current file on disk, the system creates a new version of the file on disk and assigns it with a version number that increments each time the file is saved. This is also known as a dot number, and can be seen in Figure 3.

Deleting Models

Old Versions The system deletes all but the latest version of the given file. All Versions The system deletes all versions of the given file.

Renaming Models

If you need to edit the name of any model, you can rename it directly from within Creo Parametric. There are two different methods to rename models: On Disk and In Session The system renames the file both in system memory and on the hard drive. In Session The system renames the file only in system memory.

Fo r

2012 PTC

PT

Problems can result if you rename a file on disk and then retrieve a model (not already in session) that depends on the previous file name; for example, a part cannot be found for an assembly.

In

te rn

al
Module 3 | Page 27

U se

There are two different methods to delete models:

Deleting files permanently removes them from the working directory on your hard drive or network storage area. Be careful when deleting files; you cannot undo the deletion of files.

nl y

PROCEDURE - Managing Files in Creo Parametric

Close Window File\Managing Task 1: Erase Not Displayed DRILL_BIT_BLACK.PRT

Open and close files to understand the In Session concept.

1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. Click Close from the Quick Access toolbar.

3. Click File > Manage Session > Erase Not Displayed and click OK from the Erase Not Displayed dialog box.

8. In the Web browser, double-click DRILL_BIT_GRAY.PRT to open it.

Fo r

9. Click Close from the Quick Access toolbar to close the window containing DRILL_BIT_GRAY.PRT. This leaves DRILL_BIT_BLACK.PRT still open.

10. Click Web Browser to toggle the Web browser window off. 11. Click Folder Browser from the top of the model tree.

12. In the Folder Browser, click In Session to view in session contents in the Web browser. Right-click DRILL_BIT_GRAY. PRT and select Open.

Module 3 | Page 28

PT

In

te rn

7. Click Working Directory

al
2012 PTC

6. Click Folder Browser from the top of the model tree.

U se

5. In the Web browser, double-click DRILL_BIT_BLACK.PRT to open it again.

from the Folder Browser to view the 4. Click Working Directory working directory contents in the Web browser.

nl y

13. Click Close from the Quick Access toolbar. 14. Click File > Manage Session > Erase Not Displayed. 15. Click OK in the Erase Not Displayed dialog box to erase DRILL_BIT_GRAY.PRT from system memory. 16. Click Folder Browser from the top of the model tree. 17. Click In Session from the Folder Browser. Notice that DRILL_BIT_GRAY.PRT is no longer in session memory. 18. Click Web Browser to toggle the Web browser window off. Task 2:

Rename DRILL_BIT_BLACK.PRT and erase it from session.

1. Click File > Manage File > Rename. 2. In the Rename dialog box, edit the New Name to DRILL_BIT_NEW.

Fo r

4. Click OK to complete the rename action. .

5. Click Close

6. Click File > Manage Session > Erase Not Displayed. 7. Click OK in the Erase Not Displayed dialog box.

This completes the procedure.

2012 PTC Module 3 | Page 29

PT

3. Verify that the Rename on disk and in session option is selected.

In

te rn

al

U se

nl y

Understanding Datum Display Options

You can independently control the display of datum entities and datum tags in the graphics window.
Datum entities include: Datum planes Datum axes Datum points Coordinate systems Datum tags include: Plane Tag Display Axis Tag Display Point Tag Display Csys Tag Display

Figure 1 Datum Display Options

In

Setting Datum Display

Fo r

Datum entities are 2-D reference geometry that you use for building feature geometry, orienting models, dimensioning, measuring, and assembling. There are four main datum types: Datum planes Datum axes Datum points Coordinate systems The display of each of these datum types is controlled independently by clicking the following icons from either the Show group in the View ribbon tab or the In Graphics toolbar: Plane Display Enable/disable datum plane display. Enable/disable datum axis display. Enable/disable datum point display.
2012 PTC

Axis Display Point Display

Module 3 | Page 30

PT

te rn
Figure 2 Datum Tag Display

al

U se

nl y

 Csys Display

Enable/disable datum coordinate system display.

The initial datum display for a given exercise is included in step 1 for that exercise. For example, consider the following: Enable only the following Datum Display types: . This indicates that you should display datum planes only, and that you should not display datum axes, datum points, or datum coordinate systems.

Setting Datum Tag Display

Each datum entity has a name associated with it, for example, datum plane FRONT. The datums display in the model tree with this name, and you can display the tags in the graphics window as well. By default, only the coordinate system tags display. The display of each of these datum tag types is controlled independently by clicking the following icons from the Show group in the View ribbon tab: Plane Tag Display Axis Tag Display Point Tag Display Csys Tag Display system tags. Enable/disable display of datum plane tags. Enable/disable display of datum axis tags. Enable/disable display of datum point tags.

Fo r

2012 PTC

PT

In

te rn

Enable/disable display of datum coordinate

al

U se

nl y

Module 3 | Page 31

PROCEDURE - Understanding Datum Display Options

Close Window Erase Not Displayed DATUM-DISPLAY.PRT

View\Display_Datum Task 1: Edit the datum display.

1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. Enable Plane Display .

3. In the ribbon, select the View tab. 4. Enable Plane Tag Display from the Show group.

5. Disable Plane Display 6. Enable Axis Display .

9. Enable Point Display

In

8. Disable Axis Display

10. Enable Point Tag Display

Fo r

11. Disable Point Display .

PT

12. Enable Csys Display

13. Disable Csys Display Axis Tag Display Tag Display .

14. Disable Plane Tag Display

, and Point

This completes the procedure.

Module 3 | Page 32

te rn
. . . . . ,

7. Enable Axis Tag Display

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

Understanding Display Style Options

You can modify the display style of models in the graphics window.
Display style options: Shading With Edges Shading With Reflections Shading No Hidden Hidden Line Wireframe

Figure 1 Display Style Options

There are six different 3-D model display options in the graphics window: The model is shaded according to view Shading With Edges orientation and its edges are highlighted. Shading With Reflections The model is shaded according to view orientation. Shadows and a reflection are placed on an imaginary floor directly below the model. Shading The model is shaded according to the view orientation. Hidden lines are not visible in shaded view display.

Fo r

No Hidden

Hidden Line By default, hidden lines in the model are displayed in a slightly lighter color than visible lines. Wireframe Hidden lines are displayed as regular lines (all lines are the same color). In Figure 1, the same model is displayed in six different ways. Clockwise from the top left, the display is Shading With Reflections, Shading With Edges, Shading, Wireframe, Hidden Line, and No Hidden.

Repainting the Screen

You can repaint a view to remove all temporarily displayed information. Repainting redraws the screen, and is performed by clicking Repaint from the In Graphics toolbar.

2012 PTC

PT

Hidden lines in the model are not displayed.

In

te rn

Understanding Display Style Options

al
Module 3 | Page 33

U se

nl y

PROCEDURE - Understanding Display Style Options

Close Window Erase Not Displayed DISPLAY-STYLE.PRT

View\Display_Style Task 1:

Edit the model display style.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

3. Select Shading With Reflections from the Display Style types drop-down menu in the Model Display group.

Fo r

5. Select Shading from the Display Style types drop-down menu in the Model Display group.

Module 3 | Page 34

PT

In

te rn

4. Select Shading With Edges from the Display Style types drop-down menu in the Model Display group.

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

2. In the ribbon, select the View tab.

6. In the In Graphics toolbar, select from the Display No Hidden Style types drop-down menu.

8. In the In Graphics toolbar, select Wireframe from the Display Style types drop-down menu.

Fo r

This completes the procedure.

2012 PTC

PT

9. In the In Graphics toolbar, select Shading from the Display Style types drop-down menu.

In

te rn

al
Module 3 | Page 35

U se

7. In the In Graphics toolbar, select Hidden Line from the Display Style types drop-down menu.

nl y

Analyzing Basic 3-D Orientation

Manipulate the 3-D orientation of your design models in the Creo Parametric graphics window.
Keyboard/mouse orientation: Spin Pan Zoom Turn Wheel Zoom Additional orientation options: Previous Refit Named View List Spin Center

Figure 1 3-D Orientations using the Keyboard and Mouse

In

Fo r

Orientation using Keyboard and Mouse Combinations

To view a model in a specific orientation, you can spin, pan, and zoom the model using a combination of keyboard and mouse functions. For each orientation, you press and hold a key and click the appropriate mouse button, as shown in the following table: Orientation Spin Keyboard and Mouse Selection

Pan

Module 3 | Page 36

PT

te rn
Figure 2 The Spin Center

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

Orientation Zoom

Keyboard and Mouse Selection

Turn

Zoom Level Zoom

Keyboard and Mouse Selection

Fine Zoom

Refit

Fo r

Named Views Displays a list of saved view orientations available for a given model. Select the name of the desired saved view, and the model reorients to the selected view. The default Creo Parametric template includes the following views: Standard Orientation The initial 3-D orientation which cannot be altered. Default Orientation Similar to the Standard Orientation, but its orientation can be redefined to a different orientation. BACK, BOTTOM, FRONT, LEFT, RIGHT, and TOP.

Enables and disables the spin center. When enabled, Spin Center the model spins about the location of the spin center. When disabled, the model spins about the cursor location. Disabling the spin center can be useful when orienting a long model, such as a shaft.

2012 PTC

PT

Previous

Refits the entire model in the graphics window.

In addition to using keyboard and mouse combinations, the following additional model orientation options are available: Reverts the model to the previously displayed orientation.

In

Additional Orientation Options

te rn

Coarse Zoom

al
Module 3 | Page 37

U se

nl y

Cursor over the area of interest before zooming in. The zoom function uses the cursor position as its area of focus. You can also zoom by using the scroll wheel. To control the level of zoom, press a designated key while using the scroll wheel, as shown in the following table:

PROCEDURE - Analyzing Basic 3-D Orientation

Close Window Erase Not Displayed ORIENT.ASM

View\3D_Orientation Task 1: Use saved views.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

4. Click Named Views and select Default Orientation. Task 2: Use the spin center.

2. Spin the assembly again in a different direction. 3. Spin the assembly in a third direction. The assembly is spinning about the spin center.

4. Click Named Views 5. Click Spin Center

PT

Fo r

6. Cursor over the lower portion of the assembly, near the CHUCK_2.PRT, and spin the assembly. 7. In the ribbon, select the View tab. from the 8. Click Previous Orientation group. 9. Cursor over the upper portion of the assembly and spin the assembly. Notice that the center of rotation is the cursor location.

10. Click Spin Center from the In Graphics toolbar to enable it.
Module 3 | Page 38 2012 PTC

In

te rn

1. Middle-click and drag to spin the assembly.

and select Standard Orientation. from the In Graphics toolbar to disable it.

al

U se

3. Click Named Views select LEFT.

and

nl y

2. Click Named Views from the In Graphics toolbar and select TOP.

Task 3:

Pan the assembly.

1. Press and hold SHIFT, and then middle-click and drag to pan the assembly. 2. Click Named Views and select Standard Orientation.

Task 4:

Turn the assembly.

2. Press and hold CTRL, and then middle-click and drag to the right to turn the assembly clockwise. 3. Click Named Views and select Standard Orientation.

1. Press and hold CTRL, and then middle-click and drag upward to zoom out.

Fo r

2. Press and hold CTRL, and then middle-click and drag downward to zoom in. 3. If your mouse is equipped with a wheel: Roll the mouse wheel away from you to zoom out. Roll the mouse wheel towards you to zoom in. Press and hold CTRL, and then roll the mouse wheel away from you to coarsely zoom out. Press and hold SHIFT, and then roll the mouse wheel towards you to finely zoom in.

2012 PTC

PT

Task 5:

Zoom in and out of the assembly.

In

te rn

al
Module 3 | Page 39

U se

1. Press and hold CTRL, and then middle-click and drag to the left to turn the assembly counterclockwise.

nl y

4. Click Named Views and select Standard Orientation. 5. Cursor over the hole next to the teeth. Press and hold CTRL, then middle-click and drag downward to zoom in to the hole. 6. Click Refit from the In Graphics toolbar to refit the model.

This completes the procedure.

Fo r

Module 3 | Page 40

PT

In

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

Understanding the View Manager

The view manager is a powerful, content-sensitive dialog box that enables you to edit how a model displays in the graphics window.
Use the view manager to create and manage: Simplified representations View orientations Style states Cross-sections Explode states Layer states

Understanding the View Manager

Simplified representations View orientations Style states Cross-sections Explode states Layer states

Fo r

Some important facts about the view manager include: The active item is indicated by a red arrow next to its name. In Figure 1, the active view orientation is the Front. A plus sign after the name of the active item indicates that it has changed. You can either save the modified item to capture what has changed, or double-click it or another item to dismiss the changes. In Figure 1, view orientation Front has been modified from how it was saved.

2012 PTC

PT

The view manager is a content-sensitive dialog box that enables you to edit how a model displays in the graphics window. The view manager contains numerous tabs that enable you to create and manage the following:

In

te rn

al
Figure 1 The View Manager
Module 3 | Page 41

U se

nl y

Creating and Managing View Orientations

You can create and edit view orientations using the View Manager and Orientation dialog boxes.
Orientation dialog box: Orient by reference. Two references and two directions required. You can reorient existing view orientations.

Fo r

Figure 2 Typical LEFT View Orientation

PT

In

Saved View Orientation

A model displays in a certain view orientation when it is first created and any time it is retrieved. In addition to using mouse and keyboard methods to orient a model, you can create predefined view orientations and save them as part of the model. This enables you to set the model orientation in a repeatable, consistent manner for company standards, drawing creation, and quick navigation. Not only does a saved view capture the model's orientation, it also captures the model's level of zoom in the graphics window.

Creating a New View Orientation

You can create a new view orientation using the view manager or the Orientation dialog box. When you create a new view orientation, a default name is created for your view. If desired, you can edit the view name. The new view orientation is automatically created at the current model orientation.
Module 3 | Page 42 2012 PTC

te rn
Figure 3 Typical FRONT View Orientation

al

U se

Figure 1 Typical TOP View Orientation

nl y

You can edit the view orientation by redefining it. The Orientation dialog box enables you to specifically define your model orientation, compared to using keyboard and mouse functions, which are more approximate. The view orientations that display in the Orient tab of the view manager are the same as those that are displayed in the Named Views and Orientation dialog box.

Orient by Reference

Fo r

2012 PTC

PT

In

te rn

You can click Reorient from the bottom of the Named Views drop-down list in the In Graphics toolbar or from the Orientation group in the View tab to open the Orientation dialog box directly. This method displays the saved views directly inside of the dialog box. Therefore, you can Orient by reference and save a new view orientation directly within the dialog box, which is an alternative to using the view manager.

al

U se

Creating View Orientations in the Orientation Dialog Box

You can click Undo from the Orientation dialog box to undo any changes you made. The model returns to its most current view state.

nl y

One method of changing the model orientation in the Orientation dialog box is to Orient by reference. The Orient by reference option enables you to select references by which to orient the model. Two directions and two references are required to orient a model.

Module 3 | Page 43

PROCEDURE - Creating and Managing View Orientations

Close Window View\Orientation Task 1: Erase Not Displayed MANAGE_ORIENT.ASM

Create view orientations with the view manager.

1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. Orient the model as shown. 3. Click View Manager from the In Graphics toolbar. Select the Orient tab and click New. Edit the name to 3D-1 and press ENTER.

5. Zoom in on the assembly as shown.

Fo r

1. Click Named Views 2. Click Named Views select Reorient .

PT

Task 2:

Create view orientations with the Reorient dialog box.

6. In the view manager, click New. Edit the Orientation name to Conn_Rod and press ENTER. Click Close.

3. Select the surface in the upper figure as Reference 1. 4. Select the surface in the lower figure as Reference 2. 5. Edit the Reference 2 direction from Top to Left. 6. Spin the assembly as necessary and select the surface in the lower figure again as Reference 2.
Module 3 | Page 44 2012 PTC

In

te rn
and select Default Orientation. and

al

4. In the view manager, double-click Default Orientation, and then double-click 3D-1.

U se

nl y

7. In the Orientation dialog box, expand the Saved Views area if necessary. In the Name field, type the name of the saved view as CYL_HOLE. Click Save > OK. Task 3: Redefine view orientations with the view manager.

2. Orient the model as shown. 3. In the view manager, right-click 3D-1(+) and select Save. 4. Click OK in the Save Display Elements dialog box.

6. Orient the assembly as shown 7. Select the surface shown in the upper figure as the new Reference 1. In the graphics window, select the surface shown in the lower figure as the new Reference 2. Click OK in the Orientation dialog box.

Fo r

8. Click Close from the view manager.

This completes the procedure.

2012 PTC

PT

In

5. In the view manager, double-click Cyl_Hole. Right-click Cyl_Hole and select Redefine.

te rn

al
Module 3 | Page 45

U se

1. Click View Manager Double-click 3D-1.

nl y

Creating Style States Using the View Manager

Create a style state in an assembly to capture components in various displays and visibilities.
Style states are only created in assemblies. You can set individual model display (shaded, transparent, wireframe, hidden line, no hidden) independent of the rest of the assembly or other components.

A style state is a captured state of component visibility in an assembly. You can vary component visibility independently of other components. For example, you can set one component to be displayed as shaded, set another to be displayed as wireframe, and set still another to be displayed as no hidden. In Figure 1, the component display of the cylinder head has been edited, while the remainder of the assembly remains shaded. If you redefine a style state you can also edit its component display to blank, or turn off, the display of any component in the assembly.

Fo r

Creating a Style State

To create a new style state, click New in the Style tab of the view manager. If desired, edit the default style name and press ENTER. The Edit dialog box opens, enabling you to blank (or, in other words, turn off) components from the graphics window. You can select components either from the graphics window or from the model tree. You can also select the Show tab and then set the method of model display. As you select components, their model display changes to the method currently selected in the Edit dialog box.
Module 3 | Page 46 2012 PTC

PT

Style States Theory

Figure 1 Style State Example

In

te rn

al

U se

nl y

As you define component visibilities and displays, the model tree displays which settings have been specified for the components. When you finish creating the style state, the graphics window displays the name of the style state in the bottom left corner. You can also create style states by first editing component displays, and then capturing the displays in a style state. There are two default style states in every assembly: Default Style and Master Style. The Master Style cannot be modified, but the Default Style can be modified.

Fo r

2012 PTC

PT

In

te rn

al
Module 3 | Page 47

U se

nl y

PROCEDURE - Creating Style States Using the View Manager

Close Window View\Style_States Task 1: Erase Not Displayed STYLE_STATES.ASM

Create a style state using the view manager.

1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. In the graphics window, select the CYLINDER_4.PRT. 3. In the ribbon, select the View tab. 4. Click the Model Display group drop-down menu and select Component Display Style > No Hidden.

5. Click View Manager the In Graphics toolbar.

Fo r

8. In the view manager, double-click Master Style. Double-click Cyl_No_Hidden.

Module 3 | Page 48

PT

7. In the Save Display Elements dialog box, edit the Style name to Cyl_No_Hidden and click OK.

6. In the view manager, select the Style tab. Right-click Master Style(+) and select Save.

In

te rn
from

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

Task 2:

Create another style state based on the CYL_NO_HIDDEN style state.

1. In the graphics window, press and hold CTRL and select the ENG_BLOCK_FRONT_4.PRT and ENG_BLOCK_REAR_4. PRT. 2. Click the Model Display group drop-down menu and select Component Display Style > Transparent. 3. In the view manager, right-click Cyl_No_Hidden(+) and select Save. 4. In the Save Display Elements dialog box, edit the Style name to Castings_Transparent and click OK. 5. In the view manager, double-click Master Style. 6. Click Close.

Fo r

This completes the procedure.

2012 PTC

PT

In

te rn

al
Module 3 | Page 49

U se

nl y

Managing and Editing Appearances

You can create and manage appearances and apply them to your models.
A company-standard appearance file is common. Use the Appearances Manager to manage, create, and edit appearances. Use the Appearance Gallery to select and apply appearances. Apply appearances to parts, surfaces, or components. Clear selected or all appearances.

Managing and Editing Appearances

A new model is assigned a grayish, solid appearance by default. The appearance palette can be used to set a new appearance for an entire model, surface, or component in an assembly. The appearance gallery contains a list of user-defined appearances that a company typically creates and distributes as its standards. Your company-specific appearance gallery is usually loaded automatically when you launch Creo Parametric. Appearances within Creo Parametric typically revolve around three main tasks: Creating and editing appearances. Applying and clearing appearances. Managing appearances.

Fo r

The Appearance Gallery

You access the appearance gallery from the Appearance Gallery types drop-down menu. The appearance gallery is divided into three distinct palettes:
Module 3 | Page 50 2012 PTC

PT

Figure 2 Appearances Applied

In

te rn

Figure 1 The Appearances Manager

al

U se

nl y

 My Appearances Displays a list of available user-defined appearances. Model Displays the appearances that are applied to a component, part, or surface display. Library Displays a predefined library of appearances from which to use. These libraries accurately simulate real world materials including metals and plastics. You can switch the library that is displayed by expanding the drop-down list next to it.

The Appearances Manager

The appearances manager enables you to manage your appearances. You

An appearance consists of both Color and Highlight Color. You can modify the properties of both within the appearance editor to create your desired appearance. You can even apply textures and decals to your appearance. To edit an appearance within the appearances manager, you must first copy it into the My Appearances palette. You can copy the appearance from the Library palette or Model palette by right-clicking and selecting Copy to My Appearances. You can also select an appearance in the My Appearances palette and click New Appearance , which copies the appearance to a new name. You can also edit an appearance by right-clicking it in the appearance gallery and selecting Edit. This launches the Appearance Editor.

Fo r

Applying Appearances
Once an appearance has been created, you can apply it to entire part models, part surfaces, or components in an assembly. You can use the selection filter, if necessary, to filter the item that you wish to apply the appearance. If an appearance is assigned to a part at the assembly level, the appearance is saved in the context of the assembly and does not change the appearance of the part at the part level. You can select the appearance first and then apply it to the reference, or you can select the reference first and then apply the appearance. To apply an appearance, you first select it from the Appearance Gallery types drop-down menu in the Model Display group. This selected appearance is now the active appearance, and is the appearance that is applied to the selected references. You can also search for the appearance using the Search field at the top of the appearance gallery and appearances manager. Clicking the upper half of the Appearance Gallery types drop-down menu enables you to apply the last active appearance.
2012 PTC Module 3 | Page 51

PT

Use preexisting appearances as a starting point to quickly and easily create new appearances.

In

te rn

al

U se

Creating and Editing Appearances

nl y

access the appearances manager by selecting Appearances Manager from the Appearance Gallery types drop-down menu. The Appearances Manager dialog box contains both the contents of the appearance gallery on the left and the appearance editor on the right.

Model Appearances versus My Appearances

Appearances that are applied to a component, part, or surface display in the Model palette of the appearance gallery and appearances manager. You can modify a Model appearance either within the appearances manager or within the model appearance editor. This enables you to replace, or edit, the Model appearance to dynamically change all applied occurrences without affecting the appearance located in the My Appearances palette. Once you are satisfied with the modified appearance, you can copy it into the My Appearances palette within the appearances manager.

Clearing Appearances
Appearance or Clear All Appearances from the appearance gallery. When clearing an appearance, you are prompted to select the references from which you want the appearance removed. However, the Model appearance from is still retained. You can also click Clear Assembly Appearances the appearance gallery to clear only assembly appearances. For a part, clearing all appearances removes all Model appearances and reverts the part to its default assigned appearance. For an assembly, clearing all appearances removes all Model appearances and returns the components to the appearances they were assigned at the part level.

Fo r

Module 3 | Page 52

PT

In

te rn

al

U se

nl y

To clear appearances applied to a part or surface, you can either click Clear

2012 PTC

PROCEDURE - Managing and Editing Appearances

Close Window View\Appearance Task 1: Erase Not Displayed APPEARANCE.ASM

Copy a library appearance into the My Appearances palette.

1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. Select Appearances Manager

6. Click Close.

Fo r

Task 2:

1. Press and hold CTRL and select GEARBOX_REAR_5.PRT and GEARBOX_FRONT_5.PRT. 2. Select the ptc-std-aluminumpolished appearance from the Appearance Gallery types drop-down menu.

2012 PTC

PT

5. Locate and select this new appearance from the My Appearances section.

Apply an appearance to assembly components.

In

4. Right-click the ptc-stdaluminum-polished appearance and select Copy to My Appearances.

te rn

3. In the Appearances Manager dialog box, select the drop-down in the Library palette and select std-metals.dmt, if necessary. Click File > Open. Select APPEARANCE.DMT and click Open. Click Override all, if necessary.

al
Module 3 | Page 53

U se

nl y

from the Appearance Gallery types drop-down menu in the Model Display group.

Task 3:

Copy and edit an appearance.

1. Select Appearances Manager types drop-down menu. 2. Select the ptc-std-aluminumpolished appearance sphere from the Model section.

from the Appearance Gallery

5. Drag the Transparency slider to 70 and click Close. 6. Select the aluminum-polishedtransparent appearance from the Appearance Gallery types drop-down menu.

7. Press and hold CTRL and select GEARBOX_REAR_5.PRT and GEARBOX_FRONT_5.PRT and then click OK.

Fo r

Module 3 | Page 54

PT

In

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

4. In the My Appearances section of the dialog box, select the new <ptc-std-aluminum-polished> appearance, edit the name to aluminum-polishedtransparent and press ENTER.

nl y

3. Right-click and select Copy to My Appearances.

Task 4:

Create a new appearance.

1. In the ribbon, select the Tools tab. 2. Click Appearances Manager from the Utilities group. 3. In the My Appearances section of the dialog box, select the upper-left appearance sphere, ref_color1 . Click New Appearance to copy the ref_color1 appearance. Edit the new appearance Name to MyColor1 and press ENTER. 4. In the Basic tab, click the Color rectangle to edit the color. Expand the RGB/HSV Slider section. Edit the RGB colors to 127, 137, and 145, and click OK > Close.

Task 5:

Fo r

1. In the graphics window, select CHUCK_5.PRT . 2. Right-click and select Open. 3. Select the View tab and select the MyColor1 appearance from the Appearance Gallery types drop-down menu. 4. Select CHUCK_5.PRT from the model tree and click OK.

2012 PTC

PT

Apply an appearance to a part.

In

te rn

al
Module 3 | Page 55

U se

nl y

5. Click Close to view the new part appearance in the assembly.

Task 6:

Apply an appearance to a group of surfaces.

2. Right-click and select Open. 3. Select the View tab and select the black appearance from the Appearance Gallery types drop-down menu. 4. Press and hold CTRL, and select the five surfaces shown. 5. Click OK.

Fo r

6. Click Close to view the new part surface appearance in the assembly.

This completes the procedure.

Module 3 | Page 56

PT

In

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

1. In the model tree, expand DRILL_CHUCK_5.ASM and select CHUCK_COLLAR_5. PRT.

nl y

Setting Up New Part Models

Your company can create customized templates that can be used to create new part models.
Create new parts using the New dialog box. Use customized part templates. Part templates include: Datums Layers Units Parameters View Orientations

Figure 1 New Part Created using Template

Fo r

PT

In

Figure 2 Examples of Parameters

Creating New Parts

You can create new part models within Creo Parametric by clicking File > New, or clicking New . You type the name of the part and select whether you want to use a default template. Unless you select the Empty template, the new part displays in the graphics window with some default datum features.

Using Templates
New models should be created using a template. Your company has most likely created customized templates for you to use. Using a template to create a new model is beneficial because it means that, regardless of who created it, the model contains the same consistent set of information, including:
2012 PTC Module 3 | Page 57

te rn
Figure 3 Layers Created from Part Template

al

U se

nl y

 Datums Most templates contain a set of default datum planes and default coordinate system, all named appropriately. Layers When every model contains the same layers, management of both the layers and items on the layer is easier. Units Most companies have a company standard for units in their models. Creating every model with the same set of units ensures that mistakes are not made. Parameters Every model can have the same standard metadata information. View Orientations Ensuring that every model contains the same standard view orientations aids the modeling process.

Viewing and Creating Parameters

You can view a models parameters and create new ones by clicking Parameters from the Model Intent group in the ribbon. You can create parameters that accept the following types of values: Real Number Any numerical value. For example 25.5, 1.666667, 10.5E3, and PI. Integer Any whole number. For example 1, 5, and 257. String Any consecutive sequence of alphanumeric characters (letters or numbers). Yes/No Accepts either the YES or NO value.

Fo r

Module 3 | Page 58

PT

In

te rn

Parameters can drive dimension values through relations, or be driven by relations. Parameters can be used as a column in a family table. For example, the parameter Cost might have a different value for each instance. Parameter values can be reported in drawings, or viewed with data management tools such as Pro/INTRALINK or Windchill solutions. User parameters can be added at the model level (part, assembly, or component) or to a feature or pattern.

al

U se

Parameters are metadata information that can be included in a model template or created by a user in his own part or assembly. Parameters are important because they enable you to add additional information into part and assembly models. Parameters have several uses:

nl y

2012 PTC

PROCEDURE - Setting Up New Part Models

Close Window File\New_Part Task 1: Erase Not Displayed CREATE NEW

Create a new part by selecting a template.

1. Without an open model, notice only the Home tab displays in the ribbon.

4. Enable only the following Datum 5. Explore the default datum features created in the graphics window and model tree.

In

3. In the New File Options dialog box, select the mmns_part_solid template. Click OK.

Fo r

6. Notice that the ribbon has populated with tabs specific to the type of open file.

7. In the model tree, click Show and select Layer Tree. Notice the default layers.

2012 PTC

PT

Display types:

te rn
.

al
Module 3 | Page 59

2. Click New from the Quick Access toolbar. Select Part as the Type and Solid as the Sub-type. Edit the Name to new_part. Clear the Use default template check box. Click OK.

U se

nl y

8. Click File > Prepare > Model Properties to access the Model Properties dialog box. Notice the units that are set. Click Close. 9. Click the Model Intent group drop-down menu and select Parameters . 10. In the Parameters dialog box, click in the Description parameter Value field. Edit the value to NEW PART and press ENTER.

12. Click Named Views to close it.

1. Click New from the Quick Access toolbar. Edit the Name to select_template. Clear the Use default template check box. Click OK. 2. In the New File Options dialog box, select the inlbs_part_solid template and click OK. 3. Again, notice the datum features.

Fo r

Module 3 | Page 60

PT

Task 2:

Create a new part by selecting a different template.

In

te rn
again

11. Click Named Views . Notice the default view orientations.

al
2012 PTC

U se

and edit the Name to PART_NUMBER. Click New Parameter Edit the Type to Integer. Click in the Value field and edit the number to 596289. Click OK.

Click New Parameter and edit the Name to PURCHASED. Edit the Type to Yes No and notice the default value of NO.

nl y

4. Click File > Prepare > Model Properties to access the Model Properties dialog box. 5. Notice the units that are set. 6. Click Close. This completes the procedure.

Fo r

2012 PTC

PT

In

te rn

al
Module 3 | Page 61

U se

nl y

Fo r

Module 3 | Page 62

PT

In

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

Module

4
U se O te rn al
Module 4 | Page 1

Selecting Geometry, Features, and Models

Module Overview
Before you can edit design models or create new features on models, you must be able to select within Creo Parametric. Selection enables you to choose features, geometry in a part model, or components in an assembly. In this module, you learn the different methods available for selecting items in Creo Parametric and become familiar with the feedback that the system provides you both before and after you select an item.

Objectives

Fo r

After completing this module, you will be able to: Understand the basic Creo Parametric mouse controls, keyboard shortcuts, and color feedback. Use drag handles and dimension draggers. Understand the purpose of the model tree, its basic columns, and available display filters. Select items using Direct Selection, Query Selection, and the Search Tool. Select multiple components Filter the selection of items using Selection Filters.

2012 PTC

PT

In

nl y

Understanding Creo Parametric Basic Controls

The graphics window provides you with color-based feedback to mouse and keyboard inputs.
System color assignments in the graphics window: Transparent light green Preselection highlighting Wireframe green Selected features Dark green Selected surfaces Orange Preview geometry or component Purple Partially constrained component Keyboard and mouse actions perform different functions.

Figure 1 Preselection Highlighting

Figure 3 Selected Surface

PT

In

Fo r

Understanding Color-Based Feedback

Creo Parametric provides you with color-based feedback during various operations that you perform on models in the graphics window. The following list explains the system color assignments: Transparent light green: Preselection highlighting When you cursor over a model or an area of a model, various geometry becomes shaded in the transparent light green color. This is called Preselection Highlighting, which is an indicator of what would be selected if you were to click that location. Wireframe green: Selected features Once you cursor over and select a feature, it highlights in wireframe green. Dark green: Selected surfaces Selected surfaces display in dark green. Orange: Preview geometry or component New feature geometry in a model previews in orange, enabling you to preview the completed model. Similarly, a newly assembled component that is fully constrained also previews in orange.
Module 4 | Page 2 2012 PTC

te rn

al

Figure 2 Selected Feature

Figure 4 Preview Geometry

U se

nl y

 Purple: Preview Component Assembly While you are assembling a new component in an assembly, the new component displays in purple. Once the component is fully constrained, it displays in orange. Preview colors are very beneficial because they provide feedback as you create valid geometry.

Mouse and Keyboard Controls for Making Selections

Different combinations of keyboard and mouse controls enable you to use different methods to make different selections. The following table displays the keyboard and mouse selections that comprise various selection types: Selection Type Keyboard and Mouse Selection

Preselection Highlighting (Transparent green color) Query to Next Item (Feature or Component Beneath) Select Highlighted Geometry (Opaque green color) or Select Features (Wireframe green color) Add or Remove Items from Selection

U se al

Select Range of Geometry (Chain/Set Selection)

Fo r

2012 PTC

PT

Clear Selection

In

te rn
On Background

nl y
Over Geometry Until Highlighted
Module 4 | Page 3

Using Drag Handles and Dimension Draggers

Drag handles and dimension draggers are graphical objects used to manipulate geometry, components, or dimensions during creation, editing, or redefinition in real time.
Drag handles are used to: Resize geometry. Reorient geometry. Move geometry. Reference geometry. Adjust component offset. Access context-sensitive options by right-clicking. Dimension draggers are used to: Dynamically adjust dimension values.

Figure 1 Dragging Extrude Depth

Figure 2 Adjusting Distance Offset

PT

In

Fo r

Using Drag Handles

Drag handles are small, white squares that display in the graphics window. These graphical objects are used to manipulate geometry during creation, editing, or redefinition in real time. Using your mouse, drag the handles to resize or reorient geometry, move feature geometry in a model, or reference geometry. In an assembly, drag the handle to adjust component offset. Your changes display dynamically in the graphics window. Right-click a drag handle to access context-sensitive menu options. You can specify various keyboard and mouse combinations to modify how the drag handle is used. The following table displays dragging options comprised of various keyboard and mouse combinations performed on a drag handle.

Module 4 | Page 4

te rn
Figure 3 Dragging the Cut Height

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

Dragging Option

Keyboard and Mouse Selection

Adjust Drag Handle Resize, reorient, move, and reference geometry; adjust component offset. Snap Drag Handle Reference geometry, such as a datum plane, edge, point, vertex, or surface. Access context-sensitive menu options.

Fo r

2012 PTC

PT

In

te rn

al

When editing or redefining features or sketching entities, the arrow heads of certain dimensions become filled white dimension draggers, as shown in Figure 3. Dimension draggers are graphical arrow heads used to manipulate dimensions while sketching, editing or redefining geometry. Using your mouse, drag a dimension dragger to dynamically adjust its corresponding dimension value. The resulting dependent geometry also updates in real time.

U se

O
Module 4 | Page 5

Using Dimension Draggers

nl y

Using Keyboard Shortcuts

Keyboard shortcuts are used to quickly perform commonly used functions.
You can use keyboard shortcuts to perform: Common file operations. Common edit operations. Common view operations. Figure 1 The CTRL Key

Using Keyboard Shortcuts

Fo r

Except for the Delete operation, all keyboard shortcuts use the CTRL key on your keyboard in conjunction with another letter key. There are keyboard shortcuts for various areas of Creo Parametric usage, including file operations, edit operations, and view operations. The following table contains keyboard shortcuts for various file operations. Keyboard Shortcut CTRL+N CTRL+O CTRL+S File Operation New Create a new object. Open Open an existing object. Save Save the active object.

The following table contains keyboard shortcuts for various edit operations.

Module 4 | Page 6

PT

You can use various keyboard shortcuts to quickly perform commonly used functions. Keyboard shortcuts facilitate a more efficient experience in the user interface by eliminating the need to move the mouse to make icon or menu selections.

In

te rn

al
Figure 2 Keyboard and Mouse
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

Keyboard Shortcut CTRL+G

Edit Operation Regenerate Regenerate model. Find, or Search Search for, filter, and select items in the model by rule. Delete Delete selected features. Copy Copy selected features. Paste Paste selected features.

CTRL+F

DEL CTRL+C CTRL+V CTRL+Z CTRL+Y

The following table contains keyboard shortcuts for various view operations. Keyboard Shortcut CTRL+R CTRL+D View Operation

Fo r

2012 PTC

PT

In

te rn

al

Standard Orientation Display object in standard orientation.

U se

Redo Redo last operation.

Repaint Redraw the current view.

Undo Undo last operation.

nl y

Module 4 | Page 7

Understanding the Model Tree

The model tree lists the features in a model, in the order in which they were created. The model tree also displays the order of the parts and sub-assemblies in an assembly.
The model tree enables you to: Visualize model features Visualize feature order Select items Edit items Show options include: Layer/Model tree Expand/Collapse All Preselection highlighting Highlight Geometry

Figure 2 Layer Tree

PT

In

Fo r

Model Tree Basics

The model tree is part of the Navigator window and, by default, displays along the left side of the main interface. When you open a part model, assembly, or drawing, the Navigator automatically changes its display to the model tree. The model tree contains a hierarchical list of features or components in the order in which they were created, as well as the display status (hidden/unhidden or suppressed) of those features and components. The model tree can also be customized to display other information. You can use the model tree in the following ways: Visualize model features/assembly components The model tree displays all features that comprise a model. For assemblies, the model tree also displays the components that comprise that assembly, and can display the assembly constraints for each assembled component. Visualize feature order/component assembly order A model's features are displayed in the order in which they were created, from top to bottom.
Module 4 | Page 8 2012 PTC

te rn
Figure 3 Show Menu Options

al

U se

Figure 1 The Model Tree

nl y

Similarly, an assembly's components are displayed in the order in which they were assembled, from top to bottom. Selection Selecting a feature or component in the model tree results in the selection of that feature or component in the graphics window. Editing The model tree can be used to edit features or components, including their display and name. The model tree is part of the Navigator. It can be toggled on or off by clicking in the status bar. You can also resize the model tree by Model Tree dragging the right edge of the pane to make it larger or smaller.

The Show menu is located at the top of the model tree and is accessed by

Fo r

Layer/Model Tree Shown in Figure 2, this option toggles the model tree to the layer tree so that all layers associated with a model, assembly, or drawing are displayed. If the layer tree is displayed and the Show menu is selected, the Layer Tree menu selection is replaced by the Model Tree menu selection. Locate in Model Tree Locates the object selected in the graphics window in the model tree. This option is especially useful when locating an embedded object such as a pattern instance or component in a sub-assembly. Expand All Fully expands every branch within the model tree and mechanism tree. Collapse All Fully collapses every branch within the model tree and mechanism tree. Preselection Highlighting Toggles preselection highlighting on or off. When you cursor over an item in the model tree when preselection highlighting is turned on, the item is preselected in the graphics window. By default, this option is turned off. Highlight Geometry Toggles Highlight Geometry on or off. When you select an item from the model tree when Highlight Geometry is turned on, the item is also selected (in green) in the graphics window.

2012 PTC

PT

In

te rn

al

U se

clicking Show following options:

, as shown in Figure 3. The Show menu contains the

nl y

Model Tree Show Options

Module 4 | Page 9

Understanding Model Tree Filters

You can use model tree filters to control both item and feature type display.

Figure 1 Model Tree Items Dialog Box

Fo r

The model tree contains a hierarchical list of features or components in the order created. You can filter what is displayed in the model tree both in terms of item display and feature types. The filtering of item display and feature types is controlled by the Model Tree Items dialog box, shown in Figure 1. from the top

Open the Model Tree Items dialog box by clicking Settings of the model tree, and then selecting Tree Filters.

The filters applied to the model tree are unique to each window except in the case of assemblies, where applied filters only propagate to sub-assemblies of assemblies.

Controlling Model Tree Item Display

The display of the following specific types of items is controlled on the left side of the Model Tree Items dialog box: Features Figure 2 shows the model tree with the display of features turned on and off. Notice that when features are turned off, they are turned off in both the assembly and part levels of the model tree. When features are turned off in the assembly, you can only see the components that are
Module 4 | Page 10 2012 PTC

PT

Understanding Model Tree Filters

Figure 3 Model Tree with Suppressed Objects Turned On

In

te rn
Figure 4 Model Tree Used Sketches Before and After

al

U se

Figure 2 Model Tree Display Features Filter Before and After

nl y

Controlling Model Tree Feature Types Display

Fo r

Datum Planes Datum Axes Curves Datum Points Coordinate Systems Rounds Auto Round Members Cosmetics Sketches Used Sketches Used sketch features are those external sketches that are used in another feature, such as an Extrude or Revolve feature. When a sketch is used, it is automatically changed to a hidden status, as shown in Figure 4.

Saving Model Tree Display

The model tree display can be saved to a file and loaded at any time. Click Settings from the top of the model tree and select Save Settings File to save the current model tree display. The default save location is the working directory, and the default settings file name is tree.cfg. You can configure Creo Parametric to always consider tree.cfg as the default model tree display.

2012 PTC

PT

In

te rn

The display of feature types is a more granular method of determining which level of feature display you wish to use. In the Feature Types section of the Model Tree Items dialog box, you can specifically control which features to display in the model tree:

al

U se

assembled, but nothing more granular. By default, features are turned on for parts and turned off for assemblies. Placement folder Toggles the display of component placement constraints within assembly components. Annotations Toggles the display of annotations. Sections Toggles the display of cross-sections. Suppressed Objects Toggles the display of suppressed features and components. Suppressed objects in the model tree are preceded with a black square. In Figure 3, the EDGE_ROUNDS and LUBE_HOLE features are suppressed. If the display of suppressed objects was turned off, these two features would not be visible in the model tree. Incomplete Objects Toggles the display of incomplete features. Excluded Objects Toggles the display of excluded components. Blanked Objects Toggles the display of blanked mold/cast components. Envelope Components Toggles the display of envelope components. Copied References Toggles the display of copied references.

nl y

Module 4 | Page 11

Understanding Basic Model Tree Columns

You can add additional columns of information to the model tree display.
Basic information columns that you can add include: Feat # Feat ID

PT

In

Fo r

Understanding Basic Model Tree Columns

You can add informational columns to the model tree, including: Feat # Displays the feature number of each feature in the model tree. The first feature created in a model is feature number one, and each consecutive feature is assigned an ascending integer increment. Feat ID Displays the feature ID of each feature in the model tree. The feature ID is a unique number that is assigned by Creo Parametric to each feature that is created. The information displayed in these columns can be obtained using other methods, but this particular method ensures that the information is always directly displayed without needing to perform any queries. You can add other informational columns in addition to Feat # and Feat ID, including regeneration status, feature type, copied references, and more. In addition, you can add other column types of information, including model parameters,
Module 4 | Page 12 2012 PTC

te rn
Figure 2 Viewing Added Columns in the Model Tree

al

U se

Figure 1 Adding Columns to the Model Tree

nl y

feature parameters, simplified representations, layer information, and mass property information. You access the Model Tree Columns dialog box by clicking Settings from the top of the model tree and selecting Tree Columns. You can edit the order of column display and the width of a displayed column in the Model Tree Columns dialog box. The columns displayed in the model tree are unique to each window, except in the case of assemblies where displayed model tree columns propagate to sub-assemblies of assemblies.

Saving Model Tree Column Display

you have added the desired columns to the model tree, click Settings from the top of the model tree and select Save Settings File. The default save location is the working directory, and the default settings file name is tree.cfg. You can configure Creo Parametric to always consider tree.cfg as the default model tree display.

Fo r

2012 PTC

PT

In

te rn

al
Module 4 | Page 13

U se

nl y

The model tree display can be saved to a file and loaded at any time. Once

Selecting Items using Direct Selection

Direct selection occurs when you cursor over a feature or component and click to select it.
You can direct select: Components Features Surfaces (by pressing ALT) You can perform direct selection in: The graphics window. The model tree. Select multiple items by pressing CTRL. Select a range of items by pressing SHIFT.

In

Selecting Items using Direct Selection

Fo r

After selecting features, geometry, or components in a model, assembly, or drawing, you are able to make modifications to the selected items. Direct selection is one of the three basic methods of selection. Direct selection occurs when you cursor over a feature or component and click to select it. Some key factors regarding direct selection include: You can perform direct selection on components in an assembly, and features or surfaces in a model. You can perform direct selection in both the graphics window on a model or assembly, and in the model tree. When you initially cursor over a model in the Creo Parametric graphics window, the component or feature preselects in the transparent light green color. When you select the component or feature, it highlights in green wireframe. The selected item is dependent on whether you have a part or assembly open. If you have a part open, a selected feature highlights in green wireframe. If you have an assembly open, the selected component highlights in green wireframe.
Module 4 | Page 14 2012 PTC

PT

Figure 2 Select Features in Model Tree or Graphics Window

te rn
Figure 3 Press ALT and Select Surfaces Directly

al

U se

Figure 1 Select Components in Model Tree or Graphics Window

nl y

In a part or assembly, you can select a surface directly by pressing ALT. With ALT selected, surfaces preselect in transparent light green. When the surface is selected it highlights in dark green. You can select multiple items by pressing CTRL. You can select a range of items from the model tree by pressing SHIFT. If you select an item and then press SHIFT and select a second item, the entire range of items between them is also selected. You can de-select components or features two different ways: Press CTRL and click the selected item again. Click in the graphics window background.

Fo r

2012 PTC

PT

In

te rn

al
Module 4 | Page 15

U se

nl y

PROCEDURE - Selecting Items using Direct Selection

Close Window Selection\Direct Task 1: Erase Not Displayed DIRECT_SELECTION.ASM

Select components using direct selection.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

5. De-select the component.

Fo r

8. Press CTRL and select ENG_BLOCK_REAR_6.PRT from the model tree to de-select it.

9. Press CTRL and select the two BOLT_5-18_6.PRT and the three BOLT_5-28_6.PRT from the model tree. 10. Click in the background of the graphics window to de-select all components.

Module 4 | Page 16

PT

7. Press CTRL and select ENG_BLOCK_FRONT_6.PRT from the graphics window to de-select it.

In

6. Press CTRL and select ENG_ BLOCK_FRONT_6.PRT and ENG_BLOCK_REAR_6.PRT from the graphics window.

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

4. Select CYLINDER_6.PRT from the model tree.

3. Click in the background of the graphics window to de-select the component.

nl y

2. Select CYLINDER_6.PRT from the graphics window.

Task 2:

Select features using direct selection.

1. Select CYLINDER_6.PRT from the graphics window, right-click, and select Open. 2. Select the hole from the graphics window. Notice that the feature highlights in the graphics window and model tree, and that the feature name is SPARK_PLUG_HOLE. 3. De-select the feature. 4. Press CTRL and select SPARK_PLUG_HOLE and BASE_ROUND from the graphics window. 5. Press CTRL and select SPARK_PLUG_HOLE from the graphics window to de-select it. 6. Press CTRL and select BASE_ROUND from the model tree to de-select it.

Fo r

Task 3:

1. Press ALT and select the surface shown. 2. Click in the background of the graphics window to de-select all surfaces. from the Quick 3. Click Close Access toolbar to return to the assembly.

2012 PTC

PT

8. Click in the background of the graphics window to de-select all features. Select surfaces using direct selection.

7. Press CTRL and select the four mount hole features from the model tree.

In

te rn

al
Module 4 | Page 17

U se

nl y

4. Press ALT and select the surface shown. 5. Click in the background of the graphics window to de-select all surfaces.

This completes the procedure.

Fo r

Module 4 | Page 18

PT

In

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

Selecting Items using Query Selection

Query selection enables selection of features, geometry, or components that are hidden beneath another item.
Query selection: Select by querying the model. Select using the Pick From List menu.

Selecting Items using Query Selection

Fo r

Query selection is one of the three basic methods of selection. Query selection enables you to select features, geometry, or components that are hidden beneath another feature or model. For example, in Figure 2, you may want to select the piston so you can change the overall height of the part. However, the cylinder part obstructs your attempts to click and select the piston. In this situation, you can easily query and select the piston. There are two methods of query selection: Select by querying the model When you cursor over a model directly in the Creo Parametric graphics window, the transparent green color designates a preselected item. By right-clicking the preselected model or feature, you can query directly through the initial model or feature to the next model or feature. You can continue to right-click to query the next model or feature. When you have queried to the desired model or feature, you then click to make your selection. Select using the Pick From List The Pick From List method is similar to querying the model, except that all of the query possibilities are listed
2012 PTC Module 4 | Page 19

PT

Figure 2 Original Model, Cursor Over to Highlight, Query to Highlight, Select

In

te rn

al

U se

Figure 1 Pick From List

nl y

in the dialog box for the cursor location. To activate the Pick From List menu, cursor over the location you want to query, and then right-click and select Pick From List. Items highlighted in the Pick From List menu also preselected in the graphics window. Remember: Cursor over to highlight, right-click to query, and click to select.

Fo r

Module 4 | Page 20

PT

In

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

PROCEDURE - Selecting Items using Query Selection

Close Window Selection\Query Task 1: Erase Not Displayed QUERY_SELECT.ASM

Use query selection in an assembly.

1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. Cursor over the assembly.

Fo r

5. Press CTRL, then right-click and select Pick From List. It is necessary for you to right-click and hold to display pop-up menus.

6. Still pressing CTRL, select CONNECTING_ROD_9.PRT from the Pick From List dialog box. Click OK.

2012 PTC

PT

4. Move the cursor down slightly until the CYLINDER_9.PRT model preselects.

In

te rn

3. Right-click to query until the PISTON_9.PRT highlights, and then click to select it.

al
Module 4 | Page 21

U se

nl y

7. Press CTRL and cursor over PISTON_9.PRT. Right-click to query until the PISTON_9.PRT highlights, and then select it. This de-selects the component.

Task 2:

Use query selection in a part model.

2. Cursor over the bottom, center area of the CYLINDER_9.PRT. 3. Right-click and select Pick From List.

5. Click OK from the Pick From List dialog box.

Fo r

6. De-select the feature.

7. Cursor over the area where the CYLINDER_CUT feature is located, right-click to query until the CYLINDER_CUT feature highlights, and then select it. 8. Orient the model to observe the CYLINDER_CUT feature. This completes the procedure.
Module 4 | Page 22 2012 PTC

PT

4. In the Pick From List dialog box, click the down arrow until the CYLINDER_CUT feature is preselected.

In

te rn

al

U se

1. In the graphics window, select CYLINDER_9.PRT. Right-click and select Open.

nl y

Using the Search Tool

Using the Search Tool is a powerful method for selecting many types of objects.
Search by various methods and then select items Look for Look by Look in Name Found/Selected Objects

PT

Figure 2 The Found and Selected Lists

In

Fo r

Using the Search Tool

The Search Tool is one of the three basic methods of selection. It includes several options for searching models by a variety of criteria, including: Look for Specifies the type of items you want to search for. For example, you can search for only datum planes, components, or axes. Look by Specifies the types of items you want to search by. This is a further refinement to the Look for option, and is context-sensitive based on the Look for option specified. Look in Specifies which model or models the search is conducted against. If an assembly or sub-assembly is specified as the Look in object, you can choose whether sub-models are included. You can set the Look in object either by selecting it from the drop-down list in the Search Tool
2012 PTC Module 4 | Page 23

te rn
Figure 3 Axes Selected using Search Tool

al

U se

Figure 1 The Search Tool

nl y

dialog box, or you can click Select Model and select the model from the graphics window. Name Enables you to refine the search by typing in part or all of the name of the item you want to search for. You can also type wildcards, both at the beginning and end of the name search string. In Figure 1, wildcards are used to search for all features containing pin in their name. The items that fulfill the criteria specified display in the Found list on the left side of the Search Tool. If you select items in the Found list, they preselect in the graphics window. You can select multiple items by pressing CTRL or SHIFT, or you can select all items by pressing CTRL+A. Move items to the Selected list on the right to select them in the graphics window and therefore perform operations. The Search Tool becomes invaluable as the complexity of your model increases.

Fo r

Module 4 | Page 24

PT

In

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

PROCEDURE - Using the Search Tool

Close Window Selection\Search Task 1: Erase Not Displayed SEARCH_TOOL.ASM

Use the Search Tool in an assembly model. .

1. Enable only the following Datum Display types: 2. In the ribbon, select the Tools tab. 3. Click Find from the Investigate group.

5. Click Find Search Tool.

PT

6. In the Search Tool dialog box, select Feature from the Look for drop-down list. Select Datum Plane from the Look by drop-down list. Type front as the Criteria Value. Click Find Now.

Fo r

2012 PTC

4. In the Search Tool dialog box, select Component from the Look for drop-down list. Type *gear_shaft_11 as the Criteria Value. Click Find Now. In the Found list, select the first component, press CTRL, and select the second and third components. Select REDUCTION_GEAR_ SHAFT_11 and click Add Item . Click Close. De-select the component.

In

to start the

te rn

al
Module 4 | Page 25

U se

nl y

7. In the Search Tool dialog box, select DRILL_CHUCK_11.ASM from the Look in drop-down list. 8. Click Find Now. 9. Edit Look in to CHUCK_11.PRT. 10. Click Find Now. 11. In the Found list, click Add Item and click Close.

3. In the Search Tool dialog box, edit Look for to Feature if necessary. Edit Look by to Feature. Type reduction* as the Criteria Value. Click Find Now. Select REDUCTION_GEAR_ HOLE and click Add Item . Click Close. 4. De-select the feature.

Fo r

5. Select the Tools tab and click to start the Search Find Tool.

6. In the Search Tool dialog box, edit Look for to Datum Plane. Type rib* as the Criteria Value. Click Find Now. Select RIB_PLANE_3 and click Add Item . Click Close. 7. De-select the datum plane. 8. Click Repaint .

Module 4 | Page 26

PT

In

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

2. Press CTRL+F to start the Search Tool.

1. Open GEARBOX_FRONT_11. PRT.

nl y

Task 2:

Use the Search Tool in a part model.

9. Click Find bar.

from the Status

This completes the procedure.

Fo r

2012 PTC

PT

In

te rn

al
Module 4 | Page 27

U se

nl y

10. In the Search Tool dialog box, edit Look for to Axis. Type *pin* as the Criteria Value. Click Find Now. Select ALIGNMENT_PIN_ TOP and click Add Item . Click Close.

Using the Smart Selection Filter

The smart filter enables you to select the most common types of items that are valid for the current geometrical context.
Smart filter: The selection of features, geometry, or components is a nested process. Select specific items of interest after the initial selection. Smart filter selection levels: Feature/Component level. Geometry level. Surfaces. Edges/Vertices. You may need to zoom in for surface selection.

Figure 1 Example of Smart Filter Selection Levels

Fo r

Creo Parametric automatically selects the Smart selection filter, if it is available. When using the Smart selection filter, the selection of features, geometry, or components is a nested process. This means you can select specific items of interest after the initial selection. There are two levels of selection when using the Smart Filter: Feature/Component Level Geometry Level When selecting on a part in the graphics window, your initial selection highlights a feature in green wireframe. The Smart selection filter then automatically narrows the selection scope, enabling you to select specific items on that feature that you wish to either modify or use to create another feature. For example, you can select an edge where you wish to add a chamfer. The three specific items that you may wish to select highlight differently, as shown in Figure 1. Selected surfaces highlight as dark green items; selected edges highlight in bold green; and selected vertices highlight with a green plus. The entire selection process occurs automatically. The process is usually easier if you zoom in on the specific area of the model first.

Module 4 | Page 28

PT

Using the Smart Selection Filter

In

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

Assemblies have a similar selection scheme. Components are selected initially, followed by geometry, such as surfaces, edges, and vertices. The Smart selection filter is not available if you disable preselection highlighting.

Fo r

2012 PTC

PT

In

te rn

al
Module 4 | Page 29

U se

nl y

PROCEDURE - Using the Smart Selection Filter

Close Window Erase Not Displayed SMART_FILTER.ASM

Selection\Smart_Filter Task 1:

Use the smart selection filter in an assembly.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

4. Select the planar tab surface.

Fo r

6. Select the edge of the hole in the tab.

Module 4 | Page 30

PT

5. Select the cylindrical tab surface.

In

te rn

al
2012 PTC

3. Zoom in to the tab on the upper-left area of the part.

U se

nl y

2. In the graphics window, select component ENG_BLOCK_FRONT_8.PRT.

7. Select the vertex on the edge of the hole. 8. De-select the vertex.

Task 2:

Use the smart selection filter in a part model.

3. Select the hex cut feature.

5. De-select the hex cut edge.

Fo r

6. Select the top protrusion feature. 7. Select the front cylindrical surface of the top protrusion feature.

This completes the procedure.

2012 PTC

PT

In

4. Select the edge of the hex cut feature.

te rn

al
Module 4 | Page 31

U se

2. In the graphics window, select the BOLT_5-18_8.PRT model, right-click, and select Open.

1. Press CTRL+D to orient the assembly to the standard orientation.

nl y

Understanding Selection Filters

The selection filter provides various filters to help you select items.
Filters include: Parts Features Geometry Datums Quilts Annotation

Figure 2 Viewing the Selection Filter

Fo r

Each filter in the selection filter narrows the item types that you can select, enabling you to easily select the desired item. All filters are context-sensitive, so that only those filters that are valid for the geometrical context are available. For example, the Parts filter would not be available while working in a part; rather it would be available while working in an assembly. Creo Parametric automatically selects the best filter according to the context; however, you can always change the filter by simply selecting it from the selection filter. The following filters are available in Part mode and Assembly mode: Parts Available in Assembly mode only, this filter enables you to only select components in the assembly. Features Enables you to only select features in a part or component in the assembly. Geometry Enables you to only select geometry, such as edges, surfaces, and vertices. Datums Enables you to only select datum features, including datum planes, datum axes, datum points, and coordinate systems. Quilts Enables you to only select surface quilts. Annotation Enables you to only select annotation features.

Module 4 | Page 32

PT

In

Understanding Selection Filters

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

Figure 1 The Selection Filter

nl y

PROCEDURE - Understanding Selection Filters

Close Window Selection\Filters Task 1: Erase Not Displayed SELECTION_FILTERS.ASM

Use the selection filter in an assembly.

1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. Edit the selection filter to Parts.

4. Select CRANKSHAFT_7.PRT from the graphics window. 5. Notice that BOLT_5-18_7.PRT is automatically de-selected.

Fo r

7. Press CTRL and select CRANKSHAFT_7.PRT from the graphics window. Notice that it de-selects. 8. De-select FLYWHEEL_7.PRT. 9. Edit the selection filter to Features.

10. Press CTRL and select the two round features. 11. De-select the rounds.

2012 PTC

PT

6. Press CTRL and select FLYWHEEL_7.PRT from the graphics window.

In

te rn

al
Module 4 | Page 33

U se

nl y

3. Select BOLT_5-18_7.PRT from the graphics window.

12. Press CTRL and select the two hole features. 13. De-select the holes.

14. Edit the selection filter to Geometry. 15. Zoom in on ENG_BLOCK_ FRONT_7.PRT and select the front surface.

16. Zoom in on the BOLT_5-18_7.PRT component. 17. Select the inner planar surface on the hex of BOLT_5-18_7.PRT, as shown on the left. 18. Select the top edge on the hex of BOLT_5-18_7.PRT, as shown on the right.

20. De-select the vertex.

21. Enable Plane Display Axis Display

Fo r

22. In the ribbon, select the View tab. 23. Enable Plane Tag Display and Axis Tag Display .

24. Edit the selection filter to Datums. 25. Press CTRL and select datum axis A_4 and datum plane TOP. 26. De-select the datum plane. 27. Disable Plane Tag Display and Axis Tag Display This completes the procedure. .

Module 4 | Page 34

PT

In

19. Select the top vertex on the hex of BOLT_5-18_7.PRT. and

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

Selecting Multiple Components

You can use either 2-D or 3-D Box Selection to select components.
2-D Box Selection: Draw a rectangle. Components selected. 3-D Box Selection: Draw a rectangle. A 3-D box is created from the drawn 2-D rectangle. Manipulate the 3-D box. Components selected. The direction you follow while drawing the rectangle determines selection. Inside Crossing

te rn

Fo r

From an assembly, edit the selection filter to Parts. Draw a rectangle over the model. The direction you follow while drawing the rectangle determines whether the system uses Inside Box or Crossing selection types. Perform the following steps to use 3-D Box Selection: , and select a plane or surface. From an assembly, click 3D Box Select Draw a rectangle in the selected plane. The direction you follow while drawing the rectangle determines whether the system uses Inside Box or Crossing Box selection types. Once the rectangle is created, a 3-D box appears, as shown in Figure 2. Drag arrows display on each surface. You can drag the arrows and watch the components dynamically select.

2-D and 3-D Selection Box Options

The following types of selection are available when using the selection box: Inside Box Selection Only components that are fully inside the box are selected. To achieve this type of selection, draw a selection rectangle from the upper-left towards the lower-right.
2012 PTC Module 4 | Page 35

PT

You can use either 2-D or 3-D Box Selection to select components. Perform the following steps to use 2-D Box Selection:

In

Selecting Multiple Components

al
Figure 2 3-D Selection

U se

Figure 1 2-D Selection

nl y

 Crossing Box Selection All components that are either inside or crossing the box are selected. To achieve this type of selection, draw a selection rectangle from the lower-right towards the upper-left.

Considerations When Using Box Selection

Consider the following when using box selection: You can work from 2-D or 3-D model orientations when creating the box region. For the 3-D box selection, it may be useful to manipulate the box region from multiple orientations. The system considers the component bounding box for selection purposes.

Fo r

Module 4 | Page 36

PT

In

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

PROCEDURE - Selecting Multiple Components

Close Window Erase Not Displayed ENGINE.ASM

Selection\Multiple_Components Task 1:

Select components using 2-D Box Selection.

1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. Edit the selection filter to Parts.

5. Notice the selected components. 6. Click in the background to de-select all components.

Fo r

8. Notice the selected components. 9. Click in the background to de-select all components. 10. Edit the selection filter back to Smart.

2012 PTC

PT

7. Draw a rectangle from the lower-right of the model towards the upper-left of the model, as shown.

In

te rn

al
Module 4 | Page 37

U se

4. Draw a rectangle from the upper-left of the model towards the lower-right of the model, as shown.

nl y

3. Orient to the LEFT view orientation.

Task 2:

Select components using 3-D Box Selection.

1. Orient to the Standard Orientation. 2. Click 3D Box Select the status bar. 3. Select the front surface. 4. Draw a rectangle from the upper-left of the model towards the lower-right of the model, as shown. 5. Manipulate the 3-D box as necessary to select the components shown. 6. Click in the background to de-select all components. from

7. Click 3D Box Select

8. Select the front surface.

Fo r

10. Manipulate the 3-D box as necessary to select the components shown. 11. Click in the background to de-select all components.

This completes the procedure.

Module 4 | Page 38

PT

9. Draw a rectangle from the lower-right of the model towards the upper-left of the model, as shown.

In

te rn
.

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

Module

5
U se O te rn al
Module 5 | Page 1

Editing Geometry, Features, and Models

Module Overview

Once a selection is made, you can perform a variety of operations, including editing. Editing enables you to modify not only dimensions of existing design models or features, but you can also edit shape, size, location, and visibility. You can also edit models by renaming them.

Objectives

After completing this module, you will be able to: Rename objects. Utilize undo and redo operations. Understand regeneration and auto regeneration. Edit features. Edit the definition of features. Activate and edit models. Delete and suppress items. Edit feature and component visibility.

Fo r

2012 PTC

PT

In

nl y

Renaming Objects
You can rename objects with more descriptive names so that they are easily recognized in the model tree.
Objects that can be renamed include: Features Components

Renaming Features

When you create a feature in a part model, it is automatically assigned a generic name based on its type. For example, the feature may be called Sketch 1 or Extrude 2, or Revolve 3. While these names describe the type of feature, they do not describe what the feature is in the context of the design. Consequently, it can be helpful to rename the feature to something more descriptive. Figure 1 shows the model tree before and after feature renaming has occurred. You can see that the model tree is more intuitive once the features have been renamed with more descriptive names. As a result, it is much easier to find a feature when it needs to be edited. You can rename model features by using any of the following methods: Select the feature in the model tree or graphics window, then right-click and select Rename from either the graphics window or model tree. Select the feature to be renamed in the model tree. Once selected, select it again from the model tree. Names can contain up to 31 characters and may not include spaces.

Fo r

Module 5 | Page 2

PT

Figure 2 The Rename Dialog Box

In

te rn
Figure 3 Connecting Rod

al

Figure 1 Features Before and After Rename

U se

O
2012 PTC

nl y

Renaming Components
To avoid assembly failures, you must rename components within the context of the assembly instead of using Windows Explorer to rename components on the hard drive. You can rename components by using either of the following methods: Rename on disk and in session The system renames the component both in system memory and on the hard drive. Rename in session The system renames the component only in system memory.

, and then select the component to can click Commands and Settings be renamed from either the model tree or graphics window. You can also rename the assembly in the Rename dialog box. Notice that the assembly is the default item to be renamed when this dialog box appears.

Fo r

2012 PTC

PT

In

te rn

al
Module 5 | Page 3

U se

nl y

Click File > Manage File > Rename from the File menu to rename components. Within the Rename dialog box, as shown in Figure 2, you

Utilizing Undo and Redo Operations

You can easily undo and redo model changes.
Undo and Redo Capabilities: Pop-Up Text Undo List Redo List Figure 1 Pop-Up Text

Figure 2 Undo List

te rn

Operations valid for undo or redo include creating, deleting, editing, redefining, suppressing, resuming, patterning, and reordering. The Undo and Redo operations have the following capabilities: Pop-Up Text A preview of the operation that is to be undone or redone. Undo List You can select one or many sequential actions to undo. Redo List You can select one or many sequential actions to redo.

Fo r

Module 5 | Page 4

PT

You can undo and redo most of the operations performed on a model. The operations are sequentially stacked in memory as they are performed. You have access to the undo/redo stack when you click the Undo or Redo icons.

In

Utilizing Undo and Redo Operations

al
Figure 3 Redo List
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

Understanding Regeneration and Auto Regeneration

Regenerating a model recalculates the model geometry, incorporating any changes made since the last time the model was saved or regenerated.
Auto Regenerate automatically regenerates the model while you edit it. Orange preview geometry displays. Auto Regenerate is enabled by default. You can toggle Auto Regenerate off. Preview geometry is turned off. Dimensions can be directly edited only. Draggers are toggled off.

Understanding Regeneration and Auto Regeneration

Fo r

When you edit features in Creo Parametric, you are editing dimension values which control the geometry. After you edit a features dimensions, the function recalculates the model geometry, incorporating any Regenerate changes made since the last time the model was saved or regenerated. It is necessary to regenerate a model after you have edited it. Auto Regenerate eliminates the need to regenerate the model after making changes. Rather, the model is automatically regenerated dynamically while models are edited. By default, Auto Regenerate is enabled. However, if you wish to make multiple changes to a feature or features before regenerating the model, you can toggle Auto Regenerate off temporarily. When Auto Regenerate is toggled off, you can only edit dimensions directly, and all draggers are toggled off. You also cannot drag section entities. When you are ready for the model to regenerate, toggle Auto Regenerate back on.
2012 PTC Module 5 | Page 5

PT

Figure 2 Making Multiple Edits to the Model

In

te rn
Figure 3 Auto Regenerate Toggled Back On

al

U se

Figure 1 Auto Regenerate Toggled Off

nl y

Editing Features
Edit enables you to alter dimensions of a selected feature or component.
Edit: Edit a dimension directly. Select the Most Recently Used option. Use draggers. Drag section entities. Features are regenerated in real time. Child features regenerate in real time.

Figure 1 Editing a Model

Figure 2 Dynamically Editing Depth

Editing Features

Fo r

Edit is a menu selection available from the model tree or pop-up menu. After selecting Edit, the dimensions of the selected features or components display in the graphics window. You can also double-click a feature to open Edit mode. Using Edit, you can quickly change the dimensions of a selected feature using one of the following methods: Edit the dimension directly To edit a dimension directly, simply double-click it and edit its value. Edit using the Most Recently Used option When you edit a models dimensions, you can also utilize the Most Recently Used option. When you double-click a dimension, a drop-down list displays the most recent values of the model. You can select a suitable value from this list. The Most Recently Used option only displays recent values from the current session. It does not display values used in previous Creo Parametric sessions.
Module 5 | Page 6 2012 PTC

PT

In

te rn

al
Figure 3 Dynamically Editing a Section

U se

nl y

 Use draggers Drag the handles that display for rounds and chamfers, pattern dimensions, or a features depth or angle. You can also use the dimension draggers that display over the arrow heads of certain dimensions to dynamically edit that specific dimension. Drag section entities You can drag a sections entities to dynamically update the geometry. By default, features are regenerated in real time when they are edited. Additionally, child features also regenerate in real time. Real-time regeneration may be slow if dragging a parent feature in a large model. If you edit a feature in such a way that it cannot successfully regenerate, a caution icon displays next to your cursor and the geometry displays red. You can simply undo the edit or edit the feature back to a successful status. Other affected downstream features that do not successfully regenerate display in blue.

While in Edit mode, the following options are available in the pop-up menu that appears when you right-click: Display Draggers Enables you to toggle the display of drag handles on and off. Display Dimensions Enables you to toggle the display of dimensions on and off. When dimensions are toggled off, you can still drag the features section entities. Display Sketch Dimensions Enables you to toggle the display of the section dimensions on and off. When section dimensions are toggled off, you can still drag the sections entities Auto Regenerate Enables you to toggle the auto regenerate function on and off. When auto regenerate is toggled off, all draggers are toggled off, and you can only update dimensions directly or drag section entities. The geometry is not dynamically updated, and you must manually regenerate the model.

Fo r

2012 PTC

PT

In

te rn

al

U se

Edit Right-Click Options

O
Module 5 | Page 7

nl y

PROCEDURE - Editing Features

Close Window Edit\Features Task 1: Erase Not Displayed EDIT-FEATURES.PRT

Edit features in a model using various techniques.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

4. Click once in the background.

5. Double-click the 12 dimension, edit it to 10, and press ENTER. 6. Click once in the background. 7. Double-click the 10 dimension and select 12 from the drop-down list. 8. Click once in the background.

Fo r

11. Click Named Views from the In Graphics toolbar and select 3D. 12. In the model tree, select Extrude 1, right-click, and select Edit. 13. Click the circular section and drag it to a diameter of approximately 12.5. 14. Click twice in the background to exit Edit mode.

Module 5 | Page 8

PT

10. Click in the background to exit Edit mode.

9. Click the 8 dimension dragger and drag it to approximately 7.

In

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

3. Double-click the 8 depth dimension, edit it to 12, and press ENTER.

nl y

2. In the graphics window, double-click Extrude 3.

15. In the model tree, select Extrude 4, right-click, and select Edit. 16. Right-click and select Display Sketch Dimensions to toggle their display off. 17. Drag the depth handle to approximately 21. 18. Right-click and select Display Sketch Dimensions to toggle their display on. 19. Click twice in the background to exit Edit mode. 20. Edit Extrude 5. 21. Drag the depth handle to approximately 10. 22. Right-click and select Auto Regenerate to toggle it off. 23. Notice that the orange preview geometry disappears. 24. Double-click this approximate dimension and edit it to 6.

Fo r

26. Select Extrude 4 from the model tree. 27. Double-click the 3 dimension and edit it to 3.5. from the Regenerate types drop-down menu in the Operations group.

28. Select Auto Regenerate

29. Notice that the geometry updated for both edits. 30. Click in the background to exit Edit mode. This completes the procedure.
2012 PTC Module 5 | Page 9

PT

In

25. Notice that the geometry did not dynamically update.

te rn

al

U se

nl y

Editing Features using Edit Definition

Edit Definition enables you to modify feature type, size, shape, location, references, or options.
Edit Definition using: The dashboard Preview Feature Pause Feature Resume Feature Drag handles Context-sensitive options available by right-clicking

Type Change a protrusion into a cut, for example. Size Make a feature larger or smaller. Shape Change a round cut into a square cut, for example. Location Move a cut from one reference to a different reference. References Change the location of the feature or change the dimensional references. Options Change the additional details of the feature, such as its depth. When you finish editing the definition of a feature, the system automatically regenerates the model for you to incorporate the changes you have just made. In Edit Definition, you can modify the model by: 1. 2. Editing with the dashboard This is the graphical area in which you can change a feature's type, size, shape, and location. Editing with drag handles You can directly change features on a model by manipulating the drag handle. Your changes display dynamically in the graphics window.
2012 PTC

Fo r

Module 5 | Page 10

PT

Using Edit Definition, you can significantly change the model by redefining the following aspects of a feature:

Editing Features using Edit Definition

In

Figure 2 Modifying a Features References

te rn

al
Figure 3 Modifying a Features Shape

U se

Figure 1 Modifying a Features Depth

nl y

3.

Using the various context-sensitive options Accessed by right-clicking the dynamic preview or drag handles.

The set of icons along the right side of the dashboard perform the following operations: Preview Feature Provides a preview of how the completed feature or component will look in the graphics window. Pause Feature Pauses the current feature's edit definition operation, enabling you to perform other functions such as inserting datum features. Resume Feature Resumes a paused feature's edit definition operation.

Fo r

2012 PTC

PT

In

te rn

al
Module 5 | Page 11

U se

nl y

PROCEDURE - Editing Features using Edit Definition

Close Window Edit\Definition Task 1: Erase Not Displayed EDIT-DEFINITION.PRT

Edit the definition of features in a part model.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

3. Drag the drag handle to 12. 4. Click Complete Feature the dashboard. from

Fo r

6. In the dashboard, select the Options tab. Edit the Side 1 depth to To Selected . Select the lower front surface. Edit the Side 2 depth to To . Selected Query select the lower rear surface. 7. Click Complete Feature

PT

Module 5 | Page 12

In

te rn
.

5. In the model tree, right-click UPPER and select Edit Definition.

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

2. In the model tree, right-click BASE and select Edit Definition.

8. In the model tree, right-click BASE and select Edit Definition. 9. In the graphics window, select the square sketch.

10. Click Complete Feature

This completes the procedure.

Fo r

2012 PTC

PT

In

te rn

al
Module 5 | Page 13

U se

nl y

Activating and Editing Models

You can activate components and sub-assemblies within a top-level assembly and edit their features and components, respectively.
From an assembly, you can activate: Components Sub-assemblies Perform the following operations on the active component or subassembly: Edit Edit Definition Create features

Figure 1 Viewing the Activated Component

Activating and Editing Models

From an open assembly, you can activate individual components or sub-assemblies within the assembly. You can then perform Edit and Edit Definition operations on features of the activated component or components of an activated subassembly. You can also create features on the activated part or sub-assembly in the context of the top-level assembly. If you know you need to edit many features within the context of the assembly, consider toggling on the display of features within the model tree to help with selection. Activating a component or sub-assembly in an assembly is different . However, you than activating a window by clicking Windows can click this icon to reactivate the top-level assembly. An active component or sub-assembly is denoted in the Creo Parametric interface in three ways: A green symbol displays in the model tree next to the active component.
Module 5 | Page 14 2012 PTC

Fo r

PT

Figure 2 Editing the Definition of a Chamfer in the Activated Crankshaft

In

te rn
Figure 3 Editing the Number of Fins in the Activated Flywheel

al

U se

nl y

 Text in the graphics window states which component is active. All other non-active components become unavailable and display in gray in the graphics window.

Fo r

2012 PTC

PT

In

te rn

al
Module 5 | Page 15

U se

nl y

PROCEDURE - Activating and Editing Models

Close Window Edit\Activate Task 1: Erase Not Displayed ACTIVATE_EDIT.ASM

Activate assembly components and edit their features.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

Fo r

5. Click Regenerate Operations group.

PT

4. Double-click the 16 FIN_ROUNDS value, edit it to 10, and press ENTER. from the

Module 5 | Page 16

In

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

3. Select one of the fins, right-click, and select Edit.

nl y

2. In the model tree, expand the CRANK_10.ASM sub-assembly. Right-click FLYWHEEL_10. PRT and select Activate.

6. Click Windows from the Quick Access toolbar and select ACTIVATE_EDIT.ASM to activate the top-level assembly.

8. Zoom in to the end of the CRANKSHAFT_10.PRT. 9. Select the chamfer, right-click, and select Edit Definition.

10. Drag the drag handle to a value of 1.

This completes the procedure.

Fo r

2012 PTC

PT

12. In the model tree, right-click ACTIVATE_EDIT.ASM and select Activate.

In

11. Click Complete Feature

te rn
.

al
Module 5 | Page 17

U se

7. In the model tree, right-click CRANKSHAFT_10.PRT and select Activate.

nl y

Deleting and Suppressing Items

Suppressing an item removes it from the graphics display and regeneration cycle, but the item can be resumed. Deleting an item is permanent.
Delete: Is permanent. Follows parent/child relationships. Suppress: Items can be restored via Resume. Follows parent/child relationships. Resume: Selected items. All items.

In

Figure 2 Viewing Children of Item to Be Suppressed

Fo r

Deleting and Suppressing Items

If you delete an item from a model and save it, that item is permanently removed from the graphical display and regeneration cycle of the model. Suppressing an item also removes it from the graphical display and regeneration cycle. However, you can restore a suppressed item by resuming it. Resuming a suppressed item returns it to the graphical display and regeneration cycle. Suppressed items are denoted in the model tree by a black square. By default, however, suppressed items are not displayed in the model tree. Figure 1 shows two suppressed items. Suppressing items causes regeneration speed to increase. However, suppressing items is not meant to be a technique for managing complex models or large assemblies. You can resume all suppressed items by clicking the Operations group drop-down menu and selecting Resume > Resume All.
Module 5 | Page 18 2012 PTC

PT

te rn
Figure 3 Both Parents and Children Suppressed

al

U se

Figure 1 Suppressed Items in the Model Tree

nl y

 You can select an object and delete from that object to the end of the model from the Delete types drop-down by selecting Delete to End of Model menu in the Operations group. You can select an object and suppress from that object to the end of the model by clicking the Operations group drop-down menu and selecting Suppress > Suppress to End of Model. You can select an object and delete all objects other than the selected one from the Delete and its parents by selecting Delete Unrelated Items types drop-down menu in the Operations group. You can select an object and suppress from that object to the end of the model by clicking the Operations group drop-down menu and selecting Suppress > Suppress Unrelated Items.

Handling Parent/Child Relationships

If you suppress an item that is a parent to another item, the child item highlights in red and the system warns you that the child item would suppress, too. In Figure 2, the gear is a parent to the drill chuck sub-assembly in how it was assembled. Therefore, when the gear is suppressed, the chuck assembly is also suppressed, as shown in Figure 3. The same parent/child relationships hold true if you try to delete an item that is a parent to another item. Again, the child item highlights in red and the system warns you that the child item would need to be deleted, too.

Fo r

2012 PTC

PT

If you want to remove non-solid features or components in the graphics window for the long-term, it is a best practice to use layers or simplified representations.

In

It is recommended that you use Suppress and Resume to temporarily remove features or components in the graphics window to test design variations. It is a best practice to remove (delete) all suppressed features or components before saving your final design.

te rn

Best Practices

al
Module 5 | Page 19

U se

nl y

PROCEDURE - Deleting and Suppressing Items

Close Window Erase Not Displayed DELETE_SUPPRESS.ASM

Edit\Delete-Suppress Task 1:

Delete, suppress, and resume items from an assembly.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

5. Click Undo

Settings Filters.

and select Tree

Fo r

9. Click the Operations group drop-down menu and select Suppress .

10. Click OK in the Suppress dialog box. 11. Click Undo .

Module 5 | Page 20

PT

8. Select DRILL_CHUCK_12.ASM again.

7. In the Model Tree Items dialog box, select the Suppressed Objects check box. Click OK.

In

te rn

6. At the top of the model tree, click

al
2012 PTC

U se

4. Click OK in the Delete dialog box.

from the Delete 3. Select Delete types drop-down menu in the Operations group.

nl y

2. In the model tree, select DRILL_CHUCK_12.ASM.

12. Query select the FINAL_GEAR_SHAFT_12.PRT. 13. Right-click and select Delete. 14. Read the contents of the Delete dialog box and click Cancel. 15. With the component still selected, right-click and select Suppress. 16. Click OK in the Suppress dialog box. 17. Press CTRL and select both suppressed components from the model tree.

1. Open CHUCK_12.PRT. 2. Select FRONT_ROUND and press DELETE. 3. Click OK. 4. Click Undo .

5. Select FRONT_ROUND again. 7. Click OK.

8. Select the radial hole. 9. Right-click and select Delete. 10. Read the contents of the Delete dialog box and click OK. 11. Click Undo . 12. Select the radial hole again. 13. Right-click and select Suppress. 14. Click OK. 15. Click Undo .

Fo r

This completes the procedure.

2012 PTC

PT

In

6. Right-click and select Suppress.

te rn

al
Module 5 | Page 21

U se

Task 2:

Delete and suppress items in a part.

18. Right-click and select Resume.

nl y

Editing Feature and Component Visibility

The Hide and Unhide operations respectively remove and display components or non-solid feature geometry from the graphic display.
Hide/Unhide: Components in an assembly Datum features Solid features Does not affect parent/child relationships. Changes are not saved by default. Save Status

PT

Figure 2 Hiding Datum Features

In

Fo r

Editing Feature and Component Visibility

The Hide and Unhide operations respectively remove and display components or non-solid feature geometry from the graphic display. You can hide items to enable easier selection and visualization while completing tasks. You may then unhide items to return them to the display after your tasks are complete. Hidden objects are grayed out in the model tree. The datum features and holes in Figure 1 are hidden. Hiding objects does not affect parent/child relationships with other components or features. Hiding solid geometry features in a part does not remove the geometry from the display; rather, it hides only the non-solid components of the feature (such as the axis of a hole) from the display. Hidden items are placed in the Hidden Items layer in the Layer tree.
Module 5 | Page 22 2012 PTC

te rn

al

Figure 1 Hidden Features in the Model Tree

Figure 3 Hiding Components

U se

nl y

 You can unhide all hidden objects at once by selecting Unhide All from the Unhide types drop-down menu in the Visibility group. Unhide All does not unhide items that were automatically hidden by Creo Parametric, such as layer items and datums created on-the-fly or used sketches.

Saving Feature and Component Visibility

If you want hidden items to open in their still-hidden state the next time the file is opened (once it has been erased from session), you must select the option in the Status types drop-down menu in the Visibility Save Status group to save changes to the Hide/Unhide status before saving the model. Changes to the Hide/Unhide status are not saved with the model by default.

Best Practices

Fo r

2012 PTC

PT

In

te rn

al
Module 5 | Page 23

U se

It is recommended that you use Hide/Unhide to temporarily remove non-solid features or components in the graphics window. If you want to remove non-solid features or components in the graphics window for the long-term, it is a best practice to use layers or simplified representations.

nl y

PROCEDURE - Editing Feature and Component Visibility

Close Window View\Visibility Task 1: Erase Not Displayed FEAT_COMP_VISIBILITY.ASM

Edit component visibility in an assembly.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

5. Press CTRL and select all four BOLT_5-18_13.PRT components. 6. Right-click and select Hide.

7. Click Named Views from the In Graphics toolbar and select LEFT. 8. Click Save Click OK.

from the Quick Access toolbar.

10. Notice the warning message stating that the layer display was not saved.

Fo r

PT

9. Expand the message log to 2 lines, if necessary.

11. Select Save Status the Visibility group.

12. Click Save Click OK.

from the Quick Access toolbar.

Module 5 | Page 24

In

te rn
from the Status types drop-down menu in

al
2012 PTC

U se

4. Click Hide group.

from the Visibility

3. Press CTRL and select GEARBOX_FRONT_13.PRT and GEARBOX_REAR_13.PRT.

nl y

2. In the ribbon, select the View tab.

Task 2:

Edit feature visibility in a part.

1. Open CHUCK_13.PRT. 2. Enable Plane Display Axis Display . and

3. Press CTRL and select datum planes RIGHT, TOP, and FRONT from the graphics window.

6. Press CTRL and select the other two Hole features. 7. Right-click and select Hide.

Fo r

8. In the ribbon, select the View tab. from the Status types drop-down menu.

9. Select Save Status

PT

10. Click Save Click OK.

This completes the procedure.

2012 PTC

In

from the Quick Access toolbar.

te rn

al
Module 5 | Page 25

The axis is hidden, but there is no effect on the hole itself.

U se

5. Expand the first Pattern (Hole) feature in the model tree. Select each Hole feature to highlight it. Select the first Hole id 156, right-click, and select Hide.

nl y

4. Right-click and select Hide.

Fo r

Module 5 | Page 26

PT

In

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

Module

6
U se O te rn al
Module 6 | Page 1

Creating Sketcher Geometry

Module Overview

Most 3-D geometry created in Creo Parametric begins with a 2-D sketched section. Consequently, sketching is one of the most fundamental, consistently performed operations. In this module, you review sketcher theory and learn how to create a robust, predictable sketch. You also learn the tools available for creating sketch geometry.

Objectives

Fo r

2012 PTC

PT

After completing this module, you will be able to: Review sketcher theory and understand design intent. Modify the sketcher display. Learn and use constraints. Learn how to sketch lines, centerlines, rectangles, circles, arcs, fillets, and chamfers.

In

nl y

Reviewing Sketcher Theory

A sketch is a 2-D entity that graphically captures an idea with lines, constraints, and dimensions.
2-D sketches are: Sketched on a 2-D plane. Placed on a 3-D model. Used to create solid features.

PT

Figure 2 Sketches are Used to Create Solid Features

In

Fo r

Reviewing Sketcher Theory

In Creo Parametric, you use the 2-D Sketcher mode to capture your engineering idea. You sketch your idea in a 2-D plane using various types of lines which are then trimmed, constrained, dimensioned, and modified accordingly. An example of a sketch is shown in Figure 1. This 2-D sketch is then placed into a 3-D model, as shown in Figure 3. Once the sketch is placed, it can be used to create solid features, as shown in Figure 2. Notice that the same sketch can be used to create two completely different types of geometry.

Module 6 | Page 2

te rn
Figure 3 Sketch Placed on a 3-D Model

al
2012 PTC

U se

Figure 1 2-D Sketch

nl y

Understanding Design Intent

Design Intent in Sketcher is used to create, constrain, and dimension a sketch in a manner that causes it to update predictably if modified.
Design intent is captured in sketches by: How it is constrained. How it is dimensioned. Capture design intent by using Sketcher to: Maintain fully defined sketches at all times. Maintain weak/strong items.

Fo r

Figure 2 Design Intent Captured with Constraints

PT

In

Understanding Design Intent

When creating models with Creo Parametric, it is critical that you capture the design intent of the model. Design intent ensures predictable results when a model is modified. Creating sketch features enables you to capture design intent. Design intent is captured and can be varied in sketches by: How it is constrained Changing how a sketch is constrained affects the predictable behavior of the sketch, thereby varying design intent. How it is dimensioned Changing how a sketch is dimensioned affects the predictable behavior of the sketch, again varying design intent.

Using Sketcher to Capture Design Intent

The top image in Figure 1 shows a freehand sketch. Design intent has not been applied to it. When you edit the sketch, you cannot predict how it behaves. The bottom image in Figure 1 shows the desired sketch to be
2012 PTC Module 6 | Page 3

te rn

al

U se
Figure 1 Freehand Sketch and Desired Sketch Figure 3 Design Intent Captured with Dimensions

nl y

achieved. Sketcher helps you apply design intent to your sketch so it appears as the bottom image, not the top image. Start by sketching the rough shape of your desired sketch. Sketcher begins to dynamically apply constraints to help you lock in your sketch. For example, if you sketch a line approximately vertical, Sketcher dynamically applies a vertical constraint to that line, helping you lock in design intent. When you stop sketching, a series of light blue dimensions appears in addition to your constraints. Sketcher must maintain a fully defined sketch at all times. The dimensions and constraints maintain the size, shape, and location of all sketched items, which helps you capture design intent. If needed, you can modify the default dimension scheme by editing or adding dimensions to properly capture your intended design intent. Sketcher contains both Weak and Strong items. Weak items are light blue, whereas Strong items are dark blue. Dimensions and constraints can be Weak or Strong. Sketcher adds or removes Weak items as necessary to maintain the fully constrained sketch. You cannot delete Weak items. Strong items are Weak items that were made strong either directly or by modifying them.

Fo r

Module 6 | Page 4

PT

In

te rn

al

U se

nl y

2012 PTC

Modifying the Sketcher Display

You can modify the Sketcher Display to enable easier visualization when completing tasks.
Display options available in Sketcher: Dimensions Constraints Grid Section vertices Inspection display options available in Sketcher: Highlight Open Ends Shade Closed Loops reorients Sketch View parallel to the screen.

Figure 1 Showing Sketcher Inspection Display

PT

When you enter Sketcher mode, there are four different Sketcher Display types that can be controlled to aid visualization while completing tasks:

Sketcher Display Options

Fo r

Display Dimensions Display Constraints

Display Grid

Toggles the display of section vertices on or off. Display Vertices These Sketcher Display types can be found in both the In Graphics toolbar and the Setup group in the Sketch ribbon tab. The Sketcher Display for a given exercise is included within the procedure and exercise steps where applicable. When you see the sketcher display icons in exercises, you should set your sketcher display to match. Consider the following example: Enable only the following Sketcher Display types: This step indicates that you should enable the display of dimensions, constraints, and vertices.
2012 PTC Module 6 | Page 5

In

Figure 2 Sketcher Display Options

Toggles the display of the grid on or off.

te rn
Toggles the display of dimensions on or off. Toggles the display of constraints on or off.

al

U se

nl y

Sketcher Inspection Display Tools

Sketcher contains four inspection display tools to help analyze and solve common sketching problems. Two of these tools are enabled by default and are available in the Inspect group of the Sketch ribbon tab: Highlight Open Ends The endpoints of entities not common to more than one entity are highlighted. For example, any open ends of the sketch are highlighted. The highlight appears as a large red square on the open endpoint. Shade Closed Loops The area inside entities that form a closed loop is shaded. The default shading color is pale yellow.

Orienting the Sketch Parallel to the Screen

Fo r

Module 6 | Page 6

PT

In

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

from the In Graphics toolbar default. However, you can click Sketch View to reorient the sketch parallel to the screen at any time. This orientation can be beneficial when creating more complicated sketches.

When you enter Sketcher, the models current orientation is retained by

nl y

Utilizing Constraints
Constraints are rules enforced by Creo Parametric on your sketched entities.
Constraint types include: Vertical Horizontal Perpendicular Tangent Mid-point Coincident Symmetric Equal Parallel

Utilizing Constraints

Fo r

Constraining the sketch is an important means to capture design intent. As you add constraints, you add logic to your sketches. You also minimize the number of dimensions required to document your design intent. This is why it is important to constrain your sketched entities before dimensioning your sketch. The following table lists the available constraints, which can be activated from the Constrain group in the Sketch tab of the ribbon, or by selecting multiple entities and right-clicking: Constraint Vertical Horizontal Perpendicular
2012 PTC

PT

Figure 2 Constrain Group

In

te rn
Figure 3 Sketch Before and After Constraints Applied Description Makes lines vertical or aligns points vertically. Makes lines horizontal or aligns points horizontally. Makes lines perpendicular to one another.

al
Module 6 | Page 7

U se

Figure 1 Sketch Before and After Constraints Applied

nl y

Constraint Tangent Midpoint Coincident

Description Makes lines tangent to arcs and circles. Places a point on the middle of a line or arc. Aligns two entities or vertices to the same point. Also creates Collinear and Point on Entity constraints. Makes two points or vertices symmetric about a centerline. Makes lines equal length, gives arcs/circles equal radii, makes dimensions equal, or creates equal curvature.

Symmetric Equal

Parallel

Fo r

Module 6 | Page 8

PT

In

te rn

al

At any time, you can select a constraint from the sketch, click the Constrain drop-down menu, and select Explain. The Message Log provides an explanation of the constraint.

U se

Makes lines parallel to one another.

nl y
2012 PTC

PROCEDURE - Utilizing Constraints

Close Window Erase Not Displayed CONSTRAINTS.PRT

Sketcher\Constraints Task 1:

Apply the Equal, Horizontal, and Coincident constraints to the Sketch 1 feature.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

Sketcher Display types:

4. Click Equal from the Constrain group in the ribbon. Select the small circle, then the larger circle. When using the Equal constraint, you can select two or more entities or dimensions to set them equal.

Fo r

6. Select One-by-One from the Select types drop-down menu in the Operations group. 7. Drag the circle centers to test the Horizontal constraint. 8. Drag the circle radii to test the Equal Radii constraint. 9. Click Undo from the Quick Access toolbar twice.

2012 PTC

PT

5. Click Horizontal from the Constrain group and select the center of each circle.

In

te rn

al
Module 6 | Page 9

U se

3. Enable only the following

nl y

2. In the model tree, right-click Sketch 1 and select Edit Definition.

10. Click Coincident from the Constrain group and select one circle center and the horizontal reference. 11. Click OK from the Sketch tab in the ribbon.

Task 2:

1. Edit the definition of Sketch 2. 2. Click Midpoint Constrain group. from the

3. Select the circle center, then select the vertical line on which it resides. 4. Click Coincident . Select the circle radius, then select the upper-right rectangle vertex. 5. Click OK .

Task 3:

1. Edit the definition of Sketch 3.

Fo r

2. Click Perpendicular from the Constrain group and select the upper and right lines. 3. Click Parallel from the Constrain group and select the upper and lower lines. 4. Middle-click twice to enable selection. 5. Press CTRL and select the upper and lower lines, then right-click and select Equal. 6. Select the left line, then right-click and select Vertical.

Module 6 | Page 10

PT

Apply the Perpendicular, Equal, Vertical, and Coincident constraints to the Sketch 3 feature.

In

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

Apply the Midpoint and Coincident constraints to the Sketch 2 feature.

7. Select the right line, press CTRL, select the vertical reference, then right-click and select Coincident. Select the lower line, press CTRL, select the horizontal reference, then right-click and select Coincident. 8. Click OK . For most constraint types, you can select entities first, and then right-click to apply the desired constraint. Task 4:

1. Edit the definition of Sketch 4. 2. Notice the red highlighted open ends.

Fo r

4. Click Tangent from the Constrain group and select the right arc and the upper line. 5. Click Symmetric from the Constrain group and select the upper vertex of the right arc, the upper vertex of the left arc, and the vertical centerline. Click One-by-One .

2012 PTC

PT

3. Press CTRL and select the endpoints on either side of the gap. Right-click and select Coincident.

In

te rn

al
Module 6 | Page 11

U se

Apply the Coincident, Tangent, and Symmetric constraints to the Sketch 4 feature.

nl y

6. Drag the centerline to the right. 7. Click OK .

This completes the procedure.

Fo r

Module 6 | Page 12

PT

In

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

Sketching with On-the-Fly Constraints

When sketching entities, you can manipulate constraints on-the-fly as they appear.
On-the-fly constraints enable you to capture design intent. Constraint manipulations include: Lock/Disable/Enable. Disable constraints from appearing on-the-fly. Toggle the active constraint.

Figure 1 Locking a Constraint

In

te rn
Sketching with On-the-Fly Constraints
As you sketch geometry entities, constraints appear dynamically on-the-fly to quickly capture design intent. The constraints actually cause the geometry to snap as you sketch it, based on the constraint that appears. For example, as you sketch a line close to horizontal, a Horizontal constraint dynamically displays and snaps the line horizontal, enabling you to quickly capture your horizontal line design intent. Taking advantage of these constraints ensures that you do not have to manually constrain entities after they are sketched. When a constraint appears, you can perform the following manipulations to further aid you while sketching: Lock constraint Enables you to lock the constraint so the geometry remains snapped. Locked constraints are denoted by circles, as shown in Figure 1. Disable constraint Enables you to disable the constraint so it does not influence the geometry. Of course, you can always re-enable the disabled constraint. Disabled constraints are denoted by slashes, as shown in Figure 2.
2012 PTC Module 6 | Page 13

Fo r

PT

Figure 2 Disabling a Constraint

al
Figure 3 Toggling the Active Constraint

U se

nl y

 Disable constraints from appearing on-the-fly Enables you to sketch an entity without any on-the-fly constraints appearing. Toggle active constraint When a constraint appears on-the-fly while sketching, it displays in green and is considered active. When more than one constraint appears at the same time, only one can be the active constraint. The active constraint has the previously defined manipulations applied to it. The toggle manipulation is only available if more than one on-the-fly constraint appears at the same time. In Figure 3, the Equal Length constraint is active in the left image and the Horizontal constraint is active in the right image. The following table lists the manipulations available and the corresponding mouse and keyboard operations: Constraint Manipulation Lock/Disable/Enable the Constraint Disable constraints from appearing on-the-fly Toggle the Active Constraint Mouse/Keyboard Operation

Right-click to toggle between constraint types.

Press and hold SHIFT while sketching the entity.

Fo r

Module 6 | Page 14

PT

In

te rn

Manipulating the constraints on-the-fly does not cancel the Sketcher entity tool that you are using. For example, if you are sketching a line and manipulate a constraint that dynamically appears, the Line tool remains active.

al

Press TAB.

U se

nl y
2012 PTC

Sketching Lines
Sketched entities are the basis for a solid face or surface of a 3-D model.
There are two types of lines: Line Chain Tangent Line

PT

Fo r

Sketching Lines

There are two main types of lines available in Sketcher: from the Line types drop-down menu Line Chain Select Line Chain or right-click and select Line Chain to create a line between two selected points. Each time you click the mouse, you start a line point or endpoint. You can continue clicking the mouse to create lines that are chained together. The endpoint of one line is the starting point of the next line. You can either middle-click or select another function from the Sketch tab in the ribbon to terminate line creation. from the Line types drop-down Tangent Line Select Line Tangent menu to create a line that is tangent to two circles, two arcs, or a circle and arc. You can only select arcs or circles when creating a Tangent Line.

2012 PTC

In

te rn
Figure 2 Tangent Line

al
Module 6 | Page 15

U se

Figure 1 Line Chain

nl y

PROCEDURE - Sketching Lines

Close Window Sketcher\Line Task 1: Erase Not Displayed SKETCH_LINES.PRT

Sketch line entities in Sketcher.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

3. Enable only the following Sketcher Display types: . from the 4. Select Line Chain Line types drop-down menu in the Sketching group. 5. Click the existing line endpoint. Move the cursor down, and click again at the vertical and horizontal reference intersection. Notice the Vertical constraint. 6. Move the cursor to the right, and notice the Horizontal constraint. 7. Continue to move the cursor to the right until you see the Equal Length constraint.

Fo r

8. Continue to move the cursor to the right until you see the Vertical Alignment constraint. 9. Click again to complete the horizontal line.

10. Move your cursor up and to the right to create a diagonal line. Continue to move the cursor upward until you see the Parallel constraint.

Module 6 | Page 16

PT

In

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

2. In the model tree, right-click LINE and select Edit Definition.

11. Continue to move the cursor to increase the line length until the Equal Length constraint appears.

15. Keeping the line parallel, continue to move the cursor to increase the line length. 16. Press TAB to activate the Parallel constraint. 17. Right-click to lock the Parallel constraint.

18. Move the cursor to further extend the line length and click to finish the line creation.

20. Click to finish the vertical line creation.

Fo r

21. Move the cursor to the left and notice the Horizontal constraint. Drag the line horizontally to the left until the Vertical Alignment constraint appears. 22. Click to finish the horizontal line creation.

2012 PTC

PT

19. Move the cursor upward. Notice the Vertical constraint.

In

te rn

al
Module 6 | Page 17

U se

14. Right-click two times to disable the Equal Length constraint.

13. Press TAB again to toggle the active constraint back to the Equal Length constraint.

nl y

12. Press TAB to toggle the active constraint to the Parallel constraint.

23. Move the cursor down and drag the line vertically until it snaps to the arc endpoint. Click to finish the vertical line creation. 24. Middle-click twice to stop sketching and exit the line creation tool. 25. Click OK from the Sketch tab in the ribbon. Task 2: Sketch tangent lines in Sketcher.

3. Click the bottom of the smaller circle to begin sketching a line. 4. Move the cursor around the circle, and notice that the line stays tangent to the circle.

6. Select One-by-One

PT

Fo r

7. Select the tangent line and press DELETE. 8. Click Line Tangent .

9. Sketch another tangent line.

10. Sketch a third tangent line. 11. Click OK .

This completes the procedure.

Module 6 | Page 18 2012 PTC

In

5. Click the top of the larger circle to complete the line. Notice the Tangent constraints.

te rn
from the Select types drop-down menu.

al

U se

2. Select Line Tangent ribbon.

from the Line types drop-down menu in the

1. Edit the definition of 2-TANGENT_LINE.

nl y

Sketching Centerlines
A centerline is a type of construction geometry that can be used to enforce symmetry and control sketch geometry.
There are two types of construction Centerlines: Centerline Tangent Centerline

Sketching Centerlines
A centerline is a type of construction geometry that can be used to define a line of symmetry with a sketch. They are also used to control sketch geometry. In Figure 2, the circle is dimensioned to the vertical and horizontal references. In Figure 3, the circle is dimensioned radially by using a centerline. Centerlines must be fully constrained by using dimensions or constraints like any other sketched entity. They have infinite length and do not create feature geometry. There are two types of construction Centerlines: from the Centerline types drop-down Centerline Select Centerline menu or right-click and select Centerline to create a Centerline through two points. from the Centerline Tangent Centerline Select Centerline Tangent types drop-down menu to create a centerline that is tangent to two circles, two arcs, or a circle and arc. You can only select arcs or circles when creating a Tangent Centerline.
2012 PTC Module 6 | Page 19

Fo r

PT

Figure 2 Dimensioning a Circle without a Centerline

In

te rn
Figure 3 Dimensioning a Circle using a Centerline

al

U se

Figure 1 Symmetry Created using a Centerline

nl y

PROCEDURE - Sketching Centerlines

Close Window Erase Not Displayed SKETCH_CENTERLINES.PRT

Sketcher\Centerline Task 1:

Sketch centerlines in Sketcher.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

. 4. Notice that the horizontal line is asymmetric about the vertical reference. Also notice the dimensioning scheme for the angled line.

6. Press DELETE.

9. Move the cursor upwards and click the vertical reference to create a vertical centerline on top of the vertical reference.

Fo r

10. Click the intersection of the vertical and horizontal references to start sketching a second centerline. 11. Drag the centerline until it measures approximately 70 from vertical, and click to place it.

Module 6 | Page 20

PT

8. Click the intersection of the vertical and horizontal references to start sketching a centerline.

In

7. Select Centerline from the Centerline types drop-down menu in the Sketching group.

te rn

5. Click and drag a window around the two lines.

al
2012 PTC

U se

3. Enable only the following Sketcher Display types:

nl y

2. In the model tree, select CENTERLINE, right-click, and select Edit Definition.

12. Select Line Chain from the Line types drop-down menu. 13. Click in the top left quadrant of the graphics window to start sketching a line. 14. Move the cursor horizontally to the right side of the vertical centerline until it snaps symmetric about the vertical centerline and click to place it. 15. Middle-click to stop line creation.

19. Middle-click to stop line creation.

Fo r

21. Click the angled centerline and drag it to approximately 60. Notice that the angled line always stays perpendicular about the angled centerline. 22. Click OK from the ribbon.

This completes the procedure.

2012 PTC

PT

20. Click One-by-One de-select the line.

In

18. Move the cursor down to the angled centerline, move the cursor up and down on the centerline until the Perpendicular constraint appears, and click to complete the line.

te rn
and

al
Module 6 | Page 21

17. Click Line Chain and select the right endpoint of the horizontal line.

U se

16. Select One-by-One from the Select types drop-down menu, and click and drag one of the line endpoints to resize it to a length of approximately 13. Notice that the line stays symmetrical about the vertical centerline as it is resized.

nl y

Sketching Rectangles and Parallelograms

You can quickly sketch four-sided shapes.
The four lines are independent. You can delete, trim, and align each line individually. You can create symmetric rectangles using Center Rectangles.

Figure 2 Slanted Rectangle Figure 1 Corner Rectangle

Figure 3 Center Rectangle

In

Fo r

To create a corner rectangle, select Corner Rectangle from the Rectangle types drop-down menu, or right-click and select Corner Rectangle. When you sketch a rectangle, you click to define locations for two opposite corners. from the To create a slanted rectangle, select Slanted Rectangle Rectangle types drop-down menu. When you sketch a slanted rectangle, you click two locations to define a line that becomes the first side, and then specify a third location to define the width.

To create a center rectangle, select Center Rectangle from the Rectangle types drop-down menu. When you sketch a center rectangle, you click to define locations for the rectangle center and one corner. The rectangle is created symmetrically in both directions using two diagonal construction lines that connect opposite corners through the rectangle center. from the Rectangle types To create a parallelogram, select Parallelogram drop-down menu. When you sketch a parallelogram, you click two locations to define a line that becomes the first side, and then specify a third location to define the width and side angle. Remember the following when sketching rectangles and parallelograms:
Module 6 | Page 22 2012 PTC

PT

Sketching Rectangles and Parallelograms

te rn
Figure 4 Parallelogram

al

U se

nl y

 The four lines are independent once created. You can delete, trim, and align each line individually. You should create symmetric rectangles using the Center Rectangle type.

Fo r

2012 PTC

PT

In

te rn

al
Module 6 | Page 23

U se

nl y

PROCEDURE - Sketching Rectangles and Parallelograms

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Sketcher\Rectangle_Parallelogram RECTANGLE_PARALLELOGRAM.PRT Task 1: Create a corner rectangle and a center rectangle in Sketcher.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

3. Enable only the following Sketcher Display types: 4. Select the upper line of the rectangle and press DELETE. 5. Press CTRL and select the three remaining lines. 6. Right-click and select Delete. .

8. Click the intersection of the vertical and horizontal references to start the rectangle. Move the cursor to the lower-right quadrant, and notice that the rectangle retains symmetry about its vertical and horizontal without requiring centerlines. 9. Click to complete the rectangle. Middle-click to complete sketching and view the constraints.

Fo r

Module 6 | Page 24

PT

7. Select Center Rectangle from the Rectangle types drop-down menu in the Sketching group.

In

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

2. In the model tree, right-click RECTANGLE and select Edit Definition.

10. Click Sketch View In Graphics toolbar.

from the

11. Right-click and select Corner Rectangle. Click the midpoint of the right side of the rectangle. 12. Move the cursor to the right until the second rectangle snaps to equal length. Move the cursor down until the second rectangle snaps to the bottom of the first rectangle, and click to complete the rectangle. Task 2:

Fo r

5. Click the upper-left vertex of the parallelogram to begin sketching. 6. Move the cursor to the vertical reference and upwards until the line snaps parallel, and then click. 7. Move the cursor up and to the right until it snaps to equal length, then click to complete the slant rectangle.

2012 PTC

PT

4. Select Slanted Rectangle from the Rectangle types drop-down menu in the Sketching group.

3. Move the cursor up vertically until the height snaps to equal length, then click to complete the parallelogram.

In

te rn

2. Click the upper-right vertex of the second rectangle and then click the upper-right vertex of the first rectangle.

al
Module 6 | Page 25

1. Select Parallelogram from the Rectangle types drop-down menu in the Sketching group.

U se

Sketch a parallelogram and a slanted rectangle.

nl y

8. Middle-click to stop sketching. 9. Click OK in the ribbon.

This completes the procedure.

Fo r

Module 6 | Page 26

PT

In

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

Sketching Circles
You can quickly sketch various types of circles.
There are four types of Circles: Center and Point Concentric 3 Point 3 Tangent

Figure 1 Concentric Circle

In

te rn
Sketching Circles

Fo r

There are four types of circles available in Sketcher: from the Circle types Center and Point Select Center and Point drop-down menu and select the location for the center and a location that determines the diameter. You can also right-click and select Circle. from the Circle types drop-down menu Concentric Select Concentric to create a circle that is concentric about an existing circle or arc.

from the Circle types drop-down menu and 3 Point Select 3 Point select three locations that the circle must pass through. from the Circle types drop-down menu 3 Tangent Select 3 Tangent and select three arcs, circles, or lines which must be tangent to the circle.

2012 PTC

PT

Figure 2 Circle Tangent to 3 Entities

al
Figure 3 Circle Created by Picking 3 Points
Module 6 | Page 27

U se

nl y

PROCEDURE - Sketching Circles

Close Window Sketcher\Circle Task 1: Erase Not Displayed SKETCH_CIRCLES.PRT

Sketch circles and concentric circles in Sketcher.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

3. Enable only the following Sketcher Display types: 4. Select Center and Point from the Circle types drop-down menu in the Sketching group. 5. Select the vertical and horizontal reference intersection. 6. Move the cursor out until the circle diameter snaps to equal diameter with the arc. Click to complete the circle.

9. Select Concentric from the Circle types drop-down menu and select the largest circle. Move the cursor up until the circle diameter snaps to the right arc endpoint. Click to complete the circle. Middle-click to cancel further circle creation.

Fo r

Module 6 | Page 28

PT

8. Click Sketch View In Graphics toolbar.

In

7. Sketch another circle so it snaps to the arc endpoint. from the

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y
.

2. In the model tree, right-click CTR-PNT_CONCENTRIC_CIRCLE and select Edit Definition.

10. Select the arc and create another concentric circle. 11. Middle-click to cancel further circle creation. 12. Click OK from the ribbon.

Task 2:

Sketch 3 point circles in Sketcher.

1. Edit the definition of 3-PNT_CIRCLE. 2. Select 3 Point from the Circle types drop-down menu in the Sketching group. 3. Select the line endpoint and a rectangle corner. 4. Select the opposite rectangle corner. 5. Click OK Task 3: .

Sketch a tangent circle in Sketcher.

Fo r

2. Select 3 Tangent from the Circle types drop-down menu in the Sketching group. 3. Select the upper circle. 4. Select the left arc. 5. Select the right circle. 6. Click OK .

This completes the procedure.

2012 PTC

PT

1. Edit the definition of 3-TANGENT_CIRCLE.

In

te rn

al
Module 6 | Page 29

U se

nl y

Sketching Arcs
You can create numerous types of arcs within Sketcher.
There are five types of Arcs: 3-Point Tangent End Concentric Center and Ends 3 Tangent Figure 1 3-Point Versus Tangent Arc Creation

te rn

3-Point Select 3-Point / Tangent End from the Arc types drop-down menu and select the locations for the two arc endpoints and the arc diameter. When you select an existing line endpoint, a green quadrant symbol appears around that endpoint. Move the cursor through the quadrants perpendicular to the line to create a 3-Point arc. You can also right-click in Sketcher and select 3-Point / Tangent End.

Fo r

from the Arc types Tangent End Select 3-Point / Tangent End drop-down menu, select an existing line endpoint, and move the cursor through the green quadrants parallel to the line to create a Tangent End arc. You can also right-click and select 3-Point / Tangent End. Concentric Select Concentric from the Arc types drop-down menu to create an arc that is concentric about an existing arc or circle. from the Arc types Center and Ends Select Center and Ends drop-down menu to create an arc with center and ends that you can select. from the Arc types drop-down menu and 3 Tangent Select 3 Tangent select three arcs, circles, or lines which must be tangent to the arc.
Module 6 | Page 30 2012 PTC

PT

There are five types of arcs available in Sketcher:

Sketching Arcs

In

Figure 2 Arc Tangent to 3 Entities

al
Figure 3 Center and Endpoints Arc

U se

nl y

PROCEDURE - Sketching Arcs

Close Window Sketcher\Arc Task 1: Erase Not Displayed SKETCHING_ARCS.PRT

Sketch 3-Point and Tangent End Arcs in Sketcher.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

3. Enable only the following Sketcher Display types: 4. Select 3-Point / Tangent End from the Arc types drop-down menu in the Sketching group. Select the upper line endpoint, move the cursor horizontal to the left, and select the vertical and horizontal reference intersection. Move the cursor above the horizontal reference and click to create the arc.

Fo r

6. In the graphics window, right-click and select 3-Point / Tangent End. Select the upper line endpoint, move the cursor up, and select the vertical and horizontal reference intersection to create the tangent arc. 7. Select the endpoint of the previous arc and create a new tangent arc of equal radius. 8. Click Sketch View In Graphics toolbar. from the

9. Select the endpoint of the previous arc and create a new tangent arc. 10. Click OK from the ribbon.

2012 PTC

PT

In

5. Click Undo

te rn

al
Module 6 | Page 31

U se

nl y
.

2. In the model tree, right-click 3-PNT_TANGENT-END_ARC and select Edit Definition.

Task 2:

Sketch Concentric Arcs in Sketcher.

1. Edit the definition of CONCENTRIC_ARC. 2. Select Concentric from the Arc types drop-down menu in the Sketching group. Select the upper arc and select the horizontal reference to the left of the center. Move the cursor clockwise and select the horizontal reference again to create the arc. Middle-click to stop concentric arc creation. 3. Select the lower arc and select the left arc endpoint. 4. Select the right arc endpoint to create the concentric arc. 5. Middle-click to stop concentric arc creation. 6. Click OK .

Task 3:

Sketch Center and Ends Arcs in Sketcher.

1. Edit the definition of CENTER-ENDS_ARC.

Fo r

PT

In

2. Disable Display Constraints 3. Select Center and Ends from the Arc types drop-down menu in the Sketching group. Select the vertical and horizontal reference intersection. Select the left and upper endpoints of the lines to create the arc.

Module 6 | Page 32

te rn
.

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

4. Select the vertical and horizontal reference intersection again. 5. Select the right and bottom endpoints of the lines to create the arc. 6. Middle-click to stop arc creation. 7. Click OK .

2. Enable Display Constraints 3. Select 3 Tangent from the Arc types drop-down menu.

4. Select the left circle, right circle, and line. 5. Click Undo .

6. Click 3 Tangent

7. Select the line, left circle, and right circle. 8. Click OK .

Fo r

This completes the procedure.

2012 PTC

PT

In

te rn
.

al
Module 6 | Page 33

U se

1. Edit the definition of 3-TANGENT_ARC.

Task 4:

Sketch 3-Tangent Arcs in Sketcher.

nl y

Sketching Circular Fillets

You can round sharp corners of a Sketch using Circular Fillets.
Circular Fillets: Can be applied to concave or convex corners. Construction lines are created back to the intersection. Corners do not have to be 90. Radius size is based on pick location.

Figure 1 - Convex Fillet

Figure 2 - Concave Fillet

Fo r

The Circular option creates a rounded intersection between any two non-parallel entities. When you create a Circular Fillet between two lines, the lines are automatically trimmed to the fillet. If you create a Circular Fillet between any other entities, you must delete the remaining segments manually. When you create a Circular Fillet, construction lines are created leading from the fillet endpoints to the intersection of the original entities. Circular Fillets can be applied to either concave or convex corners. The corners do not have to be at 90. The radius size is based on pick location, as shown in Figure 3. In addition to clicking the icon, you can right-click in Sketcher and select Fillet to create Circular Fillets.

Module 6 | Page 34

PT

Sketching Circular Fillets

In

te rn

al
Figure 3 - Radius Size Based on Pick Location
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

PROCEDURE - Sketching Circular Fillets

Close Window Erase Not Displayed SKETCH_FILLETS.PRT

Sketcher\Fillet_Circular Task 1:

Sketch Circular Fillets in Sketcher.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

3. Enable only the following Sketcher Display types: 4. Select Circular from the Fillet types drop-down menu in the Sketching group. 5. Select the two points to create the fillet. 6. The construction lines are automatically created.

7. Select two points to create the next fillet.

Fo r

8. Select two points to create the next fillet.

2012 PTC

PT

In

te rn

al
Module 6 | Page 35

U se

nl y
.

2. In the model tree, right-click CIRCULAR_FILLET and select Edit Definition.

9. Select two points to create the next fillet. 10. Select One-by-One from the Select types drop-down menu.

13. Right-click and select Equal. 14. Click OK .

This completes the procedure.

Fo r

Module 6 | Page 36

PT

In

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

12. Press CTRL and select the four fillets.

11. Enable Display Constraints from the In Graphics toolbar.

nl y

Sketching Chamfers
You can create chamfer geometry in a sketch.
Chamfers in Sketcher: Can be applied to concave or convex corners. Corners do not have to be 90. Entities do not have to intersect. Size and angle is based on pick locations. Default Chamfer creates construction lines. Chamfer Trim removes geometry.

PT

Figure 2 Chamfer Created Figure 3 Chamfer Trim Created

Fo r

Sketching Chamfers

The Chamfer option creates a straight line between selected locations on any two non-parallel entities. When you create a chamfer, construction lines are created leading from the chamfer endpoints to the intersection of the original entities. to create a Chamfer and automatically trim

You can click Chamfer Trim away the original geometry.

Remember the following points when sketching chamfers: Chamfers can be applied to either concave or convex corners. The corners do not have to be at 90. Entities do not have to intersect. The size and angle of the chamfer line is based on pick locations.

2012 PTC

In

te rn

al
Module 6 | Page 37

U se

Figure 1 Original Sketch

nl y

PROCEDURE - Sketching Chamfers

Close Window Sketcher\Chamfer Task 1: Sketch chamfers. Erase Not Displayed CHAMFERS.PRT

1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. In the model tree, right-click CHAMFERS and select Edit Definition. 3. Enable only the following Sketcher Display types: 4. Select Chamfer from the Chamfer types drop-down menu in the Sketching group. 5. Select two points to create the chamfer. The construction lines are automatically created.

6. Select two points to create the next chamfer.

Fo r

Task 2:

1. Select Chamfer Trim from the Chamfer types drop-down menu in the Sketching group. 2. Select two points to create the chamfer. The geometry is trimmed away.

Module 6 | Page 38

PT

Sketch chamfers using the Chamfer Trim option.

In

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y
.

3. Select two points to create the next chamfer. 4. Click OK .

This completes the procedure.

Fo r

2012 PTC

PT

In

te rn

al
Module 6 | Page 39

U se

nl y

Fo r

Module 6 | Page 40

PT

In

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

Module

7
U se O te rn al
Module 7 | Page 1

Using Sketcher Tools

Module Overview

Once you sketch geometry, it typically needs to be modified or further manipulated. In this module, you learn the tools available for modifying and manipulating your sketch, as well as how to handle any conflicts that may arise while sketching.

Objectives

Fo r

2012 PTC

PT

After completing this module, you will be able to: Understand construction geometry theory. Learn how to sketch points. Use geometry tools to edit geometry in a sketch. Create new sketch files, as well as place and manipulate sketches. Create and modify dimensions, as well as handle any sketcher conflicts that arise.

In

nl y

Understanding Construction Geometry Theory

You can use Construction Geometry to help control design intent, simplify dimension schemes, and simplify sketches.
Construction Geometry: Can be dimensioned and constrained. Solid geometry snaps to it. Does not add entities to the final sketch. Can make an otherwise difficult scheme easy. Can reduce the number of dimensions/constraints used.

Fo r

Understanding Construction Geometry Theory

Construction entities enable you to create references on-the-fly. Construction geometry is important because it enables you to easily constrain your sketch. It is signified by a dotted magenta entity within Sketcher. Construction geometry can be dimensioned and constrained in the same manner as regular, solid geometry. Solid sketched geometry snaps to construction geometry, which means that construction geometry can be used to control a sketch. In Figure 1, the arc centers are snapped to the construction line endpoints. Therefore, changing the construction geometry length or angle dimensions causes the arcs to move accordingly. Construction geometry does not display in the final Sketch feature. Therefore, it does not add entities to the final sketch. Construction geometry can make an otherwise difficult dimensioning scheme easy. In Figure 2, one dimension is used to control the entire sketch. All line endpoints are snapped to the construction circle. Without
Module 7 | Page 2 2012 PTC

PT

Figure 4 Center Rectangle uses Construction Geometry

In

te rn

Figure 2 Construction Geometry Simplifies Dimension Schemes

al
Figure 3 Construction Geometry Simplifies Sketches

U se

Figure 1 Construction Geometry Controls a Sketch

nl y

the construction circle, several more dimensions and constraints would be required to properly constrain the sketch. Construction geometry can simplify sketches. In Figure 3, the sketch has been simplified by constraining line vertices that must snap to an imaginary arc to a construction geometry arc. Construction geometry may be created automatically as part of the geometry created from a sketch tool. In Figure 4, a Center Rectangle uses construction geometry to automatically maintain symmetry. The two construction geometry lines are created as part of the rectangle. Sketched circular fillets and sketched chamfers also generate construction geometry.

Converting Solid Geometry to Construction Geometry

Fo r

2012 PTC

PT

In

te rn

Almost any solid sketched geometry entity can be converted into construction geometry. Simply select the geometry entity you wish to convert, right-click, and select Construction. To change construction geometry back to solid geometry, select it, right-click and select Geometry.

al

U se

To create new construction geometry in Sketcher, you can toggle Construction in the Sketching Geometry mode on by clicking Construction Mode group in the ribbon. When this mode is toggled on, you can use any sketch tool available to sketch new geometry, but the resulting geometry is created as construction geometry rather than solid geometry. You can then toggle off Construction Geometry mode and resume sketching solid geometry using the same sketch tools.

nl y

Creating Construction Geometry

Module 7 | Page 3

Sketching Points
Sketcher points are a type of construction geometry which do not contribute to the resulting sketch geometry.
Sketcher Point uses the following: Dimension to theoretical sharps. Dimension slanted on arcs. Provide an anchor or pivot point in a sketch.

Sketching Points

Fo r

Sketcher Points are created by using the Point icon from the Sketching group in the ribbon. Sketcher points do not contribute to the resulting sketch geometry in a feature. Sketcher points are actually a type of construction geometry. Sketcher points have the following uses: Dimension to theoretical sharps In Figure 1, a Sketcher Point has been placed at the theoretical corner sharp. As a result, this theoretical sharp can be used for controlling design intent through a dimension. Dimension slanted on arcs In Figure 2, a Sketcher Point has been placed on each arc. As such, a slanted dimension can be created to measure the distance between arc tangencies. Provide an anchor or pivot point In Figure 3, a Sketcher Point has been placed at the intersection of the arc and the vertical and horizontal references. As such, the angular dimension can be modified, and the entire sketch pivots about the Sketcher Point.
Module 7 | Page 4 2012 PTC

PT

Figure 2 Dimensioning Slanted on Arcs

In

te rn
Figure 3 Providing a Pivot Point

al

U se

Figure 1 Dimensioning to Theoretical Sharp

nl y

Using Geometry Tools within Sketcher

You can use Geometry Tools to modify existing sketched entities.

Figure 1 Using Delete Segment

Figure 2 Using Trim Corner

Figure 3 Using Divide

te rn

Using Geometry Tools within Sketcher

Using Delete Segment

Fo r

You can dynamically trim the parts of sketched entities you no longer need. When dynamically trimming, any entity that you touch while dragging is deleted. In Figure 1, the extra arcs are deleted.

Using Trim Corner

You can trim or extend sketched entities to other entities in Sketcher. To trim entities, select the entity side you want to keep. In Figure 2, the two entities are selected to be trimmed, and the gap between the entities is closed.

Using Divide
You can divide a sketched entity into two or more new entities. The system divides the entity at the point(s) you select. In Figure 3, the circle is divided to become two separate arcs. Some sketched features require portions of a sketch to maintain an equal number of entities.
2012 PTC Module 7 | Page 5

PT

You can use various Geometry Tools within Sketcher to modify existing geometry. You can dynamically trim entities, trim entities to other entities, divide entities, and mirror entities. You can undo any operation you have performed using Geometry Tools.

In

al
Figure 4 Using Mirror

U se

nl y

Using Mirror
You can mirror selected sketched entities about a centerline. Mirrored entity geometry combines with the original entity to become one entity, given the following two criteria: The entity is normal to the centerline from which it is being mirrored. One endpoint lies on the centerline. In Figure 4, the top horizontal line and bottom are both perpendicular to the mirroring centerline and have an endpoint that lies on the centerline. When the geometry is mirrored, the result is one horizontal entity on the top and one arc on the bottom. You cannot mirror dimensions, text entities, or centerlines.

Fo r

Module 7 | Page 6

PT

In

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

PROCEDURE - Using Geometry Tools within Sketcher

Close Window Erase Not Displayed GEOM_TOOLS.PRT Sketcher\Geometry_Tools Task 1:

Dynamically trim sketched entities.

1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. In the model tree, right-click DYNAMIC_TRIM and select Edit Definition. 3. Enable only the following Sketcher Display types: .

6. Dynamically trim the three extra arcs. 7. Perform the same trims to the lower sketch portion. 8. Click OK Task 2:

Trim sketched entities to other sketched entities.

1. Edit the definition of TRIM_ENTITIES.

Fo r

2. Enable Display Constraints .

3. Click Corner from the Editing group in the ribbon, and select the two entities to trim. 4. Click Undo .

and select the 5. Click Corner two entities to trim.

2012 PTC

PT

In

from the ribbon.

te rn

al
Module 7 | Page 7

5. Zoom in on the upper-right part of the sketch.

U se

4. Click Delete Segment from the Editing group in the ribbon, and click and drag to dynamically trim the entities.

nl y

6. Select the two entities to trim.

7. Select the two entities to trim.

8. Select the two entities to trim. 9. Click OK .

Task 3:

Divide sketched entities.

Fo r

from the Editing 2. Click Divide group in the ribbon, and select the two circle locations to divide.

3. Middle-click to stop dividing entities. 4. Select the left half of the divided circle.

Module 7 | Page 8

PT

1. Edit the definition of DIVIDE.

In

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

5. Click Divide and divide the arcs four more times. 6. Click OK .

1. Edit the definition of MIRROR. 2. Enable Display Dimensions . Notice the top 7.25 dimension.

3. Click and drag a window around all sketched entities.

6. Notice the top 14.50 dimension.

Fo r

7. Select the upper horizontal line and lower arc. 8. Notice that both are single entities. 9. Click OK .

This completes the procedure.

2012 PTC

PT

5. Select the vertical centerline.

In

4. Click Mirror group.

from the Editing

te rn

al
Module 7 | Page 9

U se

nl y

Task 4:

Mirror sketched entities.

Manipulating Sketches within Sketcher

Manipulate Sketches using: Cut/Copy/Paste Scale and Rotate Translate

Manipulating Sketches within Sketcher

Scaling and Rotating Sketches

Fo r

You can also scale and rotate selected sketch entities. The first available operations when you paste sketched entities into a sketch are scaling and rotating the pasted entities. You can scale and rotate existing sketch entities by selecting them and clicking Rotate Resize from the Editing group in the ribbon, or by right-clicking and selecting Rotate Resize. You can scale and rotate entities either by editing the fields in the dashboard or using the drag handles that appear on the entities. Click and drag the Location handle to move the entities about Sketcher. To help properly place the entities, you can right-click and drag to relocate the Location handle. Click and drag the Scaling handle to dynamically scale the entities or type a value in the Scaling factor field in the dashboard. to dynamically rotate the entities Click and drag the Rotate handle about the Location handle, or type a value in the Rotating angle field in the dashboard.
Module 7 | Page 10 2012 PTC

PT

You can cut, copy, and paste sketched entities. To do this, you can use either the context-sensitive right-mouse pop-up menu or icons in the ribbon. You can perform cut, copy, and paste operations from within a sketch or from one sketch to another.

In

te rn

Figure 1 Scaled and Rotated Sketch

al
Figure 2 Rotating a Sketch

U se

nl y

You can also move the Location handle to a specified location in the sketch by activating the Reference collector in the dashboard. When you select a reference, the Location handle snaps onto the reference.

Translating Sketches
Another available operation you can perform on pasted sketches is translating entities. To translate a sketch, you can either click and drag the Location handle or type a distance value into the fields in the dashboard. The Translate Reference is the location by which the translation distances are measured. The sketch can be translated parallel (horizontal) and perpendicular (vertical) to the Translate Reference. You can retain the default translate reference or you can specify a different one.

Fo r

2012 PTC

PT

In

te rn

al
Module 7 | Page 11

U se

nl y

PROCEDURE - Manipulating Sketches within Sketcher

Close Window Erase Not Displayed MANIP_SKETCHES.PRT

Sketcher\Manipulating Task 1:

Copy, scale, and rotate a sketch.

1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. In the model tree, right-click Sketch 1 and select Edit Definition. 3. Enable only the following Sketcher Display types: 4. Drag a window around all sketched entities. 5. Right-click and select Cut. 6. Right-click and select Paste. 7. Click in the upper-right quadrant to place the sketch. 8. Right-click the X Location handle and drag it to the upper arc endpoint.

10. Click the X Location handle and drag it to reposition the sketch.

Fo r

11. In the dashboard, edit the Scaling factor to 1 and the Rotating angle to 90, if necessary. Click Accept Changes .

12. Click Paste from the Operations group in the ribbon. 13. Click in the lower left Sketcher quadrant. 14. Right-click the X Location handle and drag it to the lower arc endpoint.

Module 7 | Page 12

PT

9. Click the Rotation handle and drag it to rotate the sketch 90 counterclockwise.

In

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y
.

15. Click the Rotation handle and drag it to rotate the sketch 90 clockwise. 16. Click the X Location handle and drag it to reposition the sketch. 17. In the dashboard, edit the Scaling factor to 0.5 and press ENTER. . Click Accept Changes 18. Select Line Tangent from the Line types drop-down menu and sketch the tangent line.

19. Click Delete Segment trim the hanging arcs. 20. Click OK .

Fo r

This completes the procedure.

2012 PTC

PT

In

te rn
and

al
Module 7 | Page 13

U se

nl y

Dimensioning Entities within Sketcher

The manner by which you dimension your sketch reflects your design intent.
Dimension types include: Line length Angle Distance Radius Diameter/Revolved Diameter Arc length Total included angle Middle-click to place dimensions. Location can determine type. Convert weak dimensions to strong.

In

Fo r

Dimensioning Entities within Sketcher

When dimensioning a sketch, it is important to create dimensions that capture your design intent because these dimensions are displayed when you edit the model and when you create drawings of the model. icon. You can also Dimensions are all created by clicking the Normal right-click and select Dimension. Select entities to be dimensioned and middle-click to place the dimension. At this point, you can either press ENTER to accept the current dimension value, or type a different one and press ENTER. The type of dimension created depends upon what is selected and where the dimension is placed. The following dimension types can be created: Line length Select a line and place the dimension. The line length is dimensioned. Angle You can create an angle measurement by selecting two linear references. Where you place the dimension determines how the angle is
Module 7 | Page 14 2012 PTC

PT

Figure 2 Revolved Diameter Dimension

te rn
Figure 3 Distance, Radius, and Diameter Dimensions

al

U se

Figure 1 Length and Angle Dimensions

nl y

Fo r

Because Sketcher must maintain a fully defined sketch at all times, a sketch initially is dimensioned using weak dimensions. As you dimension your sketch (these are strong dimensions) using your desired design intent, the weak dimensions automatically disappear. You can convert weak dimensions to strong dimensions by selecting the weak dimension, right-clicking, and selecting Strong. Similar to creating a new dimension, you can either accept the current dimension values conversion to strong, or type a new one. When you edit a weak dimension, it is automatically converted to strong.

2012 PTC

PT

Weak Dimensions

measured (acute versus obtuse). You can also create an arc angle by selecting an arc endpoint, the arc center, and the other endpoint, and then placing the dimension. Distance Select two entities to measure the distance between them and place the dimension. Again, where you place the dimension determines whether it is vertical, horizontal, or slanted. Radius Select an arc or circle once, then place the dimension. You can toggle a radius dimension to a diameter or linear dimension by right-clicking and selecting Convert to Diameter and Convert to Linear, respectively. Diameter Double-click an arc or circle, then place the dimension. You can toggle a diameter dimension to a radius or linear dimension by right-clicking and selecting Convert to Radius and Convert to Linear, respectively. Revolved Diameter Select the entity, a centerline, and the entity again and place the dimension. Alternatively, you can select the centerline, the entity, and the centerline again. You can toggle a revolved diameter dimension to a revolved radius dimension and vice-versa by right-clicking and selecting Convert to Radial and Convert to Diameter, respectively. Arc length You can create an arc length dimension by selecting the arc segment, its two endpoints, and placing the dimension. The arc length dimension displays an arch symbol over the dimension value. You can toggle the arc length measurement to an arc angle dimension and vice-versa by right-clicking and selecting Convert to Angle and Convert to Length, respectively. Total included angle Similar to a revolved diameter dimension, you can create a total included angle dimension by selecting an angled line, a centerline, and the angled line again before placing the dimension. You can toggle the total included angle to an angle dimension and vice-versa by right-clicking and selecting Convert to Angle and Convert to Total included angle, respectively.

In

te rn

al

U se

nl y

Module 7 | Page 15

PROCEDURE - Dimensioning Entities within Sketcher

Close Window Erase Not Displayed DIMENSIONS.PRT

Sketcher\Dimensions Task 1:

Create line length dimensions in Sketcher.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

. 4. Click Normal from the Dimension group in the ribbon. 5. Select the top horizontal line and middle-click above it to place the dimension. 6. Type 190 and press ENTER. 7. Select the angled line and middle-click to place the dimension.

Fo r

10. Select the weak 247.12 dimension, right-click, and select Strong. 11. Type 250 and press ENTER. . 12. Click OK

Module 7 | Page 16

PT

9. Middle-click to stop dimension creation.

8. Type 340 as the value and press ENTER. Notice the weak dimensions are disappearing.

In

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

3. Enable only the following Sketcher Display types:

nl y

2. In the model tree, right-click LENGTH and select Edit Definition.

Task 2:

Create angle dimensions in Sketcher.

1. Edit the definition of ANGLE. 2. Click Normal . 3. Select the angled line and the horizontal reference, and then middle-click to place the angle dimension. 4. Type 35 and press ENTER. 5. Select the top arc endpoint, the arc center, and the bottom arc endpoint, and then middle-click to place the dimension, as shown. 6. Type 120 and press ENTER. 7. Click OK Task 3: .

Create distance dimensions in Sketcher.

2. Click Normal

3. Select the arc centers, middle-click to the left of the vertical reference, and press ENTER. 4. Click Undo

5. Click Normal

PT

Fo r

6. Select the arc centers, middle-click below the horizontal reference, and press ENTER. 7. Click Undo .

8. Click Normal

9. Select the arcs, middle-click to place the dimension, and press ENTER. 10. Click Undo .

2012 PTC

In

te rn
. . .

1. Edit the definition of DISTANCE.

al
Module 7 | Page 17

U se

nl y

11. Click Normal

12. Select the arcs, middle-click to place the dimension, and press ENTER. 13. Click Undo .

14. Click Normal

15. Select the arc centers, middle-click to place the dimension, and press ENTER. 16. Click OK .

Task 4:

Create radius dimensions in Sketcher.

1. Edit the definition of RADIUS. 2. Click Normal .

3. Select the left circle, middle-click to place the dimension, and press ENTER.

5. Click OK

Fo r

Task 5:

1. Edit the definition of ARC_CIRCLE_DIA. 2. Click Normal . 3. Double-click the arc, middle-click to place the dimension, and press ENTER.

Module 7 | Page 18

PT

4. Select the arc, middle-click to place the dimension, and press ENTER. .

Create arc and circle diameter dimensions in Sketcher.

In

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

4. Double-click the circle, middle-click to place the dimension, and press ENTER. 5. Middle-click to stop dimension creation.

7. Click OK

Task 6:

Create revolved diameter dimensions in Sketcher.

1. Edit the definition of REV_DIA. 2. Click Normal . 3. Click the long vertical line, centerline, and long vertical line again.

5. Type 145 and press ENTER.

7. Click Normal

PT

6. Click One-by-One the dimension. .

Fo r

8. Click the short vertical line, centerline, and short vertical line again. 9. Middle-click to place the dimension.

10. Type 375 and press ENTER. 11. Click OK .

2012 PTC

In

4. Middle-click to place the dimension.

te rn
and drag

al
Module 7 | Page 19

U se

nl y

6. Select the 250 dimension, right-click, and select Convert to Radius.

Task 7:

Create an arc length dimension in Sketcher.

1. Edit the definition of ARC_LENGTH. 2. Click Normal . 3. Select the arc, select each endpoint, and middle-click to place the dimension, as shown. 4. Type 380 and press ENTER.

7. Right-click and select Convert to Length. 8. Click OK .

Task 8:

Create a total included angle dimension in Sketcher.

Fo r

4. Middle-click to place the dimension, as shown. 5. Type 115 and press ENTER. 6. Click OK .

This completes the procedure.

Module 7 | Page 20

PT

3. Select the angled line, the horizontal centerline, and angled line again.

2. Click Normal

In

1. Edit the definition of INCLUDED_ANGLE. .

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

6. Right-click and select Convert to Angle.

5. Click One-by-One the dimension.

and select

nl y

Modifying Dimensions within Sketcher

You can modify dimensions individually or modify multiple dimensions at once.
Modify dimensions by: Editing the value. Dragging the entity to which the dimension is attached. Dragging the dimension dragger. Using the Modify Dimensions dialog box.

Figure 1 Editing the Value

Modifying Dimensions within Sketcher

You can modify dimensions in Sketcher by using any of the following methods:

Fo r

Edit the dimension manually by double-clicking it. The geometry placement updates to the new dimension. You can also edit the dimension value when you create it without having to double-click it. Click the entity that the dimension is attached to and drag it. The dimension value updates automatically. Click the dimension dragger and drag it. The dimension value and geometry value update automatically. Use the Modify Dimensions dialog box. When you select the dimension, it highlights in the graphics window. You can edit values or scroll the wheel next to the dimension you wish to modify. The dimension value increases or decreases depending on the direction of scrolling. You can modify the sensitivity to adjust how finely or coarsely dimension wheels scroll. If Regenerate is selected, the sketch geometry updates immediately after a dimension is edited. If the check box is cleared, you can adjust
2012 PTC Module 7 | Page 21

PT

Figure 3 Dragging the Dimension Dragger

In

te rn
Figure 4 Modify Dimensions Dialog Box

al

U se

Figure 2 Dragging an Entity

nl y

any or all dimensions within the Modify Dimensions dialog box, and the geometry does not update until you click Regenerate Section . If Lock Scale is selected, you can modify one dimension and all other dimension values update automatically to new values at the same ratio. Locking the scale to edit dimensions is common when creating the first feature of a model.

Fo r

Module 7 | Page 22

PT

In

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

PROCEDURE - Modifying Dimensions within Sketcher

Close Window Erase Not Displayed MODIFY_DIMENSIONS.PRT

Sketcher\Dimensions_Modifying Task 1: Modify dimensions in Sketch 1.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

. 4. Click the vertical line and drag it until the diameter is approximately 204. 5. Drag the 204 dimension dragger to approximately 90.

Fo r

7. Edit the 180 dimension to 8. The sketch is distorted due to the relative dimension differences. 8. Click Undo .

2012 PTC

PT

6. Double-click the 90 dimension, edit it to 180, and press ENTER.

In

te rn

al
Module 7 | Page 23

U se

3. Enable only the following Sketcher Display types:

nl y

2. In the model tree, right-click Sketch 1 and select Edit Definition.

9. Drag a window around all dimensions. from the Editing 10. Click Modify group in the ribbon.

12. Edit the remaining dimension values. 13. Click OK .

Fo r

Task 2:

1. Edit the definition of Sketch 2. 2. Click Refit from the In Graphics toolbar. 3. Click Modify .

4. Select each dimension to add it to the dialog box.

Module 7 | Page 24

PT

Modify dimensions in Sketch 2.

In

te rn

al
2012 PTC

11. In the Modify Dimensions dialog box, click in the 292 dimension field. Scroll the wheel to approximately 400. Select Lock Scale. Edit the 400 dimension to 16 and press ENTER. Click Regenerate Section .

U se

nl y

5. Scroll the 108 dimension wheel back and forth. 6. Drag the Sensitivity slider to the left. 7. Again, scroll the 108 dimension wheel back and forth. 8. Edit the 96 dimension to 100 and press ENTER. 9. Clear the Regenerate check box. 10. Edit the dimensions, as shown. 11. Click Regenerate Section .

12. Click Refit from the In Graphics toolbar and zoom in. 13. Click OK .

This completes the procedure.

Fo r

2012 PTC

PT

In

te rn

al
Module 7 | Page 25

U se

nl y

Sketcher Conflicts
Sketcher conflicts occur from manually adding too many constraints or dimensions.
Conflicts caused by: Adding too many dimensions. Adding too many constraints. Conflicts handled by: Deleting unwanted constraints or dimensions. Converting dimensions to Reference dimensions.

In

Sketcher Conflict Causes

Fo r

Sketcher strives to maintain a fully constrained sketch automatically. Sketcher Conflicts are caused by an over-constrained sketch condition that arises from manually adding too many constraints or too many dimensions.

Resolving Sketcher Conflicts

When a Sketcher Conflict occurs, the Resolve Sketch dialog box appears, as shown in Figure 1. The Resolve Sketch dialog box displays the conflicting constraints and/or dimensions. The graphics window also highlights the conflicting items in green. When a Sketcher Conflict arises, you can resolve it by using either of the following techniques: Delete the conflicting constraints or dimensions to revert the sketch back to fully constrained. Convert dimensions to Reference dimensions. A Reference dimension is not a driving dimension that constrains a sketch. You cannot modify a Reference dimension, but it does update with geometry changes.
Module 7 | Page 26 2012 PTC

PT

Figure 2 Sketcher Conflict

te rn
Figure 3 Conflicting Dimension Converted to Reference Dimension

al

U se

Figure 1 Resolve Sketch Dialog Box

nl y

PROCEDURE - Sketcher Conflicts

Close Window Sketcher\Conflicts Task 1: Erase Not Displayed SKETCHER_CONFLICTS.PRT

Resolve conflicts due to added constraints.

1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. In the model tree, right-click Sketch 1 and select Edit Definition. 3. Enable only the following Sketcher Display types: 4. Constrain the arc perpendicular to the vertical reference. 5. Select the 6.5 dimension in the Resolve Sketch dialog box. Click Delete.

Fo r

7. Select the 7.3 dimension from the graphics window. 8. In the Resolve Sketch dialog box, click Dim > Ref. .

9. Click OK

2012 PTC

PT

In

6. Add the necessary constraint to make the two highlighted lines equal.

te rn

al
Module 7 | Page 27

U se

nl y
.

Task 2:

Resolve conflicts due to added dimensions.

1. Edit the definition of Sketch 2. 2. Dimension from the vertical reference to the upper-right arc center and place the dimension under the sketch geometry. 3. Select the 16 dimension in the Resolve Sketch dialog box. Click Delete and press ENTER.

6. Click One-by-One Operations group.

8. Click OK

Fo r

This completes the procedure.

Module 7 | Page 28

PT

In

7. Modify the dimensions, as shown.

te rn
from the

al
2012 PTC

5. Select the Parallel constraint in the Resolve Sketch dialog box. Click Delete and press ENTER.

U se

4. Double-click the lower-left arc and place the diameter dimension.

nl y

Creating New Sketch Files

You can import Sketch files into other files at a later time.
Click File > New to create a new Sketch. You can save a sketch out of an existing model. The Sketch file extension is *.sec.

Figure 1 Viewing a Sketch File

te rn

Fo r

2012 PTC

PT

A sketch can either be created within a model or it can be saved as its own file. If created within a model, it can be saved as a sketch file, which has a file extension of *.sec. You can also create a new sketch file by selecting Sketch in the New dialog box. Any sketch file can be imported into a model and placed in a Sketch feature.

In

Creating New Sketch Files

al
Figure 2 Creating a New Sketch File
Module 7 | Page 29

U se

nl y

PROCEDURE - Creating New Sketch Files

Close Window Sketcher\New Task 1: Erase Not Displayed SAVE_SKETCH.PRT

Save a sketch from an existing part.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

3. In the dashboard, select the Placement tab. Click Edit. 4. Enable only the following Sketcher Display types: . 5. Click File > Save As > Save a Copy.

7. Click OK

8. Click Complete Feature

1. Click File > New.

Fo r

2. In the New dialog box, select Sketch. Edit the Name to D_shape. Click OK. 3. Select Center and Point from the Circle types drop-down menu and sketch the circle.

Module 7 | Page 30

PT

Task 2:

Create a new 2-D sketch file.

9. Click Close

from the Quick Access toolbar.

In

te rn

6. In the Save a Copy dialog box, type CRANK_LOBE.SEC as the New Name. Click OK. from the dashboard.

al

U se
2012 PTC

nl y

2. In the model tree, right-click EXTRUDE_1 and select Edit Definition.

4. Select Line Chain from the Line types drop-down menu and sketch a vertical line whose endpoints are on the circle.

7. Select the vertical line and the arc, and then middle-click to place the dimension.

9. Double-click the arc and place the diameter dimension. 10. Type 4 and press ENTER.

Fo r

11. Click Save Click OK.

PT

This completes the procedure.

2012 PTC

In

8. Type 3 and press ENTER.

from the Quick Access toolbar.

te rn

al
Module 7 | Page 31

6. Click Normal from the Dimension group.

U se

nl y

5. Click Delete Segment from the Editing group and trim the right arc.

Placing Sections into Sketcher

Placing sections in your model saves time and encourages reuse of common shapes.
Place sections: From the File System. Using the Sketcher Palette. Modify the dimension scheme or value.

Figure 1 Placing a Section

Place a section from file This can be a *.sec file that you have created by clicking File > New and selecting Sketch, or it can be a sketch that you have saved from a different model. Either way, you can browse to the location of the existing sketch section file and place it. Use the Sketcher Palette The Sketcher palette enables you to quickly place commonly used basic shapes, such as I-beams and hexagons, into your sketch. The Sketcher Palette contains a tab for the current working directory as well as default tabs for polygons, profiles, shapes, and stars. You can create additional custom tabs simply by creating folders in the Sketcher Palette library location. When you add sketch *.sec files to the folder, they are listed in a tab with the same name in the Sketcher Palette. When you place a sketch, you can translate, rotate, and scale it. You can also modify the dimension scheme or value.

Fo r

Module 7 | Page 32

PT

You can insert preexisting sketches into your sketch. This helps to save time rather than recreating an existing sketch. It also promotes data reuse. There are two different methods that you can use to place sections:

In

Placing Sections into Sketcher

te rn

al
Figure 2 The Sketcher Palette
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

PROCEDURE - Placing Sections into Sketcher

Close Window Sketcher\Sections Task 1: Erase Not Displayed PLACE_SECTION.PRT

Place a section from a file.

1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. In the model tree, right-click Sketch 1 and select Edit Definition. 3. Enable only the following Sketcher Display types: 4. Click File System from the Get Data group.

6. Click in the graphics window to place the section. 7. Relocate the X Location handle to the arc center, if necessary.

Click Accept Changes 10. Click OK Task 2:

In

9. In the dashboard, edit the Scaling factor to 1.5.

Fo r

1. Edit the definition of Sketch 2. 2. Click Palette from the Sketching group in the ribbon. Notice the .sec file in the tab for the working directory. 3. In the Sketcher Palette dialog box, select each of the different tabs and review their contents. Select the Polygons tab. Select the 8-Sided Octagon section to preview it. Double-click the 8-Sided Octagon section.

2012 PTC

PT

Place a section from the Sketcher Palette.

te rn

8. Relocate the section to the vertical and horizontal reference intersection.

al
.
Module 7 | Page 33

U se

5. Select d_shape.sec in the Open dialog box. Click Open.

nl y
.

4. Click in the graphics window to place the section. 5. Relocate the section to the vertical and horizontal reference intersection. 6. In the dashboard, edit the Scaling factor to 1. Click Accept Changes 7. Click Close in the Sketcher Palette. 8. Edit the 1 length dimension to 1.5 9. Click OK . .

Fo r

Module 7 | Page 34

PT

In

te rn

This completes the procedure.

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

Module

8
U se O te rn al
Module 8 | Page 1

Creating Sketches for Features

Module Overview

Up to this point, you have learned how to sketch geometry within the Sketcher environment. In this module, you apply that knowledge to the creation of sketch features. Sketch features typically serve as references to other features and can exist separately as their own feature or as the starting point when you create sketch-based features. You learn how to specify the sketch setup for a sketch feature, utilize sketch references, use entity from edge, and thicken edges.

Objectives

Fo r

2012 PTC

PT

After completing this module, you will be able to: Learn how to create sketch features. Specify the sketch setup. Utilize sketch references. Use entity from edge within Sketcher. Thicken edges within Sketcher.

In

nl y

Creating Sketches ('Sketch' Feature)

To create a Sketch Feature, specify the Sketch Setup, select additional sketch references, and sketch the geometry.
You can modify the Sketch Setup. You can use references to snap geometry or dimensions. You can create 3-D geometry by using the Sketch feature. Sketched features have various requirements.

In

Creating Sketches ('Sketch' Feature)

Fo r

You can create a sketch feature by clicking Sketch from the Datum group in the Model ribbon tab. Creating a sketch feature involves the following three steps: Specify the sketch setup. Once the sketch setup has been defined, you can always change it to another plane. Select additional sketch references that you intend to dimension from or snap to with sketch geometry. For example, in Figure 3, some of the existing geometry was specified as sketch references for a new Sketch feature. Sketch the geometry.

Sketch Feature Requirements

The following rules apply to sketched sections when creating sketch features: A sketched section should not contain any gaps, or open ends. A sketch cannot contain any overlapping entities.
Module 8 | Page 2 2012 PTC

PT

Figure 2 Modifying Sketch Setup

te rn
Figure 3 Sketch Geometry Snapped to Added References

al

U se

Figure 1 Specifying Sketch Setup

nl y

 An open section sketch is required for creating a rib feature. All loops of a multiple loop section must be closed. When creating a revolve feature, you must only sketch geometry on one side of the centerline.

Fo r

2012 PTC

PT

In

te rn

al
Module 8 | Page 3

U se

nl y

Specifying and Manipulating the Sketch Setup

The Sketch Setup determines the sketching plane and the model's orientation in the graphics window.
Sketch Setup consists of: Sketch Plane Sketch Orientation Current model orientation becomes the default sketch orientation. to orient the Use Sketch View sketch plane parallel to the screen in 2-D. Select right-click options to temporarily manipulate the sketch orientation.

Figure 2 Viewing 2-D Sketch Orientation

PT

In

Fo r

Specifying the Sketch Setup

When you create a sketch feature, the Sketch Setup identifies the plane where the sketch should be created and specifies the orientation of the sketch: Sketch Plane The 2-D sketch is created on, and exists in, this planar reference. The sketching plane can be either a datum plane or a planar surface of an existing solid or surface feature. If you create consecutive sketches on the same sketch plane, you can click Use Previous in the Sketch dialog box to use the previous sketch feature's sketch setup. Sketch Orientation Determines how the sketch is oriented in the graphics window and model when viewed in the 2-D sketch orientation. Sketch orientation consists of two items: Orientation Reference The orientation reference determines the 2-D orientation of the sketch. This reference is also either a datum plane or a planar surface and must be normal to the sketch plane.
Module 8 | Page 4 2012 PTC

te rn
Figure 3 Sketch Plane Modified from FRONT to RIGHT

al

U se

Figure 1 Current Model Orientation Becoming Default Sketch Orientation

nl y

 Orientation Direction Determines the direction that the orientation reference faces when viewing the sketch in the 2-D sketch orientation. The orientation reference can be assigned to face top, bottom, right, or left. These directions are named to reflect how the reference orients with regard to the Creo Parametric graphics window. Note that datum planes have two sides, brown and gray, and that the brown, or positive side, orients to the selected direction. If you use an object-action workflow and select the sketch plane reference before starting the Sketch tool, Sketcher immediately opens with the Sketch Orientation reference and direction automatically selected. These automatic selections are based on the models orientation in the graphics window when you started the sketch tool. Working in this manner enables you to entirely bypass the Sketch dialog box.

You can edit the sketcher startup to set the sketching plane parallel to the screen in the Creo Parametric Options dialog box. At this point, you have three options available with respect to the sketch setup and orientation: 1. Retain the current default sketch orientation and begin sketching entities. 2. Revert to the default 2-D sketch orientation The system creates this default 2-D sketch orientation based on the specified Orientation to Direction and Orientation Reference. You can click Sketch View reorient the sketch into this 2-D sketch orientation. When this occurs, the sketch plane is oriented parallel to the screen, and the Orientation Reference points in the Orientation Direction. Edit the sketch setup While sketching, you can always reenter sketch from the Setup group. You can setup by clicking Sketch Setup switch the sketch plane or update the sketch orientation, keeping in mind that the sketch orientation references are only used in the 2-D sketch orientation. Different combinations of selected orientation reference and orientation direction yield the same 2-D sketch orientation in the graphics window. You can also reverse the sketch orientation by clicking Flip in the Sketch dialog box. Within the Properties tab of the Sketch dialog box, you can modify the name of the sketch feature as it appears in the model tree.

3.

Fo r

Temporarily Manipulating Section Orientation

While in Sketcher, you may wish to temporarily manipulate the section orientation without losing the previous orientation or modifying the sketch setup. To do this, you can right-click in the graphics window and select Section Orientation > Set horizontal reference or Section Orientation > Set
2012 PTC Module 8 | Page 5

PT

In

te rn

al

U se

When you enter Sketcher, you still remain in the current 3-D orientation by default.

Manipulating the Sketch Setup

nl y

vertical reference. When you specify an entity for the desired reference direction, the sketch dynamically reorients so that the selected reference is in the specified orientation. To return to the original sketch orientation, you can right-click and select Section Orientation > Restore section orientation. You can also flip either the section orientation or the sketching plane.

Fo r

Module 8 | Page 6

PT

In

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

PROCEDURE - Specifying and Manipulating the Sketch Setup

Close Window Sketcher\Setup Task 1: Erase Not Displayed SKETCH_SETUP.PRT

Specify the Sketch Setup on datum plane FRONT.

Display types:

2. Highlight datum plane FRONT and then select it. 3. Click Sketch from the Datum group. Notice that the current model orientation is now the default sketch orientation. Notice that now you could sketch geometry on datum plane FRONT. 4. Click Cancel dashboard. Click Yes.

5. Click in the background to de-select all geometry.

Fo r

Task 2:

1. Click Sketch . Highlight datum plane FRONT and then select it. Click Sketch. Again, notice that you could now sketch geometry on datum plane FRONT.

2012 PTC

PT

Specify the Sketch Setup and modify the sketch plane.

In

from the Sketch

te rn

al
Module 8 | Page 7

U se

1. Enable only the following Datum

nl y

The T, R, and F features have been added for training purposes to help visualize and distinguish datum planes.

2. Click Sketch Setup Setup group.

from the

3. Right-click in the graphics window and select Placement. 4. Highlight datum plane RIGHT and select it. 5. Click Sketch. 6. Notice that you could now sketch geometry on datum plane RIGHT. 7. Click Sketch View In Graphics toolbar. from the

8. Notice that the sketch plane is now parallel to the screen.

Fo r

9. Click Sketch Setup . Notice that datum plane TOP is oriented to the top of the screen, per the Sketch dialog box. In the Sketch dialog box, select Left as the new Orientation. Click Sketch.

10. Click Cancel dashboard. Click Yes.

Module 8 | Page 8

PT

In

from the Sketch

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

Task 3:

Temporarily manipulate the sketch orientation.

1. Orient the model to the 3D view orientation. 2. Above the model tree, click Settings Filters. and select Tree

4. Resume the three suppressed features in the model tree. 5. Click Sketch . Select the front, flat surface as the Sketch Plane. Click Sketch.

6. Right-click in the graphics window and select Section Orientation > Set vertical reference. 7. Select the chamfer surface.

8. Notice that the chamfer surface is now vertical.

Fo r

9. Right-click and select Section Orientation > Flip section orientation.

10. Right-click and select Section Orientation > Restore section orientation. 11. Click Cancel Click Yes. .

This completes the procedure.

2012 PTC

PT

In

te rn

al
Module 8 | Page 9

U se

nl y

3. In the Model Tree Items dialog box, select the Suppressed Objects check box and click OK.

Utilizing Sketch References

Sketch references are used to capture design intent by snapping geometry or dimensioning to them.
You can select the following types of entities: Existing geometry Sketches Datum features Press ALT to select entities and add them dynamically. Unused references automatically removed.

Figure 1 Geometry Snapped to References

Fo r

Figure 2 Additional Sketching References Added

PT

In

Utilizing Sketch References

You use sketch references to snap sketch geometry to them, which can cut down the number of dimensions required. Sketch references are also used by the system for creating the initial weak dimensions and constraints. If further dimensions are required, you can dimension to or from sketch references. Sketch references appear as dashed entities in the Sketcher. When selecting entities from existing features, you create a parent/child relationship between the sketch and the entity you added as a reference. However, if you add a sketch reference and it goes unused, the system automatically removes it as a sketch reference. Conversely, if you dimension to or from an entity the system automatically adds it as a sketch reference. You can add sketch references in three different ways:
Module 8 | Page 10 2012 PTC

te rn
Figure 3 The References Dialog Box

al

U se

nl y

1.

You can click References from the Setup group. This opens the References dialog box. 2. Right-click in the graphics window and select References. Again, this opens the References dialog box. 3. While sketching, you can add references on-the-fly by pressing ALT, highlighting the desired entity to add as a reference, and selecting it. Pressing CTRL+ALT enables you to select multiple edges for multiple dynamically added references.

The References dialog box consists of the following items: Select References Select entities in the graphics window. The following types of entities can be selected as sketch references: Existing geometry Select the edges or surfaces of features that have already been created. You can also select silhouette edges when the sketch is in the correct orientation. Silhouette edges are rounded surfaces that display as edges when the model is in the correct orientation. Sketches Select geometry from existing sketches. Datum Features Select datum planes, datum axes, points, and coordinate systems. Select Xsec References Select a surface or datum plane to intersect with the sketching plane. Selection Filters Used for selecting items within the Reference list. Choices from the drop-down list include Use Edge/Offset, All Non-Dim. Refs, Chain Refs, and All References. Replace Select a reference from the list, click Replace, and select a new reference. Delete Delete the selected reference from the list. Reference Status Displays the status of the sketch with respect to references. Status options include Unsolved Sketch, Partially Placed, and Fully Placed. Solve You can solve an unsolved or partially placed sketch after changing references.

Fo r

2012 PTC

PT

In

te rn

al

U se

nl y

Module 8 | Page 11

PROCEDURE - Utilizing Sketch References

Close Window Erase Not Displayed REFERENCES.PRT

Sketcher\References Task 1:

Select and use references in Sketcher.

1. Enable only the following Datum Display types: 2. Click Sketch from the Datum group. Select the surface. Edit the Orientation direction to Right. Click Sketch. 3. Enable only the following Sketcher Display types: .

Fo r

6. Select the additional top silhouette edge reference shown. You can only select this silhouette edge in the 2-D sketch orientation.

7. In the References dialog box, select the Edge:F8(EXTRUDE_1) reference and click Delete.

Module 8 | Page 12

PT

5. Click Sketch View In Graphics toolbar.

In

te rn
from the

from the 4. Click References Setup group. Query select the vertical edge.

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

8. Select the far left vertical edge in the graphics window to add it as a reference. 9. Click Close in the References dialog box.

12. Still holding CTRL+ALT, select the angled edge. 13. Notice that you have added two new references dynamically. 14. Using these new references, sketch the remaining four lines.

Fo r

16. Orient to the Standard Orientation. 17. Edit the definition of Sketch 3. 18. Click References . Notice that the unused reference was removed from the left side of the sketch.

PT

19. Click Cancel Click Yes. 20. Hide Sketch 3.

This completes the procedure.

2012 PTC

In

15. Click OK

te rn

al
Module 8 | Page 13

U se

11. As you move to the left, press CTRL+ALT and select the datum plane.

10. Select Line Chain from the Line types drop-down menu and sketch the right-most vertical line from top to bottom, staying in the tool.

nl y

Using Entity from Edge within Sketcher

You can reuse existing geometry by selecting it with Use Entity from Edge within Sketcher.
Two types: Project Edge Offset Edge Select edge types: Single Chain Loop

Fo r

The Project and Offset options in Sketcher create sketcher geometry by projecting selected geometry edges onto the sketching plane. The two options are the same except the offset edge enables you to specify an offset value to the edges. A positive offset value causes the geometry to become larger, whereas a negative offset value causes the geometry to become smaller. Each entity created displays the ~ constraint symbol. The resulting dimensions are always positive when shown in a drawing.

When using the entity from edge options, you can select edges three different ways: Single Edges are selected one at a time. Chain Create sketched entities from a chain of edges or entities. Select two edges from the same surface or face and select which chain of geometry you wish to create. Figure 2 shows one possible chain selection from the selected entities. Loop Create sketched entities from a loop of edges or entities. When you select a surface or face, the edges or entities that form the loop are selected. If more than one loop exists, you must select the desired loop.
Module 8 | Page 14 2012 PTC

PT

Using Entity from Edge within Sketcher

In

Figure 2 Selecting the Desired Entity from Edge Chain

te rn

al
Figure 3 Reused Entities Offset from Edge

U se

Figure 1 Reused Entities from Edge

nl y

PROCEDURE - Using Entity from Edge within Sketcher

Close Window Erase Not Displayed USE_OFFSET_EDGE.PRT

Sketcher\Use_Edge Task 1:

Use the edges of geometry in Sketcher.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

3. Enable only the following Sketcher Display types: . 4. Click Project from the Sketching group.

5. Select the top and bottom edges of the circle.

Fo r

8. Click Next from the menu manager. Click Accept. Click Close. 9. Select Line Tangent from the Line types drop-down menu and sketch two tangent lines.

10. Click Delete Segment and trim the four overhanging arcs. 11. Click OK Task 2: .

1. Click Sketch . Click Use Previous.

2012 PTC

PT

Offset the edges of existing geometry in Sketcher.

7. Select the bottom arc and top arc.

In

6. Select Chain from the Type dialog box.

te rn

al
Module 8 | Page 15

U se

nl y

. 2. Click Sketch Select the front surface. Click Sketch.

2. Click Offset from the Sketching group. 3. Select Loop in the Type dialog box. 4. Select the surface.

5. Click Accept from the menu manager. 6. Type 10 and press ENTER.

7. Click One-by-One dimension to -10.

and edit the

10. De-select the sketch.

Fo r

This completes the procedure.

Module 8 | Page 16

PT

In

9. Click OK

te rn

8. Click References to view the sketcher references. Click Close.

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

Thickening Edges
The Thicken Edge option enables you to offset existing geometry with a width.
Edge Types: Single Chain Loop End Cap Types: Open Flat Circular

In

te rn
Figure 2 Thicken Chain: Flat

al
Thickening Edges
The Thicken option in Sketcher creates Sketcher geometry by projecting and then offsetting and thickening selected geometry edges onto the sketching plane. You are prompted for two values: a thickness and a positive or negative offset. Both values create Sketcher dimensions that you can modify. In addition, a reference dimension is automatically created between the selected edge and the thickened edge. The reference dimension cannot be modified directly, but updates with other changes. Even if negative offset values are entered, the resulting dimensions are always positive when shown in a drawing. When thickening edges, you can select edges using three different methods: Single Edges are selected one at a time. Chain Create sketched entities from a chain of edges or entities. Select two edges from the same surface or face and select which chain of geometry you wish to create. Figure 3 shows one possible chain selection from the selected entities.
2012 PTC Module 8 | Page 17

Fo r

PT

U se

Figure 1 Thicken Single: Open

Figure 3 Thicken Chain: Circular

nl y

 Loop Create sketched entities from a loop of edges or entities. When you select a surface or face, the edges or entities that form the loop are selected. If more than one loop exists, you must select the appropriate loop. In addition, you can control the end cap type on the thickened edges using the following options: Open No additional geometry is added to thickened edges. Flat Line segments are added to ends of the thickened edges. Circular Arcs are added to ends of the thickened edges.

Fo r

Module 8 | Page 18

PT

In

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

PROCEDURE - Thickening Edges

Close Window Erase Not Displayed THICKEN_EDGE.PRT

Sketcher\Thicken_Edge Task 1:

Thicken the edges of geometry using the Single and Chain options.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

3. Enable only the following Sketcher Display types: 4. Click Thicken from the Sketching group. 5. Select Single and Open. 6. Select the arc. .

7. Type 2 for the thickness and press ENTER.

Fo r

9. Select Chain and Flat.

10. Select the edges shown. 11. If necessary, click Next to highlight the appropriate chain. Click Accept.

2012 PTC

PT

8. Type 10 for the offset and press ENTER.

In

te rn

al
Module 8 | Page 19

U se

nl y

. 2. Click Sketch Select the top surface. Click Sketch.

12. Type 2 for the thickness and press ENTER. 13. Type 10 for the offset and press ENTER.

14. Select Chain and Circular. 15. Select the edges shown. 16. If necessary, click Next to highlight the appropriate chain. Click Accept.

17. Type 2 for the thickness and press ENTER. 18. Type 10 for the offset and press ENTER. 19. Click OK .

Task 2:

Thicken edges using the Loop option.

from the 2. Click Thicken Sketching group.

Fo r

3. Select Loop and select the top surface. 4. Click Next to highlight the appropriate chain. Click Accept.

5. Type 2 for the thickness and press ENTER. 6. Type -1 for the offset and press ENTER. 7. Click OK .

This completes the procedure.

Module 8 | Page 20

PT

1. Click Sketch . Click Use Previous.

In

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

Module

9
U se O te rn al
Module 9 | Page 1

Creating Datum Features: Planes and Axes

Module Overview
Datum features are commonly required as references when creating other features. In this module, you learn the theory behind creating datum features, and you create datum axes and datum planes.

Objectives

Fo r

2012 PTC

PT

In

After completing this module, you will be able to: Understand the creating datum features theory. Create datum axes. Create datum planes.

nl y

Creating Datum Features Theory

Datum features are commonly required as references when creating other features.
The following types of datum features can be created: Datum Planes Datum Axes Datum Points Datum Coordinate Systems

Creating Datum Features Theory

Examples of each type of datum feature are shown in Figure 1.

Fo r

Module 9 | Page 2

PT

Datum Datum Datum Datum

Planes Axes Points Coordinate Systems

In

te rn

Datum features are commonly required as references when creating other features. Datum features can be used as dimensioning references, feature placement references, and assembly references. The default color of datum features in the graphics window is brown (datum planes are both brown and gray, depending upon which side is currently being viewed). The following four types of datum features can be created:

al

U se

Figure 1 Examples of Datum Features

nl y
2012 PTC

Creating Datum Axes

Datum axes are particularly useful for making datum planes, placing items coaxially, and creating axis patterns.
Definition: No mass, infinite linear reference Display length can be changed Uses: Construction geometry Reference Types: Auto axis Axis feature Geometry point Geometry centerline

Figure 1 Various Datum Axis Types

In

Datum Axis Definition

Datum axes are individual features that can be redefined, suppressed, hidden, or deleted. A datum axis is a linear reference that has no mass. It is infinite in length, but its display length can be edited by selecting a reference, specifying a value, or dragging the drag handle.

Fo r

Datum Axis Uses

A datum axis can be used as construction geometry in a feature. It can also be used as a reference for: Other datum features, such as datum planes. Other features, such as a hole location. Assembling components.

Datum Axis Types

There are four different types of datum axes that can be created within Creo Parametric:
2012 PTC Module 9 | Page 3

PT

te rn
Figure 2 Geometry Axis (Centerline) Created for Revolve Feature

al

U se

nl y

Selecting Datum Axes

Fo r

You can select datum axes using the following methods: Select the axis line. Select the axis name tag. Select the axis in the model tree. Search for the axis by name in the search tool.

Module 9 | Page 4

PT

Auto Axis Belongs to another feature and is created in the following two circumstances: A circle is extruded. A hole is created. 2. Axis Feature Select almost any combination of geometry that defines a line in 3-D space. You can select single or multiple references which are set as a combination of Through, Normal, Tangent, and Center constraint types. The following types of axis features can be created: Through an edge. Normal to a plane. Through a cylindrical surface. Through the intersection of two planes or planar surfaces. Through two points or vertices. Through the center of an arc. Tangent to an edge. Through a point or vertex, normal to a plane. Through the X, Y, or Z axis of a coordinate system. 3. Geometry Point When created in Sketcher and when the sketch is completed, the axis appears at the location of the geometry point, normal to the sketch plane. A geometry point within a sketch can only create axes when used for internal sketches of extrude features. 4. Geometry Centerline Created only in Sketcher. A geometry centerline is created in the sketching plane, and when the sketch is completed, it displays as a datum axis within the graphics window. A geometry centerline can be used as the axis of revolution for a revolve feature. When a geometry centerline is selected in Sketcher, you can right-click and select Construction to convert it to a sketch entity. Similarly, you can select a centerline and right-click and select Geometry to convert the centerline to a geometry centerline.

1.

In

te rn

al

U se

nl y

2012 PTC

PROCEDURE - Creating Datum Axes

Close Window Datum\Axes Task 1: Erase Not Displayed DATUM_AXIS.PRT

Create datum axes on a part model.

1. Enable only the following Datum Display types: 2. Click Axis group. from the Datum

5. De-select the datum axis. 6. In the ribbon, select the View tab. Display .

8. Select the Model tab. 9. Click Axis .

Fo r

12. Click Axis

13. Press CTRL and select datum plane FRONT and the surface.

2012 PTC

PT

11. Click OK and de-select the datum axis.

10. Select the surface.

In

te rn

7. In the View tab, enable Axis Tag

al
Module 9 | Page 5

U se

4. Click OK in the Datum Axis dialog box.

3. Select the edge.

nl y

14. In the Datum Axis dialog box, select the Display tab. Select the Adjust Outline check box. Select Reference from the drop-down list. Select the same surface again. 15. In the Datum Axis dialog box, select the Properties tab. Edit the Name to REF_1. Click OK and de-select the datum axis. 16. Click Axis .

17. Select the surface.

19. Press CTRL and select the two surfaces.

22. In the ribbon, select the View tab.

PT

21. Click OK in the Datum Axis dialog box.

In

20. Edit the values to 22 and 3.

Fo r

23. Disable Axis Tag Display

This completes the procedure.

Module 9 | Page 6

te rn
.

18. Right-click and select Offset References.

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

Creating Datum Planes

Datum planes are 2-D reference geometry that you use to build feature geometry.
Definition: No mass, infinite planar reference Display size can be changed Two sides Uses: Default datum planes Construction geometry Reference Types: Through Normal Parallel Offset Angle Tangent Blend section

Figure 1 Viewing Datum Plane Sides

In

Datum planes are individual features that can be redefined, suppressed, hidden, or deleted. A datum plane is a planar reference that has no mass. It is infinite in size, but its display size can be edited to visually fit a part, feature, surface, edge, axis, or radius. You can also drag its drag handle. A datum plane has two sides that display brown and gray, as shown in Figure 1. The front, or brown side, is considered to be positive, while the back, or gray side, is considered to be negative.

Fo r

Datum Plane Uses

The RIGHT, FRONT, and TOP datum planes included in all the default templates are known as the default datum planes. Every feature is directly or indirectly created off of these datum planes. A datum plane can be used as construction geometry for a feature. It can also be used as a reference for: Other datum features, such as datum axes. Other features, such as sketches on an angle. Assembling components.

2012 PTC

PT

Datum Plane Definition

te rn
Figure 2 Datum Plane Types

al
Module 9 | Page 7

U se

nl y

Datum Plane Types

When creating datum planes, you can select most any combination of geometry that defines a plane in 3-D space. You can select single or multiple references which are set as a combination of the following seven constraint types: 1. Through Select any of the following: Axis, edge, or curve Point or vertex Plane Cylinder Normal Select any of the following: Axis Edge Curve Plane Parallel Select a plane Offset Select either of the following: Plane Coordinate system Angle Select a plane Tangent Select a cylinder Blend Section Select a blend feature and a section number

2.

3. 4.

Selecting Datum Planes

Fo r

Select the datum frame. Select the datum plane tag. Select the datum plane in the model tree. Search for the datum plane by name in the search tool.

Module 9 | Page 8

PT

You can select datum planes using the following methods:

In

te rn

5. 6. 7.

al

U se

nl y
2012 PTC

PROCEDURE - Creating Datum Planes

Close Window Datum\Planes Task 1: Erase Not Displayed DATUM-PLANE.PRT

Create datum planes in a part model.

1. Enable only the following Datum Display types: 2. Click Plane group. . from the Datum

3. Select the right surface and drag the drag handle to an offset of 12. 4. Click OK in the Datum Plane dialog box. 5. In the ribbon, select the View tab.

7. Select the Model tab.

10. Click OK in the Datum Plane dialog box and de-select the datum plane.

Fo r

11. Click Plane

PT

12. Select the surface. 13. In the Placement tab of the Datum Plane dialog box, select Through from the drop-down list.

2012 PTC

9. Drag the drag handle to an offset of 8.

In

8. With DTM1 still selected, click . Plane

te rn

6. In the View tab, enable Plane Tag Display .

al
Module 9 | Page 9

U se

nl y

16. Press CTRL and select the cylinder and edge.

20. In the Datum Plane dialog box, select Parallel from the datum plane reference drop-down list. Click OK.

Fo r

21. With DTM5 still selected, click . Plane 22. Press CTRL and select datum axis A_2. 23. In the Datum Plane dialog box, select Normal from the datum plane reference drop-down list. Click OK and de-select the datum plane.

Module 9 | Page 10

PT

19. Press CTRL and select datum axis A_2 and datum plane RIGHT.

18. Click Plane

In

te rn

17. In the Datum Plane dialog box, select Tangent from the surface reference drop-down list. Click OK and de-select the datum plane.

al
2012 PTC

U se

15. Click Plane

14. In the Datum Plane dialog box, select the Display tab. Select the Adjust Outline check box. Edit the drop-down list to Reference. Select the surface again. Edit the drop-down list back to Size. Edit the Width and Height to 14 and 10, respectively. Click OK and de-select the datum plane.

nl y

24. Click Plane

25. Press CTRL and select datum axis A_2 and the surface. 26. Edit the offset value to 10 or -10 to attain the proper direction and click OK. 27. Edit the definition of DTM4.

29. De-select the datum plane. 30. In the ribbon, select the View tab. 31. In the View tab, disable Plane . Tag Display This completes the procedure.

Fo r

2012 PTC

PT

In

te rn

al
Module 9 | Page 11

U se

nl y

28. In the Datum Plane dialog box, select the Display tab and click Flip. Click OK.

Fo r

Module 9 | Page 12

PT

In

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

Module

10
U se O te rn al
Module 10 | Page 1

Creating Extrudes, Revolves, and Ribs

Module Overview

Once you have created 2-D sketches, you can use those sketches to create 3-D geometry. In this module, you use 2-D sketches to create 3-D solid geometry features including extrude, revolve, and profile rib features. You also learn about the common dashboard options associated with these types of sketch-based features.

Objectives

After completing this module, you will be able to: Create solid extrude and revolve features. Add taper to extrude features. Create profile rib features. Understand common dashboard options including extrude depth, feature direction, thickening sketches, and revolve angle. Understand how to automatically add and remove material.

Fo r

2012 PTC

PT

In

nl y

Creating Solid Extrude Features

You can create extruded features from 2-D sketches.
Extrude sections perpendicular to the sketching plane. Add or remove material from the model.

Figure 2 - Extrude Feature Adding Material

PT

In

Fo r

Creating Solid Extrude Features

An extrude feature is based on a two-dimensional sketch. It linearly extrudes a sketch perpendicular to the sketching plane to create or remove material. You can either select the sketch first and then start the Extrude tool, or you can start the Extrude tool and then select the sketch. In an assembly, you cannot create an extrude feature that adds material. You can only remove material.

Module 10 | Page 2

te rn
Figure 3 - Extrude Feature Removing Material

al
2012 PTC

U se

Figure 1 - Viewing 2-D Sketches

nl y

PROCEDURE - Creating Solid Extrude Features

Close Window Extrude\Solid Task 1: Erase Not Displayed EXTRUDE.PRT

Create solid extrude features.

1. Enable only the following Datum Display types: .

2. In the ribbon, click Extrude from the Shapes group. 3. Select Sketch 1. 4. Drag the drag handle down below datum plane TOP to a depth of 16. 5. Click Complete Feature the dashboard. 6. Click Extrude 7. Select Sketch 2. . from

8. Edit the height to 24.

9. Click Complete Feature

10. Click Extrude

PT

11. Select Sketch 3.

Fo r

In

12. Click Remove Material the dashboard.

13. Edit the depth to Through All . 14. Click Complete Feature . .

15. Disable Plane Display

This completes the procedure.

2012 PTC Module 10 | Page 3

te rn
. . from

al

U se

nl y

Adding Taper to Extrude Features

The Add Taper option enables you to create an angle within an Extrude feature that appears similar to draft created using the Draft tool.
All extruded surfaces are tapered. The sketch plane begins functioning as a pivot plane. Positive or negative angle can be entered. A model dimension is created that is available upon feature edit. Positive direction of angle is determined by sketch plane reference. The enable_tapered_extrude configuration option controls availability in the dashboard.

Figure 1 Original Extrude Feature

PT

In

Fo r

Adding Taper to Extrude Features

The Add Taper option enables you to create an angle within an Extrude feature that appears similar to draft created using the Draft tool. You can enable and specify the taper angle in the Options tab of the Extrude dashboard. Consider the following when selecting the Add Taper option: All extruded surfaces are tapered. The sketch plane begins functioning as a pivot plane. Positive or negative angle can be entered. A model dimension is created that is available upon feature edit. Positive direction of angle is determined by sketch plane reference. If the sketching plane is on a part surface, the section size reduces as the feature is extruded.
2012 PTC

Module 10 | Page 4

te rn
Figure 2 Extrude Feature with Taper Added

al

U se

nl y

 If the sketching plane is off the surface of the part, the section size increases as the feature is extruded. Positive draft angle direction is determined upon feature creation. The enable_tapered_extrude configuration option controls availability in the dashboard. This option is enabled by default.

Fo r

2012 PTC

PT

In

te rn

al
Module 10 | Page 5

U se

nl y

PROCEDURE - Adding Taper to Extrude Features

Close Window Erase Not Displayed TAPER.PRT

Extrude\Add_Taper Task 1:

Redefine an existing feature to add taper.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

3. Notice that there is no taper currently defined for this feature.

Fo r

Module 10 | Page 6

PT

In

5. Click Complete Feature

te rn
.

4. In the dashboard, select the Options tab. Select the Add Taper check box. Edit the value to 10 degrees and press ENTER.

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

2. Edit the definition of extrude OVAL.

Task 2:

Create a new extrude with taper.

1. Click Extrude Shapes group.

from the

2. Select sketch HEX. 3. In the dashboard, click Remove Material . Click Change Depth . Direction Edit the depth to Through All . Select the Options tab. Select the Add Taper check box. Edit the value to 5 degrees and press ENTER. 4. Click Complete Feature This completes the procedure. .

Fo r

2012 PTC

PT

In

te rn

al
Module 10 | Page 7

U se

nl y

Common Dashboard Options: Extrude Depth

You can extrude a sketch to many different depth options.
Extrude depth options: Blind Symmetric To Next Through All Through Until To Selected Side 1/Side 2 Set using dashboard or right-clicking drag handle

Figure 1 - Extrude Depth Options

Blind (Variable) This is the default depth option. You can edit this depth value by dragging the drag handle, editing the dimension on the model, or using the dashboard. Symmetric The section extrudes equally on both sides of the sketch plane. You can edit the total depth at which the feature extrudes, just as you can with the Blind depth option. Therefore, the Symmetric depth is essentially the same as a Blind Symmetric depth. To Next This option causes the extrude to stop at the next surface encountered. A depth dimension is not required, as the next surface controls the extrude depth. Through All This option causes the section to extrude through the entire model. A depth dimension is not required, as the model itself controls the extrude depth. Through Until This option causes the extrude to stop at the selected surface. A depth dimension is not required, as the selected surface controls the extrude depth. Note that the section must pass through the selected surface. To Selected This option causes the extrude to stop at the selected surface. A depth dimension is not required, as the selected surface controls the extrude depth. Unlike the Through Until depth option, the section does not have to pass through the selected surface.
Module 10 | Page 8

Fo r

PT

In

When you create an extrude feature from a 2-D sketch, the depth at which the feature extrudes can be set in a variety of ways depending upon the design intent you wish to capture. You can specify the desired depth option using the dashboard or by right-clicking on the drag handle in the graphics window. Extrude depth options include:

te rn

Common Dashboard Options: Extrude Depth

al

U se

O
2012 PTC

nl y

 Side 1/Side 2 You can independently control the depth at which the section extrudes on each side of the sketching plane. By default, the section extrudes on Side 1; however, you can cause the section to extrude on Side 2 as well. Any of the above options can be used for either side, except for Symmetric. The To Next and Through All options only consider geometry present at the time (in the feature order) when the extrude is created. Features created after the extrude feature is created do not cause the extrude feature's depth to change. You can also switch depth options by right-clicking on the drag handle in the graphics window.

Fo r

2012 PTC

PT

In

te rn

al
Module 10 | Page 9

U se

nl y

PROCEDURE - Common Dashboard Options: Extrude Depth

Close Window Extrude\Depth Task 1: Erase Not Displayed EXTRUDE-DEPTH.PRT

Create extrude features using different depth options.

1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. Click Extrude Shapes group. from the

5. Click Extrude

6. Select sketch SYMMETRIC. 7. In the dashboard, edit the depth to Symmetric and edit the depth to 125.

11. Edit the depth to To Next

PT

10. Select sketch TO_NEXT. . .

Fo r

12. Click Complete Feature

13. Click Extrude

14. Select sketch THRU_ALL. 15. Edit the depth to Through All and click Remove Material . 16. Click Complete Feature .

Module 10 | Page 10

9. Click Extrude

In

8. Click Complete Feature

te rn
.

al
2012 PTC

U se

4. Click Complete Feature

3. Select sketch BLIND, and edit the depth to 200.

nl y

17. Click Extrude

18. Select sketch THRU_UNTIL. 19. Edit the depth to Through Until and select the surface. 20. Click Complete Feature .

22. Select sketch TO_SURFACE. 23. Edit the depth to To Selected and select the surface. 24. Click Complete Feature . 25. Notice the contour at the extrude end. 26. Enable Plane Display 27. Click Extrude . .

28. Select sketch TO_PLANE.

31. Click Extrude

PT

30. Click Complete Feature .

In

29. Edit the depth to To Selected and select datum plane DTM1. .

Fo r

32. Select sketch BOTH_SIDES and edit the depth to 220.

33. Select the Options tab and edit the Side 2 depth to To Next . 34. Click Complete Feature .

This completes the procedure.

2012 PTC

te rn
Module 10 | Page 11

al

U se

nl y

21. Click Extrude

Common Dashboard Options: Feature Direction

You can edit the depth direction and material direction of a feature.
Depth Direction Side 1 Side 2 Material Direction Flip the directions using the arrows or the dashboard.

PT

Figure 2 - Same Feature, Flipped Depth Direction

In

Fo r

Common Dashboard Options: Feature Direction

When you create a feature, such as an extrude feature, there are two arrows that appear in the interface, as shown in Figure 1. In each image in Figure 1, the arrow on the right displays perpendicular to the section and denotes the depth direction. The arrow on the left displays parallel to the section and denotes the material direction.

Specifying the Depth Direction

The depth direction arrow in the interface shows you which direction the feature is created with respect to the sketching plane. You can flip the direction of the feature creation either by using the dashboard or by clicking the arrow in the interface. In Figure 2, the depth direction was flipped. By default, the feature is created in only one direction. This is known as Side 1. However, you can add the second direction so the feature is created in
Module 10 | Page 12 2012 PTC

te rn
Figure 3 - Same Feature, Side 2 Depth Direction Added

al

U se

Figure 1 - Same Feature, Flipped Material Direction

nl y

both directions from the sketch plane. This second side is Side 2. In Figure 3, the Side 2 depth direction was added to the feature.

Specifying the Material Direction

The material direction arrow in the interface shows you which side of the sketch material is removed when creating a cut. This arrow only displays when removing material. Similar to the depth direction arrow, you can flip the material direction either by using the dashboard or by clicking the arrow in the interface. In Figure 1, the material direction for the cut was flipped from the inside to the outside. Consequently, the material that was removed flipped from the inside to the outside.

Fo r

2012 PTC

PT

In

te rn
Module 10 | Page 13

al

U se

nl y

PROCEDURE - Common Dashboard Options: Feature Direction

Close Window Extrude\Direction Task 1: Erase Not Displayed FEATURE-DIRECTION.PRT

Modify the depth and material directions for various extrude features.

2. Edit the definition of HEX. 3. Click Change Depth Direction from the dashboard. Click Preview Feature from the dashboard. 4. Orient the model and notice the cut is now on the underside of the model.

5. Click Resume Feature the dashboard.

Fo r

The hex feature is still removing material from the model (the base).

7. Click Resume Feature

PT

6. In the dashboard, click Change . Material Direction . Click Preview Feature The hex feature is now removing material on the outside of the sketch.

8. In the dashboard, click Change . Material Direction Click Complete Feature . 9. Press CTRL+D to orient to the Standard Orientation.

Module 10 | Page 14

In

te rn
from .

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

10. Edit the definition of OVAL. Notice the depth direction points upward. 11. In the dashboard, select the Options tab. Edit the Side 2 depth to Blind and edit the value to 28. Click Complete Feature .

12. Orient the model and view the underside of the model.

This completes the procedure.

Fo r

2012 PTC

PT

In

te rn
Module 10 | Page 15

al

U se

nl y

Common Dashboard Options: Thicken Sketch

The Thicken Sketch option is available in many types of features, including extrude, revolve, blend, and sweep features.
Create solids or cuts. Edit the material thickness. Flip the side that thickens. Thicken open or closed sections.

Figure 1 - Creating a Thickened Cut

Figure 2 - Original Thicken Side

In

Common Dashboard Options: Thicken Sketch

Fo r

The Thicken Sketch option is available in many types of features, including extrude, revolve, blend, and sweep features. When creating one of these option to assign a thickness to

features, you can use the Thicken Sketch the selected section outline.

You can create features that either add or cut away material. You can edit the material thickness, as shown in Figures 2 and 3. You can also change the side of the sketch where the thickness is added, or add thickness to both sides of the sketch by using Change Thickness to toggle through the options. Side You can use this option on both open and closed sketches. For example, you can use the Thicken sketch option to sketch a circle and extrude it into a pipe shape with a specified wall thickness, or you can use it to sketch a rectangle and extrude it into box-shaped tubing, again with a specified wall thickness.

Module 10 | Page 16

PT

te rn
Figure 3 - Thicken Side Flipped

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

PROCEDURE - Common Dashboard Options: Thicken Sketch

Close Window Extrude\Thicken Task 1: Erase Not Displayed THICKEN-SKETCH.PRT

Thicken the sketches of various extrude features in a model.

1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. Notice the hex cut in the bottom of the model. 3. Orient to the Standard Orientation.

4. Edit the definition of OVAL.

5. In the dashboard, click Thicken . Sketch Edit the thickness value to 4.

6. Click Change Thickness Side .

Fo r

7. Click Complete Feature

PT

In

8. Edit the definition of OVAL. 9. In the dashboard, edit the depth value to 10. Click Change Depth . Direction Click Remove Material .

2012 PTC

te rn
.
Module 10 | Page 17

al

U se

nl y

10. Click Change Thickness Side to thicken on both sides of the sketch.

11. Click Complete Feature

This completes the procedure.

Fo r

Module 10 | Page 18

PT

In

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

Creating Solid Revolve Features

You can create revolved features from 2-D sketches.
Revolve a section about the axis of revolution in a sketching plane. Add or remove material from the model. Select different axes of revolution. First geometry centerline Axis or edge

Creating Solid Revolve Features

A revolve feature is based on a two-dimensional sketch. You can use a revolve feature to revolve a sketch about an axis of revolution (in the sketching plane) to create or remove material. You can either select the sketch first and start the Revolve tool, or you can start the Revolve tool and then select the sketch. When you select a sketch to be revolved, the feature uses, by default, the first geometry centerline sketched within the section as the axis of revolution, as shown in the left image in Figure 2. However, you can also select any other straight curve or edge, datum axis, or coordinate system axis as the axis of revolution. If the sketch you are revolving does not contain a geometry centerline, you need to select one of these other references as the axis of revolution. In the right image in Figure 2, the axis of revolution has been changed to the horizontal datum axis. There are two rules for defining the axis of revolution: 1. 2. Geometry must be sketched only on one side of the axis of revolution. The axis of revolution must lie in the sketching plane of the section.
Module 10 | Page 19

Fo r

2012 PTC

PT

Figure 2 Same Revolved Sketch using Different Axes of Revolution

In

te rn
Figure 3 Removing Material using a Revolve Feature

al

U se

Figure 1 Viewing 2-D Sketches

nl y

You can revolve either an open or closed sketch. In Figure 2, a closed sketch is used to create the feature that adds material, while an open section is used to create the cut that removes material in Figure 3. You can also thicken the sketch used to create a revolve feature.

Fo r

Module 10 | Page 20

PT

In

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

PROCEDURE - Creating Solid Revolve Features

Close Window Revolve\Solid Task 1: Erase Not Displayed REVOLVE.PRT

Create solid revolve features using different axes of revolution.

1. Enable only the following Datum Display types:

3. Select the vertical centerline, right-click, and select Geometry. 4. Click OK . from the

6. Select Sketch 1 if necessary.

7. Right-click and select Axis of Revolution Collector.

9. Click Complete Feature

In

8. Highlight datum axis REV, and then select it. .

Fo r

11. In the dashboard, select the Placement tab and click Internal CL. . .

12. Click Complete Feature

13. Disable Axis Display

2012 PTC

PT

10. Edit the definition of Revolve 1.

te rn
Module 10 | Page 21

al

5. Click Revolve Shapes group.

U se

nl y

2. Edit the definition of Sketch 1. Notice the vertical and horizontal centerlines.

14. Click Revolve Shapes group. 15. Select Sketch 2.

from the

16. Click Remove Material

17. Edit the Revolve angle to 75 and press ENTER. 18. Click Complete Feature .

19. Edit the definition of Revolve 2. 20. Edit the Revolve angle back to 360 and press ENTER. 21. Click Complete Feature .

This completes the procedure.

Fo r

Module 10 | Page 22

PT

In

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

Common Dashboard Options: Revolve Angle

You can revolve a sketch to many different angle depths.
Revolve angle options: Variable Symmetric To Selected Side 1/Side 2

Figure 2 - Symmetric Revolve Angle Depth

Common Dashboard Options: Revolve Angle

Fo r

When you create a revolve feature from a 2-D sketch, the depth angle at which the feature revolves can be set in a variety of ways depending upon the design intent you wish to capture. Revolve angle options include: Variable (Blind) This the default revolve angle option. You can edit this revolve angle value by dragging the drag handle, editing the dimension on the model, or using the dashboard. The dashboard also contains four predefined angles that you can select: 90, 180, 270, and 360.. Symmetric The section revolves equally on both sides of the sketch plane. You can edit the total angle at which the feature revolves just as you can with the Variable depth angle option. Therefore, the Symmetric angle is essentially the same as the Variable Symmetric depth. To Selected Selecting this option stops the revolve at the selected surface or datum plane. A dimension for angle value is not required, as the selected surface controls the revolve angle. The location where you select the datum plane or surface determines where the revolve stops in relation to the axis of revolution. In Figure 3, the datum plane was selected to the right of the axis of revolution. If the datum plane was selected to
2012 PTC Module 10 | Page 23

PT

In

te rn

al
Figure 3 - Side 1 Revolve Angle To Selected, Side 2 Revolve Angle Variable

U se

Figure 1 - Variable Revolve Angle Depth

nl y

the left of the axis of revolution, the feature would have revolved another 180 before stopping. Side 1/Side 2 You can independently control the angle at which the section revolves on each side of the sketching plane. By default, the section revolves on Side 1; however, you can set the section to revolve on Side 2. Any of the above options can be used for either side except for Symmetric. You can also switch revolve angle options by right-clicking the drag handle in the graphics window.

Fo r

Module 10 | Page 24

PT

In

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

PROCEDURE - Common Dashboard Options: Revolve Angle

Close Window Revolve\Angle Task 1: Erase Not Displayed REVOLVE-ANGLE.PRT

Use the various revolve angle options for a revolve feature.

1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. Click Revolve Shapes group. from the

Fo r

5. Click Change Angle Side again. 6. Edit the depth to Symmetric .

2012 PTC

PT

In

te rn
Module 10 | Page 25

4. Edit the revolve angle depth value to 90 and click Change . Angle Side

al

U se

3. Select the visible sketch and select datum axis REV from the model tree.

nl y

7. Edit the depth to To Selected . 8. Enable Plane Display and select datum plane DTM2 to the right of the axis of revolution.

11. Click Complete Feature

Fo r

Module 10 | Page 26

PT

This completes the procedure.

In

te rn
.

10. In the dashboard, edit the Side 2 depth to To Selected and select datum plane DTM2 to the left of the axis of revolution.

al
2012 PTC

U se

Variable the value.

and type 90 as

9. In the dashboard, select the Options tab. Edit the Side 2 depth to

nl y

Automatically Adding and Removing Material

You can automatically add and remove material by changing the direction of an extrude and revolve feature.
Functions with both internal and external sketches. You must place the sketch on a single solid surface. Determines add or remove status. Only functions upon initial definition of the feature.

Figure 1 Alert Caption

Fo r

You can automatically add and remove material by changing the direction of an extrude and revolve feature either in or out of a model. When this action is performed, the feature preview automatically updates. Additionally, a pop-up message appears, as shown in Figure 1. Also, the dashboard Remove Material option is toggled accordingly. To use this functionality, you can set the auto_add_remove configuration option to yes. The default option is no. Consider the following when using Auto Add and Remove functionality: This functionality is available for both internal and external sketches. You must place the sketch on a single solid surface, which determines the add or remove status. This functionality is only available upon initial definition of the feature. It is intentionally unavailable when you edit the feature or definition. This protects you from unintentionally flipping feature material.

2012 PTC

PT

Automatically Adding and Removing Material

In

Figure 2 Adding and Removing Material on an Extrude Feature

te rn

al
Figure 3 Adding and Removing Material on a Revolve Feature
Module 10 | Page 27

U se

nl y

PROCEDURE - Automatically Adding and Removing Material

Close Window Erase Not Displayed AUTO_ADD_REMOVE.PRT

Extrude\Auto_Add-Remove Task 1:

Experiment with automatically adding and removing material for an extrude feature.

3. Select sketch OVAL. 4. Notice the feature is adding material by default.

5. Drag the depth handle down into the model. 6. Notice that material is not removed. 7. Click Cancel Feature 8. Click File > Options. and click Yes.

Fo r

9. In the Creo Parametric Options dialog box, select the Configuration Editor category. Click Add. Type auto_add_remove in the Option name field. Select yes from the Option value drop-down list. Click OK > OK > No.

10. Click Extrude sketch OVAL.

PT

11. Drag the depth handle down into the model. 12. Notice the caption, and that the feature is now removing material. 13. Edit the depth to 10.

Module 10 | Page 28

In

and select

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

2. In the ribbon, click Extrude from the Shapes group.

nl y

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

14. Notice that Remove Material

has been selected in the dashboard.

15. Click the magenta flip depth arrow. Notice that the feature is now adding material. 16. Click the magenta flip depth arrow. Notice that the feature is removing material again. 17. Click Complete Feature 18. Click Extrude sketch HEX. .

and select

19. Drag the depth handle down into the model. 20. Notice that the feature does not switch to a cut because the sketching plane does not lie on the surface. 21. In the dashboard, edit the depth to To Next . 22. Click Complete Feature Task 2: .

Automatically add and remove material for a revolve feature.

Fo r

4. Drag the handle in the opposite direction to approximately 70 degrees. 5. Notice that the feature is now removing material. 6. Notice that Remove Material has been selected in the dashboard.

2012 PTC

PT

3. Drag the handle to approximately 55 degrees.

2. Select sketch CIRCLE.

In

1. In the ribbon, click Revolve from the Shapes group.

te rn

al
Module 10 | Page 29

U se

nl y

7. In the dashboard, click Change . Depth Direction 8. Right-click the depth handle and select To Selected. 9. Select the surface shown. 10. Click Complete Feature . 11. Set the auto_add_remove configuration option back to no. This completes the procedure.

Fo r

Module 10 | Page 30

PT

In

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

Creating Profile Rib Features

A profile rib feature is similar to an extruded protrusion, except that it requires an open section sketch.
Profile rib features require an open sketch. You can edit the side that thickens. You can flip to which side of the sketch you want to create the rib. Rib geometry adapts to the adjacent, solid geometry.

Figure 1 Viewing Open Sketches

Figure 2 Editing the Side that Thickens

PT

In

te rn
Figure 3 Flipping Which Side the Rib is Created

Fo r

Creating Profile Rib Features

Ribs are typically used to strengthen parts. A profile rib feature is similar to an extruded protrusion, except that it requires an open section sketch. The rib also conforms to existing planar or cylindrical geometry when it is extruded. After you select an open section sketch and set a thickness, Creo Parametric automatically creates the profile rib feature by merging it with your model. The system can add material above or below the sketch, and the thickness can be applied on either side, or be symmetric about the sketch. The Profile Rib enables you to create rib features in less time than it would take for you to create and sketch a protrusion.

2012 PTC

al
Module 10 | Page 31

U se

nl y

PROCEDURE - Creating Profile Rib Features

Close Window Rib\Profile Task 1: Erase Not Displayed RIB.PRT

Create profile rib features on a part model.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

5. Click Complete Feature

6. Click Profile Rib

7. Select RIB_SKETCH-2 .

Fo r

10. Click theChange Thickness . The rib moves to the Option left of the sketch.

Module 10 | Page 32

PT

9. Drag the handle and edit the width to 25. The rib is centered about the sketch.

In

8. Orient to view orientation RIGHT.

te rn

al

Notice the angled rib surface is not planar; it is contoured to match the curved surface which is adjacent to the sketch.

U se

4. Drag the handle and edit the width to 75.

O
2012 PTC

3. Select RIB_SKETCH-1.

nl y

from the 2. Select Profile Rib Rib types drop-down menu in the Engineering group.

11. Click theChange Thickness again. The rib moves Option to the right of the sketch. 12. Click Complete Feature .

14. Click Profile Rib

17. Click Complete Feature

This completes the procedure.

Fo r

2012 PTC

PT

In

te rn
.
Module 10 | Page 33

16. Click the magenta arrow in the graphics window. The rib is now on the bottom of the sketch.

al

U se

15. Select RIB_SKETCH-3 . The rib is above the sketch.

nl y

13. Reorient the model.

Fo r

Module 10 | Page 34

PT

In

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

Module

11
U se O nl y

Utilizing Internal Sketches and Embedded Datums

Module Overview
You can select sketches and datum features to help you create 3-D geometry features. These items do not need to preexist in the model tree because you can create them as needed.

Fo r

2012 PTC

PT

After completing this module, you will be able to: Create internal sketches. Create embedded datum features.

In

Objectives

te rn

In this module, you learn how to create internal sketches when creating sketch-based features as an additional option to selecting a preexisting sketch. You also learn how to create embedded datum features.

al

Module 11 | Page 1

Creating Internal Sketches

An internal sketch is contained in the feature it defines.
Internal sketch benefits: Organization Reduced Feature Count External sketch benefits: Same sketch can be used for multiple features Can be unlinked

Figure 2 - Internal Sketches

In

Fo r

When creating sketched features in Creo Parametric, you can use either internal or external sketches. PTC does not recommend one type of sketch over the other; you should use the type that works best for you. In this topic, we discuss how to use internal sketches and some of the benefits they can provide.

Workflows for Creating an Internal Sketch

Internal sketches can be created during the creation of any sketched feature. Use any of the following three methods for creating an internal sketch: Select the sketching plane and then start the feature tool for any sketched feature (for example, Extrude object-action workflow. ), This is sometimes known as an

), and then Start the feature tool for any sketched feature (ex: Extrude select the sketching plane. This is sometimes known as an action-object workflow. ), and then Start the feature tool for any sketched feature (ex: Extrude right-click and select Define Internal Sketch. You can also click Define from
Module 11 | Page 2 2012 PTC

PT

Internal Sketches

te rn
Figure 3 - External Sketches

al

U se

nl y

Figure 1 - Internal Versus External Sketches

the Placement tab. This method is almost a subset of the action-object workflow in that you start the feature tool first (action) and then select the sketch plane (object). The difference is that this is the first method where you can specify an orientation for the sketch. This is because the Sketch Setup dialog box displays when using this method. When you complete a feature with any of these methods, an internal sketch with the name Section X is created and embedded within the feature.

Pros and Cons of Internal Sketches

Internal sketches provide some benefits that external sketches do not, including: Organization Because internal sketches are embedded in the feature they define, you always know where to find them. External sketches are separate features that can be renamed and reordered in the same manner as other features. In a model containing hundreds of features, it can take some time to determine which sketch is used to define which feature. This is not a problem, but it should be a consideration when selecting the type of sketch to use. Reduced Feature Count Because internal sketches are not features, they do not add to the total number of features in a model. Creating a separate external sketch for every sketched feature in your model can dramatically increase the number of features in a model. In models containing hundreds or even thousands of features, external sketches can dramatically increase the total feature count in a model. Again, this is something you want to consider when selecting the type of sketch to use. Unfortunately, you cannot simply make an internal sketch external without saving it out and recreating it.

You can always redefine an external sketch to internal. You can select a different sketch for the same feature. This enables you to quickly pursue multiple design options. The same external sketch can be specified for multiple features. You can unlink a specified external sketch. External sketches result in a higher feature count because there is an additional sketch feature for every sketched feature as displayed in the model tree.

Fo r

2012 PTC

PT

External sketches provide some benefits that internal sketches do not.

Pros and Cons of External Sketches

In

te rn

al

U se

nl y

Module 11 | Page 3

PROCEDURE - Creating Internal Sketches

Close Window Sketcher\Internal Task 1: Erase Not Displayed INTERNAL-SKETCH.PRT

Create and edit internal sketches.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

from the 3. Click Extrude Shapes group in the ribbon. 4. Notice that you entered Sketcher without defining the Sketch Setup. 5. Enable only the following Sketcher Display types: . 6. Select Center Rectangle from the Rectangle types drop-down menu in the Sketching group.

9. Click Remove Material flip the depth direction.

PT

8. Click OK

Fo r

10. Edit the depth to 7 and click Complete Feature . 11. Suppress Extrude 2.

12. Click Extrude

13. Select the top surface. 14. Click Center Rectangle and sketch and dimension the rectangle. 15. Click OK .

Module 11 | Page 4

In

7. Sketch the rectangle and dimension it.

te rn
and

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

2. Press ALT and select the top surface.

16. Click Remove Material flip the depth direction.

and

17. Edit the depth to 7 and click Complete Feature .

21. Notice that the Sketch Setup dialog box displays. 22. Select the front surface and click Sketch in the Sketch dialog box.

23. Click Palette and place the 6-Sided Hexagon shape. 24. Delete the length dimension, and edit the resulting radius dimension to 10. 25. Click OK

Fo r

26. Click Remove Material

PT

In

and query 27. Click To Selected select the surface at the bottom of Extrude 3. .

28. Click Complete Feature

2012 PTC

te rn
.

al
Module 11 | Page 5

U se

20. Right-click and select Define Internal Sketch

19. Click Extrude

nl y

18. Orient to the Standard Orientation and observe the 12_POINT sketch.

29. Expand Extrude 4 in the model tree, and notice the internal sketch Section 1.

30. Edit the definition of Extrude 4. 31. Select the sketch feature 12_POINT as the new sketch. 32. Click OK in the Section Selection dialog box to replace the existing internal sketch. 33. Click Complete Feature .

34. Expand Extrude 4 again in the model tree. Notice that Extrude 4 now uses the sketch feature 12_POINT and is external.

35. Select hidden sketch 12_POINT and press DELETE. Notice that Extrude 4 is also deleted, as it uses the 12_POINT sketch. Click Cancel in the Delete dialog box. 36. Edit the definition of Extrude 4. 38. Click OK in the Unlink dialog box to break the association. 39. Click Complete Feature 37. In the dashboard, select the Placement tab and click Unlink.

PT

Fo r

40. Select hidden sketch 12_POINT and press DELETE. Click OK to delete the sketch feature. 41. In the model tree, expand Extrude 4 and notice that it again contains an internal sketch.

This completes the procedure.

Module 11 | Page 6

In

te rn
.

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

Creating Embedded Datum Features

Embedded datum features contain any combination of plane, axis, point, or coordinate systems embedded within another feature.
Benefits of Embedded Datum Features: No need to restart feature creation. More organized models. Automatically hidden datums.

Figure 1 - Embedded in an Extrude

Another benefit of embedded datum features is that they produce a cleaner, more organized model tree. For example, if the sketch plane of an extrude feature you are creating requires you to create three datum planes and an axis, those four datum features are embedded within the node of the extrude feature. Unlike regular features, the embedded datum features do not clutter the model tree. Each embedded datum feature functions as some type of reference to the feature in which it is embedded, otherwise it would not be embedded. This enables you to easily determine the function of each datum and identify the feature that references it. The display of embedded datum features is automatically set to hidden after they are created. This helps ensure that the display of your model remains uncluttered. In the following figure, notice the three different displays of the same model tree. The model on the left was created without using embedded datum features. The model in the middle was created using embedded datum
2012 PTC Module 11 | Page 7

Fo r

PT

Suppose you have begun the creation of an extrude feature, and then realize the sketch plane you need has not yet been created. You could cancel out of the Extrude Tool, create the datum plane, and then start the Extrude Tool again. A better solution would be to simply create the sketch plane as an embedded datum, while the Extrude Tool is still open.

In

There are several uses for embedded datum features, such as sketch planes, orientation planes, dimensioning references, placement references for holes, and references for draft features. Datum features can even be embedded in other datum features.

te rn

Benefits of Embedded Datum Features

al

Figure 2 - Datum Group

U se
Figure 3 - Embedded in a Datum

nl y

features and the feature nodes are expanded. The model on the right displays the same model shown in the middle, except in this case the feature nodes are collapsed.

Creating Embedded Datum Features

After you have created the required datum features, you can resume the creation of the feature by clicking Resume Feature in the dashboard. By then selecting the newly created datum features as sketch planes, orientation, dimensioning, placement, or depth references, they are embedded in the feature.

Fo r

When you delete a feature containing embedded datum features, Creo Parametric provides the option to keep or delete the embedded datum features. Sketch and orientation datum planes can only be embedded in features using internal sketches. If for some reason the datum features you create are not embedded as expected, you can select them in the model tree and drag them into the feature after creation. This embeds them and sets their display to hidden, just as if they were originally embedded. Datums can be un-embedded in the same way, by dragging them from a feature back to the model tree.

Best Practices
Embedded datum features should be used as the design intent dictates. For example, you cannot reuse an embedded datum feature in a downstream feature. Using embedded datum features promotes the creation of models that are easier to edit and utilize, and thus easier to share with downstream users.
Module 11 | Page 8 2012 PTC

PT

About Embedded Datum Features

In

te rn

The quickest way to create embedded datum features is to click Datum to expand the Datum group, located to the far right of the sketched features dashboard, as shown in Figure 2. Of course, you can always select the Model tab while in feature creation and select the desired datum feature type from the Datum group.

al

U se

Embedded datums are created by starting a datum tool during the creation of another feature. Starting the datum tool automatically pauses the creation of the current feature, enabling you to create the required datum feature.

nl y

PROCEDURE - Creating Embedded Datum Features

Close Window Datum\Embedded Task 1: Erase Not Displayed EMBEDDED-DATUM.PRT

Create an extrude feature referencing embedded datum features. .

1. Enable only the following Datum Display types: 2. In the ribbon, select the View tab. 3. Enable Plane Tag Display 4. Select the Model tab. 5. Click Extrude Datum . . and Axis Tag Display

6. In the Extrude dashboard, click and select Plane

8. Select the Properties tab, edit the Name to OFFSET, and click OK.

9. With OFFSET still selected, click

PT

Fo r

Datum

Creating each of these datum features after starting a feature tool defines them as embedded.

and select Axis

In

10. Press CTRL and select the top surface. 11. Select the Properties tab, edit the name to PIVOT, and click OK.

2012 PTC

te rn

al
.
Module 11 | Page 9

7. Select the surface, and drag the Offset to 10.

U se

nl y
.

12. With PIVOT still selected, click Datum . and select Plane

13. Press CTRL and select the top surface. 14. Edit the Rotation to either 25 or -25 to attain the proper direction. 15. Select the Properties tab, edit the name to ORIENT, and click OK. 16. With ORIENT still selected, click Datum . and select Plane

18. Edit the ORIENT reference from Offset to Normal. 19. Select the Display tab and click Flip as necessary to orient the magenta arrow, as shown. 20. Select the Properties tab, edit the name to SKETCH, and click OK. 21. In the Extrude dashboard, click Resume Feature .

Fo r

23. Disable Plane Display Axis Display .

PT

22. Enable only the following Sketcher Display types: . and

24. Click Center and Point sketch the circle. 25. Edit the diameter to 32. 26. Click OK .

Module 11 | Page 10

In

te rn
and

al
2012 PTC

U se

17. Press CTRL and select datum axis PIVOT.

nl y

27. In the dashboard, click Change and edit the Depth Direction depth to To Selected . 28. Click Datum Plane . and select

31. Click Complete Feature

32. Edit the definition of Extrude 4.

te rn

al
34. Expand Extrude 4 in the model tree. Notice the embedded datums. 36. Disable Plane Tag Display

PT

35. Right-click Extrude 4 and select Edit. Notice that dimensions from the feature and all embedded datums are displayed. and Axis Tag Display .

Fo r

This completes the procedure.

2012 PTC

In

33. Click Remove Material

and click Complete Feature

U se
.
Module 11 | Page 11

30. Click Resume Feature from the Extrude dashboard. Because datum plane DEPTH is still selected, it is automatically selected as the depth reference.

nl y

29. Press CTRL and select the two inner hole surfaces. Select the Properties tab, edit the name to DEPTH, and click OK.

Fo r

Module 11 | Page 12

PT

In

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

Module

12
U se O te rn al
Module 12 | Page 1

Creating Sweeps and Blends

Module Overview

Extruded and revolved features comprise the majority of the features on the models that you create. However, there are occasions when extruded and revolved features cannot easily create the necessary geometry. In these instances, you may need to sketch more advanced geometry features. In this module, you learn how to create two advanced geometry features: the sweep feature and the blend feature.

Objectives

Fo r

2012 PTC

PT

After completing this module, you will be able to: Create sweeps with open and closed trajectories. Analyze sweep feature attributes. Create blends by selecting parallel sections. Create blends by sketching sections. Analyze blend options.

In

nl y

Creating Sweeps with Open Trajectories

A sweep feature consists of a sketched section that sweeps, or traverses, along a trajectory.
Components of a sweep feature: Trajectory Select the trajectory. Define the Start point. Section Placed at the trajectory start point, and denoted by crosshairs. Closed or open. Creation methods: Add/remove solid material. Surface. Thin.

In

Creating Sweeps with Open Trajectories

Fo r

You can create a sweep feature to create a constant cross-section feature that follows a trajectory curve. A sweep feature can also have a variable section, but this topic discusses the constant section only. A sweep can add or remove material. It can also be created as a thin feature or as a surface. A sweep feature consists of both a trajectory and a section. If your company has legacy data that contains Simple sweep features, the classic menu manager interface displays when redefining them.

Selecting the Trajectory

The trajectory is the path along which the section sweeps. The trajectory must be selected, rather than sketched. The trajectory can be open, meaning that it does not have to create a loop, as shown in the figures. It can have sharp or tangent corners, as shown in the Figure 1 protrusion and the Figure 2 cut, respectively.
Module 12 | Page 2 2012 PTC

PT

te rn
Figure 2 Sweeping an Open Sketch Along an Open Trajectory

al

U se

Figure 1 Sweeping a Closed Sketch Along an Open Trajectory

nl y

When selecting a trajectory, the following selection methods are available: Select a previously created external sketch. Select individual curves or edges from existing geometry. To include additional adjacent edges as the trajectory, you can press SHIFT while selecting them. Select an intent chain. Within the Sweep dashboard, you can click Datum and select

at the right end; however, this does not make the Sketch sketch internal to the sweep. Once the trajectory has been selected, you may decide that you do not want the trajectory to traverse the entire length of your selected sketch or geometry. You can drag the trajectory endpoint handles to lengthen or shorten the overall trajectory. If you press SHIFT while dragging you can snap the endpoints to entities such as vertices, datum planes, or edge endpoints. You can also directly specify a value. You must also select the start point for the section. The start point is the location from which the section begins to sweep, and displays in the graphics window with a magenta arrow. You can click the arrow to toggle the start point to the opposite trajectory endpoint.

Defining the Section

Once the trajectory and start point have been defined, you must sketch the section that is swept along the trajectory. The sketch plane for the section is placed perpendicular to the trajectory at the start point. The crosshairs seen in the sketching plane represent the intersection of the trajectory and sketch plane.

Causes of a Sweep Failure

Fo r

A constant section sweep feature may fail if one of the following three situations occurs: A trajectory crosses itself. You align or dimension a section to fixed entities, but the orientation of the section changes when it is swept along the 3-D trajectory. A trajectory arc or spline radius is too small, relative to the section, and the feature intersects itself while traversing around the arc.

2012 PTC

PT

The sketched section may be either open or closed. The swept protrusion in Figure 1 is a closed section, while the swept cut in Figure 2 is an open section.

In

te rn

al

U se

nl y

Module 12 | Page 3

PROCEDURE - Creating Sweeps with Open Trajectories

Close Window Erase Not Displayed SWEEP_OPEN-TRAJ.PRT

Sweep\Open-Trajectory_Solid Task 1:

Create a sweep with a closed sketch.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

3. Select the trajectory from the graphics window. 4. Click Create Section from the dashboard.

6. Click Palette from the Sketching group. 7. Select the Profiles tab and drag the T-profile in the graphics window to place it. Edit the Scaling factor to 0.5. Right-click the X Location handle and drag it to the midpoint of the top horizontal line.

8. Locate the section on the trajectory.

Fo r

9. Click Accept Changes the dashboard.

PT

Module 12 | Page 4

In

te rn

from

al
2012 PTC

U se

5. Enable only the following Sketcher Display types:

O
.

nl y

2. Select Sweep Shapes group.

from the Sweep types drop-down menu in the

10. Click OK

. .

11. Click Complete Feature

12. In the model tree, right-click Sketch 1 and select Hide.

5. Click Close in the References dialog box.

Fo r

2012 PTC

PT

4. Select datum planes OFFSET and RIGHT as references, as well as the top surface and two vertices.

In

3. In the graphics window, right-click and select References.

te rn

2. Click Sketch View In Graphics toolbar.

from the

al
Module 12 | Page 5

1. Click Sketch Previous.

and select Use

U se

Task 2:

Create a sketch for the next sweep trajectory.

nl y

6. Select Center and Point from the Circle types drop-down menu and sketch two circles that are tangent to the references. 7. Select Line Chain from the Line types drop-down menu and sketch two vertical lines. The first line should start at the top reference and snap tangent to the top circle. The second line should start at the bottom reference and snap tangent to the bottom circle.

8. Select Line Tangent from the Line types drop-down menu and create the tangent line. 9. Click Delete Segment trim the circle entities. 10. Click OK . 11. Orient to the Standard Orientation. and

Task 3:

Fo r

1. With the sketch still selected, select Sweep from the Sweep types drop-down menu in the Shapes group. 2. Click the magenta arrow to flip the start point to the bottom.

Module 12 | Page 6

PT

Create a sweep that removes material with an open section.

In

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

3. In the dashboard, click Remove Material . Click Create Section .

4. Select Center and Ends from the Arc types drop-down menu and then sketch and dimension the arc. 5. Click OK . .

6. Click Complete Feature

This completes the procedure.

Fo r

2012 PTC

PT

In

te rn

al
Module 12 | Page 7

U se

nl y

Creating Sweeps with Closed Trajectories

A sweep feature consists of a sketched section that sweeps, or traverses, along a trajectory.
Components of a sweep feature: Trajectory Select the trajectory. Define the start point. Section Placed at the trajectory start point, and denoted by crosshairs. Closed or open. If you sketch an open section for the solid feature type, the system automatically toggles to surface. Creation methods: Add/remove solid material. Surface. Thin.

Fo r

You can create a sweep feature to create a constant cross-section feature that follows a trajectory curve. A sweep feature can also have a variable section, but this topic discusses the constant section only. A sweep can add or remove material. It can also be created as a thin feature or as a surface. A sweep feature consists of both a trajectory and a section. If your company has legacy data that contains Simple sweep features, the classic menu manager interface displays when redefining them.

Selecting the Trajectory

The trajectory is the path along which the section sweeps. The trajectory must be selected, rather than sketched. The trajectory can be closed, meaning that it creates a loop, as shown in the figures. It can have sharp or tangent corners. When selecting a trajectory, the following selection methods are available: Select a previously created external sketch.
Module 12 | Page 8 2012 PTC

PT

Creating Sweeps with Closed Trajectories

In

te rn
Figure 2 L Section Swept Along a Closed Trajectory and Trajectory Extruded

al

U se

Figure 1 T Section Sketch Swept Along a Closed Trajectory

nl y

 Select individual curves or edges from existing geometry. To include additional adjacent edges as the trajectory, you can press SHIFT while selecting them. Select an intent chain. Within the Sweep dashboard, you can click Datum and select

at the right end; however, this does not make the Sketch sketch internal to the sweep. You must also select the start point for the section. The start point is the location from which the section begins to sweep, and displays in the graphics window with a magenta arrow. You can drag the start point along the closed loop, or you can press SHIFT to snap the start point to one of the entity endpoints.

Defining the Section

Once the trajectory and start point have been defined, you must sketch the section that will be swept along the trajectory. The sketch plane for the section is placed perpendicular to the trajectory at the start point. The crosshairs seen in the sketching plane represent the intersection of the trajectory and sketch plane.

Causes of a Sweep Failure

Fo r

A trajectory crosses itself. You align or dimension a section to fixed entities, but the orientation of the section changes when it is swept along the 3-D trajectory. A trajectory arc or spline radius is too small relative to the section, and the feature intersects itself while traversing around the arc.

2012 PTC

PT

A constant section sweep feature may fail if one of the following three situations occurs:

In

te rn

The sketched section may be either open or closed. If you try to sketch a solid open section, the system automatically toggles the feature creation to that of a surface. To create the type of solid feature shown in Figure 2, you can sweep the perimeter shape first and then extrude the trajectory sketch upward to fill in the middle.

al

U se

O
Module 12 | Page 9

nl y

PROCEDURE - Creating Sweeps with Closed Trajectories

Close Window Erase Not Displayed SWEEP_CLOSED-TRAJ.PRT

Sweep\Closed-Trajectory_Solid Task 1:

Create a sweep with a closed trajectory.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

5. Right-click in the graphics window and select Sketch. 6. Enable only the following Sketcher Display types: . from the 7. Click Palette Sketching group.

Fo r

8. Select the Profiles tab and drag the T-profile into the graphics window to place it. Edit the Scaling factor to 0.5 and drag the Rotation handle to 180. Right-click the X Location handle and drag it to the midpoint of the bottom horizontal line.

9. Locate the section on the trajectory. 10. Click Accept Changes the dashboard. from

Module 12 | Page 10

PT

In

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

4. Drag the start point to snap to the arc tangent endpoint

3. Select the trajectory in the graphics window.

nl y

from the 2. Select Sweep Sweep types drop-down menu in the Shapes group.

11. Click OK

. .

12. Click Complete Feature

1. Edit the definition of Sweep 1. 2. In the graphics window, right-click and select Sketch. 3. Select Line Chain from the Line types drop-down menu and sketch the vertical line on the vertical reference. and 4. Click Delete Segment trim the left side of the sketch. 5. Click OK .

6. Click Complete Feature

Fo r

7. Click Extrude Shapes group. 8. Select Sketch 2.

PT

9. In the graphics window, right-click the depth handle and select To Selected. Select the green surface shown.

2012 PTC

In

te rn
. from the
Module 12 | Page 11

al

U se

nl y

Task 2:

Edit the section and fill the center of the sweep.

10. Select the upper surface and click Complete Feature .

This completes the procedure.

Fo r

Module 12 | Page 12

PT

In

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

Analyzing Sweep Feature Attributes

You can edit the attributes for the ends of an open trajectory sweep feature.
Select the Merge Ends option on the ends of a sweep feature.

PT

In

te rn
Figure 2 Merge Ends Enabled

Fo r

Analyzing Sweep Feature Attributes

If the trajectory of a sweep feature is open (meaning that the start and end points of the trajectory do not touch), you can enable or disable the Merge Ends attribute for the ends of the sweep feature. The Merge Ends attribute is located in the Options tab in the Sweep dashboard.

Merge Ends disabled Do not attach the sweep ends to the adjacent geometry. This is the default option, and is shown in Figure 1. Merge Ends enabled Merge the ends of the sweep into the adjacent solid. To do this, the sweep ends must touch the other solid geometry. The merged sweep ends are shown in Figure 2.

2012 PTC

al
Module 12 | Page 13

U se

Figure 1 Merge Ends Disabled

nl y

PROCEDURE - Analyzing Sweep Feature Attributes

Close Window Sweep\Attributes Task 1: Erase Not Displayed SWEEP_ATTRIBUTES.PRT

Edit the ends of a sweep feature from free to merged.

1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. Orient to the FRONT view. Notice that there is a gap between the ends of the curved tube and the top and bottom flat surfaces.

3. Edit the definition of Sweep 1. 4. In the dashboard, select the Options tab. Select the Merge ends check box.

Fo r

5. Click Complete Feature . Notice that the gap between the curved tube and the top and bottom flat surfaces no longer appears.

This completes the procedure.

Module 12 | Page 14

PT

In

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

Creating Blends by Selecting Parallel Sections

You can create a blend feature by selecting existing sketches or sections or chains or loops, of a models existing feature edges.
A blend feature must contain two or more sections. Selected sections are connected using a smooth curve. Sections are blended based on selection order. You can reorder or remove sections.

In

Creating Blends by Selecting Parallel Sections

Fo r

You create blend features when you need to create models that contain different transitional cross-sections. For example, a blend feature enables you to create geometry that starts as a circular cross-section, but then changes to a square cross-section as you transition along the length of the feature. Blend features can add or remove material.

Selecting the Sections

A blend feature must contain two or more sections. You can select existing sketches or sections, or chains or loops of a models existing feature edges. The sections you select may be non-parallel, although this functionality is not discussed in this topic. By default, the system connects the selected sections together using a smooth curve. Each section must contain the same number of entities (or vertices). There are two exceptions to this rule: The blend can start or end as a single point.
2012 PTC Module 12 | Page 15

PT

Figure 2 Blending Three Selected Sections

te rn
Figure 3 Blend with Twisting Due to Misaligned Start Points

al

U se

Figure 1 Blend Feature

nl y

 You can add a number of blend vertex points, each of which counts as an entity. For example, a blend vertex placed on a triangular section enables the system to blend to a square. The system essentially connects the points of each section to create the blend feature.

Section Start Points

Each section has its own start point. The start points should correspond between sections to avoid a twisting effect in the resulting blend feature. You can individually drag the start point for each section to a different vertex in that section. In Figure 3, the start point for Section 2 is in a different location, resulting in the twisting effect. In Figures 1 and 2, the start points are properly aligned. The start point arrow direction can be flipped, but this does not affect blending.

Manipulating Selected Sections

Consider the following regarding manipulating selected blend sections: By default, sections are blended together in the order of selection. However, you can always move sections up or down in the blend order. You can remove sections. The offset, or depth, between sections is based on the selected sections depth with respect to the other selected sections. You cannot specify a different depth. When defining a blend feature, only one section is considered the active section at any time. To set a given section as the active section, you can either select it from the Sections tab in the dashboard, or you can select the section leader note in the graphics window. The selected section then changes color, and all right-click options pertain to this active section. In Figures 2 and 3, Section 2 is the active section.

Fo r

Module 12 | Page 16

PT

In

te rn

al

U se

O
2012 PTC

nl y

PROCEDURE - Creating Blends by Selecting Parallel Sections

Close Window Erase Not Displayed BLEND_SELECT_1.PRT

Blend\Select-Sections_Parallel_Solid Task 1:

Select existing sections to create a 3-section blend.

1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. Notice the three Sketch features in the graphics window.

7. Select Sketch 3 as the second section.

Fo r

8. In the Sections tab, click Insert. 9. Select Sketch 2 as the third section. 10. Notice the blend is following the order of selection.

2012 PTC

PT

6. In the Sections tab, click Insert.

5. Select Sketch 1 as the first section.

In

4. In the dashboard, select the Sections tab. Select Selected sections.

te rn
Module 12 | Page 17

3. In the ribbon, click the Shapes group drop-down menu and select Blend .

al

U se

nl y

11. With Section 3 still selected, click Move Up in the Sections tab. 12. Notice that Section 3 is now reordered as #2 in the blend feature.

15. Select Sketch 2 as the second section. 16. Right-click in the graphics window and select Insert. 17. Select Section 3 as the third section.

19. Each section has four entities.

Fo r

20. In the graphics window, select the #2 Section 2 leader note to activate the section.

21. Drag the start point to the upper-right vertex. 22. Click Preview Feature .

Module 12 | Page 18

PT

In

18. In the Sections tab, notice the # display for each blend section.

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

14. Right-click in the graphics window and select Insert.

13. With Section 3 still selected, click Remove in the Sections tab. Right-click Section 2 and select Remove.

nl y

23. Click Resume Feature

24. Drag the Section 2 start point back to the upper-left vertex.

25. Click Complete Feature the dashboard.

from

27. Right-click and select Hide.

This completes the procedure.

Fo r

2012 PTC

PT

In

te rn
Module 12 | Page 19

al

U se

26. In the model tree, select Sketch 1, press CTRL, and select Sketch 2 and Sketch 3.

nl y

Creating Blends by Sketching Sections

You can create a blend feature by sketching the sections through a series of Sketcher sessions while within the Blend tool.
A blend feature must contain two or more sections. Sketched sections are connected using a smooth curve. Section sketch plane is projected: Offset dimension Reference Sections are blended based on order of insertion. You can remove sections.

Figure 1 Blends Adding and Removing Material

Creating Blends by Sketching Sections

You create blend features when you need to create models that contain different transitional cross-sections. For example, a blend feature enables you to create geometry that starts as a circular cross-section, but then changes to a square cross-section as you transition along the length of the feature. Blend features can add or remove material.

Fo r

Sketching the Sections

A blend feature consists of a series of parallel sketches. The blend feature must contain two or more sections. You can sketch the sections through a series of Sketcher sessions while within the Blend tool. If desired, you can reference previous geometry from section to section. Each section must contain the same number of entities (or vertices). There are two exceptions to this rule: The blend can start or end as a single point. You can add a number of blend vertex points, each of which counts as an entity. For example, a blend vertex placed on a triangular section enables
Module 12 | Page 20 2012 PTC

PT

Figure 2 Sketching a Section

In

te rn
Figure 3 Projecting the Sections

al

U se

nl y

the system to blend to a square. The system essentially connects the points of each section to create the blend feature.

Specifying the Depth of Sketched Sections

By default, the system connects the sketched sections together using a smooth curve. After Section 1, the depth by which each subsequent section is offset can be defined using two methods: Offset dimension Enables you to specify the distance by which the sections sketch plane is offset. By default, the section is offset by a specified distance from the previously created section. However, you can select any other section in the blend feature from which to offset a new section. Reference Enables you to define the sections sketch plane location by selecting a reference. For example, you can select a datum plane. This depth option of an extrude feature. option is similar to the To Selected

Manipulating Sketched Sections

Consider the following regarding manipulating sketched blend sections: By default, sections are blended together in the order they are inserted. You cannot switch the order. You can remove sections. When defining a blend feature, only one section is considered the active section at any time. To set a given section as the active section, you can either select it from the Sections tab in the dashboard, or you can select the section leader note in the graphics window. The selected section then changes color, and all right-click options pertain to this active section.

Fo r

2012 PTC

PT

In

te rn

al

Each section has its own start point. The start points should correspond between sections to avoid a twisting effect in the resulting blend feature. You can manage start points within each sketched section. In Figure 2, the start point in the sketch is at the upper-left corner.

U se

Section Start Points

nl y

Module 12 | Page 21

PROCEDURE - Creating Blends by Sketching Sections

Close Window Erase Not Displayed BLEND_SKETCH_1.PRT

Blend\Sketch-Sections_Solid Task 1:

Sketch sections to create a 3-section blend. .

1. Enable only the following Datum Display types:

3. In the dashboard, select the Sections tab. Select Sketched sections, if necessary. Click Define. 4. Select datum plane FRONT and click Sketch. 5. Disable Plane Display 6. Enable only the following Sketcher Display types: . .

Fo r

10. Click One-by-One , edit the horizontal dimension to 18, and edit the vertical dimension to 16. 11. Click OK .

12. Select the Sections tab. 13. Notice that you are now defining Section 2. 14. Notice that the default offset dimension is from Section 1. 15. Click Sketch.

Module 12 | Page 22

PT

9. Extend the rectangle up and to the right, and click again to place the rectangle.

8. Select the reference origin as the rectangle start point.

In

7. Select Center Rectangle from the Rectangle types drop-down menu in the Sketching group.

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

2. In the ribbon, click the Shapes group drop-down menu and select Blend .

16. Click Center Rectangle

17. Select the new section reference origin as the rectangle start point. 18. Extend the rectangle up and to the right, and click again to place the rectangle. 19. Click One-by-One , edit the horizontal dimension to 4, and edit the vertical dimension to 6. 20. Click OK .

22. Click Insert. 23. Notice that you are now creating Section 3. 24. Notice that the default offset dimension is from Section 2. 25. Select Section 1 from the Offset from drop-down list and edit the value to 26. 26. Click Sketch.

Fo r

30. Click One-by-One , edit the horizontal dimension to 12, and edit the vertical dimension to 10. .

31. Click OK

32. Notice the twist between the second and third section. 33. In the graphics window, select the #2 Section 2 leader note. 34. Drag the depth to approximately 16.

2012 PTC

PT

29. Extend the rectangle up and to the left, and click again to place the rectangle.

28. Select the new section reference origin as the rectangle start point.

In

27. Click Center Rectangle

te rn
.
Module 12 | Page 23

al

U se

21. Select the Sections tab.

nl y

35. In the graphics window, select the #3 Section 3 leader note. 36. Right-click and select Sketch. 37. Select the upper-left vertex, right-click, and select Start Point. 38. Click OK .

39. Click Complete Feature

Task 2:

Redefine the blend to reference datum planes.

1. Enable Plane Display

3. Click in the background to de-select all features. 4. Right-click Blend 2 and select Edit Definition.

Fo r

5. In the dashboard, select the Sections tab. Select Section 2. Select Reference. Select datum plane DTM2.

Module 12 | Page 24

PT

2. Click the Operations group drop-down menu and select Resume > Resume Last Set.

In

te rn
.

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

6. In the Sections tab, select Section 3. Select Reference. Select datum plane DTM3. 7. Disable Plane Display 8. Click Complete Feature . .

Task 3:

Redefine the blend to remove material from the previous blend.

2. In the model tree, select Blend 2. 3. Notice this blend is inside of the newly resumed blend feature.

4. Right-click Blend 2 and select Edit Definition. 5. In the dashboard, click Remove Material . 6. Click Complete Feature

PT

In

Fo r

This completes the procedure.

2012 PTC

te rn
.
Module 12 | Page 25

al

U se

1. Click the Operations group drop-down menu and select Resume > Resume Last Set.

nl y

Analyzing Blend Options

You can edit the option for connecting blend sections to smooth or straight.
Blend sections can be connected: Smooth Straight

Figure 1 Options for Connecting Blend Sections

Fo r

When the sections of a Blend feature are projected, you can connect the sections by two methods: Smooth The blend sections are connected using smooth curves, as shown in Figure 2. This is the default option. Straight The blend sections are connected using straight lines, as shown in Figure 3.

Module 12 | Page 26

PT

Analyzing Blend Options

Figure 2 Smooth Blend Option Result

In

te rn
Figure 3 Straight Blend Option Result

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

PROCEDURE - Analyzing Blend Options

Close Window Erase Not Displayed BLEND_OPTIONS.PRT

Blend\Options_Solid Task 1:

Experiment with various options available for a Blend feature.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

4. Click Complete Feature

In

Fo r

2012 PTC

PT

te rn
.
Module 12 | Page 27

al

3. In the dashboard, select the Options tab. Select Straight.

U se

nl y

2. In the model tree, right-click Blend 1 and select Edit Definition.

5. In the model tree, right-click Blend 2 and select Edit Definition. 6. In the dashboard, select the Options tab. Select Straight. 7. Click Complete Feature .

8. Click the Operations group drop-down menu and select Resume > Resume Last Set.

Fo r

Module 12 | Page 28

PT

In

This completes the procedure.

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

Module

13
U se O te rn al
Module 13 | Page 1

Creating Holes, Shells, and Draft

Module Overview

In addition to creating features that begin with 2-D sketches and proceeding to solid features, you can also create features that are applied directly to a model. In this module, you learn how to create various types of holes on a model, how to shell a model, and how to apply basic draft to features.

Objectives

Fo r

After completing this module, you will be able to: Create coaxial, linear, radial, and diameter holes, as well as understand the different depth options available. Understand the different hole profile options. Create shell features. Create draft features. Create basic split drafts. Analyze draft hinges and pull direction.

2012 PTC

PT

In

nl y

Common Dashboard Options: Hole Depth

You can drill a hole to several different depth options.
Hole depth options: Blind Symmetric To Next Through Until To Selected Through All Side 1/Side 2 Set using dashboard or right-clicking drag handle

Figure 1 Hole Depth Options

Common Dashboard Options: Hole Depth

Blind (Variable) This is the default depth option. You can edit this depth value by dragging the drag handle, editing the dimension on the model, or using the dashboard. Symmetric The hole bores equally on both sides of the placement plane. You can edit the total depth at which the hole bores, in the same way you can with the Blind depth option. The Symmetric depth is actually a Blind Symmetric depth. To Next This option ensures that the hole depth stops at the next surface encountered. A depth dimension is not required, as the next surface controls the hole depth. Through Until This option ensures that the hole stops at the selected surface. A depth dimension is not required, as the selected surface controls the hole depth. Note that the hole must pass through the selected surface. To Selected This option ensures that the hole stops at the selected surface. A depth dimension is not required, as the selected surface controls the hole depth. Unlike the Through Until depth option, the hole does not have to pass through the selected surface. Through All This option causes the hole to drill through the entire model. A depth dimension is not required, as the model itself controls the hole depth. Side 1/Side 2 You can independently control the hole depth on each side of the placement plane. By default, the hole drills on Side 1; however, you can opt to drill the hole on Side 2 as well. Any of the previous hole depth options, except Symmetric, can be used for either side.
Module 13 | Page 2

Fo r

PT

In

te rn

When you create a hole, the depth at which the hole drills into a model can be set in a variety of ways depending upon the design intent you wish to capture. You can specify the desired depth option using the Hole dashboard or by right-clicking the drag handle in the graphics window. Hole depth options include:

al

U se

O
2012 PTC

nl y

The To Next and Through All options only consider geometry which is currently present (in the feature order) when the hole is created. Features you create after the hole is created do not impact the depth of the hole. You can also switch depth options by right-clicking the drag handle in the graphics window.

Fo r

2012 PTC

PT

In

te rn

al
Module 13 | Page 3

U se

nl y

PROCEDURE - Common Dashboard Options: Hole Depth

Close Window Hole\Depth Task 1: Erase Not Displayed HOLE_DEPTHS.PRT

Redefine the depth options of the six holes.

1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. Edit the definition of BLIND_1. 3. Edit the depth value to 0.5. 4. Click Complete Feature .

5. Edit the definition of BLIND_2. 6. Edit the depth value to 2.25. 7. Click Complete Feature .

10. Click Complete Feature

PT

9. Edit the depth to To Next .

8. Edit the definition of TO_NEXT. .

Fo r

11. Edit the definition of TO_SELECTED. 12. Edit the depth to To Selected and select the surface. 13. Click Complete Feature .

Module 13 | Page 4

In

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

14. Edit the definition of THRU_ALL. 15. Edit the depth to Through All . 16. Click Complete Feature .

20. Edit the depth to Through All . 21. In the dashboard, select the Shape tab and edit the Side 2 depth to Through All . 22. Click Complete Feature .

Fo r

This completes the procedure.

2012 PTC

PT

24. Click the Operations group drop-down menu and select Resume > Resume All to resume the suppressed feature CUT and view the holes.

In

23. Disable Plane Display

te rn
.

al
Module 13 | Page 5

U se

19. Edit the depth to Symmetric

18. Edit the definition of SYMMETRIC. Notice the hole placement plane is a floating datum plane.

nl y

17. Enable Plane Display

Creating Coaxial Holes

A coaxial hole is placed at the intersection of an axis and a surface.
Placement references: Datum axis Surface or datum plane Offset references: None

Hole Creation Theory

Fo r

When creating hole features on a model, you locate holes by selecting placement (primary) and offset (secondary) references. The first piece of geometry selected to place the hole is the placement reference. Next, you either select additional placement references or offset references to further dimensionally constrain the hole feature. The type of geometry selected as the placement reference determines the type of hole being created.

Creating Coaxial Holes

To create a coaxial hole, you only select placement references. An axis is selected as the first placement reference. This axis identifies the location of the hole. A second placement reference, either a surface or datum plane, is then selected to specify the surface where the hole starts drilling into the model. In Figures 1 and 2, the datum axis and front surface comprise the placement references. You can also view your selected references in the Placement tab of the dashboard. Once the hole references are satisfied, the hole preview displays with a default diameter dimension and depth value. You can edit these values by using the drag handles or dashboard, or by editing the dimensions on the model.
Module 13 | Page 6 2012 PTC

PT

In

te rn

al
Figure 2 Coaxial Holes

U se

Figure 1 Selecting Placement References

nl y

PROCEDURE - Creating Coaxial Holes

Close Window Hole\Coaxial Task 1: Erase Not Displayed HOLES_COAXIAL.PRT

Create two coaxial holes in the model: one Through All and the other of Blind depth.

1. Enable only the following Datum 2. From the Engineering group, . click Hole 3. Press CTRL and select datum axis A_1 and the front surface. 4. Edit the diameter to 1. 5. Edit the depth to Through All . 6. Click Complete Feature 7. Click Hole . .

8. Press CTRL and select datum axis A_2 and the front surface.

10. Edit the diameter to 1.5. 11. Edit the depth value to 0.25.

Fo r

12. Click Complete Feature

PT

9. From the Hole dashboard, select the Placement tab. Notice that your selected references are added to the collector.

In

This completes the procedure.

2012 PTC

te rn
.

al
Module 13 | Page 7

U se

nl y

Display types:

Creating Linear Holes

A linear hole is created by selecting one placement reference and two offset references.
Placement references: Datum plane or surface Offset references: Datum plane or surface Edge Datum axis

In

Figure 2 Selecting Offset References

Hole Creation Theory

Fo r

When creating hole features on a model, you locate holes by selecting placement (primary) and offset (secondary) references. The first piece of geometry selected to place the hole is the placement reference. Next, you either select additional placement references or offset references to further dimensionally constrain the hole feature. The type of geometry selected as the placement reference determines the type of hole being created.

Creating Linear Holes

To create a linear hole, a planar surface is selected as the placement reference. This surface identifies where the hole starts 'drilling' into the model. Two offset references are then selected to dimensionally constrain the hole feature. In Figure 1 on this slide, the front surface of the model is the placement reference. In Figure 2, the top surface and datum plane are the offset references. You can select offset references directly from the model or you can drag the green reference handles to the desired reference. You can view your selected references in the reference collectors in the Placement tab of the dashboard. Within this tab, you can edit offset reference values as well as modify whether the hole is offset or aligned to an offset reference. In Figure 2, the hole is aligned to the datum plane.
Module 13 | Page 8 2012 PTC

PT

te rn
Figure 3 Completed Hole

al

U se

Figure 1 Selecting Placement Reference

nl y

PROCEDURE - Creating Linear Holes

Close Window Hole\Linear Task 1: Erase Not Displayed HOLES_LINEAR.PRT

Create two different linear holes on a model.

1. Enable only the following Datum Display type: .

8. Click Complete Feature

PT

In

7. Edit the hole diameter to 1.50 and the depth value to 2.

Fo r

2012 PTC

te rn
.

6. Edit the offset values to 3.5 from the top surface and 3.0 from datum plane DTM1.

al
Module 13 | Page 9

5. Press CTRL and select the top surface and datum plane DTM1.

U se

4. Right-click and select Offset References Collector.

3. Select the front surface.

nl y

2. From the Engineering group, . click Hole

9. Click Hole

10. Select the front surface.

14. Edit the hole diameter to 1.50 and the depth value to 2.

Fo r

15. Click Complete Feature

PT

13. In the dashboard, select the Placement tab. In the Offset References collector, select Align from the DTM1 drop-down list. Edit the offset value to 3.5 from the top surface.

This completes the procedure.

Module 13 | Page 10

In

te rn
.

al
2012 PTC

U se

12. Press CTRL and select the top surface and datum plane DTM1.

11. Right-click and select Offset References Collector.

nl y

Creating Radial and Diameter Holes

Radial and diameter holes are created by selecting one placement reference and two offset references.
On a cylindrical surface: Create radial holes only. One offset reference for offset. One offset reference for angle. On a planar surface: Create either radial or diameter holes. One datum axis. One surface or datum plane for angle. Angle value based on quadrant of pick point from axis.

Figure 1 Radial and Diameter Holes

In

te rn
Hole Creation Theory

Fo r

When creating hole features on a model, you locate holes by selecting placement (primary) and offset (secondary) references. The first piece of geometry selected to place the hole is the placement reference. Next, you either select additional placement references or offset references to further dimensionally constrain the hole feature. The type of geometry selected as the placement reference determines the type of hole being created.

Creating Radial Holes on a Cylindrical Placement Surface

You can create a radial hole on a cylindrical surface by selecting the cylindrical surface as the placement reference. Furthermore, if the placement reference is a cylindrical surface, you can only create a radial hole. This cylindrical surface identifies where the hole starts drilling into the model. For a radial hole, the specific location chosen on this surface determines the direction from which the angle is measured. For example, in Figure 2, if the surface was chosen below the datum plane, the measured angle would be 45 clockwise from the datum plane instead of measuring 315
2012 PTC Module 13 | Page 11

PT

Figure 3 Diameter Hole

al

U se
Figure 2 Cylindrical Surface Radial Hole Figure 4 Planar Surface Radial Hole

nl y

counterclockwise. To flip the hole to the same angle on the opposite side of the datum plane, you can simply specify a negative value. Two offset references are then selected from which to dimension the hole. You can select references directly from the model or you can drag the green reference handles to the desired reference. The first offset reference is a planar reference from which to offset the hole, and the second is a planar reference to determine the angle. In Figure 2, the offset references are the front surface of the model and the datum plane.

Creating Radial or Diameter Holes on a Planar Placement Surface

You can select a planar surface as the placement reference to create both a radial or diameter hole. This placement reference identifies where the hole starts drilling into the model. For a radial hole, the specific location chosen on this surface determines the location from which the angle is measured. For example, in Figure 4, if the surface was chosen above the datum plane but to the right instead of the left, the measured angle would be 65 counterclockwise from the datum plane instead of measuring 115 clockwise. To flip the hole to the same angle on the opposite side of the datum plane, you can simply specify a negative value. Two offset references are then selected from which to dimension the hole. The first offset reference is an axis from which to locate the hole radially, and the second is a planar reference to determine the angle. For the planar placement radial hole in Figure 4, the secondary references are datum axis A_2 and the datum plane. For the diameter hole in Figure 3, the secondary references are datum axis A_2 and the datum plane. If a planar surface is selected as the placement reference, you can toggle the hole type between Linear, Radial, and Diameter. When you toggle the hole type, the offset references automatically toggle between radius, diameter, angle, or offsets.

Fo r

Module 13 | Page 12

PT

In

te rn

al

U se

nl y

2012 PTC

PROCEDURE - Creating Radial and Diameter Holes

Close Window Erase Not Displayed HOLES_RADIAL_DIAMETER.PRT

Hole\Radial_Diameter Task 1:

Create radial and diameter holes on a model.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

3. Select the cylindrical surface.

4. Right-click and select Offset References Collector. 5. Press CTRL and select datum plane TOP and the front surface. 6. In the dashboard, select the Placement tab. Edit the offset angle to 45 from datum plane TOP. Edit the offset axial value to 0.40 from the front surface. 7. Edit the diameter to 0.40 and the . hole depth to To Next

In

9. Click Hole

PT

10. Select the front surface.

Fo r

11. Right-click and select Offset References Collector. 12. Press CTRL and select datum axis A_2 and datum plane TOP.

2012 PTC

8. Click Complete Feature .

te rn
.
Module 13 | Page 13

al

U se

nl y

2. From the Engineering group, . click Hole

13. In the dashboard, select the Placement tab. Edit the hole Type from Linear to Radial. Edit the radius to 0.5 from datum axis A_2. Edit the angle to either 65 or -65 to attain the proper direction above datum plane TOP. 14. Edit the diameter to 0.40 and the . hole depth to To Next 15. Click Complete Feature 16. Click Hole . .

17. Select the front surface.

18. Right-click and select Offset References Collector. 19. Press CTRL and select datum axis A_2 and datum plane RIGHT. 20. In the dashboard, select the Placement tab. Edit the hole Type from Linear to Diameter. Edit the diameter to 1.5 from datum axis A_2. Edit the angle to either 60 or -60 to attain the proper direction from datum plane RIGHT. 21. Edit the hole diameter to 0.50 and the hole depth to Through . All 22. Click Complete Feature .

Fo r

This completes the procedure.

Module 13 | Page 14 2012 PTC

PT

In

te rn

al

U se

nl y

Exploring Hole Profile Options

You can add a drill point to your hole and add countersinks or counterbores.
Hole profile options include: Rectangle hole profile Drill point profile Add counterbore Add countersink Exit countersink Lightweight hole display Dimension drill point profile to: Shoulder Tip

te rn Fo r
Figure 2 Drill Point Dimensioning Schemes

PT

In

Exploring Hole Profile Options

When you create a hole in Creo Parametric, the default profile is a rectangular shape, as shown in the top hole in Figure 1. This is the Rectangle hole profile. Other hole profiles and options available include, and are shown in Figure 1, respectively: Drill point profile Adds the drill tip to the hole profile. You can edit the drill tip angle. Add counterbore Creates a counterbore on the hole. You can edit the counterbore diameter and depth. Add countersink Creates a countersink on the hole. You can edit the countersink angle and diameter. You can also create an exit countersink on a Through All hole.
2012 PTC Module 13 | Page 15

al
Figure 1 Hole Profile Options Figure 3 The Shape Tab

U se

nl y

 Lightweight hole display Creates a hole that displays as a ring on the placement surface. Toggling a hole feature to lightweight hole display affects the model's mass properties.

Dimensioning the Hole Depth for the Drill Point Profile

When you select the drill point profile, you can dimension the hole depth following two different methods: Shoulder You are able to specify the depth of the drilled hole to the end of the shoulder. This is shown in the left image in Figure 2. Tip You are able to specify the depth of the drilled hole to the tip of the hole. This is shown in the right image in Figure 2.

The Dashboard Shape Tab

Fo r

Module 13 | Page 16

PT

In

te rn

Edit hole diameter and depth. Edit drill tip angle. Edit counterbore diameter and depth. Edit countersink diameter and angle. Enable an exit countersink on a Through All hole.

al
2012 PTC

U se

At any time during the hole creation process, you can select the Shape tab from the dashboard to view the hole profile you are creating. This hole profile image updates automatically as you modify hole profile options, enabling you to preview the final result. Within the Shape tab, you can perform the following operations:

nl y

PROCEDURE - Exploring Hole Profile Options

Close Window Hole\Profiles Task 1: Erase Not Displayed HOLE_PROFILES.PRT

Redefine four holes to modify their profiles.

1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. Edit the definition of HOLE_1.

8. Edit the definition of HOLE_3. 9. In the dashboard, click Drill Hole . Profile Select the Shape tab to view the profile. Click Counterbore 10. Click Complete Feature . .

Fo r

2012 PTC

PT

7. Click Complete Feature

Click Tip Depth

In

6. In the dashboard, click Drill Hole . Profile Select the Shape tab to view the profile. . .

te rn
Module 13 | Page 17

5. Edit the definition of HOLE_2.

al

U se

4. Click Complete Feature

nl y

3. In the dashboard, click Drill Hole Profile .

11. Edit the definition of HOLE_4. 12. In the dashboard, click Drill Hole . Profile Select the Shape tab to view the profile. . Click Countersink Edit the hole depth to Through . All Select the Exit Countersink check box. 13. Click Complete Feature .

15. Edit the definition of HOLE_2. 16. In the dashboard, click Rectangle Hole Profile Click Lightweight Hole 17. Click Complete Feature .

PT

In

Fo r

18. De-select the feature.

This completes the procedure.

Module 13 | Page 18

te rn
. .

al
2012 PTC

U se

14. Click the Operations group drop-down menu and select Resume > Resume All to resume the EXTRUDE_CUT feature and compare holes.

nl y

Creating Shell Features

The Shell feature hollows out the inside of a solid model, leaving a shell of a specified wall thickness.
To create a basic shell feature: Select surfaces for removal. Specify thickness.

Figure 1 Original Model

In

Figure 2 Shelled Model with Surfaces Removed

te rn
Figure 3 Hollowed Out Model
Module 13 | Page 19

Fo r

Select Surfaces for Removal Select the surface(s) you want to remove from the model. You may decide not to remove surfaces from the shell, which results in the creation of a closed shell. A closed shell is an entirely hollowed out part. Thickness Specify the thickness of the model walls that remain. You create shells in the design process to support your design intent. However, be aware that several features could reference a shell created early in the design process.

Shells can be created using the Lead or Follow workflow. You can use drag handles or the dashboard to modify the thickness of the shell feature. in the dashboard is equivalent Clicking Change Thickness Direction to specifying a negative shell value.

2012 PTC

PT

Shell features remove surfaces to hollow out a design model, leaving walls with specified thickness values. There are two parts to the creation of a basic shell feature:

Creating Shell Features

al

U se

nl y

PROCEDURE - Creating Shell Features

Close Window Shell\Shell Task 1: Erase Not Displayed SHELL.PRT

Create a shell feature in a model.

1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. From the Engineering group, 3. Click Complete Feature create a hollow shell. to

4. Edit the definition of Shell 1. 5. Select the top surface to remove it. 6. Edit the thickness to 20. 7. Click Complete Feature .

8. Edit the definition of Shell 1.

Fo r

This completes the procedure.

Module 13 | Page 20

PT

10. Click Complete Feature

9. Press CTRL and select the left and right surfaces to remove them. .

In

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

click Shell

Creating Draft Features

Draft features are typically used as finishing features in molded and cast parts.
Draft features consist of: Draft surfaces Draft hinges Pull direction Draft angles

Figure 1 Draft One or Multiple Surfaces

Creating Draft Features Theory

You can use draft features as finishing features in molded and cast parts, or anywhere sloped or angled surfaces need to be created. You can define several types of draft features by selecting different combinations of curves, edges, surfaces, and planes for the draft surfaces, draft hinges, pull direction, and split plane (optional). Drafts can add or remove material from a model. A basic draft feature consists of the following four items: Draft surfaces These are the surfaces that are to be drafted. You can select a single surface, multiple individual surfaces, or loop surfaces as the draft surfaces. In Figure 1, the left image has one surface drafted, while the right image has four surfaces drafted. Draft hinge Determines the location on the model that remains the same size after the draft is created. The draft surfaces pivot about their intersection with this plane. There does not have to be a physical intersection. Rather, the intersection can be extrapolated. You can select a datum plane, solid model surface, curve chain, or surface quilt as the draft hinge. In Figure 2, the same model was drafted at the same angle, but with the specified draft hinge progressively lower in the model, as highlighted. Pull direction Direction that is used to measure the draft angle. The pull direction is also called the reference plane. By default, the pull direction is the same as the draft hinge. The direction reference is used to define
2012 PTC Module 13 | Page 21

Fo r

PT

In

Figure 2 Same Model, Same Draft Angle, and Different Draft Hinges

te rn

al

U se

nl y

the draft angle direction, and the draft angle is measured normal to this reference. You can select a datum plane, planar model surface, linear reference such as an edge or two points, or a coordinate system axis. The mold opening, or pull direction, is usually normal to this plane. Draft angle Values range from -30 degrees to +30 degrees. When you specify the draft angle, you can reverse the direction from which material is added or removed by typing a negative value, clicking Reverse Angle in the dashboard, or right-clicking the angle drag handle and selecting Flip Angle. You can also toggle the different collectors for draft surfaces, draft hinges, and pull direction by right-clicking in the graphics window.

Best Practices

Fo r

Module 13 | Page 22

PT

In

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

If possible, create draft features as some of the last features of your model.

nl y

PROCEDURE - Creating Draft Features

Close Window Draft\Draft Task 1: Erase Not Displayed DRAFT.PRT

Draft three features using three different methods.

1. Enable only the following Datum Display types: .

Click Reverse Angle

5. Click Complete Feature 6. Click Draft

Fo r

8. In the dashboard, click in the Draft hinges collector and select datum plane DTM2. Edit the draft angle to -10. 9. Click Complete Feature .

2012 PTC

PT

7. Press CTRL and select the four vertical surfaces to draft.

In

te rn
. .
Module 13 | Page 23

4. In the dashboard, select the References tab. Click in the Draft hinges collector and select the top cylinder surface. Edit the draft angle to 10.

al

U se

3. Select the cylinder surface to draft.

2. In the ribbon, select Draft from the Draft types drop-down menu in the Engineering group.

nl y

10. Click Draft

11. Press CTRL and select the four vertical surfaces to draft. 12. Right-click and select Draft Hinges. 13. Select the top surface of the main protrusion. 14. Edit the draft angle to -10. 15. Click Complete Feature .

This completes the procedure.

Fo r

Module 13 | Page 24

PT

In

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

16. Orient to the FRONT view and compare the differences in the results of the rectangular protrusions.

nl y

Creating Basic Split Drafts

Split draft enables you to apply different draft angles to different portions of a surface.
Split options include: No split Split by split object Select a plane Split by draft hinge Side options: Independently Dependently First/Second side only Draft tangent surfaces check box

Figure 2 Drafting Sides Dependently

In

Creating Draft Splits Theory

Fo r

You can create draft features with or without split. Splitting a draft enables you to apply different draft angles to different portions of a surface.

Splitting the Draft

You can split a draft feature in two different ways: Split by Split Object Split the draft using a specified datum plane or surface. Split by Draft Hinge Split the draft using the specified draft hinge.

Side Options
Once you split the draft, there are four different options available to control how the draft is handled on either side of the split: Draft sides independently Enables you to specify two independent draft angles for each side of the drafted surface. If you use this option, the system adds a second draft angle to the dashboard. In Figure 1, both sides are drafted independently with different draft angles.
2012 PTC Module 13 | Page 25

PT

te rn
Figure 3 Drafting First Side Only

al

U se

Figure 1 Drafting Sides Independently

nl y

 Draft sides dependently Enables you to specify a single draft angle, with the second side drafted in the opposite direction at the same draft angle. In Figure 2, both sides are drafted dependently. Draft first side only Drafts only the first side of the surface, with the second side remaining in the neutral, undrafted position. In Figure 3, only the first side is drafted. Draft second side only Drafts only the second side of the surface, with the first side remaining in the neutral, undrafted position.

Draft Tangent Surfaces

By default, the system automatically drafts any surfaces tangent to those selected for drafting. For example, you can select half of a cylinder, and the system drafts the entire 360 degrees around the cylinder. You can disable this behavior by clearing the Draft tangent surfaces check box in the Options tab of the dashboard.

Fo r

Module 13 | Page 26

PT

In

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

PROCEDURE - Creating Basic Split Drafts

Close Window Draft\Split Task 1: Erase Not Displayed DRAFT_SPLIT.PRT

Redefine three draft features and add split to them.

1. Enable only the following Datum Display types: .

4. Click Complete Feature

5. Edit the definition of Draft 2.

7. Edit Angle 2 to -10.

In

6. In the dashboard, select the Split tab. Edit the Split option to Split by draft hinge. Select Side option Draft sides independently.

9. Edit the definition of Draft 3. 10. In the dashboard, select the Split tab. Edit the Split option to Split by draft hinge. Select Side option Draft sides dependently. 11. Click Complete Feature This completes the procedure. .

Fo r

2012 PTC

PT

8. Click Complete Feature

te rn
.
Module 13 | Page 27

al

U se

3. In the dashboard, select the Split tab. Edit the Split option to Split by draft hinge. Select Side option Draft first side only.

nl y

2. Edit the definition of Draft 1.

Analyzing Draft Hinges and Pull Direction

You can select different references for the draft hinge and pull direction.
The draft hinge and pull direction can be different. You can reverse, or flip, the angle about the draft hinge. You can reverse, or flip, the pull direction.

Figure 1 Pull Direction and Draft Hinge Same, Different

Figure 2 References Tab

PT

In

Fo r

Analyzing Draft Hinges and Pull Direction

By default, the pull direction is the same as the draft hinge. That is, the same reference is used for both the pull direction and the draft hinge, as shown in the upper image in Figure 1. However, you can select different references for the draft hinge and pull direction. In the lower image in Figure 1, the pull direction has been switched to the datum plane. The resulting geometry is therefore different, even though the draft hinge is the same. You can further manipulate the draft hinge and pull direction in either of the following ways: You can reverse the angle about the draft hinge to add or remove material. You can reverse the pull direction by flipping it 180 degrees. In Figure 3, the pull direction has been reversed, as shown by the magenta arrow. Because it is measured normal to the pull direction, the draft angle effectively reverses.
Module 13 | Page 28 2012 PTC

te rn
Figure 3 Pull Direction Reversed

al

U se

nl y

PROCEDURE - Analyzing Draft Hinges and Pull Direction

Close Window Erase Not Displayed DRAFT_PULL-HINGE_DIR.PRT

Draft\Hinge-Direction Task 1:

Experiment with draft hinges and pull direction in a part model.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

5. Notice the loop surfaces are now selected.

6. Right-click and select Draft Hinges.

9. Click Named Views select FRONT.

PT

8. Drag the draft angle inwards to 10.

In

7. Select the large, angled surface on which the small rectangle lies.

Fo r

10. In the dashboard, select the References tab. 11. Notice the Draft surface, Draft hinge, and Pull direction. The Draft hinge and Pull direction are the same surface.

2012 PTC

te rn
and
Module 13 | Page 29

al

U se

4. Press SHIFT and select the top edge of the small rectangle.

3. Select the top surface of the small rectangle.

nl y

2. In the ribbon, select Draft from the Draft types drop-down menu.

12. Enable Plane Display 13. Right-click and select Pull Direction. 14. Select datum plane TOP. 15. Disable Plane Display

16. Notice the difference in draft.

20. Click Reverse Angle

22. Click Complete Feature

PT

21. Press CTRL+D to orient to the Standard Orientation. .

Fo r

This completes the procedure.

Module 13 | Page 30

In

te rn
again.

al
2012 PTC

19. In the dashboard, click Reverse Angle .

U se

18. Click Reverse Pull Direction again.

nl y

17. In the dashboard, click Reverse Pull Direction .

Module

14
U se O te rn al
Module 14 | Page 1

Creating Rounds and Chamfers

Module Overview

Once you have created the bulk of your part model, you can further refine it by adding finishing features such as rounds and chamfers. In this module, you learn how to create rounds and chamfers.

Objectives

Fo r

2012 PTC

PT

After completing this module, you will be able to: Create rounds by selecting edges, a surface and an edge, and two surfaces. Create full rounds. Create round sets. Create chamfers by selecting edges and understand the different chamfer dimensioning schemes. Create chamfer sets.

In

nl y

Creating Rounds Theory

Rounds add or remove material by creating smooth transitions between existing geometry.
Rounds can add or remove material. You can select edges or surfaces.

Figure 2 Round Preview: Removing Material

PT

In

Fo r

Creating Rounds Theory

Rounds add or remove material by creating smooth transitions between existing geometry. In Figure 3, one round adds material and the other removes material. When creating round features on a model, Creo Parametric awaits the selection of edges and/or surfaces to be used as references. The round tool adapts according to the references that you select to create the round feature. After the references are selected, the round preview displays with a default radius dimension, which can be modified by using the radius drag handle, editing the dimension on the model, or using the dashboard. In Figures 1 and 2, the round preview is shown.

Module 14 | Page 2

te rn
Figure 3 Completed Rounds

al
2012 PTC

U se

Figure 1 Round Preview: Adding Material

nl y

Creating Rounds by Selecting Edges

The rounds created by selecting edges are constructed tangent to the surfaces adjacent to the selected edges.
You can select one or more edge. Rounds propagate around tangent edges.

In

Fo r

You can create rounds by selecting an edge or a combination of edges. Each edge that you select is rounded. If you select an edge that has adjacent tangent edges, the round automatically propagates around those tangent edges by default. The rounds are constructed tangent to the surfaces adjacent to the selected edges. In Figures 1 and 2, the edges selected for rounding are highlighted on the left. The resulting rounds are shown on the right. Note that because the edges in Figure 2 are tangent to other edges, the round feature is automatically created on the tangent edges.

2012 PTC

PT

Creating Rounds by Selecting Edges

te rn
Figure 2 Rounds Created by Selecting Two Edges

al
Module 14 | Page 3

U se

Figure 1 Rounds Created by Selecting Two Edges

nl y

PROCEDURE - Creating Rounds by Selecting Edges

Close Window Round\Edges Task 1: Erase Not Displayed ROUND_EDGE_1.PRT

Create rounds on an L-Block.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

5. Click Complete Feature

Task 2:

Fo r

1. Click Open , select ROUND_EDGE_2.PRT, and click Open. 2. Select Round from the Round types drop-down menu in the Engineering group.

3. Press CTRL and select the two edges. 4. Edit the radius value to .25. 5. Click Complete Feature .

Module 14 | Page 4

PT

Create tangent rounds on an oval block.

In

te rn

6. Notice that the left round adds material, while the right round removes material.

al
2012 PTC

U se

4. Edit the radius value to 2.

3. Press CTRL and select the two edges.

nl y

2. Select Round from the Round types drop-down menu in the Engineering group.

6. Notice that the left round adds material, while the right round removes material. 7. Also notice that although only two edges were selected, all edges tangent to the selected edges were rounded.

This completes the procedure.

Fo r

2012 PTC

PT

In

te rn

al
Module 14 | Page 5

U se

nl y

Creating Rounds by Selecting a Surface and Edge

Rounds created by selecting a surface and edge are constructed tangent to the surface and pass through the edge.
You can select a surface and an edge. Rounds propagate around tangent edges.

Creating Rounds by Selecting a Surface and Edge

Fo r

You can create rounds by selecting a surface first and then an edge. These round features are constructed tangent to the selected surface and pass through the selected edge. If the selected edge has adjacent tangent edges, the round automatically propagates around those tangent edges by default. In Figures 1 and 2, the surfaces and edges selected are highlighted on the left, and the resulting rounds are shown on the right.

Module 14 | Page 6

PT

In

te rn
Figure 2 Round Created by Selecting a Surface and Edge

al
2012 PTC

U se

Figure 1 Round Created by Selecting a Surface and Edge

nl y

PROCEDURE - Creating Rounds by Selecting a Surface and Edge

Close Window Erase Not Displayed SURF-EDGE_1.PRT

Round\Surface-Edge Task 1:

Create rounds on a stepped block.

1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. Select Round from the Round types drop-down menu in the Engineering group. 3. Press CTRL and select the surface and edge. 4. Edit the radius value to 2. 5. Click Complete Feature . Notice that the round adds material.

6. Select Round from the Round types drop-down menu in the Engineering group.

Fo r

Task 2:

1. Click Open , select SURF-EDGE_2.PRT, and click Open. 2. Select Round .

3. Press CTRL and select the surface and edge. 4. Edit the radius value to 0.60. 5. Click Complete Feature .

2012 PTC

PT

9. Click Complete Feature . Notice that the round removes material. Create tangent rounds on an oval block.

8. Edit the radius value to 2.

In

7. Press CTRL and select the surface and edge.

te rn

al
Module 14 | Page 7

U se

nl y

6. Notice that the round adds material. Also notice that although only one edge was selected, the round follows all edges tangent to the selected edge.

This completes the procedure.

Fo r

Module 14 | Page 8

PT

In

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

Creating Rounds by Selecting Two Surfaces

Rounds created by selecting two surfaces can span gaps or engulf existing geometry.
You can select two surfaces. Rounds can span gaps. Rounds can engulf existing geometry. You can manage round pieces.

Figure 1 Round That Spans a Gap

In

Fo r

You can create rounds by selecting two surfaces. The rounds are constructed tangent to the selected surfaces. If the selected references have adjacent tangent geometry, the round automatically propagates around that geometry by default. For rounds created by selecting two surfaces, the system creates the round between the selected surfaces; therefore, it has the ability to span gaps or engulf existing geometry. In addition, rounds created by selecting two surfaces can also provide more robust round geometry in cases where rounds created by selecting edges may fail or create undesired geometry. In Figures 1 and 2, the surfaces selected are highlighted on the left, and the resulting rounds are shown on the right.

Managing Round Pieces

When a round traverses a gap, as shown in Figure 1 , it is comprised of two different pieces. You can manage the round pieces individually in the dashboard by specifying their display.
2012 PTC Module 14 | Page 9

PT

Creating Rounds by Selecting Two Surfaces

te rn
Figure 2 Round That Engulfs Existing Geometry

al

U se

nl y

PROCEDURE - Creating Rounds by Selecting Two Surfaces

Close Window Erase Not Displayed SURF-SURF_1.PRT

Round\Surface-Surface Task 1:

Create rounds on a block with a hole in it.

1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. Select Round from the Round types drop-down menu in the Engineering group. 3. Press CTRL and select the two surfaces. 4. Edit the radius value to 3. 5. Click Complete Feature . Notice that the round spans the gap. 6. Edit the definition of Round 1.

Fo r

Task 2:

1. Click Open , select SURF-SURF_2.PRT, and click Open. 2. Select Round from the Round types drop-down menu in the Engineering group.

3. Press CTRL and select the two surfaces. 4. Edit the radius value to 4. 5. Click Complete Feature .

Module 14 | Page 10

PT

8. Click Complete Feature . Notice that the round no longer spans the gap.

Create rounds on another block.

In

7. In the dashboard, select the Pieces tab. Edit Piece 2 to be Excluded in the drop-down list.

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

6. Notice that the round engulfs the existing material.

This completes the procedure.

Fo r

2012 PTC

PT

In

te rn
Module 14 | Page 11

al

U se

nl y

Creating Full Rounds

Full rounds replace a surface with a round that is tangent to the surface it replaces.
You can select two edges. You can select three surfaces.

Creating Full Rounds

Full rounds replace a surface with a round that is tangent to the surface it replaces. You can create full rounds either by selecting a pair of edges or a pair of surfaces. If a pair of edges is selected, the system initially creates individual rounds on each edge, and can be quickly converted to a full round either from the dashboard or by right-clicking. If a pair of surfaces is selected, a third surface must also be selected as the surface to remove with the creation of the round. In either case, the full round is constructed with a rounding surface forming a tangent connection between the selected references. If the selected references have adjacent tangent geometry, the round automatically propagates around that geometry. In Figure 1, the full round was created by selection of two edges. The edges selected are highlighted on the left, and the resulting round is shown on the right. This round is removing material. In Figure 2, the full round was created by selecting three surfaces. The surfaces selected are highlighted on the left, and the resulting round is shown on the right. This round is adding material.

Fo r

Module 14 | Page 12

PT

In

te rn

Figure 2 Full Round Created by Selecting Three Surfaces

al
2012 PTC

U se

Figure 1 Full Round Created by Selecting Two Edges

nl y

PROCEDURE - Creating Full Rounds

Close Window Round\Full Task 1: Erase Not Displayed ROUND_FULL_1.PRT

Create rounds on a block by selecting edges.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

5. Click Complete Feature . Notice that the round removes material. 6. Select Round from the Round types drop-down menu in the Engineering group.

Fo r

Task 2:

1. Click Open , select ROUND_FULL_2.PRT, and click Open. 2. Select Round from the Round types drop-down menu in the Engineering group.

3. Press CTRL and select the two surfaces.

2012 PTC

PT

9. Click Complete Feature . Notice that the round adds material. Create rounds on a block by selecting surfaces.

8. In the dashboard, select the Sets tab and click Full round.

In

7. Press CTRL and select the two edges.

te rn
Module 14 | Page 13

al

U se

4. Right-click and select Full round.

3. Press CTRL and select the two edges.

nl y

2. Select Round from the Round types drop-down menu in the Engineering group.

4. Press CTRL and select the bottom cut surface. 5. Click Complete Feature .

6. Select Round from the Round types drop-down menu in the Engineering group. 7. Press CTRL and select the two surfaces.

9. Click Complete Feature

Fo r

This completes the procedure.

Module 14 | Page 14

PT

In

8. Press CTRL and select the top outer surface. .

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

Creating Round Sets

Round sets enable you to create rounds of different radii in a single round feature.
Create multiple round sets in a single round feature. Each round set can have a different radius value. Each set may be created by selecting different entities.

Creating Round Sets

Fo r

Round sets are important for two reasons: 1. Simplification Round sets enable you to decrease the number of features in the model tree. 2. Transitions Round sets enable you to manually specify the appearance of the transitional surface where the round sets intersect.

Round Set Selection Guidelines

When an edge is selected for rounding, the following two guidelines determine which set the round belongs to: Selecting edges while pressing CTRL enables you to add rounds to the same set. Selecting edges without pressing CTRL enables you to create a round in a new set.

2012 PTC

PT

In Figure 1, all three rounds are created within the same round feature. Each round is from a different set. The round in the left image was created by selecting an edge. The round in the middle image was created by selecting a surface and edge. The round on the right is a full round. Notice that the rounds have different radius values.

In

Round features can contain multiple sets of references within a single round feature. When references for a round are selected, they can be selected as part of the same set, or in additional sets. Each round set can have different radius values. Each set may have also been created differently, such as a full round versus a round created by selecting surfaces. You can add new sets to a round using the dashboard, by right-clicking in the graphics window, or simply by selecting a new reference on the model. When you create a new round set, you can view the rounds from the other sets in the same feature in their previewed state.

te rn

al

U se

Figure 1 Three Round Sets in a Single Round Feature

O
Module 14 | Page 15

nl y

PROCEDURE - Creating Round Sets

Close Window Round\Sets Task 1: Erase Not Displayed ROUND-SETS.PRT

Create three round sets in a single round feature.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

4. Edit the radius value to 2. 5. Right-click and select Add set. Notice that the first round remains previewed. 6. Press CTRL and select the surface and edge. 7. Edit the radius value to 6.5.

Fo r

8. In the dashboard, select the Sets tab. Click *New set. Notice that the previous two rounds are still previewed. Press CTRL and select the two edges. 9. Click Full round from the dashboard.

10. In the Sets tab, select Set 2. 11. Edit the Radius value from 6.5 to 5.

Module 14 | Page 16

PT

In

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

3. Select the edge.

nl y

2. Select Round from the Round types drop-down menu in the Engineering group.

12. Click Complete Feature

13. Notice the single round feature created in the model tree.

This completes the procedure.

Fo r

2012 PTC

PT

In

te rn
Module 14 | Page 17

al

U se

nl y

Creating Chamfers by Selecting Edges

Chamfers add or remove material by creating a beveled surface between adjacent surfaces and edges.
You can select one or more edge. Chamfers can add or remove material. Chamfers propagate around tangent edges.

Figure 1 Chamfers Created by Selecting Two Edges

Creating Chamfers by Selecting Edges

Fo r

Similar to round features, chamfers add or remove material by creating a beveled surface between adjacent surfaces and edges selected as references. You can create chamfers by selecting an edge or a combination of edges. Each edge that you select is chamfered. Similar to rounds, if the selected edge for chamfering has adjacent tangent edges, the chamfer automatically propagates around those tangent edges by default. In Figures 1 and 2, the edges selected for chamfering are highlighted on the left. The resulting chamfers are shown on the right. Note that because the edges in Figure 2 are tangent to other edges, the chamfer feature is automatically created on the tangent edges.

Module 14 | Page 18

PT

In

te rn
Figure 2 Chamfers Created by Selecting Two Edges

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

PROCEDURE - Creating Chamfers by Selecting Edges

Close Window Chamfer\Edges Task 1: Erase Not Displayed CHAMFER-EDGE_1.PRT

Create chamfers on an L-Block.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

5. Click Complete Feature

Task 2:

Fo r

1. Click Open , select CHAMFER-EDGE_2.PRT, and click Open.

2. Select Edge Chamfer from the Chamfer types drop-down menu in the Engineering group. 3. Select the edge. 4. Drag the D value to 3. 5. Click Complete Feature .

2012 PTC

PT

Create tangent chamfers on an oval block.

In

te rn
Module 14 | Page 19

6. Notice that the left chamfer adds material, while the right chamfer removes material.

al

U se

4. Edit the D value to 1.75.

3. Press CTRL and select the two edges.

nl y

2. Select Edge Chamfer from the Chamfer types drop-down menu in the Engineering group.

6. Select Edge Chamfer from the Chamfer types drop-down menu. 7. Select the edge. 8. Edit the D value to 1. 9. Click Complete Feature .

This completes the procedure.

Fo r

Module 14 | Page 20

PT

In

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

11. Also notice that although only two edges were selected, all edges tangent to the selected edges were chamfered.

10. Notice that the inner chamfer adds material, while the outer chamfer removes material.

nl y

Analyzing Basic Chamfer Dimensioning Schemes

There are several different ways to dimension a chamfer to capture desired design intent.
Dimensioning schemes include: DxD D1 x D2 Angle x D 45 x D

There are several different dimensioning schemes available when creating chamfers: D x D Size of chamfer is defined by one dimension, as shown by the upper-right chamfer in Figure 1. D1 x D2 Size of chamfer is defined by two dimensions, as shown by the upper-left chamfer in Figure 1. Angle x D Size of chamfer is defined by a linear and angular dimension, as shown by the lower-left chamfer in Figure 1. 45 x D Size of chamfer is defined by a linear dimension at a 45 degree angle, as shown by the lower-right chamfer in Figure 1. This type is only valid for perpendicular surfaces. You can edit the chamfer dimensioning scheme either by using the dashboard or by right-clicking in the graphics window and then selecting the new scheme.

Fo r

2012 PTC

PT

Analyzing Basic Chamfer Dimensioning Schemes

In

te rn

Figure 1 Four Different Chamfer Dimensioning Schemes with the Same Geometry

al
Module 14 | Page 21

U se

nl y

PROCEDURE - Analyzing Basic Chamfer Dimensioning Schemes

Close Window Chamfer\Schemes Task 1: Erase Not Displayed DIM-SCHEMES.PRT

Create four chamfer dimensioning schemes on a block.

1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. Select Edge Chamfer from the Chamfer types drop-down menu in the Engineering group. 3. Select the edge. 4. Drag the D value to 7. 5. Click Complete Feature .

6. Select Edge Chamfer 7. Select the edge.

10. Click Complete Feature

PT

9. Edit the D1 value to 7 and the D2 value to 7.

Fo r

11. Select Edge Chamfer

12. Select the edge. 13. In the dashboard, edit the dimensioning scheme to Angle x D. 14. Edit the Angle value to 45 and the D value to 7.

15. Click Complete Feature

Module 14 | Page 22

In

8. In the dashboard, edit the dimensioning scheme to D1 x D2.

te rn
. . . .

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

16. Select Edge Chamfer 17. Select the edge.

18. In the dashboard, edit the dimensioning scheme to 45 x D. 19. Edit the D value to 7. 20. Click Complete Feature .

This completes the procedure.

Fo r

2012 PTC

PT

In

te rn
Module 14 | Page 23

al

22. Press CTRL, select all four Chamfer features, right-click, and select Edit. Notice that all four chamfers are the same geometry, but contain different dimensioning schemes.

U se

21. Orient to the FRONT view orientation.

nl y

Creating Chamfer Sets

Chamfer sets enable you to create chamfers of different dimensioning schemes or D values in a single chamfer feature.
Create multiple chamfer sets in a single chamfer feature. Each chamfer set can have a different D value. Each set may be created with a different dimensioning scheme.

Figure 1 Three Chamfer Sets in a Single Chamfer Feature

Creating Chamfer Sets

Fo r

In Figure 1, all three chamfers are created within the same chamfer feature but with different dimensioning schemes. Each chamfer is from a different set. The D x D chamfer in the left image was created by selecting an edge. In the middle image, the Angle x D chamfer was created by selecting an edge. The D1 x D2 chamfer on the right was created by selecting a different edge. Notice that the chamfers are different D values. Chamfer sets are important for two reasons: 1. 2. Simplification Chamfer sets enable you to decrease the number of features in the model tree. Transitions Chamfer sets enable you to manually specify the appearance of the transitional surface where the chamfer sets intersect.

Chamfer Set Selection Guidelines

When an edge is selected for chamfering, the following two guidelines determine which set a chamfer belongs to: Selecting edges while pressing CTRL enables you to add chamfers to the same set. Selecting edges without pressing CTRL enables you to create chamfers in a new set.
Module 14 | Page 24 2012 PTC

PT

Chamfer features can contain multiple sets of references within a single chamfer feature. When references for a chamfer are selected, they can be selected as part of the same set, or in additional sets. Each chamfer set can have different D values. Sets can also be created with different dimensioning schemes, for example, a D x D chamfer versus an Angle x D chamfer. You can add new sets to a chamfer using the dashboard, by right-clicking in the graphics window, or simply by selecting a new reference on the model. When you create a new chamfer set, you can view the chamfers from the other sets in the same feature in their previewed state.

In

te rn

al

U se

nl y

PROCEDURE - Creating Chamfer Sets

Close Window Chamfer\Sets Task 1: Erase Not Displayed CHAMFER-SETS.PRT

Create three chamfer sets in a single chamfer feature.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

7. Edit the Angle value to 19 and the D value to 6.5.

8. In the dashboard, select the Sets tab. Click *New set. Notice that the previous two chamfers are still previewed. Select the edge. Edit the chamfer dimensioning scheme to D1 x D2. Edit the D1 value to 3 and the D2 value to 1.75.

Fo r

2012 PTC

PT

In

te rn
Module 14 | Page 25

6. Edit the chamfer dimensioning scheme to Angle x D.

al

5. Select the next edge. Notice that the first chamfer remains previewed.

U se

4. Drag the D value to 2, editing it if necessary.

3. Select the edge.

nl y

2. Select Edge Chamfer from the Chamfer types drop-down menu in the Engineering group.

9. Click Complete Feature

Fo r

Module 14 | Page 26

PT

In

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

This completes the procedure.

Module

15
U se O te rn al
Module 15 | Page 1

Project I
Module Overview

Using Creo Parametric and the skills learned thus far in this course, complete the following project design tasks.

Objectives

After completing this module, you will be able to: Create the PISTON_PIN.PRT, PISTON.PRT, CONNECTING_ROD.PRT, CRANKSHAFT.PRT, ENGINE_BLOCK.PRT, IMPELLER_HOUSING.PRT, IMPELLER.PRT, FRAME.PRT, and BOLT.PRT models.

Fo r

2012 PTC

PT

In

nl y

The Air Circulator

In this project, you create components of the Air Circulator.
Create from scratch: Part models Minimal Instructions Completed Models for Reference

Figure 1 Air Circulator

Project Scenario

Fo r

Because all tasks in this project are based on topics that you have learned thus far in the course, instructions for each project step are minimal. Detailed picks and clicks are not provided. This enables you to test your knowledge of the materials as you proceed through the project.

Completed Models for Reference

Be sure to save all project models within the Intro-1_working sub-folder of the Projects lab files folder structure. The Projects folder also contains a sub-folder named Intro-1_completed. Here you can find a completed version of each model in the project. These completed models can be used as references, if required.

Module 15 | Page 2

PT

Minimal Instructions

In

Upon returning from Creo Parametric training, you are assigned to create the AC-40 Air Circulator.

te rn

ACME Incorporated develops and markets several consumer, industrial, and defense goods. The Light Industrial Division of ACME creates a number of products, including industrial fans, heating, air conditioning, and pumps. You work for the Light Industrial Division of ACME Inc., which has recently started using Creo Parametric for its product designs.

al

U se

O
2012 PTC

nl y

Piston Assembly Components

These figures illustrate the components you create in this project for the piston assembly.

Figure 1 PISTON_PIN.PRT

Figure 3 CONNECTING_ ROD.PRT

Creating the Piston Pin, Piston, and Connecting Rod Components

Fo r

2012 PTC

PT

These figures illustrate the piston pin, piston, and connecting rod components you create in the beginning of this project.

In

te rn

al
Module 15 | Page 3

U se

Figure 2 PISTON.PRT

nl y

Crankshaft, Engine Block, Impeller, and Impeller Housing

These figures illustrate the crankshaft, engine block, impeller, and impeller housing you create in this project.

Figure 1 CRANKSHAFT.PRT

Fo r

PT

In

te rn
Figure 3 IMPELLER.PRT Figure 4 IMPELLER_ HOUSING.PRT

Creating the Crankshaft, Engine Block, Impeller, and Impeller Housing Components
These figures illustrate the crankshaft, engine block, impeller, and impeller housing components you create in this project. These models are slightly more complicated than the previously created piston assembly components. You complete the crankshaft model in this project, but the engine block, impeller, and impeller housing are completed in a subsequent project.

Module 15 | Page 4

al
2012 PTC

U se

Figure 2 ENGINE_ BLOCK.PRT

nl y

The Frame and Bolt

These figures illustrate the frame and bolt components you create in this project.

Figure 1 FRAME.PRT

Fo r

2012 PTC

PT

In

te rn

These figures illustrate the frame and bolt components you create in this project. The frame is completed in a subsequent project.

al

Creating the Frame and Bolt Components

U se

Figure 2 BOLT.PRT

O
Module 15 | Page 5

nl y

Fo r

Module 15 | Page 6

PT

In

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

Module

16
U se O te rn al
Module 16 | Page 1

Group, Copy, and Mirror Tools

Module Overview

Creo Parametric offers many tools to duplicate features and parts to increase efficiency. In this module, you learn how to create local groups of features. You also learn how to use the Copy tool to create a single instance of multiple features or groups. Finally, you learn how to use the Mirror tool to mirror features and parts to create symmetrical models.

Objectives

Fo r

2012 PTC

PT

After completing this module, you will be able to: Create local groups. Copy and paste features, as well as move and rotate those copied features. Mirror selected features, all features, and parts.

In

nl y

Creating Local Groups

A local group enables you to perform an operation on multiple features at once.
Reasons for grouping include: Copy/pattern multiple features as one. Select as one. When editing, view dims from all features in the group. Organize/collapse the model tree.

Creating Local Groups

In Creo Parametric, you can collect features and combine them into a local group. A local group enables you to perform an operation on multiple features at once. You can group features either by clicking the Operations group drop-down menu and selecting Group or by selecting features, right-clicking, and selecting Group. You can also ungroup features by right-clicking. Some facts about local groups are: The features that you group must be sequential in the model tree. When you group features, they nest under the name of the group in the model tree. You can delete or suppress features individually within a group. You can drag features and drop them into or out of a group.

Fo r

Reasons for Creating Local Groups

There are numerous reasons for creating local groups: You can copy or pattern multiple features as one by patterning or copying the local group.
Module 16 | Page 2 2012 PTC

PT

Figure 2 Viewing Dimensions of All Grouped Features

In

te rn
Figure 3 Selecting All Grouped Entities as One

al

U se

Figure 1 Model Tree Before and After Local Group

nl y

 You can select all features within the local group as one. When editing, you can view the dimensions of all features in the local group at one time. You can use local groups to organize or collapse the model tree.

Fo r

2012 PTC

PT

In

te rn

al
Module 16 | Page 3

U se

nl y

PROCEDURE - Creating Local Groups

Close Window Erase Not Displayed GROUP.PRT

Feature_Operations\Local_Groups Task 1:

Group and ungroup features in a part model.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

3. Right-click and select Group. 4. Expand Group LOCAL_GROUP in the model tree. Notice both features in the group.

5. Right-click Group LOCAL_GROUP and select Ungroup. 6. Press CTRL and select Extrude 2, Hole 1, Hole 2, and Round 1. 7. Right-click and select Group. 8. Right-click and select Edit. Notice that the dimensions from all features in the group display.

9. Click in the background of the graphics window to de-select all features.

Fo r

11. Right-click and select Select Group. Notice all features in the group are selected.

Module 16 | Page 4

PT

10. Select the round feature from the model, as shown.

In

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

2. Press CTRL and select Extrude 2 and Hole 1.

12. In the model tree, expand Group LOCAL_GROUP and expand feature Hole 2. Notice the embedded datum axis A_2. 13. Right-click Hole 2 and select Delete. In the Delete dialog box, ensure that the Keep embedded datum features check box is selected. Click OK to delete the hole but keep the datum axis. 14. Enable Axis Display the axis remains. . Notice

This completes the procedure.

Fo r

2012 PTC

PT

In

te rn

al
Module 16 | Page 5

U se

nl y

Copying and Pasting Features

The copy and paste functionality enables you to quickly duplicate a feature.
Copy Select features or groups of features. Paste Pastes feature with same reference types, dimension scheme, and options as original. Select new references. Independent of original feature.

Fo r

Figure 2 Sketch Placed on the Cursor

PT

In

Copying and Pasting Features

Copy and paste enables you to quickly duplicate a feature or group of features. Each copy and paste operation creates a single copy of the selected feature(s). When the new feature is placed with paste, the primary reference is cleared and the system awaits selection of a new reference. However, depending on the feature type, the system maintains the reference type, dimensioning scheme, and the same options as the original. The copied feature is independent of the original. In Figure 1, a hole is copied and pasted. Once the placement surface is selected, you can place the new hole in a new location on the new placement surface. Notice that the hole diameter and depth options are carried over to the copy.
Module 16 | Page 6 2012 PTC

te rn
Figure 3 Copying and Pasting an Extrude

al

U se

Figure 1 Copying and Pasting a Hole

nl y

In the lower figures, an extrude feature is copied and pasted. You must specify a new sketch and reference plane and enter Sketcher mode. The system places the copied sketch on the cursor, as shown in Figure 2, and you can drop it into location and edit dimensions appropriately. The copied extrude feature maintains feature type, options, and depth. You can also copy and paste rounds. When doing so, the round reference types, size, and options are maintained. You must select new corresponding references.

Fo r

2012 PTC

PT

In

te rn

al
Module 16 | Page 7

U se

nl y

PROCEDURE - Copying and Pasting Features

Close Window Erase Not Displayed COPY_PASTE.PRT

Feature_Operations\Copy_Paste Task 1:

Copy and paste a hole feature in a part model.

1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. Select Hole 1 and click Copy from the Operations group.

3. Select Paste from the Paste types drop-down menu in the Operations group. 4. Select the approximate hole location on the front surface.

5. Right-click and select Offset References Collector.

6. Press CTRL and select the top and right surfaces.

Fo r

8. Click Complete Feature the Hole dashboard.

PT

7. Edit the offset from the top surface to 1.5 and edit the offset from the right surface to 3.

Module 16 | Page 8

In

te rn
from

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

Task 2:

Copy and paste an extrude feature in a part model.

1. Select Extrude 2 and click Copy 2. Click Paste .

3. Right-click and select Edit Internal Sketch. 4. Select the right surface as the Sketch Plane. 5. In the Sketch dialog box, edit the Orientation to Bottom and click Sketch. 6. The sketch attaches to your cursor. Select the approximate placement. 7. Click Sketch View In Graphics toolbar. 8. Edit the dimensions. from the

9. Click OK from the Sketch dashboard.

Fo r

10. Orient to the Standard Orientation. 11. Click Complete Feature the Extrude dashboard. from

This completes the procedure.

2012 PTC

PT

In

te rn

al
Module 16 | Page 9

U se

nl y

Moving and Rotating Copied Features

You can use the Paste Special option to apply move and rotate options to the resulting copied feature.
Copy: Select features or groups of features. Paste Special: Make copies dependent or independent. Move/rotate. Edit the dependence. Dim Indep Sec Indep

Figure 1 Moving a Copied Feature

PT

In

Fo r

Moving and Rotating Copied Features

When copying features in a part model, you can use the Paste Special option to apply move and rotate options to the resulting copied feature. Move the copied feature Linearly translate the copied feature. Specify a direction reference such as a surface, datum plane, edge, or axis, and enter the translation distance value. The copied feature moves normal to a plane or surface, and along an edge or axis. In Figure 1, the oval copied protrusion moves normal to datum plane DTM1 a distance of 3. Rotate copied feature Angularly rotate the copied feature. Specify a direction reference such as an edge or axis, and enter the angular rotation value. The copied feature rotates around the edge or axis. In Figure 2, the oval copied protrusion rotates around datum axis AXIS at an angle of 45. You can also apply multiple move and rotate operations to the same copied feature. For example, you may choose to move the feature in one direction
Module 16 | Page 10 2012 PTC

te rn

Figure 2 Rotating a Copied Feature

Figure 3 Moving and Rotating a Copied Feature

al

U se

nl y

and rotate it about an axis, as shown in Figure 3. Or you may choose to move the feature in one direction and then move it further in another direction.

Creating Dependent Copies

When you copy a feature, the default dependent copy option is to make the copied feature's dimensions and section sketch dependent on those of the original. That is, all the dimensions of the original feature become shared between the original feature and copied feature. Therefore, when you edit the value of a shared dimension, both features update simultaneously.

Editing the Dependence of Copies

Fo r

2012 PTC

PT

In

te rn
Module 16 | Page 11

al

U se

Break the dependence of one of the copied feature dimensions by selecting the dimension, right-clicking, and selecting Make Dim Indep. All other aspects of the copied feature remain dependent on the original. Break the dependence of the copied feature section by selecting the copied feature, right-clicking, and selecting Make Sec Indep. The copied feature depth is still dependent on the original.

nl y

There are two different ways you can edit the dependency of a dependently copied feature:

PROCEDURE - Moving and Rotating Copied Features

Close Window Erase Not Displayed MOVE_ROTATE.PRT

Feature_Operations\Move_Rotate Task 1: Move and rotate copied features.

1. Enable only the following Datum Display types: 2. Select Extrude 2. 3. Click Copy from the Operations group.

Special group.

Fo r

9. In the Paste Special dialog box, clear the Make copies dependent on dimensions of originals check box, select the Apply Move/Rotate transformations to copies check box, and click OK.

10. In the dashboard, click Rotate . 11. Select datum axis AXIS and edit the offset angle to 45. 12. Click Complete Feature the dashboard. from

Module 16 | Page 12

PT

8. With Moved Copy 1 still selected, click Copy

In

te rn
and select Paste

7. Click Complete Feature the dashboard.

from

from the Paste types drop-down menu in the Operations

al
2012 PTC

6. Select datum plane DTM1 and edit the offset value to 3.

U se

5. In the Paste Special dialog box, select the Apply Move/Rotate transformations to copies check box and click OK.

from the Paste types drop-down menu 4. Select Paste Special in the Operations group.

nl y

13. With Moved Copy 2 still selected, click Copy Special group.

and select Paste

from the Paste types drop-down menu in the Operations

14. In the Paste Special dialog box, clear the Make copies dependent on dimensions of originals check box, select the Apply Move/Rotate transformations to copies check box, and click OK. 15. Select datum plane RIGHT and edit the offset to 1. 16. In the dashboard, select the Transformations tab and click New Move. 17. Edit the move type to Rotate, select datum axis AXIS, and edit the offset angle to 45. 18. Click Complete Feature the dashboard. Task 2: from

1. Select Extrude 2, right-click, and select Edit. 2. Edit the feature height from 1 to 2 and click in the background twice to de-select all features.

Fo r

2012 PTC

PT

In

te rn
Module 16 | Page 13

al

Edit the dimensions and dependency of the moved and rotated features.

U se

nl y

3. Expand Moved Copy 1 and select Extrude 2 (2). 4. Right-click and select Edit. 5. Select the 1 width value, right-click, and select Make Dim Indep. 6. In the Confirmation dialog box, click Yes to make an independent dimension.

This completes the procedure.

Fo r

Module 16 | Page 14

PT

In

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

9. Edit the feature width from 1 to 1.5 and click in the background twice to de-select all features.

8. Right-click Extrude 2 (2) and select Edit.

nl y

7. Click in the background twice to de-select all features.

Mirroring Selected Features

You can mirror selected features about a plane.
Mirror Features: Mirror features or groups of features. Select mirror plane. Mirror features independent of or dependent on the original feature.

You can mirror selected features or a group of features about a plane. The mirrored features can be independent of the original features or dependent upon them. In the example shown, there are three oval protrusions in a group, as shown in the left image of Figure 1. The group is selected and mirrored dependently about datum plane RIGHT, as shown in the right image of Figure 1. Next, the original group and the mirrored group are selected, and both are mirrored about datum plane FRONT independently, as shown in the right image of Figure 2. Because this second mirror was performed independently, the original geometry height can be modified and only the dependently mirrored geometry height updates.

Fo r

2012 PTC

PT

In

Mirroring Selected Features

te rn

Figure 2 Mirroring Features About Datum Plane FRONT

al
Module 16 | Page 15

U se

Figure 1 Mirroring Features About Datum Plane RIGHT

nl y

PROCEDURE - Mirroring Selected Features

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Feature_Operations\Mirror_Features MIRROR_SEL_FEATURES.PRT Task 1: Mirror selected features and edit the extrude height.

1. Enable only the following Datum 2. Press CTRL and select Extrude 2, Moved Copy 1, and Moved Copy 2. 3. Click Mirror group. from the Editing

4. Select datum plane RIGHT. 5. In the dashboard, select the Options tab and notice the mirror is dependent. 6. Click Complete Feature the dashboard.

9. Select datum plane FRONT.

Fo r

10. In the dashboard, select the Options tab and clear the Dependent Copy check box. 11. Click Complete Feature the dashboard. from

Module 16 | Page 16

PT

8. Click Mirror

7. With the mirror feature still selected, press CTRL and also select Extrude 2, Moved Copy 1, and Moved Copy 2. .

In

te rn

from

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

Display types:

12. In the model tree, right-click Extrude 2 and select Edit. 13. Edit the height from 1 to 2. 14. Click in the background twice to de-select all features.

This completes the procedure.

Fo r

2012 PTC

PT

In

te rn
Module 16 | Page 17

al

U se

nl y

Mirroring All Features

Mirroring all features enables you to create half of a model and then mirror it to complete the entire part.
Mirror the entire model: Select the part node from the model tree. Mirror is dependent on original side. Mirrors all features that are before the mirror feature in the model tree.

Figure 1 Mirror All Features Before

Mirroring All Features

To mirror all features, you simply select the part node from the model tree (the name of the model at the top of the tree) and then mirror all the features in the model at one time. This enables you to create one half of a model and then mirror it to complete the entire part. A single mirror feature is created, which is dependent on the original side of the model.

Fo r

The mirror feature mirrors all features that come before it in the model tree. Features that change on the original side of the model update on the mirror side. Features inserted before the mirror feature are mirrored to the opposite side. Features created after the mirror are not mirrored. When you mirror all features, this includes all datum planes. The resulting mirrored datum planes retain the same name as their originals, except that the mirrored datum planes have an "_1" suffix added to their names and tags. For example, if you mirror all features, which includes datum plane TOP, the corresponding mirrored datum plane name is TOP_1.

Module 16 | Page 18

PT

In

te rn

Figure 2 Mirror All Features Result

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

PROCEDURE - Mirroring All Features

Close Window Erase Not Displayed MIRROR_ALL_FEATURES.PRT

Feature_Operations\Mirror_All Task 1:

Mirror all part features about a datum plane.

1. Enable only the following Datum Display types: .

3. Expand the Mirror 1 feature. Notice it contains a hole and extrude feature.

6. Select datum plane RIGHT.

9. Edit the hole diameter from 16 to 20.

Fo r

10. In the model tree, select Extrude 3. 11. Edit the width from 35 to 40. 12. Click in the background twice to de-select all features. Notice that all four hole and extrude features have updated.

2012 PTC

PT

8. In the model tree, right-click Hole 1 and select Edit.

In

7. Click Complete Feature the dashboard.

te rn
from
Module 16 | Page 19

5. Click Mirror group.

from the Editing

al

4. In the model tree, select the part node MIRROR_ALL_ FEATURES.PRT.

U se

nl y

2. In the model tree, select the Mirror 1 feature.

13. Click Named Views select 3D.

and

from the 14. Select Round Round types drop-down menu and select the right vertical edge. 15. Edit the radius to 8 and click Complete Feature from the dashboard.

Fo r

Module 16 | Page 20

PT

In

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

This completes the procedure.

nl y

16. Notice that the round feature is not mirrored.

Creating Mirrored Parts

You can create a duplicate, mirrored copy of a part.
Mirror types: Mirror geometry only. Mirror geometry with features. Dependency control: Geometry dependent.

Figure 1 Original Part

te rn

Mirror geometry only Mirrors geometry without the structure of the original part. The model tree contains one mirrored feature in the resulting mirrored part.

Fo r

Mirror geometry with features Mirrors geometry with the original part feature structure. The geometry of the resulting mirrored part is not dependent on the geometry of the original model.

When creating a new mirrored part, you must specify the part name for the new part. If you mirror a part using the Mirror geometry only type, you must
2012 PTC Module 16 | Page 21

PT

You can create a mirrored copy of a part directly within Creo Parametric. There are two different types of mirrored parts that can be created:

In

Creating Mirrored Parts

al
Figure 2 Mirrored Part

U se

nl y

also specify whether the resulting mirrored part is dependent on the original or not. This option is only available for the Mirror geometry only mirror type. You can also preview the mirrored part before it is actually created. You can also mirror an entire assembly by clicking File > Save As > Save a Mirror Assembly.

Fo r

Module 16 | Page 22

PT

In

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

PROCEDURE - Creating Mirrored Parts

Close Window Erase Not Displayed MIRROR-PART-RH.PRT

Feature_Operations\Mirror_Parts Task 1: Mirror a part.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

3. Click File > Save As > Mirror Part .

Fo r

5. In the Mirror part dialog box, check select the Preview box.

2012 PTC

PT

4. In the Mirror part dialog box, accept the defaults for Mirror type and Dependency control, and type MIRROR_PART_LH as the New Name.

In

te rn
Module 16 | Page 23

al

U se

nl y

2. Notice that the part is asymmetric. You need to create a part which is equivalent to the left part.

6. Click OK in the Mirror part dialog box. Notice that the system determines the mirror plane, as you were not prompted for it. 7. Spin the new model, as shown. 8. Arrange the two Creo Parametric windows on your desktop to compare parts.

Fo r

Module 16 | Page 24

PT

In

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

This completes the procedure.

nl y

Module

17
U se O te rn al
Module 17 | Page 1

Creating Patterns
Module Overview

Patterning features and components is yet another way to quickly duplicate features to increase efficiency. In this module, you learn how to pattern features linearly and angularly, and how to increment dimensions while patterning. You also learn how to Reference pattern features and components. Finally, you learn how to delete patterns and pattern members.

Objectives

Fo r

2012 PTC

PT

After completing this module, you will be able to: Direction Pattern in the First and Second Directions. Direction Pattern with multiple direction types. Axis Pattern in the First and Second Directions. Create Reference patterns of features and components. Delete patterns and pattern members.

In

nl y

Direction Patterning in the First Direction

The direction pattern enables you to pattern features in a given direction.
Direction and increments based on selected reference. Select a first direction reference. Specify number of members and increment. Specify additional, optional dimensions to increment.

Figure 1 Direction Patterning an Extrude in One Direction

The Pattern tool enables you to quickly duplicate a feature, group of features, or pattern of features. When you create a pattern, you create instances of the selected feature by varying some specified dimensions. The feature selected for patterning is called the pattern leader, while the patterned instances are called pattern members. Each pattern member is dependent on the original feature, or pattern leader. The pattern leader is always the first member in an expanded pattern feature in the model tree. In the graphics window, the pattern leader's instance dot border is always bolder than the other pattern members, as shown in Figure 1. In Figure 2, the width of the pattern leader has been modified between the images third from the left and fourth from the left. Consequently, all pattern members' widths have been updated as well.

Fo r

Direction Patterning in the First Direction Theory

The direction pattern enables you to pattern features in a given direction. The following items are required to create a direction pattern in one direction: Specify a First Direction reference The pattern extends in a direction based on the reference selected. If you select a plane or surface, the pattern extends normal to the reference, and if you select a linear curve,
Module 17 | Page 2 2012 PTC

PT

Patterning Features Theory

Figure 2 Editing the Direction Pattern and Pattern Leader

In

te rn

al

U se

nl y

edge, or axis, the pattern extends along the reference. You can also toggle the direction in which the pattern extends by 180 degrees. In the figures, the first direction reference specified is the datum plane. Specify the number of pattern members in the first direction Type the number of members in either the dashboard or the graphics window. The number of pattern members includes the pattern leader. In Figure 2, the model in the left-most image has four pattern members, while the model in the image second from the left has six pattern members. Specify the increment in the first direction The increment is the spacing between pattern members. You can edit the increment in the dashboard, the graphics window, or by dragging the drag handle.

Fo r

2012 PTC

PT

In

te rn

al

Select the dimension to be incremented from the pattern leader The pattern leader displays with all dimensions used to create the feature. Specify the increment value In Figure 2, the extrude feature height was incremented by 0.5. Consequently, each pattern member's height increases 0.5 over the previous pattern member.

U se

You can also increment additional dimensions in the first direction at the same time to create a "varying" pattern. The following items are required to increment additional dimensions in the first direction:

nl y

Incrementing Additional Dimensions

Module 17 | Page 3

PROCEDURE - Direction Patterning in the First Direction

Close Window Erase Not Displayed DIR_PATTERN_1ST.PRT

Pattern\Direction_First Task 1:

Direction pattern an extrude feature.

1. Enable only the following Datum Display types: . 2. Select Extrude 2 and select Pattern from the Pattern types drop-down menu in the Editing group. 3. In the dashboard, edit the pattern type to Direction. 4. Select datum plane FRONT and click Flip First Direction from the Pattern dashboard. 5. Edit the number of members to 4 and edit the spacing to 2. You can also drag the increment handle to edit the increment. 6. Click Complete Feature the Pattern dashboard.

Fo r

8. Edit the number of patterned extrudes from 4 to 6. 9. Click in the background twice to de-select all features.

Module 17 | Page 4

PT

7. With the Pattern feature still selected, right-click and select Edit.

In

te rn
from

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

10. Edit the definition of Pattern 1 of Extrude 2. 11. In the dashboard, select the Dimensions tab. Click in the Direction 1 Dimension collector. Select the 1 height dimension and edit the increment to 0.5.

12. Click Complete Feature 13. De-select all features.

Fo r

15. Select the pattern leader, right-click, and select Edit.

16. Edit the width from 2 to 3.

17. Click in the background twice to de-select all features.

This completes the procedure.

2012 PTC

PT

14. In the model tree, expand the pattern feature.

In

te rn

al
Module 17 | Page 5

U se

nl y

Direction Patterning in the Second Direction

The direction pattern enables you to pattern features in a given direction.
Direction and increments based on selected references. Select a first and second direction reference. Specify number of members and increments in first and second directions. Specify additional, optional dimensions to increment.

Figure 1 Direction Patterning a Group in Two Directions

In

Patterning Features Theory

The Pattern tool enables you to quickly duplicate a feature, group of features, or pattern of features. When you create a pattern, you create instances of the selected feature by varying some specified dimensions. The feature selected for patterning is called the pattern leader, while the patterned instances are called pattern members. Each pattern member is dependent on the original feature, or pattern leader.

Fo r

Direction Patterning in the Second Direction Theory

The direction pattern enables you to pattern features in two directions. The following items are required to create a direction pattern in two directions: Specify the First and Second Direction references The pattern extends in the directions based on the references selected. If you select a plane or surface, the pattern extends normal to the reference, and if you select a linear curve, edge, or axis, the pattern extends along the reference. You can also flip the direction the pattern extends by 180 degrees. In the figures, the first direction reference specified is datum plane RIGHT, and the second direction reference specified is datum plane FRONT.
Module 17 | Page 6 2012 PTC

PT

Figure 2 Direction Patterning a Group in Two Directions Result

te rn
Figure 3 Direction Pattern, Two Directions, Two Additional Dimensions

al

U se

nl y

 Specify the number of pattern members in the First and Second Directions Type the number of members in either the dashboard or the graphics window. The number of pattern members can be different for each direction. The number of pattern members includes the pattern leader. In the figures, the first direction has four pattern members, while the second direction has five pattern members. Specify the increment in the First and Second Directions The increment is the spacing between pattern members. You can edit the increment in the dashboard, the graphics window, or by dragging the drag handle. Again, the increment can be different between the first and second directions. In the figures, the first direction increment is 2.5, while the second direction increment is 2.

Incrementing Additional Dimensions

You can also increment additional dimensions in the first or second direction, or both, at the same time to create a 'varying' pattern. The following items are required to increment additional dimensions in the first and second directions: Select the dimension to be incremented from the pattern leader The pattern leader displays with all dimensions used to create the feature. The dimension selected can be different for each direction. Note also that you can select multiple dimensions for each direction if desired. Specify the increment value Again, the increment value for each direction can be different. In Figure 3, the extrude feature width was incremented by -0.2 in the first direction, and the extrude feature height was incremented by 0.5 in the second direction. Consequently, each pattern member's width decreases by 0.20 in the first direction and the height increases by 0.5 in the second direction over the previous pattern member.

Fo r

2012 PTC

PT

In

te rn

al

U se

nl y

Module 17 | Page 7

PROCEDURE - Direction Patterning in the Second Direction

Close Window Erase Not Displayed DIR_PATTERN_2ND.PRT

Pattern\Direction_Second Task 1:

Direction pattern an extrude feature.

1. Enable only the following Datum Display types: . 2. Press CTRL, and select Extrude 2 and Round 1. 3. Right-click and select Group. 4. Rename the group to OVAL. 5. Select Group OVAL and select from the Pattern Pattern types drop-down menu in the Editing group. 6. In the Pattern dashboard, edit the pattern type to Direction.

7. Select datum plane RIGHT as the first direction reference.

9. In the dashboard, click in the Direction 2 Reference collector. Select datum plane FRONT as the second direction reference. Click Flip Second Direction . Edit the second direction number of members to 5 and edit the second direction spacing to 2.

Fo r

Module 17 | Page 8

PT

8. In the dashboard, edit the number of members to 4 and edit the spacing to 2.50.

In

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

10. Click Complete Feature the Pattern dashboard.

from

13. In the Dimensions tab of the dashboard, click in the Direction 2 Dimension collector. 14. Select the 1 extrude height dimension and edit the increment to 0.50.

Fo r

15. Click Complete Feature

PT

In

2012 PTC

te rn
.

al
Module 17 | Page 9

12. In the dashboard, select the Dimensions tab. Click in the Direction 1 Dimension collector. Select the 2 extrude width dimension and edit the increment to -0.20. Press CTRL and select the R0.1 radius dimension and edit the increment to 0.075.

U se

nl y

11. Edit the definition of Pattern 1 of OVAL.

16. In the model tree, expand the pattern feature. 17. Select the pattern leader, right-click, and select Edit. 18. Edit the width from 1 to 0.75. 19. Click in the background twice to de-select all features.

This completes the procedure.

Fo r

Module 17 | Page 10

PT

In

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

Axis Patterning in the First Direction

The axis pattern enables you to pattern features radially about a specified axis.
Direction based on selected axis. Specify number of members and angular spacing. Set angular extent. Specify member orientation. Specify additional, optional dimensions to increment.

Fo r

The Pattern tool enables you to quickly duplicate a feature, group of features, or pattern of features. When you create a pattern, you create instances of the selected feature by varying some specified dimensions. The feature selected for patterning is called the pattern leader, while the patterned instances are called pattern members. Each pattern member is dependent on the original feature, or pattern leader.

Axis Patterning in the First Direction Theory

The axis pattern enables you to pattern features radially about a specified axis. The following items are required to create an axis pattern in one direction: Specify the axis reference The pattern extends angularly about the selected reference axis. You can toggle the angular direction the pattern extends from clockwise to counterclockwise. In the figures, the axis reference specified is datum axis AXIS. Specify the number of pattern members in the first direction Type the number of members in either the dashboard or the graphics window. The number of pattern members includes the pattern leader. In Figure 2, there are six pattern members.
2012 PTC Module 17 | Page 11

PT

Patterning Features Theory

In

Figure 2 Editing the Axis Pattern and Incrementing a Dimension

te rn

al

U se

Figure 1 Axis Patterning an Extrude in One Direction

nl y

 Specify the angular spacing Specified in degrees, you can edit the angular spacing in the dashboard, the graphics window, or by dragging the drag handle. There are two additional optional settings that you can use when creating axis patterns: Set Angular Extent This option automatically spaces the pattern members equally about the axis reference. You can also select values of 90, 180, 270, and 360 degrees from the drop-down list, or type in the desired angular extent. The range is -360 to +360 degrees. The angular extent value supersedes the angular spacing. In the figures, the angular extent has been set to 360 degrees. Member orientation Determines how the pattern members are to be oriented about the axis reference. With the Follow axis rotation check box selected by default, pattern members are oriented such that the relationship between the pattern leader and axis is maintained for each pattern member. In Figure 2, the middle image is set to Follow axis rotation. With the check box for this option cleared, all pattern members have a constant orientation that is the same as the pattern leader. In Figure 2, the left-most image shows all members having a constant orientation.

Incrementing Additional Dimensions

Fo r

Module 17 | Page 12

PT

Select the dimension to be incremented from the pattern leader. The pattern leader displays with all dimensions used to create the feature. Specify the increment value In Figure 2, the extrude feature length was incremented by 0.3 in the right-most image. Consequently, each pattern member's length increases by 0.3 over the previous pattern member.

In

te rn

You can also increment additional dimensions in the first direction at the same time to create a "varying" pattern. The following items are required to increment additional dimensions in the first direction:

al

U se

nl y

2012 PTC

PROCEDURE - Axis Patterning in the First Direction

Close Window Pattern\Axis_First Task 1: Erase Not Displayed AXIS_PATTERN_1ST.PRT

Axis pattern an extrude feature.

1. Enable only the following Datum Display types: 2. Select Extrude 2 and select Pattern from the Pattern types drop-down menu in the Editing group. 3. In the Pattern dashboard, edit the pattern type to Axis. 4. Select datum axis AXIS. 5. Edit the number of members to 6 and edit the angle increment to 45. 6. In the dashboard, click Set Angular Extent .

Fo r

8. Edit the Angular Extent value back to 360. 9. Click Complete Feature the Pattern dashboard. from

2012 PTC

PT

In

7. Edit the Angular Extent value from 360 to 90.

te rn
Module 17 | Page 13

al

U se

nl y

10. Edit the definition of Pattern 1 of Extrude 2. 11. In the dashboard, select the Options tab. Clear the Follow axis rotation check box. 12. Click Complete Feature .

13. Edit the definition of Pattern 1 of Extrude 2. 14. In the dashboard, select the Dimensions tab. Click in the Direction 1 Dimension collector. Select the 2 length dimension and edit the increment to 0.3.

15. Click Complete Feature

Fo r

16. Edit the definition of Pattern 1. 17. In the dashboard, click Flip Pattern Direction . 18. Click Complete Feature .

This completes the procedure.

Module 17 | Page 14

PT

In

te rn
.

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

Axis Patterning in the Second Direction

The axis pattern enables you to pattern features radially about a specified axis.
Direction based on selected axis. Specify number of members and angular spacing in first and second directions. Set angular extent. Specify member orientation. Specify additional, optional dimensions to increment.

Figure 2 Editing the Axis Pattern and Incrementing Dimensions

The Pattern tool enables you to quickly duplicate a feature, group of features, or pattern of features. When you create a pattern, you create instances of the selected feature by varying some specified dimensions. The feature selected for patterning is called the pattern leader, while the patterned instances are called pattern members. Each pattern member is dependent on the original feature, or pattern leader.

Fo r

Axis Patterning in the Second Direction Theory

The axis pattern enables you to pattern features radially and outward from a specified axis. The following items are required to create an axis pattern in those two directions: Specify the axis reference The pattern extends angularly about the selected axis reference in the first direction and radially outward from the axis in the second direction. You can toggle the angular direction the pattern extends from clockwise to counterclockwise. In the figures, the axis reference specified is datum axisAXIS. Specify the number of pattern members in the first and second directions Type the number of members in either the dashboard or the graphics window. The number of pattern members can be different for each direction. The number of pattern members includes the pattern leader. In the figures, the first direction has eight pattern members, while second direction has three pattern members.
2012 PTC Module 17 | Page 15

PT

In

Patterning Features Theory

te rn

al

U se

Figure 1 Axis Patterning a Group in Two Directions

nl y

 Specify the angular spacing in the first direction Specified in degrees, you can edit the angular spacing in the dashboard, the graphics window, or by dragging the drag handle. Specify the radial spacing in the second direction This increment is the spacing between pattern members outward from the axis reference. Again, you can edit the increment in the dashboard, in the graphics window, or by dragging the drag handle. In the figures, the spacing increment is 2.5. There are two additional optional settings that you can use when creating axis patterns: Set Angular Extent This option automatically spaces the pattern members equally about the axis reference. You can also select values of 90, 180, 270, and 360 degrees from the drop-down list, or you can type the desired angular extent. The range is -360 to +360 degrees. The angular extent value supersedes the angular spacing. In the figures, the angular extent has been set to 360 degrees. Member orientation Determines how the pattern members are to be oriented about the axis reference. With the Follow axis rotation check box selected by default, pattern members are oriented such that the relationship between the pattern leader and axis is maintained for each pattern member. In Figure 2, the middle image is set to Follow axis rotation. With the check box for this option cleared, all pattern members have a constant orientation that is the same as the pattern leader. In Figure 2, the left-most image shows all members having a constant orientation.

Incrementing Additional Dimensions

Select the dimension to be incremented from the pattern leader. The pattern leader displays with all dimensions used to create the feature. The dimension selected can be different for each direction. Also note that you can select multiple dimensions for each direction, if desired. Specify the increment value Again, the increment value for each direction can be different. In Figure 2s right-most image, the left hole diameter was incremented by 0.075 in the first direction, and the right hole diameter was incremented by 0.25 in the second direction, along with the extrude height incremented by 1. Consequently, each pattern member's left hole diameter increases by 0.075 in the first direction and the right hole diameter increases by 0.25 in the second direction with the extrude height increasing 1 over the previous pattern member.

Fo r

Module 17 | Page 16

PT

In

You can also increment additional dimensions in the first or second direction, or both, at the same time to create a "varying" pattern. The following items are required to increment additional dimensions in the first and second directions:

te rn

al

U se

nl y

2012 PTC

PROCEDURE - Axis Patterning in the Second Direction

Close Window Erase Not Displayed AXIS_PATTERN_2ND.PRT

Pattern\Axis_Second Step 1:

Axis pattern an extrude feature.

1. Enable only the following Datum Display types: .

3. Right-click and select Group. 4. Rename the group to OVAL. 5. Select Group OVAL and select from the Pattern Pattern types drop-down menu in the Editing group. 6. In the Pattern dashboard, edit the pattern type to Axis.

7. Select datum axis AXIS as the pattern center.

10. Edit the number of members in the second direction to 3, and edit the spacing value to 2.5.

Fo r

11. Click Complete Feature the Pattern dashboard.

PT

9. In the Pattern dashboard, click Set Angular Extent .

In

8. Edit the number of members in the first direction to 8.

12. Edit the definition of Pattern 1 of OVAL. 13. In the dashboard, select the Options tab. Clear the Follow axis rotation check box. 14. Click Complete Feature .

2012 PTC

te rn
from
Module 17 | Page 17

al

U se

nl y

2. Press CTRL, and select Extrude 2, Hole 1, and Hole 2.

15. Edit the definition of Pattern 1 of OVAL. 16. In the dashboard, select the Options tab and select the Follow axis rotation check box. 17. In the dashboard, select the Dimensions tab. Click in the Direction 1 Dimension collector. Zoom in on the pattern leader. Select the left 0.25 hole diameter dimension and edit the increment to 0.075. 18. In the Dimensions tab of the dashboard, click in the Direction 2 Dimension collector. Select the right 0.25 hole diameter dimension and edit the increment to 0.25. Press CTRL, select the 1 height dimension, and edit the increment to 1.

20. Orient to the Standard Orientation.

Fo r

This completes the procedure.

Module 17 | Page 18

PT

In

19. Click Complete Feature

te rn
.

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

Direction Patterning with Multiple Direction Types

The Direction pattern also enables you to pattern with different direction types.
First and Second Direction types: Translate Rotate Coordinate System

Figure 1 Original Model

In

te rn
Direction Patterning with Multiple Direction Types
The Direction pattern option enables you to pattern using different direction types for the first and second directions. By default, both the first and second directions are set to translate. However, you may specify either Translate, Rotate, or Coordinate System for the first and second directions independently. This capability enables you to capture translation and rotation within a single pattern. Alternatively, you can create a pattern of a pattern to accomplish similar results. In the figures, a translation is used as the first direction, and a rotation is used for the second direction.

Fo r

2012 PTC

PT

Figure 2 Translation and Rotation Directions

al
Figure 3 Completed Pattern
Module 17 | Page 19

U se

nl y

PROCEDURE - Direction Patterning with Multiple Direction Types

Close Window Erase Not Displayed PATTERN_MULT_DIR.PRT

Pattern\Direction_Multiple Task 1:

Direction pattern a group, translating in the first direction, and rotating in the second direction.

Display types:

3. Select Direction as the pattern type. 4. Select Translate , if necessary, for the first direction.

5. Select datum plane DTM1 as the first direction reference.

Fo r

7. In the dashboard, click in the second direction reference collector. 8. Select datum axis A_1 as the second direction reference. 9. Select Rotate direction. for the second .

10. Click Flip Second Direction

11. Edit the second direction number of members to 3 and edit the second direction spacing to 30 degrees.

Module 17 | Page 20

PT

In

6. Edit the number of members to 3 and edit the spacing to 3.

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

2. Select Group OVAL and select from the Pattern Pattern types drop-down menu in the Editing group.

nl y

1. Enable only the following Datum

12. Click Complete Feature

Similar results could be created by first creating a direction pattern, and then creating an axis pattern of the first pattern.

This completes the procedure.

Fo r

2012 PTC

PT

In

te rn
Module 17 | Page 21

al

U se

nl y

Creating Reference Patterns of Features

A Reference pattern enables you to pattern a feature on any other underlying patterned features.
You can reference pattern: Features Groups Patterns along an existing pattern Reference pattern types: Feature Group Both

Figure 2 Editing Reference Pattern Reference Types

Creating Reference Patterns of Features

A Reference pattern patterns a feature on any other underlying patterned features. If you create a new feature on the pattern leader of another pattern, you can Reference pattern that new feature. In Figure 1, an extrude feature was created and patterned. A cut and round feature was then created on the pattern leaders extrude feature. Consequently, the cut and round feature can be Reference patterned. If the quantity or spacing of the underlying pattern is updated, the quantity or spacing of the Reference pattern is automatically updated. Depending on how the features were created, there are three different Reference pattern types that can be created: Feature The Reference pattern references an existing feature pattern. In Figure 2s left image, the round feature is being Reference patterned based on the existing axis pattern. Group The Reference pattern references either a group or existing pattern of a pattern. In Figure 2s middle image, an axis pattern is then direction patterned, resulting in a pattern of a pattern. The round feature is Reference patterned based on the axis pattern that was patterned.
Module 17 | Page 22 2012 PTC

Fo r

PT

In

te rn

al

U se

Figure 1 Reference Patterning a Group

nl y

 Both The Reference pattern references both an existing feature pattern and a group pattern. In Figure 2s right image, the round is Reference patterned around both the feature pattern (axis pattern) and the group pattern (the pattern of the axis pattern). When creating a Reference pattern of a sketch-based feature (such as an extrude), you must either Reference pattern the sketch first, group the sketch and sketch-based feature together, or use an internal (unlinked) sketch. To simplify Reference pattern creation, an internal (unlinked) sketch is recommended. Reference patterns of other feature types, such as rounds or holes, are not an issue.

Fo r

2012 PTC

PT

In

te rn
Module 17 | Page 23

al

U se

nl y

PROCEDURE - Creating Reference Patterns of Features

Close Window Erase Not Displayed REF-PATTERN.PRT

Pattern\Reference_Features Task 1: Reference pattern a group.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

3. Right-click and select Group. 4. With the group still selected, from the select Pattern Pattern types drop-down menu in the Editing group. Notice the default pattern type is Reference pattern. 5. Click Complete Feature the dashboard. from

Task 2:

Fo r

1. Orient to the Standard Orientation. 2. In the model tree, select AXIS_PATTERN and click Pattern .

3. From the Pattern dashboard, edit the pattern type to Direction. 4. Select datum plane FRONT and click Flip First Direction . 5. Edit the number of members to 3 and edit the spacing to 50. 6. Click Complete Feature .

Module 17 | Page 24

PT

Direction pattern AXIS_PATTERN and Reference pattern a round feature.

In

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

2. In the model tree, press CTRL and select OVAL_CUT and ROUND_2.

7. Select ROUND_1. . Notice the 8. Click Pattern default pattern type is Reference pattern and that the default Reference type is Feature. Also notice that the Reference pattern only occurs on the axis pattern.

Fo r

10. From the Pattern dashboard, edit the Reference type to Both. Notice that the round patterns on each member of the axis pattern, as well as each member of the Direction pattern of the axis pattern. 11. Click Complete Feature

PT

In

This completes the procedure.

2012 PTC

te rn
.
Module 17 | Page 25

al

U se

9. From the Pattern dashboard, edit the Reference type to Group. Notice that the round only patterns once per direction pattern group.

nl y

Creating Reference Patterns of Components

You can use a Reference pattern to quickly assemble multiple instances of a component.
Assemble component to pattern leader. Reference pattern the component. Number of Reference patterned components updates automatically.

Figure 1 Reference Patterning a Bolt

Figure 2 Reference Patterning a Bolt

PT

In

Fo r

Creating Reference Patterns of Components

Reference patterns can also be used at the assembly level. For example, if a bolt is assembled into a hole which is a pattern leader of a pattern of holes, the bolt can be Reference patterned, as shown in Figures 1 and 2. To do this, a component is placed into each member of the underlying pattern. If the number of patterned holes changes, the number of patterned bolts updates accordingly, as shown in Figure 3.

Module 17 | Page 26

te rn
Figure 3 Updating the Number of Bosses and Holes

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

PROCEDURE - Creating Reference Patterns of Components

Close Window Erase Not Displayed REF_PAT_COMP.ASM

Pattern\Reference_Components Task 1:

Reference pattern the bolts in the assembly.

1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. In the model tree, select each component to highlight it in the graphics window. 3. Select the last BOLT_8.PRT in the model tree. 4. Select Pattern from the Pattern types drop-down menu in the Modifiers group. 5. Click Complete Feature the Pattern dashboard. from

6. Select the upper BOLT_8.PRT from the graphics window. 7. Click Pattern . 8. Click Complete Feature

In

Fo r

2012 PTC

PT

te rn
.
Module 17 | Page 27

al

U se

nl y

9. At the top of the model tree, click Settings Filters. and select Tree

10. In the Model Tree Items dialog box, select the Features check box and click OK. 11. Expand BASE.PRT, right-click Pattern 4 of EAR, and select Edit.

Fo r

Module 17 | Page 28

PT

This completes the procedure.

In

16. Select Regenerate from the Regenerate types drop-down menu in the Operations group. Notice that the number of Reference patterned bolts also increases to 8.

te rn

al
2012 PTC

15. Edit the number of pattern members from 6 EXTRUDES to 8 EXTRUDES.

U se

14. Select Pattern 1 of Extrude 4, right-click, and select Edit.

13. In the model tree, expand COVER.PRT.

nl y

12. Edit the number of pattern members from 6 LOCAL GROUPS to 8 LOCAL GROUPS.

Deleting Patterns or Pattern Members

You can either delete an entire pattern or disable individual members of a pattern.
Delete Deletes the pattern and the feature used to create the pattern. Delete pattern Deletes the pattern but keeps the original feature. Click the black dots to disable that particular pattern member.

Figure 1 Using the Delete Function

Figure 2 Using the Delete Pattern Function

PT

In

te rn
Figure 3 Disabling Individual Pattern Members

Fo r

Deleting Patterns or Pattern Members

You have three options available for deleting patterns or members of a pattern:

Delete the pattern and the original feature You can select the pattern, right-click, and select Delete to delete the pattern, in addition to the original feature used to create the pattern. Note also that any other patterns that reference this feature are deleted as well. In Figure 1, the extrude feature and pattern are to be deleted. The system indicates that the Reference pattern which consists of the cut and round is also going to be deleted. Delete the pattern You can select the pattern, right-click, and select Delete Pattern to delete the pattern, leaving the original feature intact, as shown in Figure 2. Note that the Reference pattern which consists of the cut and round is also updated automatically. Disable individual members of a pattern or Reference pattern When previewing a pattern or Reference pattern, each pattern instance is
2012 PTC Module 17 | Page 29

al

U se

nl y

represented by a black dot. If any of the pattern preview dots are selected, their display changes to white, which disables that particular member of the pattern. To restore the pattern member, click the white dot at any time while redefining the pattern. In Figure 3, the second and fourth pattern members have been disabled. Notice that the Reference pattern has updated automatically.

Fo r

Module 17 | Page 30

PT

In

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

PROCEDURE - Deleting Patterns or Pattern Members

Close Window Pattern\Delete Task 1: Erase Not Displayed DELETE_PATTERN.PRT

Delete patterns and disable pattern members.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

4. Click Undo from the Quick Access toolbar.

5. Edit the definition of REF_PATTERN.

Fo r

8. In the model tree, right-click REF_PATTERN and select Delete Pattern. 9. In the model tree, right-click OVAL_PATTERN and select Delete Pattern. The original instance is still intact.

2012 PTC

PT

7. Click Complete Feature the dashboard.

In

6. Click the black dots for members 2 and 4 to disable those members.

te rn
from
Module 17 | Page 31

al

U se

3. Notice that all features are deleted in addition to all features of the REF_PATTERN Reference pattern.

nl y

2. In the model tree, right-click OVAL_PATTERN, select Delete, and click OK in the Delete dialog box.

Task 2:

Delete and disable additional patterns and pattern members.

1. Orient to the Standard Orientation. 2. Edit the definition of ROUND_REF_PATTERN. 3. Click the top black dot for each patterned cluster to disable them. 4. Click Complete Feature .

8. Edit the definition of AXIS_PATTERN.

9. Click the top black dot to disable that member. 10. Click Complete Feature

11. Edit the definition of PATTERN_ OF_AXIS_PATTERN.

Fo r

12. Click the top, bottom, left, and right center black dots to disable those cluster members. 13. Click Complete Feature .

This completes the procedure.

Module 17 | Page 32

PT

In

te rn
.

7. In the model tree, expand PATTERN_OF_AXIS_ PATTERN.

al
2012 PTC

U se

6. Right-click ROUND_1, select Delete, and click OK in the Delete dialog box.

5. In the model tree, right-click ROUND_REF_PATTERN and select Delete Pattern.

nl y

Module

18
U se O te rn al
Module 18 | Page 1

Measuring and Inspecting Models

Module Overview

You can establish a system of units and a density value for the specific material type used in your models. You can then create various types of analyses, such as measuring distances, angles, and surface areas. You can also calculate mass properties and perform interference checks on assemblies. These analyses can be useful for extracting data from a model or determining whether the model meets the required design intent.

Objectives

After completing this module, you will be able to: View and edit model properties. Investigate model units. Analyze mass properties. Use the measure tools and measure summary tool. Create planar cross-sections. Measure global interferences.

Fo r

2012 PTC

PT

In

nl y

Viewing and Editing Model Properties

There is a consolidated dialog box for all model properties.

Figure 1 Model Properties Dialog Box

Fo r

The Model Properties dialog box provides common locations for viewing and editing model properties in several categories. Each line item in the dialog box provides basic information at a glance. to display

Some properties can be expanded by clicking Expand additional information.

Clicking Info produces a separate information window that provides more detailed information. To create or edit any of the properties, click the change link in the dialog box. The appropriate dialog box for that property then appears. You can access several of the model properties listed in this dialog box through other menus or dialogs. The following is a list of the properties contained in the Model Properties dialog box, which is accessed by clicking File > Prepare > Model Properties. Materials Material
Module 18 | Page 2 2012 PTC

PT

Viewing and Editing Model Properties

In

te rn

al

U se

nl y

Fo r

2012 PTC

PT

In

te rn

al
Module 18 | Page 3

Units Accuracy Mass Properties Relations, Parameters, and Instances Relations Parameters Instance Features and Geometry Tolerance Names Tools Flexible Shrinkage Simplified Representation Pro/Program Interchange Model Interfaces Reference Control Detail Options

U se

nl y

Investigating Model Units

You can specify a model's units.
Analyses are reported in current model units. Units are derived from templates. You can change units, if desired. Convert dimensions Interpret dimensions

Figure 2 Converting Model Dimensions

Fo r

There are several unit systems available, including: Centimeter Gram Second (CGS) Foot Pound Second (FPS) Inch Pound (mass) Second (IPS) Inch Pound (force) Second (IPS) Meter Kilogram Second (MKS) Millimeter Kilogram Second (mmKs) Millimeter Newton (force) Second (mmNs) If none of these default unit systems are desirable, you can customize your own unit system using any combination of units. Any analyses performed on a model are reported in the current model units. You can edit the units used in a model in the Units Manager dialog box, which is accessed by clicking change in the Units row of the Materials section of the Model Properties dialog box. When you switch from one set of units
Module 18 | Page 4 2012 PTC

PT

A model's units are typically derived from a specific model template that was chosen when you first began creating a part model. Creo Parametric's default system of units is English, specifically in_lbm_sec.

Investigating Model Units

In

te rn

al
Figure 3 Interpreting Model Dimensions

U se

Figure 1 Units Manager

nl y

to another, you must specify how to manage the dimensions. There are two different methods: Convert dimensions Enables the model to retain its original size after the system of units is modified. The dimension values update accordingly, based on your decision. In Figure 2, the diameter of the socket is 25.4 mm. The system of units is converted from Metric to English, and therefore the English diameter is now 1 in (the same size). Interpret dimensions Enables the model to change size based on the system of units specified. The dimension values remain the same. In Figure 3, the diameter of the socket is 1 in. The system of units is interpreted from English to Metric, and therefore the Metric diameter is now 1 mm (the same value). The same systems of units are also available for assemblies.

Fo r

2012 PTC

PT

In

te rn

al
Module 18 | Page 5

U se

nl y

PROCEDURE - Investigating Model Units

Close Window Properties\Units Task 1: Erase Not Displayed MODEL-UNITS.PRT

Investigate the model units of a model.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

4. Notice the current unit system for the model.

Fo r

7. In the Units Manager dialog box, select the Inch lbm Second system of units and click Set. In the Changing Model Units dialog box, select the Convert dimensions option, if necessary. Click OK > Close > Close.

Module 18 | Page 6

PT

6. Again, notice the current unit system in the Units Manager dialog box and view the Description.

In

5. In the Materials section, click change in the Units row.

te rn

3. Click File > Prepare > Model Properties to open the Model Properties dialog box.

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

2. Double-click the outer cylindrical model surface. Notice the main outer diameter is 25.4.

8. Click Refit , if necessary, and click in the background. 9. Double-click the outer cylindrical model surface. Notice the main outer diameter is now 1. The model is the same size. The diameter changed from 25.4 millimeters to 1 inch.

10. Click File > Prepare > Model Properties. 11. In the Materials section, click change in the Units row.

14. Click Refit background.

PT

Fo r

15. Double-click the outer cylindrical model surface. Notice the main outer diameter is still 1. The model is now much smaller. The diameter changed from 1 inch to 1 millimeter.

This completes the procedure.

2012 PTC

13. In the Changing Model Units dialog box, select the Interpret dimensions option and click OK > Close > Close.

In

and click in the

te rn

12. In the Units Manager dialog box, select the millimeter Kilogram Sec system of units and click Set.

al
Module 18 | Page 7

U se

nl y

Analyzing Mass Properties

You can calculate a model's mass properties.
Mass properties include: Volume Surface area Density Mass COG Analyses require model density. Density units are the same as model units. For assemblies, a density for each component is required.

Fo r

You can view a model's mass properties within the Materials section of the Model Properties dialog box. You can also calculate the mass properties by selecting the Analysis tab from the ribbon and clicking Mass Properties

from the Model Report group. Before you can calculate accurate mass properties for a model, however, you must define its density. A mass properties calculation is dependent upon the density entered for a given model. If the density is updated for a model and its mass properties are recalculated, the results update. When the system performs a mass properties analysis, the following mass property information is calculated: Volume Surface Area Density Mass Center of Gravity The center of gravity (COG) displays on the model as a coordinate system with axes 1, 2, and 3, as shown in Figure 2.
2012 PTC

Module 18 | Page 8

PT

Analyzing Mass Properties

Figure 2 Performing a Mass Properties Analysis

In

te rn

al

U se

Figure 1 Viewing Mass Properties

nl y

You can also perform mass properties analyses on assemblies. However, you must first configure the density of each part model.

Mass Properties Analysis Options

There are three options available when performing a mass properties analysis: Quick Enables you to compute mass properties without saving the analysis or creating a mass properties feature in the model tree. Saved Enables you to save the mass properties analysis for future use. You can specify a unique name for the analysis so you can easily identify it at a later time. You can retrieve the saved analyses by clicking the Analysis tab and clicking Saved Analysis from the Manage group. Feature Enables you to save the mass properties analysis as a feature in the model tree.

Fo r

2012 PTC

PT

In

te rn

al
Module 18 | Page 9

U se

nl y

PROCEDURE - Analyzing Mass Properties

Close Window Erase Not Displayed MASS-PROPS.PRT

Properties\Mass-Properties Task 1:

Analyze the mass properties of a model.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

3. In the Model Properties dialog box, click Expand in the Mass Properties row of the Materials section. 4. Notice that the density is specified as 3.613e+4. 5. In the Materials section, click change in the Mass Properties row.

Fo r

8. In the Materials section, click Info in the Mass Properties row. 9. Notice the values for volume, surface area, density, mass, and center of gravity in the Mass Properties Report.

10. Close the Mass Properties Report dialog box. 11. Click Close in the Model Properties dialog box.

Module 18 | Page 10

PT

7. Notice the updated density value in the Model Properties dialog box.

In

te rn

6. In the Mass Properties dialog box, edit the Density to .285, the density of steel, and click OK.

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

2. Click File > Prepare > Model Properties.

Task 2:

Analyze the mass properties in an assembly.

1. Click Open from the Quick Access toolbar, select VALVE.ASM, and click Open.

2. In the ribbon, select the Analysis tab and select Mass Properties from the Mass Properties types drop-down menu in the Model Report group. 3. Click Preview Analysis in the Mass Properties dialog box.

Fo r

This completes the procedure.

2012 PTC

PT

6. Click Accept in the Mass Properties dialog box.

In

5. Notice the center of gravity 1-2-3 coordinate system location.

te rn
Module 18 | Page 11

4. Notice the values for volume, surface area, density, mass, and center of gravity.

al

U se

nl y

Using the Measure Tools

You can make several types of measurements on models.
Measurements include: Length Distance Angle Diameter Area Volume Transform

Figure 1 Measuring Length

Using the Measure Tools

Fo r

Start the desired measurement tool and then select references. Select references and then start the desired measurement tool. This workflow enables you to use advanced chain or surface selection. Regardless of workflow, the references remain selected, and you can toggle between the various measure tools to view the different measurement results. Press CTRL to select multiple references for a measure tool. The tool provides cumulative results based on the selected measurement type. Measurement results display in the graphics window within on-screen panels. You can drag these panels as well as collapse them. You can restore any collapsed panel by clicking its on-screen icon. You can also view measurement results by expanding the Results area of the Measure dialog box. You can copy and paste the contents of this Results table to other programs such as spreadsheet applications.

Measurement Tool Types

The following measure tool types are available: Length Measures the length of a selected edge or curve. Pressing CTRL and selecting multiple curves or edges also calculates a cumulative length measurement. Selecting a surface reference calculates either the perimeter total for all loops in the surface or the external perimeter for only the outer loop. Selecting multiple surface references calculates either the
Module 18 | Page 12 2012 PTC

PT

In

You can make several types of measurements on models. Use either of the following workflows for measure tools:

te rn

Figure 2 Measuring Distance

al

Figure 3 Measuring an Angle

U se

nl y

Within the Measure dialog box, you can edit various options by clicking Measure Options . The following options are available: Units by Model Units are the same as those of the model. Length Units Specify the desired length units from a drop-down list. Angular Units Specify the desired angular units from a drop-down list. Decimal Places Specify the number of decimal places displayed for measurements. Show Feature Tab Displays the Feature tab in the Measure dialog box, enabling you to specify regeneration order as well as create parameters for a given measurement. Save Type Enables you to specify the default option that is selected when saving the measurement. Options include: Analysis Enables you to save the measurement for future use. You can specify a unique name for the measurement analysis so you can easily identify it at a later time. You can retrieve the saved analysis by from the Manage group in the Analysis tab. clicking Saved Analysis Feature Enables you to save the measurement as a feature in the model tree. Latest Enables you to save the measurement the same way as the previously saved measurement. Panel display You can toggle panels to either hide or display them in the graphics window. You can also toggle panels by collapsing them or expanding them.
2012 PTC

Fo r

PT

In

te rn

Measurement Options

al

cumulative perimeter total for all loops of all surfaces or the cumulative external perimeter for only the outer loops of all surfaces. Distance Measures the distance between two selected references. You can optionally provide a projection reference or measure the maximum distance between references. You can also use a cylindrical surface reference as an axis. Angle Measures the angle between two selected references. You can specify a measurement range of +/-180 degrees or 0-360 degrees. You can also specify the desired angle type you wish to measure, including Main, Supplement, Conjugate, and Second Conjugate. Diameter Measures both the diameter and radius of a selected surface or edge reference. You can also select a point reference on a non-ruled surface to measure the radius at that selected point. Area Measures the area of a selected surface reference. Optionally, you can specify a projection reference. You can also select multiple surface references and measure a cumulative area measurement. Selecting the model measures the total model surface area. Volume Measures the volume of a model. You can also measure the volume on either side of a selected plane. Transform Generates a transform matrix between two coordinate system references, consisting of the X, Y, and Z distances between the coordinate system references.

U se

nl y

Module 18 | Page 13

PROCEDURE - Using the Measure Tools

Close Window Analysis\Measure Task 1: Erase Not Displayed MEASURE.PRT

Measure the length of edges and surfaces.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

4. Select the diagonal edge. 5. Press CTRL and select the two adjacent edges. 6. Click the first panel to expand it, and drag the panels as necessary.

Fo r

9. Right-click the model and select Clear.

10. Select the top, right surface. 11. Notice the perimeter values. 12. Press CTRL and select the top, left surface. 13. Notice the five values in the Results section. 14. In the graphics window, expand the first panel and drag it as necessary. 15. Close the Measure dialog box.

Module 18 | Page 14

PT

8. Notice the individual values for all three lengths, as well as the sum total of all references.

7. Expand the Results section in the Measure dialog box.

In

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

from the 3. Select Length Measure types drop-down menu in the Measure group.

nl y

2. In the ribbon, select the Analysis tab.

Task 2:

Measure the distance between vertices, edges, and surfaces.

1. In the ribbon, select Distance from the Measure types drop-down menu in the Measure group. 2. Select the front, right vertex. 3. Press CTRL and select the rear, right-most vertex.

6. In the Measure dialog box, right-click the second vertex reference and select Remove. 7. Press CTRL and select the rear edge.

Fo r

10. In the Measure dialog box, select the Use as Line check box. 11. Right-click the vertex reference in the dialog box and select Remove.

2012 PTC

PT

9. Clear the Measure maximum distance check box.

In

8. In the Measure dialog box, select the Measure maximum distance check box.

te rn
Module 18 | Page 15

al

U se

5. In the Projection collector, right-click and select Remove.

nl y

4. In the Measure dialog box, click in the Projection collector and select datum plane FRONT.

12. Press CTRL and select the front cylindrical surface. 13. In the Measure dialog box, clear the Use as Axis check box. Clear the Use as Line check box. 14. Notice the result is the closest diagonal distance.

17. In the Measure dialog box, select the Use as Line check box.

19. Close the Measure dialog box. 20. Press CTRL+D.

Fo r

Task 3:

1. In the ribbon, select Angle from the Measure types drop-down menu in the Measure group. 2. Select the front, left surface. 3. Press CTRL and select the right, front surface.

Module 18 | Page 16

PT

Measure the angle between surfaces and edges.

18. In the Measure dialog box, select the Measure maximum distance check box.

In

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

16. In the Measure dialog box, select the Use as Axis check box.

nl y

15. Orient to the TOP view orientation.

4. In the Measure dialog box, select 0360 from the Range drop-down list, if necessary. Select Supplement from the Angle drop-down list and notice the angle.

9. In the Measure dialog box, select Conjugate from the Angle drop-down list and notice the angle.

Fo r

10. In the Measure dialog box, select Second Conjugate from the Angle drop-down list and notice the angle. 11. Select Main from the Angle drop-down list. 12. Leave the dialog box open.

2012 PTC

PT

8. In the Measure dialog box, select +/-180 from the Range drop-down list. Select Supplement from the Angle drop-down list and notice the angle.

In

te rn
Module 18 | Page 17

7. Select Main from the Angle drop-down list.

al

6. In the Measure dialog box, select Second Conjugate from the Angle drop-down list and notice the angle.

U se

nl y

5. In the Measure dialog box, select Conjugate from the Angle drop-down list and notice the angle.

Task 4:

Measure the diameter and radius of surfaces and edges. .

1. In the Measure dialog box, click Diameter

2. Notice that the references are automatically removed due to the different measurement type. 3. Select the front, cylindrical surface.

5. Press CTRL and query-select the rear hole edge. 6. Notice the diameter and radius values. 7. Expand the panels and drag them as necessary. 8. Right-click the model and select Clear. 9. Leave the dialog box open. Task 5:

Measure the area of surfaces.

4. Press CTRL and select the top, left surface.

Fo r

5. Expand the first panel and drag both as necessary.

6. Select the top, angled surface. 7. In the Measure dialog box, click in the Projection collector. 8. Select datum plane TOP. 9. Right-click the Projection collector and select Remove.

10. Leave the dialog box open.

Module 18 | Page 18

PT

3. Select the top, right surface.

2. Right-click the model and select Clear.

In

1. In the Measure dialog box, click . Area

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

4. Notice the diameter and radius values.

Task 6:

Measure the volume of a model.

1. In the Measure dialog box, click . Volume 2. Select the model from the model tree.

5. Close the Measure dialog box. This completes the procedure.

Fo r

2012 PTC

PT

In

te rn
Module 18 | Page 19

al

U se

4. Click the arrow in the graphics window to flip the volume direction.

nl y

3. In the Measure dialog box, click in the Plane collector and select datum plane RIGHT.

Using the Measure Summary Tool

The Summary measure tool provides all applicable measurement results based on the references selected.
Multiple references yields the sum total of applicable measurements. Distance between references is also provided. Individual reference results panels are collapsed by default. Toggle between the Measure tool and other individual measure tools. Selected references are retained.

Figure 1 Summary Measurement using Vertex References

Figure 2 Summary Measurement using Edge References

PT

In

Fo r

Using the Measure Summary Tool

The Summary measure tool is similar to any of the other individual measure tools. However, the Summary measure tool provides results for all measurements based on the references selected. Pressing CTRL and selecting multiple references yields the sum total of the applicable measurements as well as the distance between those references. For example, in Figure 3, the two surfaces are selected as references, and the system provides the sum total results for measurements relative to surfaces including angle, area, and perimeter, as well as the distance between those two surfaces. When specifying multiple references, the system automatically collapses the measurement results for the individual references. However, you can always expand these collapsed panels. Within the Measure dialog box you can select the individual measure tools after measuring a summary, and then switch back to the Summary tool, still retaining the references.
Module 18 | Page 20 2012 PTC

te rn
Figure 3 Summary Measurement using Surface References

al

U se

nl y

PROCEDURE - Using the Measure Summary Tool

Close Window Erase Not Displayed MEASURE.PRT

Analysis\Measure-Summary Task 1:

Use the measure summary tool on a variety of geometry types.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

4. Select the rear vertex.

5. Press CTRL and select the front vertex. 6. Expand the panels and arrange them as necessary.

7. In the Measure dialog box, expand the Results section.

Fo r

8. Right-click in the graphics window and select Clear.

9. Press CTRL and select the two edges. 10. Expand the panels and arrange them as necessary.

2012 PTC

PT

In

te rn
Module 18 | Page 21

al

U se

from the 3. Select Summary Measure types drop-down menu in the Measure group.

nl y

2. In the ribbon, select the Analysis tab.

11. Leaving the edge references selected, click Length Measure dialog box. Click Distance Click Angle . .

in the

12. Notice that only the selected measure tools information is displayed each time. 13. Click Summary . 14. Right-click in the graphics window and select Clear. 15. Press CTRL and select the two surfaces.

18. Right-click and select Measure > Angle. 19. Right-click and select Measure > Area.

Fo r

20. Notice that only the selected measure tools information is displayed each time. 21. Right-click and select Measure > Summary. 22. Right-click in the graphics window and select Clear.

23. Select MEASURE.PRT from the model tree. 24. Close the Measure dialog box.

This completes the procedure.

Module 18 | Page 22

PT

17. Leaving the edge references selected, right-click and select Measure > Length.

In

te rn

16. In the Measure dialog box, clear the Use as Plane check boxes for both references.

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

Creating Planar Part Cross-Sections

You can create planar cross-sections in a 3-D model.
Available types: Planar X Direction Y Direction Z Direction Cross-section options Edit cross-section hatching Display management: Show Section Activate/Deactivate

Figure 1 Planar Cross-Section

te rn Fo r
2012 PTC

You can create new planar part cross-sections in a 3-D model. The following planar cross-section types are available: Planar Enables you to select a planar surface or datum plane to create a cross-section through. X Direction Creates a planar cross-section with the normal pointing along the models default coordinate system X-axis. Y Direction Creates a planar cross-section with the normal pointing along the models default coordinate system Y-axis. Z Direction Creates a planar cross-section with the normal pointing along the models default coordinate system Z-axis. These cross-section types are created using the Section dashboard. You can access the Section dashboard from either the Section types drop-down menu in the Model Display group of the View ribbon tab, or from the Sections tab of the view manager. New cross-sections are given the default names of XSEC0001, XSEC0002, and so on. You can always rename a cross-section either during or after creation, similar to any feature. You can also redefine cross-sections or
Module 18 | Page 23

PT

Creating Planar Part Cross-Sections

Figure 2 Z Direction Cross-Section with Filled Surface

In

al
Figure 3 X Direction Cross-Section with Modified Hatching

U se

nl y

manage their display using either the Sections node in the model tree or the Sections tab in the view manager.

Cross-Section Options
The following are various cross-section creation options available in the Section dashboard: Distance from plane Enables you to type a distance to offset the cross-section from the specified reference. You can also dynamically drag the cross-section in the graphics window. Direction from plane Enables you to flip the direction from the specified reference that the cross-section is offset. Cap section Enables you to cap the surface of the cross-section. Fill surface color Enables you to fill the capped surface with a specified color. This option is only available if the cross-section is capped. Enable hatching Enables you to toggle the cross-sections hatch pattern on or off. 3D Dragger Similar to Assembly mode, you can enable the 3D Dragger and use it to translate or rotate the cross-section about the three axes. View 2-D section in separate window Enables you to display the 2-D cross-section in a separate window.

Fo r

Pattern Enables you to edit the hatch pattern used. You can select from a default library of ANSI or ISO hatch patterns, or choose from a user-defined library hatch pattern. Angle Enables you to specify the angle to orient the hatch pattern. Scale Enables you to size the pattern. You can type a value, or use the two options to either halve or double the existing hatch spacing. Color Enables you to modify the color that the hatch pattern displays in the graphics window.

Cross-Section Display Management

You can manage the display of a given cross-section from the Sections node in the model tree, from the view manager, or by selecting the cross-section in the graphics window. The following right-click options are available: Show Section Enables you to enable or disable the cross-section within the graphics window. This option enables or disables both the section itself and the hatch pattern. Activate/Deactivate Activates or deactivates cut on the geometry based on the cross-section.

Module 18 | Page 24

PT

In

If the hatch pattern is enabled for a given cross-section, you can edit the hatching either from the Sections node in the model tree or from the view manager. When editing the hatch pattern, the Edit Hatching dialog box displays with the following options:

te rn

Editing Cross-Section Hatching

al

U se

nl y

2012 PTC

PROCEDURE - Creating Planar Part Cross-Sections

Close Window Erase Not Displayed SECTIONS.PRT

View\Cross-Section_Part-Planar Task 1:

Create default X, Y, and Z cross-sections.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

from the 3. Select X Direction Section types drop-down menu. 4. In the graphics window, drag the section offset to the right approximately 15. 5. Drag the section offset back to 0. 6. In the dashboard, click Hatch . Pattern 7. Click Complete Feature .

Fo r

9. Right-click and select Edit Hatching. Edit the Angle to 45 and press ENTER. . Click Halve Hatch Size Click Apply and close the Edit Hatching dialog box.

10. In the model tree, right-click XSEC0001 and select Deactivate. Right-click and select Show Section to toggle it off. 11. Click in the graphics window background to de-select all geometry.

2012 PTC

PT

8. In the model tree, locate cross-section XSEC0001.

In

te rn
Module 18 | Page 25

al

U se

nl y

2. In the ribbon, select the View tab.

12. Select Y Direction from the Section types drop-down menu. 13. In the graphics window, edit the section offset to 10. 14. Notice the hidden hole profile is now visible.

16. In the 2D Section Viewer dialog box, click Rotate Right necessary. 17. Click Complete Feature 18. Right-click and select Deactivate. 19. Select Z Direction from the Section types drop-down menu. 20. In the dashboard, click Cap to toggle it off. Section 21. Click Cap Section it on. if .

22. In the dashboard, click Fill

23. Click Complete Feature

PT

Surface and select the darkest red color. . 24. Right-click and select Deactivate. Create and pattern a cross-section based on a selected plane.

Fo r

Task 2:

1. Select Planar from the Section types drop-down menu. 2. Select the surface on the right. 3. Edit the offset to -12 and press ENTER. 4. In the dashboard, click Hatch Pattern . 5. Click Complete Feature .

Module 18 | Page 26

In

te rn
to toggle

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

15. In the dashboard, click 2D View .

6. With the section still selected, right-click and select Pattern. 7. Select the same surface on the right. 8. In the dashboard, click Flip First Direction Edit the quantity to 5. Edit the spacing to 12. 9. Click Complete Feature . .

11. Orient to the 3D view orientation. Task 3:

Investigate cross-sections from the view manager.

1. Click View Manager the In Graphics toolbar.

Fo r

This completes the procedure.

2012 PTC

PT

2. In the view manager, select the Sections tab. Click New and view the available options. Right-click on XSEC0001 and notice the available options. Click Close.

In

te rn
from
Module 18 | Page 27

al

U se

10. In the model tree, expand the Pattern feature. Select XSEC0004, press CTRL, and select the remaining four patterned sections. Right-click and select Show Section.

nl y

Measuring Global Interference

You can calculate interferences between components in an assembly.
Setup: Parts only Sub-assembly only Computation type: Exact Quick Interference pairs: Highlighted in the model Volume can be calculated

Measuring Global Interference

Fo r

Parts only Interference is checked between all parts, regardless of which sub-assembly, if any, to which they belong. Sub-assembly only Interference is checked between all sub-assemblies in the top level assembly without determining whether individual parts within the sub-assembly interfere. When components interfere, the geometry of one part is embedded in another part. The system displays the interference between these two components as a pair in the Global Interference dialog box. Selecting the interfering pair in the dialog box causes the components to highlight in the graphics window, as shown in the figures. There are two different computational methods available for computing interferences: Exact When selecting the interfering pair, in addition to highlighting the interfering components, the system also highlights the interfering volume shared between the two components. In addition, the volume of interference is calculated and displayed in the dialog box, as shown in Figure 1. Quick When selecting the interfering pair, in addition to highlighting the interfering components, the system highlights the approximate interfering
Module 18 | Page 28 2012 PTC

PT

You can calculate interferences between components in an assembly. There are two different setup options available when computing global interference:

In

te rn

Figure 2 Viewing Quick Global Interference Computation

al

U se

Figure 1 Viewing Exact Global Interference Computation

nl y

volume with a plus symbol (+) in the graphics window, as shown in Figure 2. The volume of interference is not calculated.

Analysis Options
There are three options available when computing global interference on models: Quick Enables you to compute global interference without saving the analysis or creating a feature in the model tree. Saved Enables you to save the analysis for future use. You can specify a unique name for the global interference analysis so you can easily identify it at a later time. You can retrieve the saved analyses by selecting from the the Analysis tab from the ribbon and clicking Saved Analysis Manage group. Feature Enables you to save the global interference analysis as a feature in the model tree.

Fo r

2012 PTC

PT

In

te rn
Module 18 | Page 29

al

U se

nl y

PROCEDURE - Measuring Global Interference

Close Window Erase Not Displayed INTERFERENCE.ASM

Analysis\Global-Interference Task 1:

Measure global interferences in an assembly.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

3. In the Inspect Geometry group, select Global Interference from the Global Interference types drop-down menu. 4. Click Preview Analysis in the Global Interference dialog box. Notice the four interfering pairs. Select each pair to view the highlighting, and notice the volume of interference. Click Accept .

7. In the model tree, right-click BODY.PRT and select Activate. Expand BODY.PRT and expand the second Pattern (Hole). Edit the diameter of Hole id 299 from 3 to 4, and click . Regenerate

Fo r

Module 18 | Page 30

PT

6. In the Model Tree Items dialog box, select the Features check box and click OK.

In

5. Click Settings Tree Filters.

and select

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

2. From the ribbon, select the Analysis tab.

8. In the model tree, right-click INTERFERENCE.ASM and select Activate. 9. Select the Analysis tab. 10. Click Global Interference from the Inspect Geometry group. 11. Click Preview Analysis . Notice that there is only one interference pair. Click Accept . 12. In the model tree, right-click BODY.PRT and select Activate. Edit the diameter of Hole id 37 from 49 to 51, and click . Regenerate

Fo r

15. Click Global Interference from the Inspect Geometry group.

16. Click Preview Analysis . Notice that there are now no interfering parts, as shown in the Message Log. Click Accept .

This completes the procedure.

2012 PTC

PT

14. Select the Analysis tab.

13. In the model tree, right-click INTERFERENCE.ASM and select Activate.

In

te rn
Module 18 | Page 31

al

U se

nl y

Fo r

Module 18 | Page 32

PT

In

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

Module

19
U se O te rn al
Module 19 | Page 1

Assembling with Constraints

Module Overview

Most commercial product designs consist of numerous components. Creo Parametric enables you to create an assembly, into which you can assemble multiple components. Constraints locate the components within the assembly, both manually and automatically.

Objectives

Fo r

After completing this module, you will be able to: Understand assembly and constraint theory and create new assembly models. Understand assembly constraint status and analyze basic component orientation. Assemble components using the Default constraint and Automatic option. Create coincident constraints using geometry. Create coincident constraints using datum features. Create distance constraints. Create parallel, normal, and angle constraints. Use the accessory window to assemble components.

2012 PTC

PT

In

nl y

Understanding Assembly Theory

An assembly is a collection of parts and other sub-assemblies that you combine using constraints.
Create assembly models from standardized templates. Capture assembly design intent using constraints. Create assembly constraints.

Figure 1 An Assembly Model is Comprised of Parts

Understanding Assembly Theory

Like part models, all new assembly models share several characteristics in common. By creating your assembly models from standardized templates, you save time by avoiding the need to repeatedly define company standard information. This standard template enables all engineers to have a consistent starting point. After you create and name the new assembly, you can begin adding parts to it. Assemblies contain design intent in the same way that part models contain design intent. Assembly design intent is based upon which component is assembled first, and the constraints that you use during the assembly process. Design intent is important because it ensures that your assembly updates in a predictable manner when edited and regenerated. Sub-assemblies share all of the same characteristics as assemblies. In fact, a sub-assembly is nothing more than an assembly that is assembled into another assembly. Creo Parametric provides several types of constraints, such as Coincident, Distance, Parallel, Normal, and Angle. To easily utilize these constraints, select the Automatic option to enable Creo Parametric to automatically
Module 19 | Page 2 2012 PTC

Fo r

PT

There are multiple methods to assemble components using Creo Parametric. Assembling components with constraints is one of the primary methods used to create Creo Parametric assemblies.

In

te rn

al

U se

nl y

determine the constraint type based upon the orientation and position of the component and the references you select. Every assembled component contains a Placement node in the model tree that you can expand to view the constraints used in that component's placement. You must enable the Placement folder filter to view this node. Assembling with component interfaces is the second method available for assembling components. This method is especially useful when assembling common components because it can significantly reduce the number of selections that you make when constraining a component. By using component interfaces, you save the referenced interfaces on the common part. Then, when you place the common part, you only need to select the assembly references.

Fo r

2012 PTC

PT

In

te rn

al
Module 19 | Page 3

U se

nl y

Creating New Assembly Models

Your company can create customized templates that you can use to create new assembly models.
Create new assemblies in the New dialog box. Use customized assembly templates. Assembly templates include: Datums Units Parameters Layers View Orientations

Figure 2 Examples of Parameters

PT

In

Fo r

Creating New Assemblies

Assemblies are composed of parts and other sub-assemblies that you combine. You can create new assembly models within Creo Parametric either by clicking File > New, or by clicking New . You can type the name of the assembly and select whether you want to use a default template. Unless you select the Empty template, the new assembly displays in the graphics window with the default datum features associated with the selected template.

Using Templates
New assemblies should be created using a template. Assembly templates are similar to part templates in that they enable you to create a new assembly with predefined general information. Your company has most likely created customized templates to use that contain your company's standards. Using a template to create a new assembly is beneficial because it ensures that
Module 19 | Page 4 2012 PTC

te rn
Figure 3 Layers Created from Assembly Template

al

U se

Figure 1 New Assembly Created using Template

nl y

regardless of who created it, the assembly contains the same consistent set of information, including: Datums Most templates contain a set of default datum planes and default coordinate system, all named appropriately. Units Most companies have a company standard for units in their assemblies. Creating every assembly with the same set of units ensures that mistakes are not made. Parameters Every assembly can contain the same standard metadata information. Layers When every assembly contains the same layers, it is easier to manage both the layers and items on them. View Orientations Ensuring that every assembly contains the same standard view orientations aids the modeling process.

Parameters can drive dimension values through relations, or be driven by relations. Parameters can be used as a column in a family table. For example, the parameter Cost might have a different value for each instance. Parameter values can be reported in Drawings, or viewed with data management tools such as Pro/INTRALINK or Windchill solutions. User parameters can be added at the model level (part, assembly, or component) or to a feature or pattern. You can view an assemblys parameters and create new ones by clicking Parameters You can create parameters that accept the following types of values: Real Number Any numerical value. For example 25.5, 1.666667, 10.5E3, and PI. Integer Any whole number. For example 1, 5, and 257. String Any consecutive sequence of alphanumeric characters (letters or numbers). Yes/No Accepts either the YES or NO value.

Fo r

2012 PTC

PT

from the Model Intent group in the Model ribbon tab.

In

te rn

al

U se

Parameters are metadata information that can be included in an assembly template or created by a user in his or her own part or assembly. Parameters are important because they enable you to add additional information to part and assembly models. Parameters can have several uses:

O
Module 19 | Page 5

Viewing and Creating Parameters

nl y

PROCEDURE - Creating New Assembly Models

Close Window Erase Not Displayed CREATE NEW

File\New_Assembly Task 1:

Create a new assembly by selecting a template.

1. Without an open model, notice only the Home tab displays in the ribbon.

4. Enable only the following Datum

Display types:

Fo r

and select Tree Settings Filters. In the Model Tree Items dialog box, select the Features check box and click OK.

6. Explore the default datum features created in the graphics window and model tree.

Module 19 | Page 6

PT

5. At the top of the model tree, click

In

3. In the New File Options dialog box, select the mmks_asm_design template. Click OK. .

te rn

2. Click New from the Quick Access toolbar. Select Assembly as the Type and Design as the Sub-type. Edit the Name to new_assembly. Clear the Use default template check box. Click OK.

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

7. Notice that the ribbon has populated with tabs specific to the type of open file.

8. In the model tree, click Show the default layers. 9. Click File > Prepare > Model Properties to open the Model Properties dialog box. 10. Notice the units that are set. 11. Click Close. 12. Click Parameters

and select Layer Tree. Notice

from the Model Intent group.

and edit the Name to ASSY_NUMBER. Click New Parameter Edit the parameter type to Integer. Click in the Value field and edit the number to 596289. Click OK.

14. Click Named Views . Notice the default view orientations.

Fo r

15. Click Named Views to close it.

PT

In

2012 PTC

te rn
again

Click New Parameter and edit the Name to PURCHASED. Edit the Type to Yes No and notice the default Value of NO.

al

13. In the Parameters dialog box, click in the Description parameter Value field. Edit the value to NEW ASSEMBLY and press ENTER.

U se

O
Module 19 | Page 7

nl y

Task 2:

Create a new assembly by selecting a different template.

3. Again, notice the datum features. 4. Click File > Prepare > Model Properties. 5. Notice the units that are set. 6. Click Close.

This completes the procedure.

Fo r

Module 19 | Page 8

PT

In

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

2. In the New File Options dialog box, select the inlbs_asm_design template and click OK.

nl y

1. Click New from the Quick Access toolbar. Select Assembly as the Type and Design as the Sub-type. Edit the Name to select_template. Clear the Use default template check box. Click OK.

Understanding Constraint Theory

Constraints determine how a part is located in an assembly.
Most constraints are applied between parts within an assembly. Select component reference. Select assembly reference. Constraints are added one at a time. The box of the active constraint is highlighted. Double-click a constraint's tag to modify it.

In

Figure 2 Viewing the Active Constraint

Fo r

You can assemble components using constraints. Constraints determine how a part is located within an assembly. There are many different types of constraints that you can use to assemble components. Most constraints are applied between parts within an assembly. They specify the relative position of a pair of references. The system adds constraints one at a time. Use placement constraints in combinations to specify both placement and orientation. It is important to select your constraints based on the design intent of your assembly, so that when you edit a dimension on a part, the assembly reacts as predicted. When you create a constraint, its references highlight on the models and the Constraint Type displays. For most constraints, it is necessary that you select two references, a component reference on the component being placed, and an assembly reference from an item in the assembly. When the first reference has been selected, a green, dashed line connects the first selected reference to your cursor until you select the second reference, as shown in Figure 1. When multiple constraints are created, a box surrounding the active constraint highlights. For example, in Figure 2, the Oriented constraint is the active constraint. To activate a different constraint, simply select the
2012 PTC Module 19 | Page 9

PT

Understanding Constraint Theory

te rn
Figure 3 Modifying a Constraint

al

U se

Figure 1 Selecting Placement References

nl y

displayed name or select it from the Placement tab in the dashboard. You can then right-click to perform a desired action. You can also double-click a constraint's tag in the graphics window to edit the constraint, as shown in Figure 3. Editing options include switching the constraint type, changing the constraint orientation, and viewing as well as deleting the constraint's placement references. in the dashboard to convert You can toggle Constraints To Connections existing connections to constraints within an assembly.

Fo r

Module 19 | Page 10

PT

In

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

Understanding Assembly Constraint Status

Ideally, when you complete a component's placement, it should be at a Fully Constrained status.
Range of assembly constraint status: No Constraints Partially Constrained Packaged Fully Constrained Constraints Invalid The system can also Allow Assumptions to facilitate component placement.

Fo r

Understanding Assembly Constraint Status

You can assemble a component into an assembly by using placement constraints. Constraints determine how a part is located within an assembly. As constraints are added, a component becomes further and further constrained and progresses through a range of constraint statuses which display in the dashboard. The constraint status range includes: No Constraints No constraints have been added to the component being assembled, as shown in Figure 1. The preview color of components having no constraints is purple. Partially Constrained At least one constraint has been applied to the component being assembled, but not enough constraints have been added to render the component fully constrained. That is, the orientation of the component can still be changed, so its position is open to interpretation.
2012 PTC Module 19 | Page 11

PT

Figure 2 Range of Assembly Constraint Status

In

te rn

al

U se

Figure 1 No Constraints

nl y

The left-most image in Figure 2 shows the component Partially Constrained. The preview color of partially constrained components is purple. Fully Constrained Enough constraints have been applied to the component being assembled that it cannot move. Ideally, when you complete the component placement, the component should be fully constrained. The right-most image in Figure 2 is Fully Constrained. The preview color of fully constrained components changes to orange. Constraints Invalid Two constraints conflict with how they are trying to place the component in the assembly. If this condition arises, you must edit or delete one or more constraints to eliminate the conflict.

Leaving Components Packaged

Fo r

Module 19 | Page 12

PT

If you complete the component placement when the status reads Partially Constrained, the Message Log alerts you that the system leaves the component packaged only. An open square symbol also displays in the model tree next to the packaged component. You can drag components that are packaged based on their partial constraints.

In

te rn

The Allow Assumptions option can become available when placing a component in an assembly. When this option is selected, the system makes additional constraint assumptions to help fully constrain the component. If you clear this check box, the system returns the status to Partially Constrained. If you properly further constrain a component that is fully constrained with Allow Assumptions enabled, the Allow Assumptions option disappears and appears as Fully Constrained, as there is no longer a need for the system to make assumptions. The middle image in Figure 2 is Fully Constrained as long as the Allow Assumptions option is enabled. If the Allow Assumptions check box is cleared, the component is no longer Fully Constrained, as it can rotate. Either an additional constraint would need to be added or the Allow Assumptions check box would need to be selected.

al

U se

nl y

Allowing Assumptions

2012 PTC

Assembling Components using the Default Constraint

It is standard practice to assemble the first component of an assembly using the Default constraint.
Benefits of using the Default constraint: No references are specified. No parent/child relationships are created. You can also assemble sub-assemblies using the Default constraint.

Fo r

Figure 2 Completed Component Placement

PT

In

te rn
Figure 3 Assembling a Sub-Assembly

Assembling Components using the Default Constraint

The Default constraint enables you to align the internal system-created coordinate system of the component to the internal system-created coordinate system of the assembly. The system places the component at the assembly origin. Because the internal system coordinate system is used, no references are specified, and no parent-child references are created. It is a standard practice to assemble the initial assembly component using a Default constraint, as shown in Figure 2. You can also assemble sub-assemblies using the Default constraint. Similar to individual components, assembling a sub-assembly using the Default constraint creates no parent-child references.
2012 PTC Module 19 | Page 13

al

U se

Figure 1 Assembling Component using Default Constraint

nl y

PROCEDURE - Assembling Components using the Default Constraint

Close Window Assembly\Default Task 1: Erase Not Displayed DEFAULT_CONST.ASM

Assemble BODY.PRT using the Default constraint.

1. Enable only the following Datum Display types: .

from 2. Select Assemble the Assemble types drop-down menu in the Component group. 3. In the Open dialog box, select component BODY.PRT and click Open. 4. Notice the component is purple. Notice also in the dashboard that the constraint STATUS says No Constraints. 5. In the dashboard, select Default from the Constraint Type drop-down list. 6. Notice that the constraint STATUS now reads Fully Constrained.

7. Notice the component is now orange.

Fo r

8. Click Complete Component 9. Notice that the color is now the actual component color.

PT

In

Module 19 | Page 14

te rn
.

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

10. At the top of the model tree, click Settings Filters. and select Tree

11. In the Model Tree Items dialog box, select the Features check box and click OK. 12. View the model tree and notice the assembled component.

3. Right-click and select Default Constraint.

Fo r

5. Expand SUB.ASM in the model tree.

This completes the procedure.

2012 PTC

PT

In

4. Click Complete Component

te rn
.
Module 19 | Page 15

al

U se

2. In the Open dialog box, select component SUB.ASM and click Open.

1. Click Assemble

nl y

Task 2:

Assemble sub-assembly SUB.ASM using the Default constraint.

Orienting Components
You can reorient a component with respect to the assembly during placement.
3D Dragger Rotate and translate about the three axes. Move in 2-D plane. Free move. 3D Dragger portions gray out as degrees of freedom are reduced through constraints. Press CTRL+ALT and click, right-click, or middle-click.

Figure 1 Default Position

Figure 2 Orienting Around Red and Blue Axes

PT

In

Fo r

Orienting Components
When assembling a component, you can reorient it with respect to the assembly. Reorienting the component closer to its assembly location aids in the components assembly by enabling you to more easily select references. When you select the Automatic option, the system is able to more easily determine the correct placement constraints to use. You can reorient the component according to the applied constraints. As constraints are applied, the degrees of freedom are reduced, further limiting the movement of the component.

Using the 3D Dragger

The 3D Dragger is the primary method you can use to orient components. The 3D Dragger is a dynamically changing graphical interface that displays over any component being assembled. You can use the 3D Dragger to orient new components as follows:
Module 19 | Page 16 2012 PTC

te rn
Figure 3 Component Positioned on Top of Model

al

U se

nl y

 Rotate components about the three axes Click and drag around the shaded arcs to rotate the component about that specific axis. Translate components along the three axes Click and drag along the shaded arrows to translate the component along that specific axis. Move components in a 2-D plane Click and drag in the translucent shaded quadrant to move the component within that 2-D plane. Free move the components Click and drag on the small central sphere at the origin of the axes. As you create constraints, portions of the 3D Dragger are grayed out, as the degrees of freedom are reduced. For example, if a constraint is applied that prohibits component movement along a certain axis, that 3D Dragger axis becomes grayed out since the component cannot move in that degree of freedom.

You can also use the following keyboard shortcuts to orient new components: Operation

al te rn PT C In

Pan

U se

Keyboard and Mouse Selection

O
+ + +

Using Keyboard Shortcuts

Spin

Component Drag Drags the component based on existing constraints, which is the . Use same as the Drag Components this functionality when you have created constraints and wish to their movement with remaining degrees of freedom. +

Fo r

Dragging Components Along Geometry

You can also drag components along specified geometry by right-clicking the 3D Dragger and selecting the Drag along geometry check box. You can then select geometry, and the 3D Dragger appears over the selected geometry with the available degrees of freedom based on the geometry selection. These degrees of freedom change based on whether you select a cylinder, plane, or other geometry shapes. This functionality is similar to the Move tab in the dashboard.

2012 PTC

nl y
+ +

Module 19 | Page 17

PROCEDURE - Orienting Components

Close Window Erase Not Displayed COMP_ORIENT.ASM

Assembly\Component_Orient Task 1:

Use the 3D Dragger and component placement controls.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

3. In the Open dialog box, select component SHAFT.PRT and click Open. 4. Notice the 3D Dragger which appears over the component. 5. Rotate the model 90 degrees by dragging the red arc.

Fo r

7. Drag the model forward along the green axis.

Module 19 | Page 18

PT

6. Rotate the model 180 degrees by dragging the blue arc.

In

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

from 2. Select Assemble the Assemble types drop-down menu in the Component group.

8. Position the component by dragging the location sphere. 9. Press CTRL+ALT and right-click to pan the component. 10. Press CTRL+ALT and middle-click to spin the component. 11. Return the component back to the location shown.

Task 2:

Drag components along existing geometry.

1. Right-click the 3D Dragger and select the Drag along geometry check box to enable it. 2. Select an edge on the component as shown.

Fo r

2012 PTC

PT

3. Rotate and drag the component along the available 3D Dragger axes.

In

te rn
Module 19 | Page 19

al

U se

nl y

4. Select an alternate reference surface.

6. Right-click the 3D Dragger and clear the Drag along geometry check box.

Fo r

This completes the procedure.

Module 19 | Page 20

PT

7. Click Complete Component from the dashboard.

In

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

5. Rotate and drag the component along the available 3D Dragger axes.

nl y

Creating Coincident Constraints using Geometry

Use the Coincident constraint to position two cylindrical surfaces coaxial or two planar surfaces coincident.
Cylindrical/Conical surfaces: Surfaces are inserted, resulting in coincident axes. The surfaces do not need to be the same diameter. Planar surfaces: Surfaces are made coincident to each other. You can toggle the constraint orientation to mate or align surfaces.

Fo r

Creating Coincident Constraints using Cylindrical or Conical Surfaces

The Coincident constraint enables you to insert one cylindrical or conical surface into another cylindrical or conical surface, making their respective axes coaxial. For example, you can create a Coincident constraint to match a shaft to a hole, as shown in Figure 1. This constraint is especially useful when axes are unavailable or inconvenient for selection. Remember that the Coincident constraint only constrains the rounded surfaces coaxial, and does not slide one component into another. Because the two specified surfaces are constrained coaxial, they do not need to be the same diameter.

Creating Coincident Constraints using Planar Surfaces

The Coincident constraint also enables you to position two specified planar surfaces to lie in the same plane (coplanar), and either face each other or face in the same direction, as shown in Figures 2 and 3, respectively. You option in the dashboard can select the Change Constraint Orientation
2012 PTC Module 19 | Page 21

PT

Figure 2 Selecting Planar Surfaces to be Coincident

In

te rn
Figure 3 Selecting Alternate Planar Surfaces to be Coincident

al

U se

Figure 1 Selecting Cylindrical Surfaces - Axes to be Coincident

nl y

to rotate the surfaces so that their normals switch from facing each other to facing in the same direction, and vice-versa. When planar surfaces of components are assembled coincident to one another, it is the same as assigning an offset value of zero, except that an offset value is not created for editing. The components can be positioned in any location as long as the two specified surface normals either face each other or face the same direction.

Fo r

Module 19 | Page 22

PT

In

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

PROCEDURE - Creating Coincident Constraints using Geometry

Close Window Erase Not Displayed COINCIDENT_1.ASM

Assembly\Coincident_Geometry Task 1:

Assemble the SHAFT.PRT using Coincident constraints.

1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. Edit the definition of SHAFT.PRT. 3. In the dashboard, select Coincident as the Constraint Type. 4. Constrain the SHAFT.PRT surface coincident to the BODY.PRT hole cylindrical surface. 5. In the dashboard, select the Placement tab. Click New Constraint. Select Coincident Constraint Type.

7. In the Placement tab, click Flip. Click Flip again.

Fo r

2012 PTC

PT

6. Constrain the SHAFT.PRT top surface coincident to the top BODY.PRT surface.

In

te rn
as the
Module 19 | Page 23

al

U se

nl y

8. In the Placement tab, right-click the second Coincident constraint and select Delete. Drag the SHAFT.PRT upwards. Click New Constraint. Select Coincident Constraint Type. as the

5. Constrain the COVER.PRT inner diameter coincident to the inner BODY.PRT diameter.

Fo r

6. In the dashboard, select the Placement tab. Click New Constraint. Select Coincident Constraint Type. as the

7. Constrain the COVER.PRT hole coincident to the BODY.PRT hole. In this situation, the system may convert the Coincident constraint to an Oriented constraint.

Module 19 | Page 24

PT

4. In the dashboard, select Coincident as the Constraint Type.

In

3. Reorient the COVER.PRT approximately as shown.

te rn

2. In the Open dialog box, select component COVER.PRT and click Open.

al
2012 PTC

1. Select Assemble from the Assemble types drop-down menu in the Component group.

U se

Task 2:

Assemble the COVER.PRT using Coincident constraints.

10. Click Complete Component in the dashboard.

nl y

9. Constrain the SHAFT.PRT bottom surface coincident to the inner BODY.PRT surface.

8. In the Placement tab, click New Constraint. Select Coincident Constraint Type. as the

9. Constrain the COVER.PRT surface coincident to the BODY.PRT surface. 10. Review the constraints and click Complete Component .

This completes the procedure.

Fo r

2012 PTC

PT

In

te rn
Module 19 | Page 25

al

U se

nl y

Creating Coincident Constraints using Datum Features

Use the Coincident constraint to position two datum axes coaxial or two datum planes coincident.
Datum Planes: Aligns positive (brown) sides in the same direction by default. Datum Axes: Aligns positive (tag) sides in the same direction by default. You can flip the direction.

Figure 1 Selecting Datum Planes to be Coincident

In

Fo r

Creating Coincident Constraints using Datum Planes

The Coincident constraint enables you to position two specified datum planes to lie in the same plane (coplanar), and either face each other or face in the same direction. Datum planes have positive and negative sides designated by color. If you rotate a model with datum planes displayed, you see that the colors are brown and gray. If the datum planes face each other, their positive (brown) sides face each other. If the datum planes face in the same direction, their positive sides face in the same direction. By default, the system aligns the positive sides in the same direction. You can use the Change Constraint option in the dashboard to rotate the datum planes so that Orientation their positive sides face each other. When the datum planes of components are assembled coincident to one another, it is the same as assigning an offset value of zero, except that an offset value is not created for editing. The components can be positioned in any location as long as the two specified datum plane normals either face each other or face the same direction.
Module 19 | Page 26 2012 PTC

PT

te rn
Figure 2 Selecting Datum Axes to be Coincident

al

U se

nl y

Creating Coincident Constraints using Datum Axes

The Coincident constraint enables you to align datum axes coaxial. Like datum planes, datum axes also have a positive direction, which is the side on which the datum tag displays. By default, the system aligns the positive sides in the same direction. Again, you can use the Change Constraint option in the dashboard to rotate the datum axes so their Orientation positive sides face each other.

Fo r

2012 PTC

PT

In

te rn
Module 19 | Page 27

al

U se

nl y

PROCEDURE - Creating Coincident Constraints using Datum Features

Close Window Erase Not Displayed COINCIDENT_2.ASM

Assembly\Coincident_Datums Task 1:

Select datum planes with a Coincident constraint.

1. Enable only the following Datum Display types: 2. Edit the definition of ARM.PRT. 3. In the dashboard, select the Placement tab. Review the existing Coincident constraints. Click New Constraint. Select Coincident Constraint Type. as the

4. Select the two datum planes. 5. Notice the orientation.

Fo r

7. In the Placement tab, click Flip to toggle the orientation back. 8. Click Complete Component .

Module 19 | Page 28

PT

In

6. In the dashboard, click Change . Constraint Orientation

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

Task 2:

Select datum axes with a Coincident constraint.

1. Enable Axis Display disable Plane Display

and .

2. Select BODY.PRT, right-click, and select Hide. 3. Select Assemble from the Assemble types drop-down menu in the Component group. 4. In the Open dialog box, select PLATE.PRT and click Open. 5. Reorient PLATE.PRT approximately as shown. 6. In the dashboard, click 3D Dragger to hide it. as the

8. Right-click and select New Constraint. 9. Select Coincident Constraint Type.

10. Select the two datum axes. 11. Right-click and select New Constraint.

Fo r

12. Select Coincident Constraint Type.

PT

13. Select the two surfaces.

2012 PTC

In

te rn
as the as the
Module 19 | Page 29

7. Select the two datum axes.

al

Select Coincident Constraint Type.

U se

nl y

14. In the dashboard, click 3D Dragger to show it. .

15. Click Complete Component 16. Disable Axis Display .

17. In the model tree, right-click BODY.PRT and select Unhide. This completes the procedure.

Fo r

Module 19 | Page 30

PT

In

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

Creating Distance Constraints

Use the Distance constraint to specify an offset value between different types of geometry.
Select geometry pairs (two points or two planes, for example). Select geometry combinations (a point and plane, for example). Distance constraint is the same as the Coincident constraint, except that selected references can be offset from one another.

Figure 2 Distance Between Two Surfaces

PT

In

te rn Fo r
Figure 3 Distance Constraint Flipped

Creating Distance Constraints

The Distance constraint enables you to specify an offset value between selected geometry types. For example, you could select two points, two planes, and so on, or you can select geometry combinations such as a point and plane, or a point and an edge or axis. The Distance constraint is the same as the Coincident constraint, except that the selected references can be offset from one another a specified distance. The distance value becomes a dimension that can be edited. When you use the Distance constraint, the system sets the current offset direction as the positive offset direction. To offset in the opposite direction, either drag the location handle to the other side of the selected assembly reference or edit the offset to a negative value. The component moves to the opposite side, and this offset direction is now set as the positive offset direction.
2012 PTC Module 19 | Page 31

al

U se

Figure 1 Distance Between a Vertex and Datum Plane

nl y

If components are assembled to one another with a Distance constraint offset value of zero, it is the same as assembling them with a Coincident constraint, except that a distance value is available for editing. You can double-click the Distance constraint tag in the graphics window and edit the constraint type to a Coincident constraint, and vice versa. option in the You can also use the Change Constraint Orientation dashboard to flip the component orientation for the Distance constraint. For example, the component orientation was flipped between Figure 2 and Figure 3.

Fo r

Module 19 | Page 32

PT

In

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

PROCEDURE - Creating Distance Constraints

Close Window Erase Not Displayed DISTANCE.ASM

Assembly\Distance Task 1:

Utilize a Distance constraint between planar surfaces.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

5. Reorient SUB.ASM approximately as shown.

Fo r

8. Right-click and select New Constraint. 9. Select Distance Constraint Type. as the

10. Drag the sub-assembly upward if necessary. 11. Select the two surfaces.

2012 PTC

PT

7. Constrain the two cylindrical surfaces coincident.

6. In the dashboard, select Coincident as the Constraint Type.

In

te rn
Module 19 | Page 33

4. In the Open dialog box, select SUB.ASM and click Open.

al

3. Select Assemble from the Assemble types drop-down menu in the Component group.

U se

nl y

2. In the model tree, right-click COVER.PRT and select Hide.

12. Reorient the model. 13. Drag the sub-assembly and edit its distance to 15.

14. In the dashboard, click Change . Constraint Orientation 15. Click Change Constraint to toggle it back. Orientation

16. Orient to the Standard Orientation.

Fo r

17. Drag the sub-assembly upward. 18. Right-click and select Clear. 19. In the dashboard, select the Placement tab and notice that the references have been removed. 20. Select the two new surfaces. The second surface is a hidden surface on the underside of the shaft.

Module 19 | Page 34

PT

In

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

21. Reorient the model. 22. Drag the sub-assembly and edit its distance to 15.

25. Edit the distance value to 1.

Task 2:

Fo r

1. Orient to the Standard Orientation. 2. Enable Plane Display . 3. In the Placement tab, clear the Allow Assumptions check box. 4. Rotate the component approximately as shown.

2012 PTC

PT

Use a Distance constraint between other geometry.

In

te rn
Module 19 | Page 35

al

U se

24. Click Change Constraint to toggle it back. Orientation

23. In the dashboard, click Change . Constraint Orientation

nl y

5. In the Placement tab, click New Constraint. Select Distance Constraint Type. as the

6. Select the vertex and the datum plane. 7. Edit the distance value to 35. 8. Edit the distance value to -65. 9. Click Complete Component .

This completes the procedure.

Fo r

Module 19 | Page 36

PT

In

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

Creating Parallel, Normal, and Angle Constraints

Use the Parallel, Normal, and Angle Offset constraints to specify a particular component orientation.
The Parallel constraint forces references parallel to each other. Similar to Coincident constraint without coplanar requirement. The Normal constraint forces references normal to each other. The Angle Offset constraint enables you to specify a rotation angle between planar references.

Fo r

Figure 2 Viewing a Normal Constraint

PT

In

te rn
Figure 3 Viewing an Angle Offset Constraint

Constraining Components using the Parallel Constraint

The Parallel constraint enables you to force a selected datum plane or surface into a particular orientation without regard to an offset value. The Parallel constraint forces selected surfaces or datum planes to become parallel with each other. The Parallel constraint is similar to the Coincident constraint, except that the selected references do not have to be coplanar. option in the dashboard You can use the Change Constraint Orientation to toggle the specified references from facing each other to facing in the same direction, and vice-versa. You can also double-click the Parallel constraint tag in the graphics window and edit the constraint type to a Distance, Angle Offset, Coincident, or Normal constraint.

2012 PTC

al
Module 19 | Page 37

U se

Figure 1 Viewing a Parallel Constraint

nl y

Constraining Components using the Normal Constraint

Similar to the Parallel constraint, the Normal constraint enables you to force a selected datum plane or surface into a particular orientation without regard to an offset value. The Normal constraint forces selected surfaces or datum planes to become normal with each other. option in the dashboard You can use the Change Constraint Orientation to rotate the specified references 180 degrees. You can also double-click the Normal constraint tag in the graphics window and edit the constraint type to a Distance, Angle Offset, Parallel, or Coincident constraint.

Fo r

Module 19 | Page 38

PT

In

te rn

al

option in the dashboard You can use the Change Constraint Orientation to rotate the angle offset 180 degrees to the other side of the assembly reference. You can also double-click the Angle Offset constraint tag in the graphics window and edit the constraint type to a Distance, Parallel, Coincident, or Normal constraint.

U se

The Angle Offset constraint enables you to specify a rotation angle between planar references. The component reorients to the Angle Offset value that you specify. Typically, the Angle Offset constraint is used after the component has already been partially constrained with a Coincident constraint

nl y

Constraining Components using the Angle Offset Constraint

2012 PTC

PROCEDURE - Creating Parallel, Normal, and Angle Constraints

Close Window Erase Not Displayed ORIENT.ASM

Assembly\Parallel_Normal_Angle Task 1:

Utilize a Parallel and Normal constraint.

1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. Edit the definition of SUB.ASM. 3. In the dashboard, select the Placement tab. Click New Constraint. Notice the constraint status is Fully Constrained. Clear the Allow Assumptions check box. 4. Drag the component as shown. 5. In the Placement tab, select as the Constraint Parallel Type.

6. Select the two surfaces shown. 7. Notice the component orientation, and click Flip.

Fo r

8. In the Placement tab, edit the . Constraint Type to Normal Press CTRL+ALT and middle-click to spin the component 180, as shown.

2012 PTC

PT

In

te rn
Module 19 | Page 39

al

U se

nl y

Task 2:

Utilize an Angle Offset constraint.

1. In the Placement tab, edit the Constraint Type to Angle Offset . Edit the angle to 45. Click Flip.

2. Right-click in the graphics window and select Clear. 3. Press CTRL+ALT and middle-click to spin the component approximately, as shown. 4. Enable Plane Display 5. Select the two planes. 6. Edit the angle to 25 and click Complete Component . .

This completes the procedure.

Fo r

Module 19 | Page 40

PT

In

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

Assembling using Automatic

Use the Automatic option to enable Creo Parametric to determine the constraint type based on selections and component location or orientation.
Assemble components using Automatic . Typically the system generates a Coincident constraint. Toggle or create other constraints as necessary. Offset, Angle Offset, Coincident, Centered, and so on.

Figure 1 Orientation Determining Constraint Type Created

PT

In

Fo r

Assembling using Automatic

When you assemble a component, the default Constraint Type is Automatic . With the Automatic option, the system automatically determines the constraint type that is created when you select a reference pair. The following items influence the constraint type that is created: The references selected The references you select can automatically eliminate a particular constraint type that can be created. The component's location In Figure 1, the component is located above the area it is to be assembled to when references are selected; therefore, a Distance constraint is created. If the component is located along the side at approximately the same height as its desired final placement location when references are selected, the system creates a Coincident constraint. The component's orientation In Figure 2, the component is oriented in such a way that the selected references face at an angle to each other and
2012 PTC Module 19 | Page 41

te rn
Figure 2 Creating an Angle Offset Constraint Based on Orientation

al

U se

nl y

are not coplanar; therefore, the system automatically creates an Angle Offset constraint. In between the creation of constraints, you can further reorient the component to refine its position. This can help the system more accurately determine the next constraint type and offset, or it may help you easily select the next set of references. Of course, the created constraints dictate how the component moves. When you select a reference pair, the system automatically creates a constraint. At this point, the system usually waits for you to select a second reference pair to create a second constraint. The system automatically keeps creating new constraints until the component is Fully Constrained.

Right-Click Menu Options

Fo r

Module 19 | Page 42

PT

In

Assemble components using Automatic . The system typically generates a Coincident constraint from the specified references. You can then toggle, or create as necessary, the Offset, Angle Offset, Coincident, Centered, and so on, Constraint Types. The Centered constraint lines up spheres, cones, tori, or cylinders with no Flip option.

te rn

al

Best Practices

U se

New Constraint Useful when you need to create additional constraints above what the system minimally requires. Clear Clears the references specified for the currently active constraint.

When assembling components, there are various right-click menu options available to increase your speed and efficiency, including the following:

nl y
2012 PTC

PROCEDURE - Assembling using Automatic

Close Window Erase Not Displayed AUTOMATIC.ASM

Assembly\Automatic Task 1:

Use the Automatic option to assemble components.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

3. In the Open dialog box, select component BODY.PRT and click Open. 4. Right-click and select Default Constraint. 5. Middle-click to complete the component. 6. Click Assemble .

8. Reorient the assembly.

Fo r

10. Notice that the Constraint Type is set to Automatic 11. Select the surfaces. 12. Notice that the system creates a Coincident constraint. .

2012 PTC

PT

9. Reorient SHAFT.PRT approximately as shown.

In

7. In the Open dialog box, select component SHAFT.PRT and click Open.

te rn
Module 19 | Page 43

al

U se

nl y

from 2. Select Assemble the Assemble types drop-down menu in the Component group.

13. Drag the SHAFT.PRT up and out of the hole. 14. Select the two surfaces. 15. In the dashboard, select the Placement tab. Edit the Constraint Type to Distance if necessary.

17. Right-click and select New Constraint. 18. Select the two surfaces.

19. In the Placement tab, edit the Constraint Type to Angle Offset if necessary.

Fo r

20. Edit the angle value to -35 or 35 as necessary to achieve the position shown. 21. Middle-click to complete the component.

Module 19 | Page 44

PT

In

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

16. Edit the distance value to 1.

nl y

22. Click Assemble

23. In the Open dialog box, select component COVER.PRT and click Open. 24. Reorient COVER.PRT approximately as shown.

Type is set to Automatic 26. Select the surfaces.

28. Right-click and select New Constraint.

Fo r

29. Select the two surfaces. 30. Notice that the system creates an Oriented constraint.

2012 PTC

PT

In

te rn
Module 19 | Page 45

al

27. Notice that the system creates a Coincident constraint.

U se

25. Again, notice that the Constraint

nl y

31. Right-click and select New Constraint. 32. Select the two surfaces. 33. Select the Placement tab. Edit the Constraint Type to if necessary. Coincident 34. Middle-click to complete the component.

36. In the Open dialog box, select component ARM.PRT and click Open. 37. Reorient ARM.PRT approximately.

38. Again, notice that the Constraint 39. Select the surfaces.

40. Notice that the system creates a Coincident constraint.

Fo r

41. Notice that the taper direction of the cones is not aligned.

42. In the dashboard, select the Placement tab. Edit the Constraint Type to Centered .

Module 19 | Page 46

PT

Type is set to Automatic

In

te rn
.

al
2012 PTC

U se

35. Click Assemble

nl y

43. Enable Plane Display

44. Right-click and select New Constraint. 45. Select the two planes. 46. Notice that the system creates an Angle Offset constraint.

48. Middle-click to complete the component.

Fo r

This completes the procedure.

2012 PTC

PT

In

te rn
Module 19 | Page 47

al

U se

47. In the Placement tab, edit the Constraint Type to Coincident .

nl y

Utilizing the Accessory Window

The accessory window enables you to manipulate the incoming component individually to facilitate reference selection.
Accessory window uses: Component placement Data sharing Sheetmetal forms Toggle the accessory window on or off. The accessory window can be docked or undocked.

Figure 1 Viewing the Accessory Window

In

Fo r

Utilizing the Accessory Window

When assembling components, you can use the accessory window. The accessory window displays only the incoming model, enabling you to manipulate the component individually to facilitate reference selection. You can toggle the accessory window on or off by clicking the Show In Separate Window instances: icon. The accessory window can be used in the following

Component placement The accessory window can be particularly beneficial if you are assembling a very small component into a very large assembly. Data sharing Sheetmetal forms The accessory window contains its own In Graphics toolbar, enabling you to control the contents of the accessory window separately from that of the graphics window.
Module 19 | Page 48 2012 PTC

PT

te rn
Figure 2 Docked Accessory Window Model Tree

al

U se

nl y

When the accessory window is toggled on, you can select whether or not to display the incoming model in the graphics window by clicking the Show icon. Of course, you can select references on In Assembly Window the incoming model in either the accessory window or the graphics window, depending on where it is displayed. The accessory window can be docked or undocked. If docked, it appears within the Creo Parametric graphics window, and always in front, preventing windows from getting lost behind other open windows. You can drag the window to a different location within the graphics window or resize it in the same way you can modify any other conventional window. When the accessory window is docked, the model tree pane splits and displays the incoming model's model tree at the lower portion. The accessory window model tree supports layer tree functionality. If the accessory window is undocked, the incoming model's model tree displays in that window. The undocked accessory window model tree also supports layer tree functionality. You can undock the accessory window by setting a configuration option.

Accessory Window Config.pro Options

Fo r

accessory_window_display Controls the display of the accessory window. Options include: docked Places the accessory window as a separate window within the graphics window. undocked Places the accessory window as a separate window in addition to the Creo Parametric window. comp_assemble_start Sets the initial assembly placement behavior when assembling a new component. Options include, but are not limited to: default Displays the incoming model in the main graphics window only. constrain_in_window Displays the incoming model in the accessory window only.

2012 PTC

PT

In

te rn

al

The following configuration options determine the accessory window behavior:

U se

nl y

Module 19 | Page 49

PROCEDURE - Utilizing the Accessory Window

Close Window Erase Not Displayed ACCESSORY.ASM

Assembly\Accessory_Window Task 1:

Use the accessory window to assemble the BOLT.PRT components.

1. Disable all Datum Display types. from 2. Select Assemble the Assemble types drop-down menu. 3. In the Open dialog box, double-click BOLT.PRT. 4. Notice the component is located in the main graphics window. 5. In the dashboard, click Show In Separate Window . 6. Notice that the BOLT.PRT is now in both the graphics window and the docked accessory window.

Fo r

8. In the accessory window, zoom in on BOLT.PRT. 9. Reorient BOLT.PRT and select the flat surface.

10. Select the flat PLATE.PRT surface to create the Normal constraint. 11. In the dashboard, edit the Constraint Type to Coincident .

Module 19 | Page 50

PT

In

7. Notice that the BOLT.PRT model tree displays at the bottom of the existing model tree pane.

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

12. Select the shaft on BOLT.PRT. 13. Select the upper hole surface on SHAFT.PRT to create the Coincident constraint. 14. Click Complete Component .

15. Click Assemble

16. In the Open dialog box, double-click BOLT.PRT. 17. Notice that the BOLT.PRT displays in both the graphics window and the docked accessory window. 18. In the dashboard, click Show In Assembly Window to toggle it off.

21. Select the flat PLATE.PRT surface to create the Normal constraint.

Fo r

22. In the dashboard, edit the Constraint Type to Coincident .

2012 PTC

PT

20. Select the flat surface on BOLT.PRT.

In

19. Notice that BOLT.PRT now only displays in the accessory window.

te rn
Module 19 | Page 51

al

U se

nl y

23. Select the shaft on BOLT.PRT. 24. Select the lower hole surface on SHAFT.PRT to create the Coincident constraint.

25. In the dashboard, click Show In Assembly Window to toggle it on. 26. In the dashboard, click Show In Separate Window it off. to toggle .

This completes the procedure.

Fo r

Module 19 | Page 52

PT

In

te rn

al
2012 PTC

27. Click Complete Component

U se

nl y

Module

20
U se O te rn al
Module 20 | Page 1

Assembling with Connections

Module Overview

Many product designs include both static and dynamic components. Creo Parametric enables you to assemble dynamic components using several connection types. In this module, you learn how to assemble components using connections and how to simulate motion.

Objectives

Fo r

2012 PTC

PT

After completing this module, you will be able to: Understand connection theory. Drag connected components. Assemble components using Slider, Pin, and Cylinder connections. Analyze collision detection settings.

In

nl y

Understanding Connection Theory

A mechanical connection is a method of constraining components to form a joint. Joint connections determine how a component can move within an assembly.
Create mechanism connections that enable motion between components in an assembly. Joint connection examples: Slider Pin Cylinder

Figure 1 Assembly with Connections

Understanding Connection Theory

A mechanical connection is a method of constraining components to form a joint. Joint connection examples include Sliders, Pins, and Cylinders. Creating a Joint connection is similar to creating Assembly constraints between components. Joint connections enable you to create true-to-life connections between components so you can simulate motion between moving parts. For example, you can create a slider joint between an engine cylinder and the piston head to enable the piston head to translate within the cylinder.

Fo r

Creating Connections
The procedure to create a Joint constraint is similar to the procedure to create constraints between fixed assembled components. Perform the following steps to create a Joint constraint: Assemble a component into the assembly. Click the Connections list in the dashboard. Select the connection type. Select the appropriate references. in the dashboard to convert

You can click Constraints To Connections existing constraints to connections.

Module 20 | Page 2

PT

In

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

Dragging Connected Components

You can drag assembly components through their range of motion based on the current connections and applied constraints.
Drag components using Point Drag. You can create snapshots to capture the positions of components.

Figure 1 Dragging Assembly Components

In

te rn
Figure 2 Viewing a Snapshot Figure 3 Viewing a Second Snapshot

Dragging Connected Components

One method of testing your assembly connections involves dragging the assembly through its range of motion. To drag an assembly, click Drag

Fo r

and then select a part model. You can select edges, Components points, axes, datum planes, or surfaces to initiate the dragging movement. The components move according to the applied connections. The selected entity is always positioned as close as possible to the cursor location, while the remaining components stay connected to each other. To quit dragging, you can either middle-click to return the components to their original position, or click to leave the components at their current position. The default option when dragging components is Point Drag, as shown in Figure 1. You can also select Body Drag.

Creating Snapshots
After moving connected components to a desired position, you can create snapshots of that particular location in the graphics window. Snapshots enable you to return the assembly components to a particular position. You can create multiple snapshots and quickly move the assembly to specific positions by activating each snapshot.
2012 PTC Module 20 | Page 3

PT

al

U se

nl y

PROCEDURE - Dragging Connected Components

Close Window Erase Not Displayed DRAGGING_COMPS.ASM

Assembly\Component_Drag Task 1: Drag connected components.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

4. Click to stop the motion. Task 2:

Create snapshots while dragging components.

Snapshot

Fo r

4. Click the corner of CRANK_4.PRT again and move the connected components until ROD_2_4.PRT is fully extended to the right. Click again to stop the motion. 5. In the Drag dialog box, click Take Snapshot .

Module 20 | Page 4

PT

3. In the Drag dialog box, click Take .

2. Click the corner of CRANK_4.PRT and move the connected components until ROD_2_4.PRT is fully extended to the left. Click again to stop the motion.

In

te rn

1. In the Drag dialog box, expand the Snapshots area.

al
2012 PTC

U se

3. Move the cursor in a circular motion to view the motion created by the connections.

nl y

2. Click Drag Components from the Component group and select the lower-right corner of CRANK_4.PRT.

6. In the Drag dialog box, double-click Snapshot1 to activate it. Notice that ROD_2_4.PRT is fully extended to the left. 7. In the Drag dialog box, double-click Snapshot2 to activate it. Notice that ROD_2_4.PRT is fully extended to the right. 8. Click Close in the Drag dialog box. This completes the procedure.

Fo r

2012 PTC

PT

In

te rn

al
Module 20 | Page 5

U se

nl y

Assembling Components using the Slider Connection

Slider connections are used to enable translation along a single axis.
References (constraint rules): Axis Alignment to enable translation along a single axis. Use axes or cylindrical surfaces. Rotation Reference to constrain rotation around the axis. Use planes or planar surfaces. Examples include: Elevator doors Piston in a cylinder

Figure 1 Axis Alignment

Assembling Components using the Slider Connection

Slider connections are used to enable translation along a single axis. For example, an elevator door is representative of a Slider connection, as it slides back and forth in one direction and is unable to rotate about any axis. A piston in an engine is another example of a Slider connection. In the figures, the hedge trimmer blade is yet another example of a Slider connection. Slider connections require two constraint rules that limit their degrees of freedom in a single direction. These two constraint rules are: Axis Alignment The axes or cylindrical surfaces you select as references determine the axis of free translation. Rotation Reference The datum planes or planar surfaces you select with the axis alignment restrict all rotational movement.

Fo r

Module 20 | Page 6

PT

In

te rn

al
Figure 2 Rotation Reference
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

PROCEDURE - Assembling Components using the Slider Connection

Close Window Assembly\Slider Task 1: Erase Not Displayed SLIDER_CONNECTION.ASM

Assemble BLADE_2.PRT using a Slider connection. .

2. Orient to the 3D orientation.

5. In the dashboard, edit the Connection from User Defined to Slider .

Fo r

7. Select datum plane RIGHT on BLADE_2.PRT and datum plane RIGHT on HOUSING.PRT for the Rotation of the Slider connection.

2012 PTC

PT

In

te rn

al

6. Select datum axis A_2 on BLADE_2.PRT and datum axis A_3 on HOUSING.PRT as the Axis alignment of the Slider connection.

U se

4. In the Open dialog box, select BLADE_2.PRT, and click Open.

3. Select Assemble from the Assemble types drop-down menu in the Component group.

nl y

1. Enable only the following Datum Display types:

Module 20 | Page 7

8. In the dashboard, click Change to Constraint Orientation flip the component.

9. Click Complete Component 10. Disable Axis Display

12. Move the cursor to notice the range of motion created by the Slider connection. Click to place BLADE_2.PRT. 13. Click Close in the Drag dialog box.

Fo r

This completes the procedure.

Module 20 | Page 8

PT

11. Click Drag Components BLADE_2.PRT.

In

te rn
from the Component group and select

al
2012 PTC

U se

and Plane Display

O
.

nl y

Assembling Components using the Pin Connection

Pin connections are used to enable rotation along a single axis while constraining axial translation.
References (constraint rules): Axis Alignment to enable rotation about a single axis. Use axes or cylindrical surfaces Translation Reference to constrain translation along the axis. Use planes or planar surfaces Examples include: Door hinge Crankshaft in an engine

PT

In

te rn
Figure 2 Translation Reference

Fo r

Assembling Components using the Pin Connection

Pin connections are used to enable rotation about a single axis. For example, a hinge on a door and a crankshaft in a engine both use a Pin connection. Pin connections require two constraints (rules) that limit their degrees of freedom about a single axis. These two constraint rules are: Axis Alignment The axes or cylindrical surfaces you select as references determine the axis of free rotation. Translation Reference The datum planes or planar surfaces you select with the axis alignment restrict translational movement in the axis direction.

2012 PTC

al
Module 20 | Page 9

U se

Figure 1 Axis Alignment

nl y

PROCEDURE - Assembling Components using the Pin Connection

Close Window Assembly\Pin Task 1: Erase Not Displayed PIN_CONNECTION.ASM

Assemble ROD_2_2.PRT using a Pin connection.

1. Disable all Datum Display types. from 2. Select Assemble the Assemble types drop-down menu in the Component group. 3. In the Open dialog box, select ROD_2_2.PRT, and click Open. 4. Reorient the component approximately as shown.

5. In the dashboard, edit the Connection from User Defined . to Pin

Fo r

7. Select the back side surface of ROD_2_2.PRT and the front surface of BLADE_2_2.PRT for the Translation of the Pin connection. 8. Click Complete Component .

Module 20 | Page 10

PT

6. Select the small hole surface on ROD_2_2.PRT and the cylindrical surface on BLADE_2_2.PRT as the Axis alignment of the Pin connection.

In

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

9. Click Drag Components from the Component group and select ROD_2_2.PRT. 10. Move the cursor to notice the range of motion created by the Pin connection. Also notice the motion of BLADE_2_2.PRT due to the Slider connection. Click to place ROD_2_2.PRT.

Fo r

2012 PTC

PT

In

te rn
Module 20 | Page 11

al

U se

This completes the procedure.

nl y

11. Click Close in the Drag dialog box.

Assembling Components using the Cylinder Connection

Cylinder connections are used to enable rotation along a single axis with unconstrained axial translation.
References (constraint rules): Axis Alignment to enable rotation about a single axis. Use axes or cylindrical surfaces. Examples include: Aligning a pen cap over a pen. Connecting rod. Assuming one end is defined with a Pin connection. Avoids overconstraining.

te rn Fo r
Module 20 | Page 12

Assembling Components using the Cylinder Connection

Cylinder connections require only one constraint rule that limits their degrees of freedom about a specific axis. The constraint rule is: Axis Alignment The axes or cylindrical surfaces you select as references determine the axis of free rotation and translation. Cylinder connections are often used in situations in which you do not want to overconstrain a component. In the hedge trimmer example, a Pin connection between the connecting rod and the blade prevents the connecting rod from sliding in and out of the journal. As a result, a Cylinder connection is suitable to constrain the other end of the connecting rod to the crankshaft.

PT

Cylinder connections are used to enable both rotation and translation about a specific axis. For example, aligning a pen cap over a pen is a Cylinder connection. While holding the pen cap aligned with the pen, you can rotate the pen cap and slide it along the axis of the pen.

In

al
Figure 1 Axis Alignment
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

PROCEDURE - Assembling Components using the Cylinder Connection

Close Window Assembly\Cylinder Task 1: Erase Not Displayed CYLINDER_CONNECT.ASM

Redefine ROD_2_3.PRT and add a Cylinder connection.

1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. Edit the definition of ROD_2_3.PRT. 3. In the dashboard, select the Placement tab. Click New Set. Select the new Pin connection, and edit its type to Cylinder . 4. Select the large hole surface on ROD_2_3.PRT and the cylindrical journal surface on CRANK_3.PRT as the Axis alignment of the Cylinder connection. 5. Click Complete Component

In

Fo r

This completes the procedure.

2012 PTC

PT

te rn
.
Module 20 | Page 13

al

U se

nl y

Analyzing Collision Detection Settings

Collision Detection enables you to check for interferences between parts while dragging them.
Global Collision Detection Partial Collision Detection Areas of interference highlight Sound Warning on Collision

Figure 1 Areas of Interference While Dragging

Fo r

Creo Parametric provides real-time collision detection, enabling you to check for interferences between parts as you drag a mechanism assembly through its range of motion. Collision detection, by default, is turned off when you drag components in a mechanism assembly. However, you can enable two different types of collision detection: Global Collision Detection Checks for any type of collision in the entire assembly. Partial Collision Detection You specify the components between which to check for interference. There is also an option to sound a warning when a collision occurs between components. The component areas that interfere with each other highlight, as shown in Figure 1. You can then resolve the interferences by modifying the models. In Figure 2, the housing was modified such that the connecting rod no longer interferes. To enable Stop When Colliding or Push Objects on Collision functionality, you must set the config.pro option enable_advance_collision to yes.

Module 20 | Page 14

PT

Analyzing Collision Detection Settings

In

te rn

al
Figure 2 Interference Fixed
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

PROCEDURE - Analyzing Collision Detection Settings

Close Window Erase Not Displayed COLLISION_DETECT.ASM

Properties\Collision_Detect Task 1:

Analyze an assembly for interference by dragging its components.

1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. Select HOUSING_5.PRT. 3. Click the Model Display drop-down menu and click Component Display Style > Transparent. 4. Orient to the 3D2 view orientation. 5. Zoom in on HOUSING_5.PRT.

6. Click File > Prepare > Model Properties.

11. Notice the highlighted interfering geometry. The HOUSING_5.PRT is too short. Click Close in the Drag dialog box.

Fo r

12. Select HOUSING_5.PRT, right-click, and select Activate. 13. In the graphics window, select Extrude 1. 14. Right-click and select Edit.

2012 PTC

PT

10. Click Drag Components and drag the components by selecting the hex-shaped geometry.

In

9. Click Close in the Model Properties dialog box.

te rn

8. In the Collision Detection Settings dialog box, select Global Collision Detection and verify that the Sound Warning on Collision check box is selected. Click OK.

al

7. In the Assembly section, click change in the Collision Detection row.

U se
Module 20 | Page 15

nl y

15. Edit the 51 dimension to 56 and . click Regenerate 16. In the model tree, right-click COLLISION_DETECT.ASM and select Activate.

17. Click Drag Components and drag the components by selecting the hex-shaped geometry again. The collision is no longer present because the interference has been fixed. Click Close. This completes the procedure.

Fo r

Module 20 | Page 16

PT

In

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

Module

21
U se O te rn al
Module 21 | Page 1

Exploding Assemblies
Module Overview

Explode states enable you to capture assembly parts in various states of assembly and disassembly. You can easily reference these states when creating drawings and assembly or disassembly procedures. In this module, you learn how to create assembly explode states and create explode lines between exploded components. You also learn how to animate explode states.

Objectives

Fo r

2012 PTC

PT

After completing this module, you will be able to: Create and manage explode states. Create explode lines between exploded components. Animate explode states.

In

nl y

Creating and Managing Explode States

Explode states enable you to easily save assembly and disassembly views.
Position components into desired location. Select motion type Select Movement Reference Move component(s), with or without children. Toggle between exploded and unexploded states. Explode states can be used in drawings.

Figure 1 Unexploded Assembly

You can use explode states to quickly reposition components in 3-D space and save these assembly or disassembly views by selecting the view managers Explode tab. You can select explode states when placing a drawing view or use them to create assembly or disassembly procedures. You can toggle an explode state on or off, and you can also create multiple explode states.

Fo r

Specifying the Motion Type and Movement Reference

Before you can explode components from an assembly, you must specify the Motion type and Movement Reference. Motion type Specify the type of motion for a selected component. Motion types include: Linearly moves the selected component. Translate Component This is the default motion type. Rotate Component Rotates the selected component about a specified Movement Reference. Copy Position Copies the exploded position from the selected component to other components. This option is available in the Options tab of the dashboard.
Module 21 | Page 2 2012 PTC

PT

In

Creating and Managing Explode States

te rn

al
Figure 2 Exploded Assembly

U se

nl y

 Toggle Explode Location Toggles the placement location of the selected component between its original location and its current location. You can select this option to reset a component's position. Movement Reference Specifies the reference to define the direction of movement for the selected component. This reference is required when rotating components, but is optional for translating components when you require a direction other than the three default directions. Available reference types include all datum features, planar surfaces, edges, and vertices. from the dashboard, which enables you You can also click View Plane to explode components parallel to the screen in the assembly's current orientation.

Exploding Components

You can also specify the Motion increment of the component you are exploding. The default Motion increment value is Smooth, which enables the components to explode smoothly and enables you to drop them at any relative position. You can also increment values of 1, 5, or 10 by selecting the desired value from the drop-down list, or you can type in your own increment value. The units used for the increment value are the same units used in the assembly. For example, if the assembly units are measured in millimeters, when you select an increment value of 10, the component explodes in 10 millimeter increments, snapping to each increment.

Fo r

Additional Explode State Facts

When using the explode functionality, consider the following: If you explode a sub-assembly in the context of a higher-level assembly, the system does not explode the components in the sub-assembly. When you unexplode an assembly, the system retains the information so that the components can have the same explode position if you explode the assembly again. All assemblies have a Default Explode state that the system creates automatically from the defined component placement constraints.
2012 PTC Module 21 | Page 3

PT

When you select a component for translation, the 3D Dragger displays at that location along with a coordinate system. You can cursor over any of the three 3D Dragger axis arrows and drag to explode the component in that direction. When you select a component for rotation, a drag arrow displays. You can use the drag arrow to rotate the component about the Movement Reference.

In

te rn

Move one component Move a single component in an assembly or sub-assembly by selecting it. Move many components Press CTRL and select multiple components to move them all at once. Move with Children In the Options tab of the dashboard, you can select the Move with Children check box. This option enables you to select a component to explode, and move its children with it.

al

U se

Once the Motion type and Movement Reference have been defined, you can select the components you wish to explode. There are three methods available:

nl y

 Multiple occurrences of the same sub-assembly can have different explode states.

Fo r

Module 21 | Page 4

PT

In

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

PROCEDURE - Creating and Managing Explode States

Close Window Erase Not Displayed EXPLODE.ASM

View\Explode_States Task 1:

Create explode state Exp0001.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

4. Notice the note in the graphics window. 5. Click Edit Position from the Model Display group. 6. In the dashboard, verify that Translate Component selected. 7. Select SHAFT.PRT. is

Fo r

9. Select ARM.PRT.

10. Cursor over the green Y-axis arrow and drag upwards to explode the component.

2012 PTC

PT

8. Cursor over the red X-axis arrow and drag upwards to explode the component.

In

te rn

al
Module 21 | Page 5

U se

3. In the View Manager dialog box, select the Explode tab. Click New and press ENTER to accept the default name. Click Close.

nl y

2. Click View Manager the In Graphics toolbar.

from

11. In the dashboard, select the Options tab and select the Move with Children check box. 12. Select COVER.PRT, cursor over the red X-axis arrow, and drag upwards. Notice that the bolts explode with it. 13. Select the pattern leader BOLT.PRT, cursor over the red X-axis arrow, and drag upwards to explode all three bolt members. 14. In the graphics window, right-click and select Motion Reference. 15. Select the front, planar surface of BODY.PRT. 16. Select PLATE.PRT, cursor over the red X-axis arrow, and drag to the left. 17. In the Options tab, clear the Move with Children check box. 18. Select the References tab. Right-click the Movement Reference and select Remove. Click in the Components to Move collector. 19. Select one BOLT.PRT, press CTRL, and select the second BOLT.PRT member. 20. Cursor over the red X-axis arrow, and drag the bolts to the left.

Fo r

Module 21 | Page 6

PT

In

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

21. Click Complete Feature the dashboard.

from

22. Click View Manager , right-click Exp0001, and select Save. 23. Click OK in the Save Display Elements dialog box. 24. Click Close from the view manager. This completes the procedure.

Fo r

2012 PTC

PT

In

te rn

al
Module 21 | Page 7

U se

nl y

Creating Explode Lines

Explode lines are used to denote the alignment of exploded components when the assembly is unexploded.
Create explode lines by specifying references on two components. Edit explode lines: Extend or shorten lines Add/Remove Jogs Modify line style, font, or color.

In

Figure 1 Unexploded Assembly

Creating Explode Lines

Fo r

You can create cosmetic explode lines to display the alignment of exploded components when the assembly is unexploded. Explode lines automatically update to reflect position changes made to the exploded components they reference. Creating new explode lines or editing existing explode lines modifies the explode state. You can save the modified explode state in the view manager Explode tab. You can create an explode line in an explode state by specifying a reference on two different components. You can select surfaces, edges, or curves as references on the components. The explode line is then created between the two selected references and displays in the model tree as an Offset Line. Explode lines are also known as Offset lines.

Editing Explode Lines

You can edit existing explode lines by selecting the explode line and clicking Edit Explode Line from the Explode Lines tab in the dashboard. You can also right-click and select Edit Explode Line. You can perform the following edit operations on an explode line:
Module 21 | Page 8 2012 PTC

PT

te rn
Figure 2 Explode Lines in Exploded Assembly

al

U se

nl y

 Edit the explode line length You can extend or shorten the ends of an explode line by dragging the handle at the desired end. Add Jogs Select the explode line location where you want to create the jog, right-click, and select Add Jog. You can then drag the jog to its desired location. You can delete the jog by right-clicking its handle and selecting Remove Jog.

Modifying Explode Line Style

You can modify the style of existing explode lines by selecting the explode line and either clicking Edit Line Styles from the Explode Lines tab in the dashboard, or by right-clicking in the graphics window and selecting Modify Line Style. You can modify the line style to be Hidden, Geometry, Leader, Cut Plane, Phantom, or centerline. You can also modify the Line Font and Color. You can always restore the default line style by selecting the explode line and clicking Default Line Style from the Explode Lines tab in the dashboard.

You can remove explode lines by selecting the explode line and clicking Remove Explode Line from the Explode Lines tab in the dashboard. You can also right-click and select Remove Explode Line. Press CTRL to select multiple explode lines at once.

Fo r

2012 PTC

PT

In

te rn

al

U se

Removing Explode Lines

nl y

Module 21 | Page 9

PROCEDURE - Creating Explode Lines

Close Window Erase Not Displayed EXPLODE_LINES.ASM

View\Explode_Lines Task 1:

Create offset lines between exploded components.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

3. Notice the note in the graphics window.

4. Click Edit Position from the Model Display group.

7. Zoom in and select the surfaces on COVER_2.PRT and ARM_2.PRT.

Fo r

8. Click Apply in the Cosmetic Offset Line dialog box to create the explode line.

9. Select the inner hole surface on COVER_2.PRT and the outer surface on the corresponding BOLT_2.PRT, and click Apply to create the explode line. 10. Create explode lines for the other two BOLT_2.PRT components.

Module 21 | Page 10

PT

6. Edit the selection filter to Surface.

In

5. Click Create Explode Line from the dashboard.

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

from 2. Click Exploded View the Model Display group.

11. Select the inner hole surface on COVER_2.PRT and the outer surface on the SHAFT_2.PRT tip, and click Apply to create the explode line.

Fo r

17. Click Close in the Cosmetic Offset Line dialog box and click Complete Feature from the dashboard. from

18. Click View Manager the In Graphics toolbar.

19. In the View Manager dialog box, select the Explode tab. Right-click Exp0001, select Save, and click OK. Click Close.

This completes the procedure.

2012 PTC Module 21 | Page 11

PT

16. Query-select the back surface of PLATE_2.PRT in approximately the center and click Apply.

In

15. Select the inner surface of BODY_2.PRT.

te rn

14. Create another explode line for the second plate bolt.

al

13. Select the upper bolt hole surface on PLATE_2.PRT and the corresponding outer surface on BOLT_2.PRT, and click Apply to create the explode line.

U se

nl y

12. Select the inner hole surface on BODY_2.PRT and the outer surface on SHAFT_2.PRT, and click Apply to create the explode line.

Animating Explode States

You have the option of animating your explode states for both exploding and unexploding operations.
Toggle animation on or off. Options include: Maximum seconds an animation takes between explode states. Follow explode sequence. You can set default behavior.

Fo r

Animating Explode States

You have the option of animating your explode states for both exploding and unexploding operations. The system animates the movement of components from their start to end positions in the explode state. To enable animation, click File > Options and select the Show animation while exploding the assembly check box under the Assembly display settings section of the Entity Display category. You can also control the following options: Maximum seconds an animation takes between explode states Sets the duration of time the system takes to explode or unexplode the assembly. Follow explode sequence If enabled, this option causes the components to explode or unexplode in the order they were moved when the explode state was created, following the drag motions you used. If this check box is cleared, the system selects the shortest distance to move the components. All components are also moved at once, regardless of the order they were moved when the explode state was created.
Module 21 | Page 12 2012 PTC

PT

Figure 1 Animation Not Following the Explode Sequence

In

te rn
Figure 2 Animation Following the Explode Sequence

al

U se

nl y

Explode lines appear at the end of the animation when exploding, and display until the end of the animation while unexploding.

Animated Explode State Config Options

The following configuration options determine the default animated explode state behavior: animate_explode_states Controls whether explode states are animated. This option is set to yes by default. explode_animation_max_time Sets the default duration of time necessary to explode or unexplode the assembly.

Fo r

2012 PTC

PT

In

te rn
Module 21 | Page 13

al

U se

nl y

PROCEDURE - Animating Explode States

Close Window Erase Not Displayed ANIMATE.ASM

View\Explode_Animate Task 1:

Animate an explode state in an assembly.

1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. Click File > Options. 3. In the Creo Parametric Options dialog box, select the Entity Display category. In the Assembly display settings section, notice that the Show animation while exploding the assembly check box is selected. Type 10 as the value for Maximum seconds an animation takes between explode states. Click OK > No. 4. Click Exploded View from the Model Display group.

Fo r

Module 21 | Page 14

PT

6. Notice that the explode lines appear at the end of the sequence.

5. Notice that all components begin exploding at once.

In

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

7. Click Exploded View

again.

8. Notice that all components unexplode at once. 9. Notice that the explode lines display until the end of the sequence.

Fo r

2012 PTC

PT

13. Notice that the components explode in order.

12. Click Exploded View from the Model Display group.

In

te rn
Module 21 | Page 15

11. In the Creo Parametric Options dialog box, select the Entity Display category. In the Assembly display settings section, select the Follow explode sequence check box. Click OK.

al

U se

10. Click File > Options.

nl y

14. Click Exploded View

again.

15. Notice that all components unexplode in order.

This completes the procedure.

Fo r

Module 21 | Page 16

PT

In

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

Module

22
U se O te rn al
Module 22 | Page 1

Drawing Layout and Views

Module Overview

Drawings are used for documenting the production design of parts and assembly models. They typically contain two-dimensional and three-dimensional model views, as well as dimensions, notes, and Bills of Materials. Drawings are frequently used in the manufacture of product designs. This module focuses on the creation of drawings and the layout of drawing views. There are two methods for creating drawings. In the first method, you manually place views onto a drawing. In the second method, you use a drawing template to automatically populate the drawing with predefined information. Typically, a combination of these methods is used, which involves manually placing views on drawings that were started using a drawing template.

After completing this module, you will be able to: Analyze drawing concepts and theory, as well as basic 2-D orientation skills. Create new drawings manually and apply formats. Use the drawing tree. Create new drawings using drawing templates. Manage drawing sheets. Add drawing models to a drawing. Create, orient, and modify drawing views including general, projection, cross-section, detailed, and auxiliary. Create assembly and exploded views.

Fo r

2012 PTC

PT

Objectives

In

nl y

Analyzing Drawing Concepts and Theory

A drawing is often the final deliverable at a company and contains parametric 2-D or 3-D views of a 3-D model.
A drawing usually contains at least: Model views Dimensions Title block A drawing is bi-directional.

Figure 1 Example of a Model

Fo r

Analyzing Drawing Concepts and Theory

Once a part or assembly has been modeled, you typically need to create a 2-D drawing to document it. Often, a 2-D drawing is the final deliverable at a company. The 2-D drawing usually contains parametric 2-D or 3-D views of the 3-D part or assembly, dimensions, and a title block. The drawing may also contain notes, tables, and further design information. However, not every company requires you to create drawings of models. A drawing is bi-directional. If a change is made to a model, the drawing that displays the model automatically updates to reflect the change. Similarly, if a change is made to a model in the drawing, the model automatically updates as well.

Module 22 | Page 2

PT

Figure 2 Example of a Drawing

In

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

Analyzing Basic 2-D Orientation

Manipulate the 2-D orientation of your drawings in the Creo Parametric graphics window.
Keyboard/Mouse Orientation: Pan Zoom Wheel Zoom Additional Orientation options: Refit Change sheets

Figure 1 Viewing a Drawing Sheet

PT

Figure 2 Zooming in on a Drawing View

In

Orientation using Keyboard and Mouse Combinations

Fo r

To view specific areas of a drawing, you can pan and zoom the drawing using a combination of keyboard and mouse functions, as shown in the following table. Orientation Pan Keyboard and Mouse Selection

Zoom + Cursor over the area of interest before zooming in. The zoom function uses the cursor position as its area of focus. You can also zoom by using the scroll
2012 PTC Module 22 | Page 3

te rn
Figure 3 Zooming in on the Title Block

al

U se

nl y

wheel. To control the level of zoom, press a designated key while using the scroll wheel, as shown in the following table: Zoom Level Zoom Keyboard and Mouse Selection

Fine Zoom + Coarse Zoom

In addition to using keyboard and mouse combinations, the following additional drawing 2-D orientation options are available: Refit Refits the entire drawing sheet in the graphics window. Change sheets You can change drawing sheets in a multi-sheet drawing. The sheet numbers display under the graphics window as individual tabs. To change sheets, you can select the tab which corresponds with the desired sheet. Often your company's title block displays the drawing sheet number in a multi-sheet drawing, as shown in Figure 3.

Fo r

Module 22 | Page 4

PT

In

te rn

al

U se

Additional Orientation Options

O
2012 PTC

nl y

Creating New Drawings and Applying Formats

Your company can create customized formats to use in new drawings.
Create new drawings in the New dialog box. Specify the Default Model. Specify orientation. Specify size. Specify format (optional). A Format: Contains 2-D items. Is created in Format mode. Is applied to a drawing. Add or change formats . using Sheet Setup

In

Fo r

You can create new drawings within Creo Parametric either by clicking File from the Quick Access toolbar, selecting the > New, or by clicking New Drawing option, and then editing the drawing Name. You must also specify whether to use a default template. This topic focuses on drawing creation when a default template is not used. You must specify the Default Model to be used in the drawing. The Default Model is the model that is used in your drawing when you start placing views. You can add additional models to the drawing at a later time. If you have models open in Creo Parametric when a new drawing is created, the model that is in the active window at the time of drawing creation is automatically set as the Default Model. You must also specify the drawing Orientation, whether Portrait, Landscape, or Variable. If you select Portrait or Landscape, you can choose between numerous standard, predefined drawing sizes. If you select Variable, you must specify the desired drawing size width and height, in units of either inches or millimeters. A C-size drawing is shown in Figure 1.

2012 PTC

PT

Creating New Drawings

te rn
Figure 2 Drawing with Format

al
Module 22 | Page 5

U se

Figure 1 Empty Drawing

nl y

Using Drawing Formats

When creating a new drawing, you must also decide whether to use a format in the new drawing. A drawing format contains 2-D items that typically include boundary lines, referencing marks, tables, and text. A format has an extension of *.frm, and is created in Format mode. A format is then applied to a drawing. Your company has most likely created customized formats to use, as they typically contain your company's logo, title block, and tolerancing standards. In Figure 2 shows a A2-size drawing with an applied format. If you specify a format during drawing creation, you do not need to specify an orientation or size; these parameters are determined during format creation and are incorporated into the drawing.

Adding and Changing Formats

Fo r

Module 22 | Page 6

PT

In

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

You can decide whether to add a format at the time of drawing creation or at a later time. To add a format to a drawing after the drawing has been created, you can either click Sheet Setup from the Document group in the Layout tab, or you can double-click the drawing size that is displayed along the bottom of the graphics window. You can then select your desired format, or replace an existing format with a different format.

nl y

PROCEDURE - Creating New Drawings and Applying Formats

Close Window Erase Not Displayed CREATE NEW

Drawing\Formats_Applying Task 1:

Create a new drawing and apply different formats to it.

3. Disable all Datum Display types.

Fo r

5. Click Sheet Setup

PT

4. Notice the text below the sheet that displays the drawing scale, type, name, and drawing size.

6. In the Sheet Setup dialog box, edit the Format from A Size to C Size in the drop-down list. Click OK.

2012 PTC

In

te rn
from the Document group in the Layout tab.

2. In the New Drawing dialog box, click Browse to specify the Default Model. Select ANGLE_GUIDE.PRT and click Open. Select Empty for the template, if necessary Edit the Standard Size to A in the drop-down list. Click OK.

al
Module 22 | Page 7

U se

1. Click New from the Quick Access toolbar. In the New dialog box, select Drawing as the Type. Edit the Name to new_drawing. Clear the Use default template check box and click OK.

nl y

7. Double-click the SIZE : C tag at the bottom of the graphics window. 8. In the Sheet Setup dialog box, click the C Size format to activate the field. Click Browse from the drop-down list. In the Open dialog box, click Working Directory. Select C_FORMAT_ GENERIC.FRM and click Open. Click OK. 9. In the input window, type your first initial, followed by your surname, and press ENTER. 10. Notice that the text at the bottom has updated again. Also notice the new format which contains a border and title block. 11. Zoom in on the title block.

12. Click Refit from the In Graphics toolbar. This completes the procedure.

Fo r

Module 22 | Page 8

PT

In

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

Creating and Orienting General Views

When creating a series of views, a general view is usually the first view you create.
You can edit the following attributes when creating or editing general views: View name View type View orientation Model view name

Fo r

When you create a drawing, the first view added to a drawing is a general view. A general view is usually the first of a series of views to be created. When you create or edit a general view in a drawing, the Drawing View dialog box appears displaying the View Type category. You can edit the following attributes of a general view in the View Type category: View name The view name displays in the drawing tree and when you cursor over the view in the graphics window. It also displays in the layer tree when selecting the active layer object. View type If there is more than one general view on the drawing, you can edit the view type from general to a different view type. This option is only available when editing an existing general drawing view. View orientation Determines the orientation of the view in the drawing. You can set the view orientation using model view names that are created in the model itself. These are the same model views that are found in the model's saved view list and view manager. A general view can be placed in any orientation.
2012 PTC Module 22 | Page 9

PT

Creating and Orienting General Views

In

Figure 2 Another General View Type

te rn

al

U se
Figure 1 General View Type

nl y

PROCEDURE - Creating and Orienting General Views

Close Window Erase Not Displayed GENERAL_VIEWS.DRW

Drawing_Views\General Task 1: Create a 2-D general view.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

3. Click OK in the Select Combined State dialog box. 4. Click in the middle of the drawing to place the view. 5. In the Drawing View dialog box, edit the View name to SHAFT_SIDE. 6. Notice the default view of the model. Also notice the model views available in the Drawing View dialog box. The available views were generated from the model.

7. In the Drawing View dialog box, select Model view name FRONT, and click Apply.

Fo r

8. De-select the SHAFT_SIDE view.

Module 22 | Page 10

PT

Click Repaint . Select Model view name LEFT and click Apply. Select Model view name RIGHT and click OK.

In

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

from the Model 2. Click General Views group in the Layout tab.

Task 2:

Create a 3-D general view.

1. Right-click in the drawing and select Insert General View. 2. Click OK in the Select Combined State dialog box. 3. Click in the upper-right of the drawing to place the view. 4. In the Drawing View dialog box, edit the View name to SHAFT_DEFAULT. 5. Notice the model views available in the Drawing View dialog box.

6. In the Drawing View dialog box, select Model view name 3D, and click Apply.

Fo r

7. In the Drawing View dialog box, select Model view name Default Orientation, and click OK.

This completes the procedure.

2012 PTC

PT

In

te rn
Module 22 | Page 11

al

U se

nl y

Utilizing the Drawing Tree

The drawing tree enables you to visualize and manipulate drawing elements.
Drawing Tree Changes with Ribbon tab Select items Right-click options

Figure 1 Drawing Tree: Layout Tab

In

Figure 2 Drawing Tree: Table Tab

Utilizing the Drawing Tree

Drawing elements are shown in a hierarchical tree similar to the model tree. The drawing tree changes its display to match the current drawing task, based on the tab selected in the drawing ribbon. The drawing tree enables you to visualize the items in the drawing and right-click them for access to additional various options. Consider the following while working with the drawing tree: The drawing tree appears above the model tree. Each can be independently resized or collapsed. Both the drawing tree and the model tree can be toggled to display the layer tree.

Fo r

Module 22 | Page 12

PT

te rn
Figure 3 Drawing Tree: Annotate Tab

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

PROCEDURE - Utilizing the Drawing Tree

Close Window Drawing\Tree Task 1: Erase Not Displayed DRAWING_TREE.DRW

Navigate through the drawing and explore the drawing tree.

1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. Select the Layout tab from the ribbon, if necessary. Notice that the active sheet is shown in the drawing tree. Also notice that the views are shown in the drawing tree.

The views in this drawing were renamed to be easily recognizable in the drawing tree. 3. Right-click FRONT and view the available options. 4. Select Auxiliary to locate this view.

5. Select the Table tab from the ribbon. Notice the drawing tree updates.

Fo r

6. Select Table 3 to locate it. Right-click Table 3 and view the available options.

2012 PTC

PT

In

te rn
Module 22 | Page 13

al

U se

nl y

7. Select the Annotate tab from the ribbon. Notice the drawing tree updates. 8. Expand the FRONT node and the Annotations node in the drawing tree. Notice the various shown and erased dimensions. 9. Select the HOLE_DIA dimension to locate it. Right-click and view the available options for this shown dimension.

Fo r

12. Select the CYL axis to locate it. Right-click and view the available options for this axis.

This completes the procedure.

Module 22 | Page 14

PT

11. Expand the RIGHT node and the Datums node in the drawing tree. Notice the various shown and erased axes.

In

te rn

10. Select the d21 dimension to locate it. Right-click and view the available options for this erased dimension.

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

Managing Drawing Sheets

You manipulate Sheets using sheet tabs and dialog boxes.
Move or Copy Sheet dialog box: Move sheets with the option to copy Sheet Setup dialog box: Specify Format Change Size/Orientation Sheet tabs: Located below drawing status text Select to activate sheet Create/Delete Reorder Rename

Figure 1 Move or Copy Sheet Dialog Box

Drawings contain at least one sheet. When additional sheets are created, you use the sheet tabs and sheet dialog boxes to manage multiple sheets.

Fo r

You can access the most common sheet functions from the sheet tabs area, located below the drawing status text. Using the sheet tabs, you can:

Preview a sheet by placing the cursor over the tab. Select a sheet tab to activate the desired sheet. Create and Delete sheets. Reorder the sheets by dragging a sheet tab. Rename a sheet. Right-click a sheet for additional options. Within the Layout tab of the drawing ribbon, you can click Move or Copy from the Document group. The Move or Copy Sheet dialog box Sheets enables you to: Move the current sheet to the selected location. Insert a copy of the current sheet to the selected location.
2012 PTC Module 22 | Page 15

PT

Managing Drawing Sheets

In

te rn

Figure 3 Sheet Tabs

al
Figure 2 Sheet Setup Dialog Box

U se

nl y

Within the Layout tab of the drawing ribbon, you can click Sheet Setup from the Document group. The Sheet Setup dialog box enables you to: Specify the drawing Format. Change sheet Size. Change sheet Orientation.

Fo r

Module 22 | Page 16

PT

In

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

PROCEDURE - Managing Drawing Sheets

Close Window Drawing\Sheets Task 1: Erase Not Displayed DRAWING_SHEETS.DRW

Use different tools to manipulate sheets in a drawing.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

3. Notice the drawing tree updates for this sheet.

6. Notice the drawing tree updates for this sheet.

7. Click New Sheet from the Document group. Press ENTER to leave the name blank. Double-click the Sheet 3 sheet tab, type NEW, and press ENTER. Drag the NEW sheet tab to reorder it as sheet 2 of 3. 8. Double-click the Sheet 1 sheet tab, type CYL, and press ENTER. 9. Right-click the Sheet 2 sheet tab and view the available options. Select Rename, type ANG and press ENTER.

Fo r

2012 PTC

PT

In

te rn
Module 22 | Page 17

5. Select the Sheet 2 sheet tab to activate it.

al

4. Cursor over the Sheet 2 tab to view the thumbnail preview.

U se

nl y

2. Select the Sheet 1 sheet tab to activate it, if necessary.

10. Select the NEW sheet tab to activate it. 11. From the Document group in the ribbon, click Move or Copy Sheets . Select ANG, if necessary. Select the Create a copy check box. Click OK and press ENTER to create Sheet 4.

12. Select the Sheet 4 sheet tab to activate it. Right-click and select Delete. Click Yes.

Fo r

This completes the procedure.

Module 22 | Page 18

PT

14. From the Document group in the ribbon, click Sheet Setup . Select the current format to activate the drop-down list. Select Browse from the drop-down list. Select a.frm, then click Open and OK. Click Remove All and Yes.

In

te rn

al
2012 PTC

13. Select the NEW sheet tab to activate it.

U se

nl y

Adding Drawing Models

A drawing can contain views and other information from multiple drawing models.
Add or delete drawing models from the drawing. Set/Switch the active model. The system adds information to the drawing from the active model only.

Figure 2 Menu Manager

PT

In

te rn
Figure 3 Different Models on Different Drawing Sheets

Fo r

Adding Drawing Models

When you create a drawing, you typically specify the drawing model to use in the drawing. Views placed in the drawing depict this specified drawing model. However, you can add additional drawing models to the drawing. This enables drawing views and information from multiple models to be captured in a single drawing.

The system adds information to the drawing from the active model. The active model is displayed at the bottom of the graphics window and in the model tree. You can switch between drawing models and set the active one icon from the model tree, by by clicking the Set Active Model/Rep from the Model Views group of the Layout tab in clicking Drawing Models the drawing ribbon, or by right-clicking in the drawing and selecting Drawing Models. You can also right-click a selected view of a drawing model that is not the active model and select Set/Add Drawing Model or double-click the active component name at the bottom of the graphics window.
2012 PTC Module 22 | Page 19

al

U se

Figure 1 Switching the Active Model

nl y

However, you must click the Drawing Models icon and use the subsequent menu manager to add new models. Figure 2 displays the menu manager. You must also delete drawing models from the drawing through the view manager. You can only delete a drawing model if there are no views using it, however, and each drawing must contain at least one drawing model.

Fo r

Module 22 | Page 20

PT

In

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

PROCEDURE - Adding Drawing Models

Close Window Drawing\Models Task 1: Erase Not Displayed DRAWING_MODELS.DRW

Add the CYLINDER_BRACKET.PRT to the drawing.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

5. In the menu manager, click Add Model. 6. Select CYLINDER_BRACKET. PRT and click Open. At the bottom of the graphics window, notice that CYLINDER_BRACKET is now the active model.

8. Click New Sheet

PT

7. Notice that the model tree displays CYLINDER_BRACKET. PRT. .

9. In the input window, type your first initial, followed by your surname, and press ENTER. Sheet number 2 is added to the drawing. Notice the model name in the title block.

Fo r

10. Click General from the Model Views group in the Layout tab. 11. Click OK in the Select Combined State dialog box. 12. Click in the drawing to place the general view. 13. In the Drawing View dialog box, select FRONT as the Model view name and click OK.
2012 PTC Module 22 | Page 21

In

te rn

al

U se

from 4. Click Drawing Models the Model Views group of the Layout tab.

3. Notice that the model tree displays SHAFT.PRT.

nl y

2. At the bottom of the graphics window, notice that SHAFT is the active model.

Task 2:

Add the ANGLE_GUIDE.PRT to the drawing. .

1. Click Drawing Models

2. In the menu manager, click Add Model. 3. Select ANGLE_GUIDE.PRT and click Open. At the bottom of the graphics window notice that ANGLE_GUIDE is now the active model and that ANGLE_GUIDE.PRT displays in the model tree. 4. Click New Sheet .

6. Click General

Task 3:

Set a different active drawing model.

Fo r

1. In the model tree, click Set Active Model/Rep and select SHAFT.PRT > Master Rep. 2. The SHAFT.PRT is now the active model. 3. Click General and click OK in the Select Combined State dialog box.

4. Click in the drawing to place the general view, and click OK. 5. De-select the drawing view. 6. Right-click in the drawing and select Drawing Models. 7. In the menu manager, click Set Model > CYLINDER_BRACKET > Done/Return. This completes the procedure.
Module 22 | Page 22 2012 PTC

PT

In

te rn

8. Click in the drawing to place the general view, and click OK.

al

7. Click OK in the Select Combined State dialog box.

U se

5. In the input window, type your first initial, followed by your surname, and press ENTER. Sheet number 3 is added to the drawing. Notice the model name in the title block.

nl y

Creating Projection Views

A Projection view is an orthographic projection of another view's geometry along a horizontal or vertical direction from the parent view.
Projected view characteristics: Is child of view from which it is projected Orientation is 90 from parent view Third angle or First angle

Figure 2 Example Third Angle Projected Left View

PT

In

te rn
Figure 3 Example General View

Fo r

Creating Projection Views

A Projection view is an orthographic projection of another view's geometry along a horizontal or vertical direction from the parent view. The orientation of the projection view is always 90 from the parent view, and its scale is dependent on the parent view. If the orientation of the parent view is updated, the orientation of the child projection views also updates.

You can either insert projection views by clicking Projection from the Model Views group in the Layout tab, or by selecting a drawing view, right-clicking, and selecting Insert Projection View. In either case, you must specify the parent view from which the projection view projects. When you create a projection view, it is assigned a default name based upon the direction of projection.

2012 PTC

al

U se

Figure 1 Example Third Angle Projected Top View

O
Module 22 | Page 23

nl y

The default projection type for projection views is Third Angle. If desired, the projection type can be changed to First Angle. You can also project 3-D general views.

Fo r

Module 22 | Page 24

PT

In

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

PROCEDURE - Creating Projection Views

Close Window Erase Not Displayed PROJECTION_VIEWS.DRW

Drawing_Views\Projection Task 1:

Create two projection views on sheet 1.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. Select the shaft_side drawing view, right-click, and select Insert Projection View.

Fo r

3. Move the cursor up and click to place the new projection view.

2012 PTC

PT

1. Select the Sheet 3 sheet tab to activate it.

In

Task 2:

Create three projection views on sheet 3.

te rn

5. Move the cursor to the right and click to place the new projection view.

al
Module 22 | Page 25

4. Select the front view, right-click, and select Insert Projection View.

U se

3. Select the front view, move the cursor up, and click to place the new projection view. Notice the orange rectangle that snaps to your cursor until you click to place the view.

nl y

from the 2. Click Projection Model Views group of the Layout tab.

4. Select the shaft_side drawing view, right-click, and select Insert Projection View. 5. Move the cursor to the left and click to place the second new projection view. 6. Select the shaft_side view, right-click, and select Insert Projection View.

This completes the procedure.

Fo r

Module 22 | Page 26

PT

In

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

7. Move the cursor to the right and click to place the third new projection view.

Creating Cross-Section Views

You can add cross-sections to drawing views and edit their Xhatching.
Cross-section views: Use cross-sections from the 3-D model. Have Xhatching that you can edit. Enable you to add arrows to a perpendicular view. Flip material direction

In

te rn
Creating Cross-Section Views
You can add cross-sections to drawing views in the Sections category of the Drawing View dialog box. When you specify that you want to add a section to a drawing view, a list of available cross-sections displays in a drop-down list. This list of available cross-sections originates from the 3-D model itself. You can only select valid cross-sections for a given drawing view. A valid cross-section is one that is parallel to the screen when placed in the view. A cross-section displays in a drawing view with a set of Xhatching. You can edit the following attributes of the Xhatching lines: Spacing For spacing, you can select either Half or Double from the menu manger. Each time you select half or double, the spacing between Xhatching lines halves or doubles, respectively. You can also type a spacing value for the Xhatching lines. In the upper image of Figure 2, the spacing has been changed to a value of 0.15. In the lower image, the spacing has been changed to a value of 0.6. Angle For angle, you can select a Xhatching line angle in 30 or 45 degree increments between 0 and 150 degrees. You can also type an
2012 PTC Module 22 | Page 27

Fo r

PT

Figure 2 Editing Xhatching

al
Figure 3 Added Arrows to Perpendicular View

U se

Figure 1 Cross-Section Views Using 3-D Model Cross Sections

nl y

angle value. In the lower image of Figure 2, the Xhatching line angle has been modified from 45 degrees to 135 degrees. In addition to creating a section view, you can optionally add section arrows to any view that is perpendicular to the section view. In Figure 3, the arrows were added to the drawing view. The direction in which the arrows point indicates the direction of material to maintain in the section view. You can toggle this material direction if desired.

Fo r

Module 22 | Page 28

PT

In

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

PROCEDURE - Creating Cross-Section Views

Close Window Erase Not Displayed SECTION_VIEWS.DRW

Drawing_Views\Section Task 1:

Add cross-section A to a view in a drawing.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

5. Click Close from the View Manager. 6. Click Close drawing. to return to the

Fo r

9. Click in the background to de-select the view.

10. In the section view, select the Xhatching, right-click, and select Properties. 11. In the menu manager, click Spacing > Half > Done.

2012 PTC

PT

8. In the Drawing View dialog box, select the Sections category and select the 2D cross-section option. Click Add Section and select A from the drop-down list. Click OK.

In

7. Select the lower, center, shaft_side view. Right-click and select Properties.

te rn
Module 22 | Page 29

al

U se

4. Right-click section A and select Show Section. Notice the cross-section.

3. Click View Manager from the In Graphics toolbar and select the Sections tab.

nl y

2. In the model tree, right-click SHAFT.PRT and select Open.

12. De-select the X-hatching.

13. Select the cross-section view, right-click, and select Add Arrows. 14. Select the top projection view to place the arrows. 15. Select the arrows, right-click, and select Flip Material Removal Side.

This completes the procedure.

Fo r

Module 22 | Page 30

PT

In

te rn

16. Right-click and select Flip Material Removal Side to toggle the material removal direction back to the original direction.

al

U se
2012 PTC

nl y

Creating Detailed Views

A Detailed view is a small portion of a model shown enlarged in another view.
Detailed view components: Location on drawing Sketched spline View name Scale Xhatching (if applicable)

Figure 2 Placed Detailed View

You must define the following when creating a detailed view: Location Select a location on the drawing where the resulting detailed view is to be placed. Similar to other views, you can always move the drawing view at a later time. Spline Select a center point in an existing drawing view that you want to enlarge in the detailed view. You must then sketch a spline around the area of the view that you want enlarged in the resulting detailed view. You do not have to be concerned about sketching a perfect shape because the spline is automatically converted into a boundary shape. The default boundary shape is a Circle, although you can modify the boundary to an Ellipse, Horizontal/Vertical ellipse, an ASME 94 Circle, or keep it as a Spline. In Figure 3, the boundary shape is a Circle. You may also define the following optional items when creating a detailed view: View name Provide a different detailed View name. The View name of the detailed view displays in the detail note, as shown in Figure 3. The View name also displays under the detailed view, as shown in Figure 2.
2012 PTC Module 22 | Page 31

Fo r

PT

A detailed view is a small portion of a model shown enlarged in another view. A reference note and border is included on the parent view as part of the detailed view setup. The orientation of the detailed view is the same as its parent, but the detail view is typically assigned a much larger scale than the parent view.

In

Creating Detailed Views

te rn

al

Figure 3 Resulting Spline Boundary

U se

Figure 1 Sketching the Spline

nl y

 Scale You can specify the scale of the resulting detailed view. Xhatching (if applicable) If you create a detailed view for a drawing view that contains a cross-section, you can optionally edit the Xhatching to specify a view other than the parent cross-section view by selecting Det Indep from the menu manager when editing the Xhatching properties. The default detailed view Xhatching is governed by the parent.

Fo r

Module 22 | Page 32

PT

In

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

PROCEDURE - Creating Detailed Views

Close Window Erase Not Displayed DETAILED_VIEWS.DRW

Drawing_Views\Detailed Task 1:

Create a detailed view in a drawing.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

Fo r

6. Select a point in the top left of the drawing to place the detail view. 7. Click in the background to de-select the view.

2012 PTC

PT

5. Middle-click to complete the spline curve.

In

te rn
Module 22 | Page 33

al

4. Click points to create a spline curve around the SHAFT.PRT end. Do NOT close the spline curve when sketching it. Instead, leave a gap.

U se

3. In the section view, select the center point for the detailed view.

nl y

from the 2. Click Detailed Model Views group in the Layout tab.

8. Select the detailed view note. 9. Double-click the 3.000 scale on the view, type 4, and press ENTER. 10. Click in an empty area of the graphics window to de-select the scale value.

Fo r

Module 22 | Page 34

PT

In

te rn

This completes the procedure.

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

Creating Auxiliary Views

An auxiliary view is projected perpendicular to a selected planar reference or projected along the direction of an axis.
You can select the following references: Planar reference Datum plane Linear reference Datum axis Edge Edit the View name. Add optional arrows. Single Double

Creating Auxiliary Views

Fo r

You may also edit the View name to a more meaningful name, as well as add projection arrows, as shown in the figure. The View name displays when projection arrows are created. You can also move projection arrows individually with respect to the auxiliary view. Projection arrows can be displayed as either single or double arrows.

2012 PTC

PT

An Auxiliary view is a special type of projection view. Instead of being projected orthogonal, the auxiliary view is projected perpendicular to a selected planar reference (a datum plane), or projected along the direction of an axis. The resulting auxiliary view can be moved only along its angle of projection. In Figure 1, the datum plane is selected as the projection reference.

In

te rn

al

U se
Figure 1 An Auxiliary View
Module 22 | Page 35

nl y

Creating New Drawings using Drawing Templates

Drawing templates work in conjunction with the model's saved views to automatically populate default drawing views.
Drawing Templates are customizable: Create templates that complete a majority of the initial drawing. Additional items can be added to drawing templates. Other views View options Drawing formats Drawing options

Figure 1 Example of a Drawing Template

PT

In

Fo r

Creating New Drawings using Drawing Templates

Similar to part and assembly templates, a drawing template provides you with a starting point to create your drawings. You can use drawing templates when you want to create a standardized drawing. Drawing templates can automatically create views, set the desired view display and view options, display formats, and show model dimensions based on the template. You can configure Creo Parametric to use a default drawing template when creating a new drawing, or you can select a different one. A drawing template is shown in Figure 1, while a drawing created using the drawing template is shown in Figure 2. The views created within a drawing that uses a template are determined from the model's view orientations. It is important to consider drawing view orientations when creating your models. Drawing templates contain three types of information for creating new drawings:
Module 22 | Page 36 2012 PTC

te rn
Figure 2 Drawing Created using a Template

al

U se

nl y

Fo r

2012 PTC

PT

In

te rn

For example, you can create a template for a machined part versus a cast part. The machined part template could define the views that are typically placed for machined part drawings, set the view display of each view (for example, show hidden lines), place company standard machining notes, and automatically create snap lines for placing dimensions.

al

U se

You can use drawing templates to define the layout of views, set view display, define tables, place symbols and notes, show dimensions, and create snap lines. A drawing template can also be customized with your company formats and standards. This enables you to automatically create drawings in a fraction of the time it would take to sketch them.

Drawing Template Uses

nl y

Basic information Includes information that comprises a drawing but is not dependent on the drawing model, such as sheet size, notes, symbols, and formats. This information is copied from the template into the new drawing. 2. Representative view symbols Contains the options used to configure drawing views and the actions that are performed on that view. The instructions in the template are used to build a new drawing that references a model to place various views in specific orientations and view states. 3. Parametric note Notes that update to new drawing model parameters and dimension values. When a drawing is created from a template, the parametric notes update with the proper information from the models used in the drawing.

1.

Module 22 | Page 37

PROCEDURE - Creating New Drawings using Drawing Templates

Close Window Erase Not Displayed CYLINDER_BRACKET.PRT

Drawing\Templates Task 1:

Create a new drawing using the DRAWING_TEMPLATE.DRW template.

Fo r

5. In the New Drawing dialog box, notice that the Default Model is CYLINDER_BRACKET.PRT because it is still in session. You can browse and specify a different Default Model. Select Use template. Click Browse, select DRAWING_TEMPLATE.DRW, and click Open. Click OK.

6. In the input window, type your first initial, followed by your surname, and press ENTER. 7. Zoom in on the title block. 8. Pan to the different drawing views, zooming in and out as desired. 9. Click Refit .

Module 22 | Page 38

PT

In

te rn

4. Click New from the ribbon. In the New dialog box, select Drawing as the Type. Edit the Name to new_drawing. Clear the Use default template check box and click OK.

al

U se

3. Click Close

O
2012 PTC

2. Rotate CYLINDER_BRACKET. PRT to familiarize yourself with its shape.

nl y

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

10. Notice the three template view names in the drawing tree.

This completes the procedure.

Fo r

2012 PTC

PT

In

te rn
Module 22 | Page 39

al

U se

nl y

Modifying Drawing Views

You can perform many operations on a drawing view to change its display.
Operations include: Move the view. Lock view movement Delete views. Child views Modify properties. Scale View display Edit the sheet scale.

Figure 2 Editing the Sheet Scale

In

Modifying Drawing Views

Fo r

When a view is placed on a drawing, there are a variety of operations that you can perform to change the display of the view. In most cases, you can modify a view that has already been placed on a drawing. The following are different types of operations that you can perform on views in a drawing.

Moving Views
By default, views cannot be moved when they are placed on a drawing. They are locked to the drawing. You can unlock drawing views for movement in the drawing by selecting a view, right-clicking, and toggling the Lock View Movement option, or by clicking Lock View Movement from the Document group. The toggle for locking view movement is a system setting rather than an individual drawing view setting. If one view is unlocked, all views are unlocked. Once views are unlocked, a drawing view can be moved according to any parent/child relationships that exist between views. Since a general view has no parent views, it can be moved anywhere on the drawing. When a general
Module 22 | Page 40 2012 PTC

PT

te rn
Figure 3 Modifying View Properties

al

U se

Figure 1 Deleting Child Views

nl y

view is moved, any child views move accordingly. A child view, on the other hand, can only move according to the angle of projection from the parent view.

Deleting Views
You can delete views from a drawing. All items associated with the deleted drawing view, including child views, are also deleted. For example, if you delete a general view that has three child projection views, the child projection views must also be deleted. The system highlights child views that are to be deleted, as shown in Figure 1.

Modifying Drawing View Properties

Scale Is modified in the Scale category of the Drawing View dialog box. In most cases, the scale of a placed view is specified as the default scale for the sheet, or the sheet scale. You can also define a custom scale for a drawing view that makes it larger or smaller than the defined sheet scale. If a custom scale is defined, it is listed under the drawing view, as shown in Figure 3. Note that for some drawing views, such as a projection view, you cannot specify a custom scale because the drawing view scale is dependent upon its parent view. View Display Is modified in the View Display category of the Drawing View dialog box. Three view display options that can be modified include: Display style Controls the display of the entire view. Options include Follow Environment, Wireframe, Hidden, No Hidden, Shading, and Shading With Edges. The Follow Environment display style may vary from company to company depending upon how the default display style is defined. In Figure 3, the display style was edited from No Hidden to Shading. Tangent edges display style You can define how tangent edges display within the drawing. Options include Default, None, Solid, Dimmed, Centerline, and Phantom. Colors come from For display styles other than shading, you can define the location from which the colors for the drawing view geometry lines are generated. By default, colors are defined based on the drawing. You can specify that the colors are generated from how they are defined in the model.

Fo r

Editing the Sheet Scale

You can also edit the sheet scale at the bottom of the graphics window. The sheet scale value edits the scale of the active model only. When you edit the sheet scale of the active model, any drawing views of that active model on that sheet update their scale based on the new value. In Figure 2, the sheet scale was increased from 1 to 1.75.

2012 PTC

PT

In

te rn

al

U se

nl y

The following are two types of drawing view properties that can be modified:

Module 22 | Page 41

PROCEDURE - Modifying Drawing Views

Close Window Erase Not Displayed MODIFYING_VIEWS.DRW

Drawing_Views\Modifying Task 1:

Modify the views on sheet 1 of the drawing.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

5. Right-click and select Properties.

Task 2:

Modify the views on sheet 2 of the drawing.

1. Select the Sheet 2 sheet tab to activate it.

PT

In

6. In the Drawing View dialog box, edit the Display style to Hidden and click OK.

Fo r

2. Click Set Active Model/Rep > Master Rep.

3. In the bottom left of the graphics window, double-click the scale, edit it to 1.25, and press ENTER. 4. Click in the background to de-select the scale. 5. Press CTRL and select the two 2-D views. 6. Right-click and select Properties. 7. In the Drawing View dialog box, edit the Tangent edges display style to Phantom and click OK.

Module 22 | Page 42

te rn
and select ANGLE_GUIDE.PRT

al
2012 PTC

4. With the general front view still selected, press CTRL and select the two projection views.

U se

3. With the front view still selected, click and drag down and to the left. Notice that the two projection view children move along with the general view parent.

nl y

2. Select the front general view, right-click, and clear Lock View Movement.

Task 3:

Modify the views on sheet 3 of the drawing.

1. Select the Sheet 3 sheet tab to activate it. 2. Select the top view and move it further up in the drawing.

5. Click Undo

Fo r

8. In the Drawing View dialog box, select the View Display category, edit the Display style to Shading, and click OK.

This completes the procedure.

2012 PTC

PT

7. In the Drawing View dialog box, select the Scale category, select the Custom scale option, edit the value to 2, and click Apply.

In

6. Select the 3-D general shaft_default view, right-click, and select Properties.

te rn
Module 22 | Page 43

al

4. Click Yes in the Confirmation dialog box.

U se

3. Select the lower, center shaft_side view, right-click, and select Delete. The three child projection views highlight in purple boxes.

nl y

Creating Assembly and Exploded Views

You can create a drawing that displays assembly views. You can further modify an assembly view to display it in an exploded state.
Set an assembly as the active model to create assembly views. All components included. Display an assembly view in an exploded state. Views reference 3-D model explode states. Explode states can be edited from the drawing. Explode lines can be shown.

Creating Assembly Views

Fo r

Similar to creating part drawings, you can also create assembly drawings that display assembly views. When creating a new drawing, simply set an assembly as the default model or add it as a drawing model to an existing drawing. With an assembly set as the active model, you can add views of the entire assembly without having to add each of its individual components. If your company requires that assembly drawings display individual components on different sheets, you must add each component as a drawing model. When placing any view, you are prompted to select a combined state. A combined state is a combination of various state representations created in the 3-D model using the All tab of the view manager. For example, you can create a combined state in the 3-D model that consists of a specific orientation, a specific explode state, and a specific style state. When the combined state is selected, the view displays with all three state representations enabled. For this topic, you should not specify a combined state.

Module 22 | Page 44

PT

Figure 1 Assembly View

In

te rn
Figure 2 Exploded Assembly View

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

Creating Assembly Exploded Views

Exploded views are used to illustrate assembly and disassembly (taking a product apart). With exploded views, you can create customized drawings based on 3-D models; these views can display information needed by manufacturing personnel to produce your product, or they can be used as a general reference. To display an assembly view in an exploded state, select the Explode components in view check box in the View States category of the Drawing View dialog box. You must then select the desired saved explode state or the default exploded state previously created in the 3-D assembly model. You can add an exploded view of an assembly without having to explode it in Assembly mode. If an exploded view is edited on the drawing, the explode state in the 3-D model is not affected. However, if the explode state is edited in the 3-D model, the associated exploded drawing view updates. Exploded views also typically contain explode lines, created in the 3-D model. In addition, BOM Balloons and a table indexing the parts can also be added to the drawing, enabling all users to easily reference the component information.

Fo r

2012 PTC

PT

In

te rn
Module 22 | Page 45

al

U se

nl y

PROCEDURE - Creating Assembly and Exploded Views

Close Window Erase Not Displayed CREATE NEW

Drawing_Views\Exploded Task 1:

Create a new drawing from a template and add an assembly view. , select Drawing, and edit the name to explode_view.

1. Click New

2. Clear the Use default template check box and click OK. 3. In the New Drawing dialog box, click Browse, select VALVE.ASM, and click Open. Select Use template, click Browse, select DRAWING_TEMPLATE. DRW, and click Open. Click OK. 4. In the input window, type your first initial, followed by your surname, and press ENTER. 5. Disable all Datum Display types. 6. If necessary, double-click the sheet scale value, edit it to 1, and press ENTER.

Fo r

9. Click near the upper-right corner to place the view.

10. In the Drawing View dialog box, select Default Orientation as the Model view name, and click OK. Insert a drawing sheet and add an exploded assembly view. .

Task 2:

1. Click New Sheet

2. In the input window, type your first initial, followed by your surname, and press ENTER.

Module 22 | Page 46

PT

8. Select No Combined State and click OK.

7. Right-click and select Insert General View.

In

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

3. Right-click and select Insert General View. 4. Select No Combined State and click OK. 5. Click near the middle of the drawing to place the view.

This completes the procedure.

Fo r

2012 PTC

PT

In

te rn
Module 22 | Page 47

8. In the Drawing View dialog box, select the View States category. Select the Explode components in view check box, and select Assembly explode state EXP0001 from the drop-down list. Click OK.

al

U se

7. Click Repaint

nl y

6. In the Drawing View dialog box, select 3D as the Model view name, and click Apply.

Fo r

Module 22 | Page 48

PT

In

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

Module

23
U se O te rn al
Module 23 | Page 1

Creating Drawing Annotations

Module Overview

Drawing views alone are not typically sufficient for conveying all the information needed to manufacture a given model. In this module, you learn how to display all of the details that manufacturing needs to create production parts. This information includes dimensions, axes, notes, and BOM Balloons.

Objectives

Fo r

After completing this module, you will be able to: Analyze annotation concepts and types. Create tables from file. Create BOM balloons. Show, erase, and delete annotations. Clean up and manipulate dimensions. Create driven dimensions. Insert notes. Analyze drawing associativity. Publish drawings.

2012 PTC

PT

In

nl y

Analyzing Annotation Concepts and Types

You can add additional detail to drawing views to convey information needed to manufacture the part or components of the assembly.
Add the following annotations to drawings: Dimensions Driving Driven (Created) Axes Notes Tables Bills of Material

Fo r

Analyzing Annotation Concepts and Types

You can add additional detail to drawing views in the form of annotations to convey information needed to manufacture the part or components of the assembly. There are numerous annotations you can add to a drawing, including, but not limited to: Dimensions Displays measurements, distances, and depths between specific geometric entities on a drawing view. You can add both driving dimensions from the model, or create your own dimensions. Axes Displays the centers of holes or bolt circles. Notes Add additional information to a drawing that may not be found in dimensions. Tables Displays additional drawing information in tabular format. Examples include names of optional components in an assembly, specific
Module 23 | Page 2 2012 PTC

PT

Figure 2 Viewing Annotation Items on a Drawing

In

te rn

al

Figure 1 Viewing a BOM on a Drawing

U se

nl y

dimension values for part numbers in a common drawing, and cam lift values per degree. BOM Shows components in an assembly and their quantities.

Fo r

2012 PTC

PT

In

te rn

al
Module 23 | Page 3

U se

nl y

Creating Tables from File

You can insert tables from a file or using quick tables.
Table From File Ribbon Options Quick Tables Gallery: Contains a gallery of previously created tables with thumbnails User Tables System Tables Place the table. Select Point dialog box

Figure 1 Table Ribbon Options

Figure 2 Browsing for a Table From File

In

Creating Tables from File

Fo r

You can insert tables from a file. Table files that were previously saved can be reused throughout your organization. You can save your own created tables as files, if desired. To insert a table from a file, click Table From File from the Table group drop-down menu, also located in the Table or select it from the Table group. You then browse to the desired location that contains saved tables, such as your working directory.

Creating Tables from the Quick Tables Gallery

You can also select a previously created table from the Tables Gallery. To from the Table group and then select access the Tables Gallery, click Table . A gallery of previously created tables with thumbnails Quick Tables to access tables shared in displays. You can also click More User Tables to your organization in the pro_table_dir path. Click More System Tables access system tables stored in the <loadpoint>/text/tables directory.
Module 23 | Page 4 2012 PTC

PT

te rn
Figure 3 Quick Tables Gallery

al

U se

nl y

Once you have selected your desired quick table, the Select Point dialog box displays, enabling you to specify the reference type to which the table snaps. Options include: Free Point Enables you to select a free point on the drawing. Enables you to specify absolute coordinates Enables you to specify relative coordinates to

Absolute Coordinates to locate the table. Relative Coordinates locate the table. Object or Entity or entity. Vertex

Enables you to select a point on a drawing object

Enables you to select the vertex on a drawing object or entity.

Fo r

2012 PTC

PT

In

te rn

al
Module 23 | Page 5

U se

nl y

PROCEDURE - Creating Tables from File

Close Window Erase Not Displayed TABLES_3.DRW

Drawing_Details\Tables_From-File Task 1: Save a table to file.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

3. Query the revision history table and select it. 4. Select Save As Table

from the Save Table types drop-down menu.

5. In the Save Drawing Table dialog box, type rev_hist.tbl as the File name. Click Save. Task 2: Insert a Table from File. from

1. Click Table From File the Table group.

3. Move the cursor to locate the table near the upper-right corner of the sheet.

Fo r

4. Click to place the table. 5. Click in the background to de-select the table.

Module 23 | Page 6

PT

2. In the Open dialog box, notice that REV_HIST.TBL is available. Select BOM_TABLE.TBL. Click Open.

In

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

2. In the ribbon, select the Table tab.

6. Zoom in to view the table. This table was created with a Repeat Region and Report Parameters which enables it to update to the assembly. 7. Click Refit from the In Graphics toolbar.

2. Scroll and select the tooltable. 3. Move the cursor to locate the table near the right side of the sheet.

4. Click to place the table.

Fo r

6. Zoom in on the table to view it.

This completes the procedure.

2012 PTC

PT

In

5. Click in the background to de-select the table.

te rn

al
Module 23 | Page 7

U se

1. Click Table from the Table group and select Quick Tables .

nl y

Task 3:

Insert a Quick Table.

Creating BOM Balloons

You can use balloons in conjunction with Bill of Materials tables to detail the location and number of parts included in the assembly for manufacture.
Numerous balloon creation options. Manipulate placed balloons: Merge Balloons Split Balloons Detach Balloons Redistribute Quantity Edit BOM balloon settings.

Figure 1 Balloon Ribbon Options

Creating BOM Balloons

Bill of Materials (BOM) tables can be used to detail the location and number of parts included in the assembly for manufacturers. BOM tables are created with repeat regions. A repeat region is a group of user-designated table cells that automatically populate, and expand or contract to accommodate the amount of data currently in the model. You can also detail parts and assemblies with BOM balloons, which are circular callouts in an assembly drawing that display components listed in the BOM table. BOM balloons are tied to the bill of materials table. If you select a table row, the corresponding balloon highlights, and vice versa. You can create balloons by clicking Create Balloons one of the following balloon types: and then selecting

Fo r

All By View You must select the view on which the balloons display. By Component You must select the desired assembly component on which the balloons display.
Module 23 | Page 8 2012 PTC

PT

Figure 2 Viewing Created Balloons

In

te rn
Figure 3 Editing BOM Balloon Properties

al

U se

nl y

 By Component and View You must select an assembly component in a particular view on which the balloons display. By Record You must select a specific row in a BOM table.

Manipulating Balloons
You can manipulate placed BOM balloons in the drawing. The following options are available: Merge balloons You can nest balloons by clicking Merge Balloons . Detach balloons You can separate balloons by clicking Detach Balloons . . This Split balloons You can split balloons by clicking Split Balloons option enables you to create a copy of a balloon that represents multiple quantities and assign a portion of that quantity to the new copy. Redistribute Quantity You can redistribute balloon quantities by clicking

Editing BOM Balloons Settings

Select which region to apply settings, if multiple repeat regions are selected. Control the type of balloon. Options include: Simple Circle. Quantity Split Circle. Custom This option requires a custom balloon symbol (*.sym). Set the BOM balloon parameter to use from the repeat region. The default parameter is rpt.index. Set the Reference Balloon Text By default, REF is used.

Fo r

2012 PTC

PT

In

te rn

You can edit the settings for BOM balloons within the Table Properties dialog box. When a drawing has placed BOM balloons, the BOM Balloons tab activates. You can edit the following properties of BOM balloons:

al

U se

. This option enables you to move a quantity Redistribute Quantity from one balloon to another.

nl y

Module 23 | Page 9

PROCEDURE - Creating BOM Balloons

Close Window Erase Not Displayed TABLES_4.DRW

Drawing_Details\Tables_BOM-Balloons Task 1: Create balloons for the assembly.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

4. Select a row from the table.

5. Notice that the corresponding balloon highlights.

Fo r

6. Select a balloon from the view. 7. Notice that the corresponding table row highlights.

Module 23 | Page 10

PT

In

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

3. From the Balloons group, click Create Balloons and select Create Balloons All.

nl y

2. In the ribbon, select the Table tab.

Task 2:

Edit the BOM balloon settings.

1. Query the BOM table and select it. 2. Right-click and select Properties. 3. In the Table Properties, notice that the BOM Balloons tab is now available. 4. Select the BOM Balloons tab. Select Quantity Split Circle from the Type drop-down list. Click OK.

1. Notice that the entire balloon quantity of 5 is on the lower bolt.

Fo r

2. Click Split Balloons Balloons group. 3. Select the balloon.

PT

In

4. Type 3 as the quantity of balloons to remove and press ENTER. 5. Select the edge of the bolt. 6. Select a location for the balloon.

2012 PTC

te rn
from the
Module 23 | Page 11

al

Task 3:

Manipulate the balloons.

U se

nl y

Task 4:

Update the assembly and observe the BOM table update.

1. Select the VALVE.ASM from the model tree. 2. Right-click and select Open. 3. Select the bolt pattern, right-click, and select Delete Pattern. 4. Click Close .

This completes the procedure.

Fo r

Module 23 | Page 12

PT

In

te rn

al
2012 PTC

7. Notice that the BOM table has also updated.

U se

6. Notice the view and the balloon quantity have updated.

nl y

5. Notice the message window and read its contents. Click Close.

Showing, Erasing, and Deleting Annotations

Dimensions and other detail items created in a 3-D model can be shown in drawings.
Show various types, based on tab Context sensitive, based on selection Erase/Unerase Delete

Showing Annotations

Dimensions Driving Dimension Annotation Elements All Driving Dimensions or Strong Driving Dimensions Driven Dimensions, Reference Dimensions, or Ordinate Dimensions Geometric Tolerances Notes Surface Finishes Symbols Datums Set Datum Planes, Set Datum Axes, or Set Datum Targets Axes The Show Model Annotations dialog box is context-sensitive. You can control which annotations display on the drawing and where they display based on how items are selected: Select a model from the model tree Indicates all the selected item types for the model on the drawing. The items may appear in multiple views.
2012 PTC Module 23 | Page 13

Fo r

PT

When creating a 2-D drawing, you can select which information from the 3-D model to show in the drawing:

In

When you create a 3-D model, you simultaneously create various items useful for annotating the model in a drawing, such as dimensions and axes.

te rn

Figure 1 Showing Axes and Dimensions

al

Figure 2 Show Model Annotations Dialog Box

U se

nl y

When dimensions are shown, the system automatically arranges and spaces them apart. You can then adjust them further manually or by using the Cleanup Dimensions dialog box.

If at any point during drawing creation you decide that you no longer wish to display certain shown items, you can erase or delete them. The differences between these two options are as follows: Erase Temporarily removes the items from the display. The items are shown grayed out in the drawing tree. Erased items can be returned to the display by right-clicking and selecting Unerase. Delete Removes the items from the drawing. Any item originating in the model is retained in the model, and can be shown again. Any item created in the drawing, such as dimensions or notes, are deleted and must be recreated. To erase/delete items, select them in the drawing, and then right-click and select Erase or Delete. You can select items to erase or delete using the following methods: Select an individual item. Press CTRL and select multiple items. Apply a selection filter to quickly select desired items. Select items from the drawing tree.

Fo r

Module 23 | Page 14

PT

In

te rn

Erasing and Deleting Annotations

al
2012 PTC

U se

All of the possible items that can be shown based on the selected tab and selected items display in the drawing in a preview color. You can then select or de-select items to show by using the dialog box or by selecting them from the drawing.

nl y

Select features from the model tree Indicates the selected item types for the selected features on the drawing. The items may appear in multiple views. Select a drawing view Indicates all the selected item types within a particular drawing view. Select features from a particular drawing view Indicates the selected item types for the selected features on the drawing, within the view in which the feature was selected. If an item is not appropriate to that view, it does not display. Select a component in a particular drawing view (Assembly Drawings only) Indicates the selected item types for the selected component on the drawing, within the view in which the component was selected. If an item is not appropriate to that view, it does not display.

PROCEDURE - Showing, Erasing, and Deleting Annotations

Close Window Erase Not Displayed SHOW_ERASE.DRW

Drawing_Details\Show_Erase_Delete Task 1:

Show dimensions using different methods.

1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. Select the Annotate tab from the ribbon. 3. Click Show Model Annotations from the Annotations group. Select the Dimensions Tab . 4. Select HOLE 2 from the model tree. Notice the dimensions appear in different views.

5. Select HOLE 2 from the top view. Notice the dimensions now only appear in this view. and then 6. Click Select All click Apply in the dialog box.

Fo r

7. Select the front view. To select a view, click within the view boundary, but not on the model geometry.

2012 PTC

PT

In

te rn
Module 23 | Page 15

al

U se

nl y

8. Click Select All . Click OK in the dialog box. Notice the dimensions from both views are now shown. Click the background to de-select all selected items.

9. Select the Sheet 2 tab to view sheet 2. 10. Select ANGLE_GUIDE.PRT from the model tree. 11. Click Show Model Annotations from the Annotations group. Click Select All . Clear the d22 and d35 options in the dialog box. Click OK in the dialog box. Click the background to de-select all selected items. Task 2:

Erase, unerase, and delete dimensions.

Fo r

1. Press CTRL and select the 65 and 32.5 dimensions in the front view. Right-click and select Erase. Click the background to de-select all selected items.

2. Specify Dimension as the selection filter. Drag to select all dimensions in the top view. Right-click and select Erase. Click the background to de-select all selected items.

Module 23 | Page 16

PT

In

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

3. Expand the Front view Annotations node in the drawing tree. Select d5, right-click, and select Unerase. Select d25, right-click, and select Delete. Select d2, right-click, and select Delete.

Task 3:

Show datum axes using different methods.

Fo r

2. Click Show Model Annotations . Select the Datums Tab .

3. Select the Front view. Select axes A_4, A_5, and A_6 in the dialog box. Click Apply in the dialog box. 4. Select the top view and click Select All Click OK. .

This completes the procedure.

2012 PTC

PT

1. Click the Sheet 3 tab to view sheet 3.

In

te rn
Module 23 | Page 17

5. Click Show Model Annotations . Notice the deleted dimensions may be shown again. Select d25 to show it again. Click OK in the dialog box. Click the background to de-select all selected items.

al

U se

4. Select ANGLE_GUIDE.PRT from the model tree.

nl y

Cleaning Up Dimensions
Creo Parametric can automatically arrange the display of selected dimensions based on controls that you set.
Functions include: Offset dimensions in evenly spaced increments. Create breaks in witness lines. Flip dimension arrows that do not fit between witness lines. Center dimensions between witness lines. Create snap lines.

Figure 2 The Clean Dimensions Dialog Box

In

Fo r

Cleaning Up Dimensions
You can use Creo Parametric's clean dimensions functionality to automatically perform the following tasks: Clean dimensions by view, or by selecting individual dimensions. You cannot clean angle or diameter dimensions. Offset dimensions from edges or view boundaries. Space dimensions in even increments. Create breaks in witness lines where they intersect other witness lines or draft entities. Automatically flip arrows on dimensions when they do not fit between witness lines. Center dimensions between witness lines. Figure 1 displays dimensions before the cleanup process has been performed, while Figure 2 displays the cleanup settings applied. Figure 3 displays the dimensions after the cleanup process has been performed.
Module 23 | Page 18 2012 PTC

PT

te rn
Figure 3 Dimensions After Cleanup

al

U se

Figure 1 Dimensions Before Cleanup

nl y

Creating Snap Lines

When cleaning dimensions, you have the option of creating snap lines with the offset dimensions. Objects snap to these lines, which are created at the specified offset value. Figure 3 displays snap lines that were created during the dimension cleanup process. Even after the cleanup process has been performed, you can manipulate dimensions and snap them to the displayed snap lines. There are two important points to understand about snap lines: Snap lines do not display in a printed drawing. You can delete snap lines after use.

Fo r

2012 PTC

PT

In

te rn
Module 23 | Page 19

al

U se

nl y

PROCEDURE - Cleaning Up Dimensions

Close Window Erase Not Displayed DIM_CLEAN-UP.DRW

Drawing_Details\Dimensions_Cleanup Task 1: Clean up dimensions on sheet 1.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

4. Accept all default options. 5. Click Apply > Close. 6. Notice the snap lines that were created, and that the dimensions have snapped to these lines. Task 2: Clean up dimensions on sheet 2.

1. Select the Sheet 2 sheet tab to activate it.

4. In the Clean Dimensions dialog box, edit the Offset to 0.625. Edit the Increment to 0.5. Clear the Create Snap Lines check box. Click Apply > Close. 5. Notice that angle and diameter dimensions are not affected by the dimension cleanup process.

Fo r

This completes the procedure.

Module 23 | Page 20 2012 PTC

PT

3. Click Cleanup Dimensions from the Annotations group in the Annotate tab.

In

2. Select the top view, press CTRL, and select the front view.

te rn

al

U se

3. Select the front view, right-click, and select Cleanup Dimensions.

nl y

2. Select the Annotate tab from the drawing ribbon.

Manipulating Dimensions
When dimensions are placed on a drawing, you typically need to modify them, for reasons such as clarity or to adhere to your company's drawing standards.
You can manipulate dimensions in the following ways: Move (handles) Align Dimensions Flip Arrows Flip Text Move Item to View Edit Attachment

Figure 1 Moving Dimensions

te rn
Figure 2 - Moving Witness Line Endpoint

Fo r

You can manually manipulate a dimension or dimensions to display them in the desired location. The following operations can be manually performed on dimensions: Move dimensions Select a dimension and move it to a different location on the drawing view. When you cursor over various parts of the dimension, the cursor updates to display the type of movements you can make, as shown in Figure 1. The following move options are available: Move Dimension and Text Cursor over the dimension text and drag to move both the dimension and dimension text. You can snap dimension text to be centered about its arrows. Move Dimension Cursor over the dimension leader lines and drag to move the dimension. Move Text Press SHIFT and cursor over the dimension text to move only the dimension text. Again, the system snaps dimension text to be centered about its arrows. Move Witness Line Cursor over the witness line endpoints, and a handle dynamically displays, as shown in Figure 2. Drag the handle to move the witness line.
2012 PTC Module 23 | Page 21

PT

Manipulating Dimensions

In

al
Figure 3 Flipping Arrows

U se

nl y

te rn

al

Align Dimensions When dragging dimensions, they automatically snap to align with other dimensions in the view. You can also select multiple dimensions including linear, radial, and angular, and align them to one another. The selected dimensions align to the first dimension selected. Once the dimensions are selected, you can either right-click and select from the Align Dimensions, or you can click Align Dimensions Annotations group in the Annotate tab. Flip Arrows You can flip arrows by right-clicking and selecting Flip Arrows, or you can right-click while dragging a dimension to toggle through the different arrow flipping options. There are four flip options available for radius dimensions, three flip options for diameter dimensions, and two flip options for linear dimensions. In Figure 3, you can view each of the available arrow flipping options for radius dimensions. Flip Text For radial dimensions, you can flip the side of the arrow about which the text displays by selecting the dimension, right-clicking, and selecting Flip Text. Move Item to View Move dimensions from one drawing view to another. You can select the item to move, then either right-click and select Move Item from the Edit group in the Annotate tab. to View, or click Move to View Edit Attachment Specify a new attachment position for certain dimensions, such as a radius dimension. The available new attachment positions highlight in all drawing views and enable you to select a new surface or edge. To edit the attachment, select the dimension, then

U se

right-click and select Edit Attachment, or click Attachment Edit group in the Annotate tab.

Fo r

Module 23 | Page 22

PT

In

nl y
from the

2012 PTC

PROCEDURE - Manipulating Dimensions

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Drawing_Details\Dimensions_Manipulate MANIPULATE_DIMS.DRW Task 1: Manipulate dimensions in a drawing.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

Fo r

4. With the 51 dimension still selected, right-click and select Flip Arrows, as shown. 5. Right-click and select Flip Arrows to flip them back.

2012 PTC

PT

3. In the top view, select the 51 dimension. Cursor over the dimension text and drag to move both the dimension and text. Press SHIFT, cursor over the dimension text, and drag the dimension downward until it snaps to the center. Cursor over the dimension leader lines and drag to move the entire dimension left or right. Cursor over the lower-left witness line endpoint and drag the handle to the right to move the witness line until it no longer touches the model.

In

te rn
Module 23 | Page 23

al

U se

nl y

2. Select the Annotate tab from the drawing ribbon.

6. With the 51 dimension still selected, press CTRL and select the 33 dimension. 7. Right-click and select Align Dimensions. 8. Cursor over the witness lines and move the dimensions until they are properly centered between the other two dimensions.

9. In the top view, select the 12.65 diameter dimension. 10. Cursor over the dimension text and drag to move both the dimension and text. 11. Press SHIFT, cursor over the dimension text, and drag the dimension to the left of its leader. 12. Right-click and select Flip Arrows.

13. Right-click and select Flip Text.

Fo r

17. In the front view, select the R22 dimension. 18. Right-click and select Flip Arrows.

19. Right-click and select Flip Arrows two more times. 20. Move the dimension and text upward until it snaps to the snap line. This completes the procedure.

Module 23 | Page 24

PT

16. Select the top view.

15. Click Move to View Edit group.

In

14. In the front view, select the 12.65 diameter dimension. from the

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

Creating Driven Dimensions

You can create additional dimensions within a drawing, as needed, if a dimension is not available to be shown or as company standards dictate.
Driven dimension types include: Linear Angular Radial/Diameter Point-Point Add additional text: Prefix Suffix

te rn Fo r
Creating Driven Dimensions
2012 PTC

A driven dimension is created by the user. This type of dimension reports a value based upon the references selected when the dimension is created. The dimension value is driven by the geometry selected, and therefore it is not possible to modify the value of a driven dimension. A driven dimension does not pass back to the model; it appears only within the drawing. A created dimension displays in the drawing tree differently than that of a shown dimension. In Figure 1, the dimensions in the front view are created dimensions, while the dimensions in the top view are shown dimensions. You can create a Standard driven dimension by selecting Dimension - New from the Dimension types drop-down menu in the Annotate References tab, or by right-clicking and selecting Dimension - New References. The system creates a dimension based upon one or two selected references, similar to how you create dimensions in Sketcher. The dimension's witness lines automatically clip to their selected references.

PT

Figure 2 Viewing Created Dimension Types

In

al
Figure 1 Created Dimensions versus Shown Dimensions
Module 23 | Page 25

U se

nl y

Driven Dimension Types

Standard driven dimension types include linear, angular, radial, diameter, or point-point dimensions. When creating a driven dimension, you can select an edge, edge and point, two points, or a vertex. You can further filter which entities the dimension attaches to using the following attach type menu commands in the menu manager: On Entity Attaches the dimension to the entity at the pick point, according to the rules of creating regular dimensions. On Surface Attaches the dimension to the location selected on a surface. Midpoint Attaches the dimension to the midpoint of the selected entity. Center Attaches the dimension to the center of a circular edge. Circular edges include circular geometry, such as holes, rounds, curves, and surfaces, and circular draft entities. Intersect Attaches the dimension to the closest intersection point of two selected entities. Make Line References the current X and Y-axes in the orientation of the model view. Depending upon the selected references, you may have to further specify the type of dimension to be created. For example, you may be asked to specify whether the dimension you create is to be Horizontal, Vertical, Slanted, Parallel, or Normal to the selected references. If your selected references are arcs or circles, you must specify whether the dimension is to be created between the arc Centers, Tangent, or Concentric.

Fo r

Module 23 | Page 26

PT

You can add additional text to a dimension. Text can be added as a prefix or a suffix to the dimension value. For example, if a radius dimension is typical of all radii on the part, you can add the suffix TYP to the dimension.

In

Adding Prefix and Suffix Text

te rn

al

U se

nl y

2012 PTC

PROCEDURE - Creating Driven Dimensions

Close Window Erase Not Displayed DRIVEN_DIMS.DRW

Drawing_Details\Dimensions_Driven Task 1:

Create a driven dimension in a drawing.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

3. Navigate to the top view in sheet 1. 4. Notice the 14 dimension that locates the holes from the center of the model. Manufacturing requires a dimension from the model edge. 5. Select the unwanted 14 dimension, right-click, and select Properties.

6. In the Dimension Properties dialog box, select the Display tab. In the Suffix field, type REF. Click OK.

You could also erase or delete the dimension rather than specifying it as a reference dimension.

Fo r

7. Select Dimension - New References from the Dimension types drop-down menu in the Annotations group.

8. Select the right edge of the block and select the hole edge.

2012 PTC

PT

In

te rn
Module 23 | Page 27

al

U se

nl y

2. Select the Annotate tab from the drawing ribbon.

9. Middle-click to place the 19 dimension. 10. Click Center from the menu manager. 11. Click Return from the menu manager.

Fo r

Module 23 | Page 28

PT

In

This completes the procedure.

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

12. In the drawing tree, expand the Annotations node of the top drawing view. Select dimension ad55, if necessary. Notice that both the dimension format and symbol are different.

nl y

Inserting Notes
You can insert notes on a drawing with or without leaders that can contain dimensions.
Note types include: No Leader With Leader ISO Leader On Item Offset Specify Leader Attach Type: On Entity On Surface Free Point Midpoint Intersect

Figure 1 Note with No Leader

te rn In

Inserting Notes

Fo r

No Leader Creates a free note. With Leader Creates a note with a leader. ISO Leader Creates a note with an ISO leader. On Item Creates a note directly attached to an edge, surface, or datum point. Offset Creates a note relative to a detail entity. If the detail entity is moved, the note moves with it. Notes can be created horizontally, vertically, or at an angle, and you can specify the justification as Left, Center, or Right. When you specify that the note has a leader, the following leader attach types are available: On Entity Attaches the leader to selected geometry in a drawing view. On Surface Attaches the leader to a selected location on the surface of a drawing view. Free Point Attaches the leader to a location on the screen that you select. Midpoint Attaches the leader to the midpoint of a specified entity.
2012 PTC Module 23 | Page 29

PT

The following types of notes can be inserted:

You can insert notes on a drawing to convey additional information. For example, you can insert a note stating that all sharp edges must be broken, as shown in Figure 1.

al
Figure 2 Note with a Leader

U se

nl y

 Intersect Attaches the leader to the intersection of two entities. You can also specify the appearance of the attach point of the leader. Options include arrow head, dot, filled dot, no arrow, slash, integral, box, filled box, double arrow, target, half arrow, and triangle. In Figure 2, the note was created with an arrow head leader.

Placing Notes
When you proceed to place a note in the drawing, the Select Point dialog box displays. This dialog box enables you to specify the reference type to which you snap the note. Options include:

Object or Entity or entity. Vertex

Enables you to select a point on a drawing object

Enables you to select the vertex on a drawing object or entity.

Fo r

Module 23 | Page 30

PT

In

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

Relative Coordinates locate the note.

Enables you to specify relative coordinates to

Absolute Coordinates to locate the note.

Enables you to specify absolute coordinates

nl y

Free Point

Enables you to select a free point on the drawing.

PROCEDURE - Inserting Notes

Close Window Erase Not Displayed NOTES.DRW

Drawing_Details\Notes_Inserting Task 1: Insert notes in a drawing.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

3. Click Note from the Annotations group. 4. In the menu manager, click With Leader > Make Note > On Surface > Arrow Head. 5. Select the cylindrical cut on the 3-D view. 6. Click Done from the menu manager.

7. Click on the drawing to specify the location for the note.

Fo r

8. In the input window, type CYLINDER SURFACE. 9. Press ENTER twice to complete the note.

2012 PTC

PT

In

te rn
Module 23 | Page 31

al

U se

nl y

2. In the ribbon, select the Annotate tab.

10. Select the Sheet 2 sheet tab to activate it. 11. In the menu manager, click No Leader > Make Note. 12. Click below the 3-D view to specify the note location. 13. In the input window, type BREAK ALL SHARP EDGES.

15. Click Done/Return from the menu manager.

Fo r

Module 23 | Page 32

PT

In

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

This completes the procedure.

nl y

14. Press ENTER twice to complete the note.

Analyzing Drawing Associativity

Due to Creo Parametric's bi-directional associativity, a change made to a model automatically updates in a drawing and vice versa.
Examples of drawing associativity include: BOM tables update based on added/removed assembly components. Drawing views and shown dimensions update based on model modifications. A modified shown drawing dimension automatically updates in the model.

Fo r

Analyzing Drawing Associativity

Due to Creo Parametric's bi-directional associativity, a change made to a model automatically updates in a drawing and vice versa. Examples of drawing associativity include the following: If components are added or removed from an assembly, the BOM table in the assembly drawing automatically updates to reflect the new quantities. If a dimension is modified in a model, the matching shown drawing dimension is automatically updated along with the drawing view geometry. If a shown drawing dimension is modified, the dimension in the model, as well as its geometry, updates automatically. Depending on your Creo Parametric settings, it may be necessary to click

from the Update group of the Review tab to refresh the Update Sheets display of all views in the active drawing sheet to view a change made at the
2012 PTC Module 23 | Page 33

PT

Figure 2 Model and Drawing Associativity

In

te rn

al

U se
Figure 1 BOM and Drawing View Associativity

nl y

model level. You can press CTRL and select multiple tabs across the bottom of the graphics window. If you then click Update Sheets in each of the selected drawing sheets refresh. , all of the views

Fo r

Module 23 | Page 34

PT

In

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

PROCEDURE - Analyzing Drawing Associativity

Close Window Erase Not Displayed ASSOCIATIVITY.DRW

Drawing\Associativity Task 1:

Update the pattern member quantity in VALVE.ASM to view the drawing associativity.

1. Disable all Datum Display types. 3. In the model tree, expand Pattern 1 of BOLT.PRT and notice that there are 4 pattern members. 4. In the model tree, right-click VALVE.ASM and select Open. 5. Click Settings and select Tree Filters.

6. In the Model Tree Items dialog box, select the Features check box and click OK. 7. In the model tree, expand COVER.PRT. Right-click Pattern (Hole) and select Edit. Zoom in and edit the number of pattern members from 4 to 3.

Fo r

9. Select the Review tab from the drawing ribbon.

10. Press CTRL and select Sheet 1, Sheet 2, and Sheet 3 from the sheet tabs area. 11. Click Update Sheets the Update group. from

12. Notice that the BOM quantity of BOLT.PRT has updated and that the view has changed as well.

2012 PTC

PT

and select 8. Click Windows ASSOCIATIVITY.DRW to return to the drawing.

Click Regenerate

In

te rn
.
Module 23 | Page 35

al

U se

nl y

2. Notice in the BOM table that the BOLT.PRT quantity is 6.

Task 2:

Edit the dimension length to view the associativity in the drawing geometry and model.

1. Select the Sheet 3 sheet tab to activate it. 2. In the front view, select the 76 dimension. 3. Double-click the 76 dimension and edit it to 102. Click OK. 4. Click Regenerate Active Model from the Update group. 5. Notice that the drawing view geometry has updated. 6. In the model tree, right-click ARM.PRT and select Open. 7. Right-click Protrusion id 21 and select Edit. 8. Edit the length from 102 to 84. 9. Click in the background twice to de-select all geometry.

Fo r

This completes the procedure.

Module 23 | Page 36

PT

11. Notice that the dimension and drawing view geometry have updated to the new length value.

10. Click Windows and select ASSOCIATIVITY.DRW to return to the drawing.

In

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

Publishing Drawings
You can create a hard copy deliverable of your drawing.
Send the drawing to a printer or plotter. Export the drawing to a different electronic format. You can print preview the drawing.

Figure 1 Previewing the Drawing

Fo r

To create a hard copy deliverable of your drawing, you can click File > Print > Print or File > Print > Quick Print. The Print option launches the Printer Configuration dialog box, enabling you to send the drawing to a printer or plotter. The Quick Print option opens the Microsoft Print Manager, enabling you to send the drawing to a networked Windows printer. You can also click File > Print > Print Settings / Preview to preview and modify settings before printing. When you enter Print Preview mode, the Navigator pane automatically closes, and when you close Print Preview, the Navigator pane automatically restores. Print Preview creates an accurate preview of the selected output type. It takes into account pen table mapping, line styles, line priorities, printer margins, and other settings. To preview the output, you can click Preview from the Print Preview tab in the ribbon. You can also modify the default settings for the specified publish option by clicking Settings
2012 PTC

PT

Printing and Previewing Drawings

Figure 2 Export Setup Tab in the Ribbon

In

in the Print Preview tab of the ribbon. Once you are

Module 23 | Page 37

te rn

al

U se

nl y

satisfied with the display of the drawing in Print Preview, you can click Print directly from the Print Preview tab.

Exporting Drawings
You can also export the drawing to one of many different formats by clicking File > Save As > Export. The following electronic file formats are available: DXF IGES Stheno PDF STEP CGM Medusa DWG TIFF

You can also click File > Save As > Quick Export (*.XXX) to quickly export a copy of the drawing in the same format used in the previous export. The XXX denotes the file format to be created.

Fo r

Module 23 | Page 38

PT

In

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

Settings

from the Configure group in the Export Setup tab of the ribbon.

Of course, any of these exported file formats can also be sent to a printer to generate a hard copy. You can also modify the export settings by clicking

nl y

PROCEDURE - Publishing Drawings

Close Window Drawing\Publish Task 1: Erase Not Displayed PUBLISH.DRW

Experiment with publishing drawings.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

3. Notice that the Navigator pane automatically collapsed. 4. Click Preview group. from the Finish from .

5. Click Close Preview the Finish group.

6. Click Close Print Preview

8. Select the TIFF export option. 9. Click Export .

11. Click Yes in the Confirmation dialog box. 12. Select the PDF export option. 13. Click Settings

PT

Fo r

14. In the PDF Export Settings dialog box, select Current for the Sheets to be exported. Clear the Open file in Acrobat Reader check box. Click OK. 15. Click Export from the Finish group. 16. In the Save a Copy dialog box, accept the defaults and click OK. 17. Click Close Export Setup .

18. Click File > Save As > Quick Export (*.PDF). 19. Click OK in the dialog box. This completes the procedure.

2012 PTC

In

10. In the Save a Copy dialog box, accept the defaults and click OK.

te rn
.

7. Click File > Save As > Export.

al
Module 23 | Page 39

U se

nl y

2. Click File > Print > Print Settings / Preview.

Fo r

Module 23 | Page 40

PT

In

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

Module

24
U se O te rn al
Module 24 | Page 1

Using Layers
Module Overview

Layers organize model items, such as features, datum planes, assembly parts, and even other layers, enabling you to perform operations on the items collectively. Layers enable you to simplify geometry selection by temporarily hiding or displaying specific model features or assembly components in the graphics window. You can also use layers to perform actions, such as simultaneously suppressing all the items in a layer.

Objectives

Fo r

2012 PTC

PT

After completing this module, you will be able to: Understand layers. Create and manage layers. Create layer states. Utilize layers in part models and assembly models.

In

nl y

Understanding Layers
A layer is a container object that enables you to organize features, components, and even other layers.
Managed in layer tree Uses include: Collectively perform operations Hide/Unhide Select Model management Layer types include: Default Automatic User-created

Fo r

Understanding Layers
A layer is a container object that enables you to organize features, assembly parts, and even other layers. You can create as many layers as you need and associate items with more than one layer.

Layer Uses
A layer enables you to collectively perform operations on items in a layer. Layers are most often used from a model management standpoint to control the amount of information displayed in the graphics window. This helps you to more easily perform tasks. The two most common operations performed on items on a layer include: Hiding and Unhiding Layers You can hide and unhide layers in parts and assemblies. This hides or unhides the items on the layer. In Figure 1,
Module 24 | Page 2 2012 PTC

PT

Figure 1 Hiding Items using Layers

In

te rn

al

Figure 2 Viewing the Layer Tree

U se

nl y

The Layer Tree

again toggles off the layer tree. You can also click Show from the top of the model tree and select Layer Tree. Figure 2 displays the layer tree.

There are three types of layers that you can create in a model: Default Layers can be included in part and assembly templates. If your company uses part and assembly templates containing default layers, Creo Parametric automatically associates different features of a model to specific default layers. When using default layers, all parts have the same initial set of default layers. This enables you to use cascading layer control at the assembly level since each models layers are identically named. Automatic When you hide items in the model tree, those hidden items are automatically added to the Hidden Items Layer. User-Created You can create your own layers in a model and add items to them manually.

Fo r

2012 PTC

PT

In

Layer Types

te rn

al

You use the layer tree to add items to layers and perform operations on layers. You can access the layer tree by selecting the View tab and clicking Layers from the Visibility group. This toggles on the layer tree. Clicking the icon

U se

the datum axes layer has been hidden, preventing you from viewing any datum axes on the model. Hiding items on a layer seems similar to suppressing those same items. However, there are significant differences: When you suppress an item, it is removed from the regeneration cycle of the model, whereas hiding an item simply removes it from the graphics window. A hidden item is included in Creo Parametric calculations, such as mass properties analyses. A suppressed item is not included in calculations. Selecting Items on the Layer Layers enable you to easily select multiple items, rather than selecting them individually. Mass selection is a beneficial, timesaving approach to follow in certain circumstances, such as needing to select 82 out of 100 part axes. Once the items in a layer are selected, you can perform operations on them. Typical operations include deleting those items or suppressing/resuming them. However, you could also edit their display or add them to a simplified representation.

nl y

Module 24 | Page 3

Creating and Managing Layers

You can create layers manually by naming the layer and selecting geometry items or components to add from the model tree or the graphics window.
Layer Properties: Name Contents Rules Different icons for layers with or without rules Set the Active Layer Status Save Reset Warning

Figure 1 Layer Properties Dialog Box

Figure 2 Layer with No Rule

In

Fo r

You can create layers manually by naming the layer and selecting geometry items or components to add from the model tree or the graphics window. This type of layer is useful for specific tasks. As a best practice, it is recommended that you name the layer to enable other designers to recognize the task. When you create a layer, the Layer Properties dialog box displays, as shown in Figure 1. The dialog box displays the following information: Name This is the name of the layer. Contents The Contents tab displays which items are included or excluded from the layer. Items that are included on the layer are displayed with a green plus (+) symbol in the Status column, while items that are excluded from the layer are displayed with a red minus () symbol in the Status column. When selected, items are included on the layer if the Include button is turned on, while items are excluded from the layer if the Exclude button is turned on. Rules The Rules tab displays any applicable rules that have been defined for the layer. Rules enable you to create layers based upon defined criteria. To create a layer based on a rule, simply create a layer, name it, and define the rule. You can either define the rule within the Layer Properties dialog box, or you can save a rule from the Search Tool. In
Module 24 | Page 4 2012 PTC

PT

Creating and Managing Layers

te rn
Figure 3 Layer Created with Rule

al

U se

nl y

addition to its usefulness in specific tasks, this type of layer is excellent when creating templates. Layers that are created with rules display with a different icon than those layers that were created without rules. In Figure 2, the layer does not contain rules, while the layer in Figure 3 was created with a rule. The Layer Properties dialog box also displays when you view the layer properties of any existing layer by selecting the layer, right-clicking, and selecting Layer Properties. You may also decide to set a layer as the active layer. When a layer is set as the active layer, all subsequently created features are automatically placed on the active layer. Note that a layer containing rules cannot be set as the active layer.

Understanding Layer Status

te rn

If you save a model and forget to save the layer status, the message log alerts you with a warning message, as shown here: .

Fo r

2012 PTC

PT

You can also reset the layer status to the last saved status by selecting the from the Status types drop-down View tab and selecting Reset Status menu in the Visibility group, or by right-clicking in the layer tree and selecting Reset Status.

In

al

by selecting the View tab and selecting Save Status from the Status types drop-down menu in the Visibility group. You can also right-click in the layer tree and select Save Status.

U se

Whenever you hide or unhide a layer, you are modifying the layer status for that model. This new layer status is not automatically saved, even when the model is saved. Thus, it is necessary to save the layer status if you wish to retain it for the next time the model is opened. You can save the layer status

nl y

Module 24 | Page 5

Utilizing Layers in Part Models

When you hide a layer, only the non-solid geometry from the feature items added to the layer are hidden in the graphics window.
Add almost any feature to a layer. Only non-solid geometry is hidden. Datum features Surfaces

Fo r

Utilizing Layers in Part Models

You can add almost any feature item in a part to a layer. However, when you hide the layer, only the non-solid geometry from the feature items added to the layer, such as datum features and surfaces, are hidden. For example, if you add a hole feature to a layer and hide the layer, as shown in Figure 2, the hole geometry still displays in the graphics window, but the hole axes associated with the hole feature are hidden.

Module 24 | Page 6

PT

Figure 2 Hiding a Layer with Holes

In

te rn

Figure 1 Hiding a Layer with Default Datums

al

U se
2012 PTC

nl y

PROCEDURE - Utilizing Layers in Part Models

Close Window View\Layers_Part Task 1: Erase Not Displayed LAYER.PRT

Use layers within a part model. .

1. Enable only the following Datum Display types: 2. In the ribbon, select the View tab. 3. Enable Plane Tag Display 4. Select the Model tab. 5. In the model tree, expand Extrude 4. Press CTRL, select the five internal datum features, right-click, and select Hide. and Axis Tag Display

6. At the top of the model tree, click Show Tree. and select Layer

Fo r

8. Select the 01__PRT_DEF_ DTM_PLN layer, right-click, and select Hide. .

9. Click Repaint

10. Right-click in the layer tree and select New Layer. Type OTHER_DATUMS as the Name. Select DTM1 and A_1 as items to add and click OK. Right-click the new layer and select Hide. Click Repaint .

2012 PTC

PT

7. Expand the Hidden Items layer. Notice that the five internal datum features you hid are now on this layer.

In

te rn

al
Module 24 | Page 7

U se

nl y
.

11. Right-click in the layer tree and select New Layer. Type TOP_HOLES as the Name. Select the four holes on top of the model and click OK. Right-click the new layer and select Hide. Click Repaint .

14. Click OK in the Suppress dialog box. 15. Click the Operations group drop-down menu and select Resume > Resume All. 16. Click Save 17. Notice the warning in the Message Log.

and click OK.

18. Select the View tab from the ribbon.

In

te rn
from the Status and Axis Tag Display .

20. Click Save

Fo r

21. Notice that the warning did not display in the Message Log this time. 22. Disable Plane Tag Display

This completes the procedure.

Module 24 | Page 8

PT

19. From the Visibility group, select Save Status types drop-down menu. and click OK.

al
2012 PTC

U se

13. Right-click in the graphics window and select Suppress.

12. In the layer tree, right-click the TOP_HOLES layer and select Select Items.

nl y

Creating Layer States

Layer states can be used to toggle between different layer displays.
Layer States Example: Create a Layer State in the view manager Hide/Unhide Layers Save updated Layer State

Creating Layer States

Fo r

You create Layer States in the view manager to record the hide/unhide status for all layers in a model. You can create an initial layer state upon opening a model, and then create different states to quickly toggle between the layer displays. Remember, the action of hiding a feature or component actually places the item on the Hidden Items layer. Therefore, you can use layer states with hidden items without accessing the layer tree. Layer states apply to any item that may be placed on a layer, such as: Features Components Drawing Views and Detail Items

2012 PTC

PT

Figure 2 Layer_State001

In

te rn
Figure 3 Layer_State003

al

U se
Figure 1 View Manager
Module 24 | Page 9

nl y

PROCEDURE - Creating Layer States

Close Window View\Layer-States Task 1: Erase Not Displayed LAYER_STATES.ASM

Create layer states in an assembly.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

3. Select the Layers tab. 4. Click New and press ENTER to create Layer_State001.

7. Right-click and select Hide.

9. Click OK.

Fo r

10. Double-click Layer_State001 to enable it. Create layer states in a part.

Task 2:

1. Select CONNECTING_ROD. PRT from the model tree. 2. Right-click and select Open. 3. Enable Plane Display 4. Click View Manager 5. Select the Layers tab. 6. Click New and press ENTER to create Layer_State001.
Module 24 | Page 10 2012 PTC

PT

8. In the view manager, right-click Layer_State002 and select Save.

In

6. Press CTRL and select PISTON.PRT and PISTON_PIN.PRT from the model tree.

te rn
. from the In Graphics toolbar.

5. Click New from the View Manager, and press ENTER to create Layer_State002.

al

U se

nl y

2. Click View Manager the In Graphics toolbar.

from

7. Click New from the view manager and press ENTER to create Layer_State002. 8. Select DTM3 from the model tree. 9. Right-click and select Hide. 10. Right-click Layer_State002 and select Save. 11. Click OK. 12. Click New from the view manager and press ENTER to create Layer_State003. 13. In the ribbon, select the View tab. 14. Click Layers Visibility group. from the

17. Right-click Layer_State003 and select Save. 18. Click OK.

19. Click Repaint from the In Graphics toolbar.

21. Double-click Layer_State001 to enable it.

Fo r

This completes the procedure.

2012 PTC

PT

20. Double-click Layer_State002 to enable it.

In

te rn
Module 24 | Page 11

16. Right-click and select Hide.

al

15. Select the 01__PRT_DEF_ DTM_PLN layer.

U se

nl y

Utilizing Layers in Assembly Models

Unlike parts, you can add components to layers in an assembly and hide the geometry of those components.
Add almost any feature to a layer. Only non-solid geometry is hidden. Add assembly components. Solid geometry is hidden. Cascading layer control available for layers of same name. Placing external items options.

Figure 1 Cascading Layer Control

Figure 2 Hiding a Layer with Assembly Components

Fo r

Unlike parts, you can add components to layers in an assembly. If you add components to a layer and then hide the layer, the component geometry hides. In Figure 2, the nut and bolt components were added to the HARDWARE layer and hidden. Notice that the components are removed from the display in the graphics window.

Cascading Layer Control in Assemblies

Layers in assemblies provide cascading control. You can control a part level layer from an assembly if the part and assembly both contain a layer of the same name. When this circumstance occurs, you can edit the layer properties and layer display of each component individually, as shown in Figure 1. The layer tree also displays a different layer icon for the common layer.

Module 24 | Page 12

PT

Similar to parts, you can hide non-solid geometry of assembly features including assembly datum features and surfaces. For example, if you create an assembly level hole, add it to a layer, and then hide the layer, the hole geometry still displays, while the hole axis is hidden.

In

Utilizing Layers in Assembly Models

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

PROCEDURE - Utilizing Layers in Assembly Models

Close Window Erase Not Displayed LAYER.ASM

View\Layers_Utilize-Assembly Task 1: Use layers in assemblies.

1. Enable only the following Datum Display types: 2. In the ribbon, select the View tab. 3. Enable Plane Tag Display 4. Select the Model tab. 5. Click Show from the model tree and select Layer Tree. 6. Expand the Hidden Items layer. Notice that there are three components in this layer that contain hidden items. and Axis Tag Display

7. Expand each of these component layers.

Fo r

8. Expand the 01___PRT_DEF_ DTM_PLN layer. Press CTRL and select the in BOLT.PRT and in NUT.PRT layers, right-click, and select Hide.

9. Click Repaint

PT

10. In the layer tree, select the 01__ASM_DEF_DTM_PLN layer, right-click, and select Hide. 11. Click Repaint .

2012 PTC

In

te rn

al
Module 24 | Page 13

U se

nl y
.

12. Right-click in the layer tree and select New Layer. Type HARDWARE as the Name. Select the NUT.PRT and BOLT.PRT components and click OK. Right-click the new layer and select Hide.

14. Click Repaint

18. Notice the warning in the Message Log.

Fo r

19. Select the View tab from the ribbon. 20. Select Save Status the Visibility group. from the Status types drop-down menu in

21. Click Save

22. Notice that the warning does not display in the Message Log this time. 23. Disable Plane Tag Display This completes the procedure. and Axis Tag Display .

Module 24 | Page 14

PT

17. Click Save from the Quick Access toolbar and click OK.

from the Quick Access toolbar and click OK.

In

16. Click the Model Display group drop-down menu and select Component Display Style > Transparent.

te rn

15. In the layer tree, right-click the HARDWARE layer and select Select Items.

al
2012 PTC

U se

13. Right-click the HARDWARE layer and select Unhide.

nl y

Click Repaint

Module

25
U se O te rn al
Module 25 | Page 1

Investigating Parent/Child Relationships

Module Overview

In a model, the order in which features are created and the references that they are provided create hierarchical relationships. These are called parent/child relationships and they determine feature interaction. In this module, you learn about parent/child relationships and how to view information about your models.

Objectives

Fo r

2012 PTC

PT

After completing this module, you will be able to: Understand parent/child relationships. View part and assembly parent/child information. View model, feature, and component information.

In

nl y

Understanding Parent/Child Relationships

The parent/child relationship is one of the most powerful aspects of Creo Parametric and parametric modeling in general.
Defining parent/child relationships. Effects of parent/child relationships when editing. How parent/child relationships are created.

Figure 1 Viewing KEY_HANDLE. PRT

The parent/child relationship is one of the most powerful aspects of Creo Parametric and parametric modeling in general. This relationship serves an important role in propagating changes across the model to maintain the design intent. After a parent feature in a part is modified, all children are dynamically updated to reflect the changes in the parent feature. If you suppress or delete a parent feature, Creo Parametric prompts you for an action pertaining to the related children. You can also minimize the cases of unnecessary or unintended parent/child relationships. It is therefore essential to reference the desired geometry when creating feature dimensions so Creo Parametric can correctly propagate design changes throughout the model. When working with parent/child relationships, it can be helpful to remember that parent features can exist without child features. However, child features cannot exist without their parents.

Fo r

Effects of Parent/Child Relationships When Editing

Consider the impact of parent/child relationships on each of the following editing functions:
Module 25 | Page 2 2012 PTC

PT

You can use various types of Creo Parametric features as building blocks in the progressive creation of solid parts. Certain features, by necessity, precede other more dependent features in the design process. Those dependent features rely on the previously defined features for dimensional and geometric references. This is known as a parent/child relationship.

In

Defining Parent/Child Relationships

te rn

al
Figure 2 Parent/Child Relationship Flowchart

U se

nl y

 Edit Children of the feature or component update as edits are regenerated. Edit Definition Enables you to modify the parent of the feature or component. Suppress/Resume Enables you to remove a feature or component, and its children, from the graphics window and regeneration cycle. Delete Deletes all children of the selected feature or component by default. You can also suspend the children, and then redefine each in turn. Hide/Unhide Does not affect parent/child relationships.

How Parent/Child Relationships are Created

Sketch Plane and Orientation Reference Plane Are parents to the sketch feature. Sketcher References Additional sketcher references, including selected references, dimension references, and constraint references, are parents to the sketch feature. Constraints and dimensions can create relationships between the constrained entity and its reference. Hence, the constrained entity becomes a child of the referenced feature. Consider the impact of parent/child relationships on each of the following feature and tools functions: Selected References The edges or surfaces selected for rounds and chamfers become parents to the rounds and chamfers. A depth reference selected for a sketch-based feature becomes a parent to the sketch-based feature. Similarly, an axis of revolution specified for a Revolve feature becomes a parent to the revolve feature. Selected Sketch An external sketch selected for a sketch-based feature, such as an Extrude feature, becomes a parent to the Extrude feature. A sketch-based feature that contains an internal sketch inherits all sketch references as its own, including sketch plane, reference plane, references, constraints, and dimensions. A sketch-based feature that contains embedded datum features inherits all datum references as its own. Consider the impact of parent/child relationships on each of the following assembly functions: Templates Similar to part templates, assembly templates do not create parent/child relationships between the template and the assembly file. Constraint References Existing models that are referenced when assembling components with constraints or connections become parents to the components being assembled. Assembly models can also be children if they are assembled to other assembly models. Consider the impact of parent/child relationships on each of the following drawing functions: Templates Are similar to part and assembly templates because they do not create a parent/child relationship between the template and the drawing file. Views Are children to either the saved views in the part or to the reference orientations selected. Also, drawing views are children to other views. For
2012 PTC Module 25 | Page 3

Fo r

PT

In

te rn

al

U se

nl y

Consider the impact of parent/child relationships on each of the following sketching functions:

example, a projection view is a child to the general view from which it was projected. Finally, a drawing view is a child to the source model. Details Are generally children to their respective models. Examples of drawing details include dimensions, parametric notes, and BOM tables.

Fo r

Module 25 | Page 4

PT

In

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

Viewing Part Parent/Child Information

You can use the Reference Viewer to view parent/child relationships between features in a part model.
Current Object Parents Children Highlight entities in model: Features References

Viewing Part Parent/Child Information

from the desired feature and then either clicking Reference Viewer the Investigate group in the Tools tab or right-clicking and selecting Info > Reference Viewer. The Reference Viewer displays a graph of parent/child relationships for a given feature. This graph is broken down into three columns. From left to right, these columns are:

Fo r

Parents Displays the Parents for the currently selected feature. Current Object Displays the currently selected feature for which you wish to view parent/child relationships. Children Displays the Children of the currently selected feature. The graph of parent/child relationships in the Reference Viewer is interactive with the model in the graphics window: You can cursor over the feature node to highlight it on the model. You can expand the feature nodes to view the list of references that creates the parent/child relationships. You can also select the reference to see it highlight in the model. You can also see which feature the reference is a parent to, as it highlights the Reference Type arrow to the proper child feature node in the graph. In Figure 2, datum axis A_7 creates a parent/child relationship between the Hole_2 and Hole_3 features.

2012 PTC

PT

In

You can view parent/child relationships of features in a part model by using the Reference viewer. You can launch the Reference Viewer by selecting

te rn

al

Figure 1 Full Path Between Features

Figure 2 Reference Viewer Graph

U se
Module 25 | Page 5

nl y

Obtaining Full Path Information Between Features

You can display the full parent/child relationship path between two features in tree representation by selecting the Reference Type arrow, then right-clicking and selecting Display Full Path. For example, the graph in Figure 1 displays the full chain of parent/child relationships between the Hole 2 and Hole 3 features. It shows that datum axis A_7 is a child to Hole 2, which is a child back to the part. It also shows that datum axis A_7 is a parent to Hole 3.

Switching the Current Object

You can switch which feature is the current object either by double-clicking the desired feature node in the graph, right-clicking it and selecting Set as current, or by clicking Actions > Set as current from the Reference Viewer dialog box menu. You can also revert back to the previously selected Current Object by clicking Use Previous at the top of the graph or clicking the down arrow next to it to view the history of Current Objects and selecting an earlier one.

Fo r

Module 25 | Page 6

PT

In

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

PROCEDURE - Viewing Part Parent/Child Information

Close Window Erase Not Displayed PART_PC.PRT

Info\Part_Parent-Child Task 1:

View Parent and Child information for features using the Reference Viewer.

1. Disable all Datum Display types. 3. In the ribbon, select the Tools tab. 4. Click Reference Viewer the Investigate group. from

9. Click the down arrows on the Current Object to view its entities.

Fo r

10. In the Reference Viewer, select the arrow leading to the Hole 3 node, right-click, and select Display Full Path. 11. Notice that Hole 3 refers to datum axis A_7 in Hole 2. 12. Click Close in the Full Path Display dialog box.

2012 PTC

PT

8. Select each of these entities to highlight them on the model.

In

7. Click the down arrows on each Parent node to view its entities.

te rn

6. Cursor over each node in the Reference Viewer to highlight the respective feature on the model.

al
Module 25 | Page 7

5. Notice that the reference graph displays the current object, Hole 2, in the middle, that object's Parents on the left, and that object's Children on the right.

U se

nl y

2. Select Hole 2 from the model.

13. In the Reference Viewer, right-click the Hole 3 node and select Set as current. Notice that the graph has now updated. Notice the Parents specified for the Hole 3 feature. Notice the Children specified for the Hole 3 feature.

Fo r

Module 25 | Page 8

PT

In

This completes the procedure.

te rn

al
2012 PTC

17. Click Complete Feature the Hole dashboard.

from

U se

16. Notice that the 14 dimension is dimensioned to datum axis A_7 in Hole 2. This dimension established the parent/child relationship.

15. Edit the definition of Hole 3.

nl y

14. Click Close in the Reference Viewer dialog box.

Viewing Assembly Parent/Child Information

You can use the Reference Viewer to view parent/child relationships between components in an assembly.
Current Object Parents Children Highlight entities in model: Components Features References Set Current: Model Component Placement Both

Viewing Assembly Parent/Child Information

Fo r

You can view parent/child relationships of components or their features in an assembly using the Reference Viewer. You can launch the Reference Viewer by selecting the desired component and then either clicking Reference

Viewer from the Investigate group in the Tools tab or right-clicking and selecting Info > Reference Viewer.

Reference Viewer Sections

The Reference Viewer displays a graph of parent/child relationships for a given component or that component's features. This graph is broken down into three columns. From left to right, the columns are as follows: Parents Displays the Parents of the currently selected component. Current Object Displays the currently selected component for which you wish to view parent/child relationships. Children Displays the Children of the currently selected component. The features or components displayed in the Reference Viewer depend upon the Reference Types specified. By default, the Regular, Placement,
2012 PTC Module 25 | Page 9

PT

Figure 2 Full Path Between Components

In

te rn
Figure 3 Reference Viewer: Component Placement as Current Object

al

U se

nl y

Figure 1 Reference Viewer: Model as Current Object

Relation, and System reference types display. The Reference Type to display Components in a path does not display by default.

Reference Viewer Functionality

The Reference Viewer can be utilized in one of three ways, depending upon the type of information you wish to view: Model as Current Object Displays parent/child relationships for references in the context of the solid model. In Figure 1, the parent/child relationships display in the context of the model. As such, the assembly is a child to the part since the assembly fails if it cannot find the part. Component Placement as Current Object Displays parent/child relationships for assembly level or placement references. These relationships are described in the context of the assembly, as shown in Figure 3. Note that not only are the components shown as parents and children, but the components' features that create the parent/child relationships are shown as well. Both as Current Object Displays parent/child relationships for references in the context of both the solid model and the assembly level. The graph of parent/child relationships in the Reference Viewer is interactive with the assembly in the graphics window: You can cursor over the component or feature node to highlight it on the model. You can expand the component or feature nodes to view the list of references that creates the parent/child relationships shown. You can also select these references to highlight them in the model.

Obtaining Full Path Information Between Components

You can display the full parent/child relationship path between two components in tree representation by selecting the Reference Type arrow between two components, then right-clicking and selecting Display Full Path, as shown in Figure 2. For example, the graph in Figure 2 displays the full chain of parent/child relationships between the BOLT.PRT and PLATE.PRT components. It shows that Surface id 55 is a child to Extrude 1 in PLATE.PRT, which is a child of assembly ASSY_PC.ASM. It also shows that the BOLT.PRT is assembled to Surface id 55 in PLATE.PRT.

Fo r

Switching the Current Object

You can switch which feature or component is the current object either by double-clicking the desired feature node or component in the graph, right-clicking it and selecting Set as current, or by clicking Actions > Set as current from the Reference Viewer dialog box menu. You can also revert back to the previously selected Current Object by clicking Use Previous at the top of the graph or by clicking the down arrow next to it to view the history of Current Objects and selecting an earlier one.

Module 25 | Page 10

PT

In

te rn

al

U se

nl y

2012 PTC

PROCEDURE - Viewing Assembly Parent/Child Information

Close Window Erase Not Displayed ASSY_PC.ASM

Info\Assembly_Parent-Child Task 1:

View Parent and Child information for components using the Reference Viewer.

5. Click Model As Current Object in the Reference Viewer dialog box. 6. Click the down arrows on the Children assembly node to view the components.

Fo r

8. Cursor over each of the BOLT.PRT models to highlight them in the model.

9. Click Component Placement Current in the Reference Viewer dialog box.

10. Notice that the graph updates to now show PLATE.PRT as a component in the assembly, as well as its Parents and Children. 11. Cursor over each node to highlight the respective features and components on the model.

2012 PTC

PT

7. Notice the two BOLT.PRT components.

In

te rn
Module 25 | Page 11

al

4. If necessary, widen both the Reference Viewer dialog box and the Parents column.

U se

3. In the Reference Viewer dialog box, select the Components in path check box as an additional Reference Type.

2. In the model tree, right-click PLATE.PRT and select Info > Reference Viewer.

nl y

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

12. Click the down arrows on each Parent node to expand it and view its referenced entities. 13. Select each of these entities to highlight them on the model.

Fo r

15. In the Reference Viewer, right-click the Comp id 47 (BOLT.PRT) node and select Set as current. Notice that the graph has now updated. Notice the Parents specified for the Comp id 47 (BOLT.PRT) component. Cursor over Hole 2 in PLATE.PRT to highlight it. The BOLT.PRT is assembled into this hole. Hence, the component is a child to the hole. Click Close.

This completes the procedure.

Module 25 | Page 12

PT

In

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

14. In the Reference Viewer, select the arrow leading to the Comp id 47 (BOLT.PRT) node, right-click, and select Display Full Path. If necessary, edit the Displayed Full Path to Surface id 55. Notice that BOLT.PRT is assembled to a surface in Extrude 1. Click Close.

nl y

Viewing Model, Feature, and Component Information

You can view the following information: Feature Model Component Bill of Materials Figure 1 Viewing Model Information

te rn

Figure 2 Viewing BOM Information

Viewing Model, Feature, and Component Information

When information is displayed about the item you have selected, the system helps you identify that item by displaying the following:

Fo r

Name Either the model, component, or feature name of the item you have selected. Feature Number/Component Number Displays the feature number or component number in the model tree as it is found in the model tree. ID The internal identification number that the system has assigned to the item you select.

Understanding the Browser Information Window's Contents

The information for the item you have selected is displayed in the Web browser window. The information is categorized, depending upon its type, for example, Parents, Children, Feature List, and Dimensions. Because information is displayed in the Web browser window, there are many clickable items that can be selected to yield even more information. The following items can be clicked on in the Web browser information window:
2012 PTC Module 25 | Page 13

PT

You can access the icons to view model, feature, and component information either in the Investigate group of the Tools tab or by right-clicking the appropriate item in the model tree or graphics window.

In

al
Figure 3 Viewing Feature Information

U se

nl y

 Blue Links Call out the name of something, such as a Feature Name or Model name. Clicking these blue links highlights the item in the model. An item that's name is a series of three dashes simply means that no name is given for that particular item. Dimensions Dimensions are listed by their internal identification number. Clicking the dimension link highlights the dimension in the model. Highlight Feature Feature Info component. Highlights the feature in the model.

Enables you to jump to information for that feature or

Viewing Model and Feature Information in Parts

When you view the model information for a part, the Web browser window displays the following information: Part Name Displays the name of the model. Unit Information Displays the units in which the model was created, including Length, Mass, Force, Time, and Temperature. Feature List Provides a list of features, similar to the model tree.

When you view the feature information for a given feature in a model, the Web browser window displays the following information: Part Name, Feature Number, and Feature ID. Parents, if any. Children, if any. Feature Elements Displays the elements that comprise the feature. Layers Displays any layers that the feature is on, and the layer status. Feature Dimensions Displays all dimensions found in the feature.

Fo r

When you view the model information for a component in an assembly, you must select whether you want the information for the top-level assembly or a component in the assembly. The Web browser window displays the following information: Part Name Displays the name of the model. Component Information Displays a list of the assembled components and only displays when model information is displayed for the top-level assembly. Feature List Provides a list of features, similar to the model tree. When you view the component information for a component in an assembly, the Component Constraints dialog box displays the assembly constraints used to assemble the component. You can highlight each constraint pair on the model by selecting it in the dialog box. The Web browser window then displays the following: Component Name, Parent Assembly, Component Number in Parent assembly, Feature Number, and Feature ID. Parents List Any components in the assembly which are parents. Children List Any components in the assembly which are children.
Module 25 | Page 14 2012 PTC

PT

Viewing Model, Component, and BOM Information in Assemblies

In

te rn

al

U se

nl y

When you view the Bill of Materials information for an assembly, the Web browser window displays the components found in the assembly, and their quantities. You must specify whether the BOM is to be created for the top-level assembly or a sub-assembly.

Fo r

2012 PTC

PT

In

te rn
Module 25 | Page 15

al

U se

nl y

PROCEDURE - Viewing Model, Feature, and Component Information

Close Window Info\Viewing Task 1: Erase Not Displayed ASSY_INFO.ASM

View assembly information using Creo Parametric's tools.

1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. In the ribbon, select the Tools tab. from the 3. Click Model Investigate group 4. Click Apply > Close in the Model Info dialog box. 5. View the information that displays in the Web browser. 6. Click Web Browser the Web browser. 7. Click Component Investigate group. to close

8. Select PLATE.PRT from the model tree.

Fo r

9. Notice the component constraints used to assemble this component. Select the constraints in the dialog box and notice that the pair highlights in the model.

10. Click Apply > Close in the Component Constraints dialog box to display the component information for PLATE.PRT.

Module 25 | Page 16

PT

In

te rn
from the

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

11. Click Bill of Materials the Investigate group.

from

12. Verify that Top Level is selected in the BOM dialog box and click OK. 13. Notice that there are two BOLT.PRT components in the assembly.

Task 2:

View part information using Creo Parametric's tools.

2. In the ribbon, select the Tools tab. from the 3. Click Model Investigate group.

Fo r

8. Arrange the model and Web browser window so you can see both. 9. Scroll up in the Feature information window to the Parents section.

10. Click the link for Extrude 3. 11. Click Repaint from the In Graphics toolbar.

2012 PTC

PT

7. Click Model Tree to collapse the model tree and leave the Web browser open.

6. Select Hole 2 from the model tree.

In

5. Click Feature from the Investigate group.

te rn
Module 25 | Page 17

4. Notice the model information for the model.

al

U se

1. In the model tree, right-click PART_INFO.PRT and select Open.

nl y

12. In the Children section of the Feature information, click the Hole 3 link. 13. Click Repaint . next to

14. Click Feature Info Chamfer 1.

16. Click Hole 3 to highlight it. to expand 17. Click Model Tree the model tree window. This completes the procedure.

Fo r

Module 25 | Page 18

PT

In

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

15. Notice that the Feature information for the chamfer now displays. Also notice that Hole 3 is a parent to the chamfer.

Module

26
U se O te rn al
Module 26 | Page 1

Capturing and Managing Design Intent

Module Overview

Now that you understand parent/child relationships, you can learn to properly capture and manage design intent in models. In this module, you learn the tools available for modifying and capturing your design intent within all aspects of the modeling process. You also gain additional knowledge about selecting references that capture your design intent.

Objectives

Fo r

2012 PTC

PT

After completing this module, you will be able to: Handle the children of deleted and suppressed items. Reorder and insert features. Redefine features and Sketches. Capture design intent in Sketches, features, parts, and assemblies.

In

nl y

Handling Children of Deleted and Suppressed Items

In Creo Parametric, you have three options for handling the children of suppressed or deleted items.
Child handling options include: Suppress/Delete Suspend Freeze

Figure 1 Children Handling Dialog Box

Figure 3 Handling a Frozen Child Component

Fo r

If you attempt to suppress or delete an item that has children, the system highlights these child items in red. In Figure 1, the piston component is being suppressed, and the system highlights the piston pin and piston ring in red because they are children of the piston. In Figure 2, the two rounds highlighted in red are children of the round that is being suppressed. The system also displays a Delete or Suppress dialog box. When you click Options in this dialog box, the system displays the Children Handling dialog box, as shown in Figure 1. The Children Handling dialog box displays each of the child items highlighted in red. You have three different options available for handling these children, and each child can be handled independently: Suppress/Delete When suppressing a parent, you can also suppress a child item, and when deleting a parent, you can also delete a child item. If this is the desired option for all child items, you can click OK in the original Suppress or Delete dialog box without having to consider the options available in the Children Handling dialog box. Suspend Suppresses or deletes the parent, thus suspending the child item's regeneration temporarily. Once the parent is suppressed or deleted, the suspended child item regenerates. This results in one of the following:
Module 26 | Page 2 2012 PTC

PT

Handling Children of Deleted and Suppressed Items

In

te rn

al

U se

Figure 2 Suspending Child Rounds

nl y

Fo r

2012 PTC

PT

In

Another method to temporarily thaw frozen components is to delete the placement constraint which has missing references and add a Fix constraint. The Fix constraint locks, or fixes, a component in its current orientation but retains it as fully constrained.

te rn

al

The child item regenerates successfully. However, if the child item is a feature, it may have different geometry; if the child item is a component, it may be in a different position. In Figure 2, the two round children were suspended. After the parent round was suppressed, these two child rounds successfully regenerated, although their geometry is different. The child item does not regenerate successfully. If this occurs, Creo Parametric indicates the failure. You can then acknowledge and accept the failure or undo the changes. If you acknowledge the failure, you can continue to work normally, but you should ultimately fix the failure. You can fix the failure by modifying, suppressing, or deleting the child item, or by modifying another feature or part. Freeze The Freeze option is available only for assembly components. Once the parent component is suppressed or deleted, the child component is frozen, or locked, in 3-D space. Frozen components display in the model tree with a special icon preceding their name. In the left image of Figure 3, the PISTON_PIN.PRT component is frozen. In addition, any child components of the frozen component display in the model tree with a slightly different icon that includes a small square. Frozen components must be redefined, and the missing assembly placement references must be replaced with valid references from components that still remain in the assembly. Once this is accomplished, the component is no longer frozen in the assembly. These unlocked components are commonly referred to as thawed components, as shown in Figure 3.

U se

nl y

Module 26 | Page 3

PROCEDURE - Handling Children of Deleted and Suppressed Items

Close Window Erase Not Displayed CHILD_HANDLING.ASM

Edit\Delete-Suppress_Child Task 1:

Suppress PISTON.PRT and redefine PISTON_PIN.PRT after it is frozen.

1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. Click Settings and select Tree Filters.

3. In the Model Tree Items dialog box, select the Suppressed Objects check box and click OK. 4. Select PISTON.PRT, right-click, and select Delete. 5. Notice that because PISTON_PIN.PRT and PISTON_RING.PRT are children of PISTON.PRT, they are also to be deleted. 6. Click OK in the Delete dialog box. 7. Click Undo .

9. Again, notice that because PISTON_PIN.PRT and PISTON_RING. PRT are children of PISTON.PRT, they are also to be suppressed.

Fo r

10. In the Suppress dialog box, click Options. Edit the Status of PISTON_PIN.PRT to Freeze, leaving PISTON_RING.PRT to be suppressed. Click OK. 11. Notice the suppressed components and the freeze symbol on PISTON_PIN.PRT.

Module 26 | Page 4

PT

8. Select the PISTON.PRT, right-click, and select Suppress.

In

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

12. Edit the definition of PISTON_PIN.PRT. 13. If necessary, select the Coincident constraint to activate it. Select the inner hole surface on CONNECTING_ROD.PRT into which you need to insert the pin. The pin was formerly inserted into the piston.

Task 2:

5. Click Undo

PT

4. Click OK in the Delete dialog box. .

Fo r

6. Select SIDE_ROUND, right-click, and select Suppress. 7. Again, notice that the child rounds also are to be suppressed. 8. In the Suppress dialog box, click Options. Edit the Status of both Round ids to Suspend. Click OK.

2012 PTC

3. Notice the two child round features.

In

2. Right-click SIDE_ROUND and select Delete.

te rn

1. Select CONNECTING_ROD. PRT, right-click, and select Open.

al

Suppress SIDE_ROUND and suspend the resulting child rounds.

U se

15. Notice that the PISTON_PIN. PRT the component is no longer frozen in the assembly.

O
Module 26 | Page 5

14. Click Complete Component from the Component Placement dashboard.

nl y

9. Notice the geometry changes made to the model because SIDE_ROUND is no longer present.

This completes the procedure.

Fo r

Module 26 | Page 6

PT

In

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

Reordering Features
You can reorder features in the model tree by dragging them to a new location.
Original model Through All hole 2. Protrusion added Hole no longer meets design intent 3. Hole reordered Hole again meets design intent 1.

Figure 1 Original Model

Reordering Features

The order of features is the sequence in which features display in the model tree. You can drag a feature within the model tree to place it such that it immediately succeeds its parent, even though you may have added several features to it after the parent was created. Since you must regenerate a parent before you regenerate its children, you cannot reorder a parent to succeed its children; nor can you reorder a child to precede its parents. Feature order can affect the geometry of a model. When a feature is created, it can only add or remove material from the model as the model exists at that point in time. For example, in Figure 1, the hole feature's depth is Through All, which drills the hole through the unseen side of the block. If you add an additional protrusion to the block, you need to reorder the hole to succeed this new protrusion if you want to retain its Through All design intent. In that case, the Through All depth would include the new protrusion and drill the hole through the entire block.

Fo r

2012 PTC

PT

When regenerating a model, Creo Parametric regenerates features one at a time, following the order in which they display in the model tree. As you create new features, they are added to the bottom of the list in the model tree.

In

te rn

al
Figure 3 Hole Reordered
Module 26 | Page 7

U se

Figure 2 Protrusion Added

nl y

PROCEDURE - Reordering Features

Close Window Edit\Reorder Task 1: Erase Not Displayed REORDER.PRT

Reorder features in a part model.

1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. Locate Hole 1 in the model tree.

Fo r

5. Click Extrude from the Shapes group and select Sketch 2. Edit the depth to 6. Click Complete Feature from the Extrude dashboard.

Module 26 | Page 8

PT

In

4. Edit the definition of Hole 1. Select the Shape tab from the Hole dashboard. Notice the hole depth is Through All. Click Complete Feature .

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

3. Notice its position in the feature order.

6. Select Hole 1. 7. Notice that the hole does not appear to have a depth of Through All, but recall that it did at the time of creation. A feature can only add or remove material from the model as the model exists at the point in time in which the feature is created. 8. In the model tree, click and drag Hole 1 to reorder it to succeed Extrude 2. 9. Select Hole 1. 10. As previously observed, the hole still removes material Through All from the model; however, since the extrude feature now precedes the hole feature, the Through All depth has the desired effect. 11. Click Shell from the Engineering group.

12. Select the front face to remove it. 14. Click Complete Feature the Shell dashboard.

13. Edit the thickness to 0.50.

In

Fo r

15. Notice the boss around the hole feature. 16. In the model tree, click and drag Shell 1 to reorder it to precede Hole 1. 17. Reorient the model and notice that the shell feature now hollows out the entire model.

This completes the procedure.

2012 PTC

PT

te rn
from

al
Module 26 | Page 9

U se

nl y

Inserting Features
You can insert new features or components in the model tree where desired.
Original model One protrusion Shell has square edge 2. Insert mode activated Protrusion mirrored and rounds created before shell 3. Insert mode cancelled Hole on left goes through mirrored protrusion Shell hollows out mirrored protrusion and rounds 1.

Figure 1 Original Model

PT

In

Fo r

Inserting Features

The model tree insertion indicator, shown in the model tree as Insert Indicator , indicates where features are inserted upon creation. By default, its position always succeeds all items listed in the model tree. You may drag it higher or lower in the model tree to insert features between other features in the tree. When you move the insert indicator, you enter Insert Mode and the model is rolled backward or forward in its regeneration in response to its new position, and all features update in the graphics window. If a feature precedes the indicator, then it is displayed in the graphics window and processed during regeneration. If a feature succeeds the indicator, it is temporarily suppressed. Thus, it is not regenerated or displayed in the graphics window. In addition to dragging the Insert Indicator up into the model tree, you can specify an insert location in the tree. To do this, select a feature, right-click, and select Insert Here. The insert indicator is then placed directly below the selected item.
Module 26 | Page 10 2012 PTC

te rn

Figure 2 Insert Mode Activated

Figure 3 Insert Mode Cancelled

al

U se

nl y

You can exit Insert Mode and return the insert indicator to its default location at the bottom of the model tree by cursoring over it, right-clicking, and selecting Cancel. You are then prompted to resume the features you suppressed when you activated Insert mode. When you select to resume them, Creo Parametric places them after the inserted features. For example, the model in the figures is a cast metal cover. However, a design change is needed to make another protrusion with a rounded notch in the middle. Hence, we need to mirror the existing protrusion and round the edges of the resulting notch. Additionally, these rounded edges should also be located on the inside of the part to enable easier extraction from the cast. As shown in the part's model tree, you can delete and recreate the shell and hole features after creating the necessary protrusion and rounds. Alternatively, you can use Insert mode to add the protrusion and round features before the Shell feature. Notice that this includes the round feature in the shell, which accomplishes the task of having round edges on the inside of the part. Insert Mode operates the same way when you are in an assembly. You may select a component, right-click, and select Insert Here to insert components between other components in the model tree. If you display features in the model tree, you can also drag the Insert Indicator. Again, when you move the Insert Indicator, you enter Insert Mode and the assembly is rolled backward or forward in its regeneration in response to its new position, and all components update in the graphics window.

Fo r

2012 PTC

PT

In

te rn
Module 26 | Page 11

al

U se

nl y

PROCEDURE - Inserting Features

Close Window Edit\Insert Task 1: Erase Not Displayed INSERT.PRT

Insert new features in a part model.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

4. Notice the features that are suppressed and therefore not currently regenerated. 5. Select Extrude 2 and click from the Editing Mirror group. Select datum plane RIGHT. Click Complete Feature from the Mirror dashboard.

Fo r

7.

Select Round from the Round types drop-down menu in the Engineering group, press CTRL, and select both edges of the notch bottom. Right-click and select Full round. Click Complete Feature from the Round dashboard.

Module 26 | Page 12

PT

6. Click Named Views select 3D-2.

In

te rn
and

al
2012 PTC

U se

3. In the model tree, click the Insert Indicator and drag it so that it precedes Shell 1.

nl y

2. Select each of the five solid features in the model tree to highlight them in the graphics window.

8. Select Round from the Round types drop-down menu in the Engineering group, press CTRL, and select a vertical edge on the front and back of the notch. Edit the radius to 1. Click Complete Feature from the Round dashboard. 9. In the model tree, select the Insert Indicator , right-click, and select Cancel. 10. Click Yes in the Confirmation dialog box.

11. Click Named Views select 3D-1.

13. Also notice that the shell now hollows out both the mirrored protrusion and the newly inserted rounds.

Fo r

This completes the procedure.

2012 PTC

PT

12. Notice the hole on the left that goes through the mirrored protrusion.

In

te rn
and
Module 26 | Page 13

al

U se

nl y

Redefining Features and Sketches

The Edit Definition option provides you with complete control of a feature.
Edit Definition Datum Features Feature Tools Sketch Features Pre-Wildfire Features Complete control of a feature Feature Type Size Shape Location Options References

Figure 1 Various Edit Definition Options

Redefining Features and Sketches

In Creo Parametric, altering the parents of a feature or sketch can drastically affect the outcome of the resulting geometry. To modify a parent/child relationship, the easiest method is to use the Edit Definition option. This option enables you to select your references using dialog boxes, the dashboard, or menu options depending on the feature you are redefining. You can redefine a feature or sketch by selecting it, and then either right-clicking and selecting Edit Definition, or by clicking the Operations group drop-down menu and selecting Edit Definition . If you edit the definition of legacy model features, you may encounter a different interface than that of the dashboard. For example, if you redefine a legacy sweep or blend feature, you will see a dialog box of options rather than the dashboard, as shown in the lower-right image in Figure 1. For example, if you redefine a datum feature, you can select new references in a dialog box. If you redefine a Sketch feature, you can use the Sketch dialog box to edit its placement. You can also use the References dialog box
Module 26 | Page 14 2012 PTC

Fo r

PT

Figure 2 Feature Dashboard

In

te rn

al

U se

nl y

to modify references internal to the sketch. For most solid features, you can use the dashboard to edit references; for example, selecting a different sketch for an extrude, or selecting different edges for a round.

Controlling Features with Edit Definition

The Edit Definition functionality provides you with complete control over a feature within its tool. Consider the control that Edit Definition provides in the following areas: Feature Type Switch the feature type for many features. For example, you can edit a feature to modify it from a solid feature to a surface feature. Size Increase or decrease the size of many features. For example, you can edit the radius value of a round feature. Shape Edit the resulting geometry shape of a model. For example, you can edit a feature's Sketch, depth or angle value, or switch the external sketch used. Location Edit the location of a feature. For example, you can edit the sketching plane specified for a Sketch feature which modifies the location of the resulting sketch feature and therefore any features using that Sketch. Options Edit numerous options of a feature. For example, you can edit the depth of a hole from Blind to Through All, or you can add an additional side for material to be removed. References (Parents) Edit the parent references to a feature. For example, you can switch which external sketch is used in the creation of a feature, or you can specify different references to different features in the Sketch References dialog box.

Fo r

The model regenerates back to the feature being redefined. The model tree reflects that this has happened by removing all features that succeed the feature being redefined. In addition, the feature being redefined displays with a yellow icon preceding its name in the model tree, as shown here: Most features being redefined display in their orange dynamic preview color. In this state, the feature's drag handles display, enabling you to edit their respective values. In addition, the on-screen flip arrows display. The feature's UI is presented. Depending upon the feature being redefined, this could be either a dialog box or the dashboard. The UI or dialog boxes enable you to make changes to the feature. Once modifications have been made, most features can be previewed solid, if desired. This option regenerates the feature to determine whether the changes you have made are valid. Once you have completed the feature, it regenerates. After this occurs, the child features also regenerate to reflect the modifications made to their parent.
2012 PTC Module 26 | Page 15

PT

When you redefine, or edit the definition of, a feature or sketch, the following occurs:

The Edit Definition Workflow

In

te rn

al

U se

nl y

PROCEDURE - Redefining Features and Sketches

Close Window Edit\Redefine Task 1: Erase Not Displayed REDEFINE.PRT

Redefine features and sketches in a part model.

1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. Edit the definition of RING_CUT. 3. Select the Placement tab from the Revolve dashboard, and notice that the Sketch is Internal. Click Edit. 4. Edit the 1.5 dimension to -1.5. 5. Click OK from the Sketch dashboard. 6. Orient to the Standard Orientation. 7. Click Remove Material toggle it off. to

8. Drag the handle from 360 to 75. 9. Click Complete Feature the Revolve dashboard.

Fo r

11. Click Named Views select FRONT.

PT

10. Click Undo

12. Edit the definition of SKIRT_CUT. 13. Select the Placement tab from the Extrude dashboard, and notice that the Sketch is external to the extrude feature. Select an alternate external sketch, Sketch 2, from the model tree. from

14. Click Complete Feature the Extrude dashboard. 15. Notice the new skirt shape. 16. Click Undo .

Module 26 | Page 16

In

te rn
from and

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

17. Edit the definition of Sketch 1. 18. Click Sketch Setup Setup group. from the

19. In the graphics window, right-click and select Placement. 20. Orient to the Standard Orientation and notice the sketch in the model.

22. Click Sketch in the Sketch dialog box. 23. Click OK from the Sketch dashboard.

Fo r

This completes the procedure.

2012 PTC

PT

24. Notice that the SKIRT_CUT has been rotated 90 degrees.

In

te rn
Module 26 | Page 17

al

U se

21. Select datum plane RIGHT from the model tree as the new sketching plane.

nl y

Capturing Design Intent in Sketches

You must carefully consider how to define a sketch since several other features use sketches in their creation.
Considerations include: Sketch/Reference plane selection Reference selection Dimension scheme Constraints Sketched geometry type Open sketch results may differ from closed sketch results

Figure 1 Captured Design Intent

Fo r

Design intent is captured in Sketcher by selecting references and by sketching, constraining, and dimensioning entities. It is important to capture design intent in sketches since several other features originate from sketches. Consequently, you must carefully consider how to define a sketch and then capture it. You can always modify the sketch's design intent, but it is easiest to do when you have planned for future changes.

Considerations When Capturing Design Intent in Sketches

When you create a new sketch in Creo Parametric, consider the options available for capturing design intent in each of the following areas, and in some of the examples listed. Your decisions in these areas at the time of sketch creation impact the overall model downstream when you wish to modify it. Sketch/Reference Plane Should these selected references be default datum planes or a construction plane created with an adjustable offset or angle? Perhaps the sketch plane should be on a surface created from another feature? References Remember that when you select additional sketching references or dimension to existing geometry, you are selecting the
Module 26 | Page 18 2012 PTC

PT

Capturing Design Intent in Sketches

In

Figure 2 Closed Sketch Design Intent Examples

te rn

al
Figure 3 Open Sketch Design Intent Examples

U se

nl y

There are two different techniques for creating sketch features:

Closed-section sketches are the more robust of the two options and should therefore be used whenever possible. However, your desired design intent should ultimately dictate which type of sketch section is created. The yellow extrude features shown in Figure 2 are created from closed-section sketches, whereas the yellow extrude features created in Figure 3 are created from open-section sketches. The geometry created using an open-section sketch causes the resulting geometry to follow the 3-D contour of a surface. The endpoints of the open-section sketch must be constrained to the surface edge. The geometry created using the closed-section sketches ignores the 3-D contour of the surface and simply extends the geometry upward. There are two specific rules regarding open-section versus closed-section sketches in regards to feature requirements: Rib features require an open-section sketch. You must create the first extrude or revolve feature using a closed-section sketch.

Fo r

2012 PTC

PT

Closed-section sketch The sketched geometry forms a closed loop. Open-section sketch The sketch geometry does not form a closed loop.

In

Open Sketches Versus Closed Sketches

te rn

parents for your sketch. If the references you select update, so does the sketch. Consider whether you want your sketcher references to be default datums or another feature. In Figure 1, the sketch feature references the angled surface of existing geometry, so if that angled surface updates, the sketch also updates. Additionally, the sketch references the existing hole. Therefore, if the hole location updates, the sketch's location updates as well. Dimensioning scheme When dimensioning circles and arcs, should the dimension be a radius or diameter? Should the sketch be dimensioned with an X-Y scheme or a radius-angle scheme? Deciding whether the sketch must pivot can help you determine which scheme to use. Consider which dimensions you might want to modify at a later time if the design changes. Constraints You must decide which constraints to use, and to which reference you wish to constrain because you are again creating parents when selecting constraint references. How should the sketch entities react to each other? Should they be parallel, perpendicular, or tangent? Should the sketch be symmetrical? If so, you need a centerline. Do you want arc and circle centers to remain aligned? In Figure 1, the sketch's construction line between each arc center is constrained to be parallel to the angled surface. Therefore, if the angle of the existing surface changes, so too must the angle of the sketch. Similarly, if the existing hole diameter is modified, this sketch's upper arc diameter also changes because it is constrained to be of equal radius. Sketched geometry type When sketching arcs, for example, you should use the arc type which helps you obtain your desired design intent. Remember to use construction geometry or sketched datum points to your advantage.

al

U se

nl y

Module 26 | Page 19

Capturing Design Intent in Features

Capture design intent in your model's features by deciding which feature options to use.
Option considerations include: Depth Solid/Thicken Round/Chamfer type Hole type Sketch or select sweep trajectory Internal versus external sketches Embedded datum features

Figure 1 Internal Versus External Sketches

Fo r

Design intent is captured in features by specifying the correct feature and its options. As a result, you must carefully consider which feature options to specify to properly capture your design intent. You can always modify the feature's design intent, but it is easiest to do when you have planned for future modifications.

Considerations When Capturing Design Intent in Features

When you create a new feature in Creo Parametric, consider the options available for capturing design intent in each of the following areas. Your decisions in these areas at the time of feature creation impact the overall model downstream when you wish to modify it. Depth When creating an extrude feature, determine whether the depth should be symmetric or defined with 2-sided blind depth values. Determine whether the depth is to be defined to a reference. If so, remember that the reference you select becomes a parent to the feature. Or consider if the depth should be Through All? Solid or Thicken Determine whether the feature you create should be a solid feature in which you create a cut through, or a thickened feature with a defined thickness. If so, which side?
Module 26 | Page 20 2012 PTC

PT

Capturing Design Intent in Features

In

te rn
Figure 2 Embedded Datum Features

al

U se

nl y

Fo r

2012 PTC

PT

In

te rn

Round/Chamfer type Determine which type of chamfer best captures your design intent. Is it better to use a 45 x D or a D x D? Again, considering how the design may change in the future helps you decide. Should the round be created by selecting the edge or by selecting the two surfaces in your model? If you believe that the design may change so that the edge disappears, use the two surfaces. Hole type Determine which dimensioning scheme works best in your design. Which would be best to the tip or to the shoulder of the hole? Internal versus external sketches In Figure 1, notice that feature Extrude 2 was created using an external sketch, but feature Extrude 3 was created using an internal sketch. Which sketch you ultimately use for feature creation depends upon these factors: You must use an internal sketch to create Geometry Points in the sketch. Internal sketches reduce clutter in the model tree. As shown in Figure 1, there are two additional model tree entries for Sketches 1 and 2 due to the fact that these were external sketches. Had Extrude 1 and Extrude 2 been created with internal sketches, neither of these entities would exist in the model tree. External sketches are helpful when you want to test multiple design alternatives for a feature. You can select alternate external sketches to test these design alternatives. Embedded datum features Embedded datum features are useful when you want to edit features as if they are one feature. This also simplifies the tree and reduces the display clutter. In Figure 2, Extrude 4 was created using five embedded datum features. However, embedded datum features are not recommended if you want to reuse the datums for other features.

al

U se

nl y

Module 26 | Page 21

Capturing Design Intent in Parts

Capture design intent in parts with proper planning, feature selection, and feature order.
Planning model design 80/20 rule Feature type Feature order Parent/child effects

Figure 1 Following the 80/20 Rule

PT

Figure 2 Feature Order Example 1

In

Capturing Design Intent in Parts

Fo r

Design intent is captured in parts by properly planning your model design and specifying which features to use and in which order. Often the same geometry result can be achieved by creating many different types or combinations of features. As a result, you must carefully consider which features to use to properly capture your design intent. You can always modify the part's design intent, but it is easiest to do when you have planned for future modifications.

Planning Your Model Design

Before you begin your new part model, you should plan its design. As a general guideline, you should follow the 80/20 rule, which states that 80 percent of the overall shape of the model should typically be created in the initial 20 percent of the model's features. Figure 1 illustrates the 80/20 rule. The left image displays only the first four extrude features of the muffler, while the right image displays the completed model. Although only the first four features are displayed, roughly 80 percent of the overall model shape is present.
Module 26 | Page 22 2012 PTC

te rn
Figure 3 Feature Order Example 2

al

U se

nl y

Here are some guidelines to follow when planning your part model design: Begin with the feature that determines the overall size and shape of the model. This is your base feature. The left image of Figure 1 displays the first four extrude features of a muffler model. The first feature is an extruded rectangle, which is the base feature of this model. Create major geometry features that add or remove material from your model. In the left image of Figure 1, the extruded cut along the front face of the muffler is an example of this type of major geometry feature. Create minor geometry features that add or remove material. These include smaller features such as protrusions, cuts, bosses, ribs, or holes. In Figure 1, the smaller extruded cuts are an example of this type of feature in the left image, and the holes in the right image are another example. Finally, add finishing features such as rounds and chamfers. In the right image of Figure 1, the rounds and shell are both finishing features.

Deciding Upon Feature Type and Order

The feature order also has an impact later on if the design is modified. In the bottom figures, the resulting geometry is identical, but was created differently. In Figure 2, the first feature extrudes the entire length, with subsequent features adding or removing material. In Figure 3, three extrudes were stacked in a series, with the overall length being created as the sum of the three features. If the length must be modified later, it is easier to modify the length of the design in Figure 2.

Fo r

Considering Parent/Child Effects

It is important to always consider parent/child relationships when creating features in parts. Build new features using references from other features only as necessary. To create features without establishing parent/child relationships to other features, you can create default datum planes instead. These are common references that are not deleted. Using default datums also minimizes unwanted parent/child relationships.

2012 PTC

PT

You need the profile to change along the extrude length later in the design In this case, a blend feature may be the best option. You could initially create the blend straight back, and edit the individual blend sections at a later time. The path of extrusion may change In this case, a sweep may be the best option. You could initially create a straight sweep trajectory, and modify it at a later time. You need the feature to rotate In this case, a revolve may be the best option.

In

te rn

al

Often the same geometry result can be achieved by creating many different types or combinations of features. It is your responsibility to decide how to best create the geometry so that when the design is later modified, it updates in a predictable manner. For example, an extrude is common, but consider what occurs if any of the following situations arise:

U se

O
Module 26 | Page 23

nl y

Capturing Design Intent in Assemblies

Capture design intent in assemblies by determining which assembly type to use, which component to assemble first, and which constraints to use during the assembly process.
Considerations include: Assembly type Static Dynamic Mixture Assembly/Subassembly structure Choice of base model Assembly references Fit/Interference issues

PT

Fo r

Capturing Design Intent in Assemblies

Design intent is captured in assemblies by specifying which assembly type to use, the assembly/sub-assembly structure, choice of base model, assembly references used, and any fit or interference issues. As a result, you must carefully consider how to create your assembly to properly capture your design intent. You can always modify the assembly's design intent, but it is easiest to do when you have planned for future modifications.

Considerations When Capturing Design Intent in Assemblies

When you create a new assembly in Creo Parametric, consider the options available for capturing design intent in each of the following areas. Your decisions in these areas at the time of feature creation impact the overall assembly model later on when you wish to modify it.
Module 26 | Page 24 2012 PTC

In

Figure 2 Vice Assembly

te rn

al

Figure 1 Assembly Structure Examples

U se

nl y

Fo r

Assembly type There are three different types of assemblies that you can create in Creo Parametric. Create the assembly type that best fits your needs: Static Assemblies are created using constraints. If you decide to create this type of assembly, determine whether some components require angular or linear offsets. If so, remember to create the proper constraint types. Dynamic Assemblies are created using connections. Determine whether your assembly needs to contain components that can be dynamically moved. If so, a dynamic assembly with pin, slider, and cylinder connections may be your best option. Mixture Assemblies are created with both static and dynamic components. Assembly/Sub-assembly Structure There are usually multiple ways to assemble components and still achieve the same assembly result. In Figure 1, notice that in one assembly example, component D is assembled into the sub-assembly SUB, while in the other example, it is assembled directly to the top-level. The end result may appear the same, but could cause the assemblies to behave differently should another component's placement be modified. Choice of base model The base model is the first component assembled into the assembly. It is important to consider which component you set as the base model because if all other models reference this component it becomes difficult to remove the base model. Assembly references used Remember that the assembly references you select for placing components create parent/child relationships between these components. Be sure to select references that are more robust if possible, such as selecting surfaces over edges. Fit or interference issues Determine what occurs when you assemble all your components into the assembly and you find you have interference or fit issues. Remember that you can always activate components to edit them within the context of the assembly. Once the top-level assembly is activated and regenerated, the other components update. Be careful when creating features in components in an assembly because you may inadvertently select a reference from a different component. If this occurs, it creates a parent/child relationship both between the two components and between the component and the assembly.

2012 PTC

PT

In

te rn

al

U se

nl y

Module 26 | Page 25

Fo r

Module 26 | Page 26

PT

In

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

Module

27
U se O te rn al
Module 27 | Page 1

Resolving Failures and Seeking Help

Module Overview

When using features as the foundation of design models, you create several references and parent/child relationships between them. Regeneration failures occur when Creo Parametric cannot successfully resolve a parent/child relationship, geometric situation, or a missing reference in a part or assembly model. Because the failure can occur for different reasons, you need to be able to diagnose the problem to correct it. In this module, you learn the various reasons for model failure and learn to utilize the tools and diagnostics available to resolve them.

Fo r

After completing this module, you will be able to: Understand and identify failures. Analyze geometry, open-section, and missing part references failures. Analyze missing component failures, missing component reference failures, and invalid assembly constraint failures. Understand resolve mode tools. Recover models. Access and use Creo Parametric's help system.

2012 PTC

PT

In

Objectives

nl y

Understanding and Identifying Failures

When a model fails regeneration, the system indicates the failing features or components.
Failures occur due to: Invalid/Impossible geometry Missing/Broken references Missing models Failure Indications: Regeneration Manager: Regeneration Caption Red Highlighting Model tree Model geometry

Figure 1 Regeneration Caption

Figure 2 Feature Highlighting

PT

In

Fo r

Understanding and Identifying Failures

When Creo Parametric regenerates a model, it recreates the model feature by feature, in the order in which each feature was created, and according to the hierarchy of the parent/child relationships between features. Occasionally during the model regeneration, a problem occurs that causes the model to fail regeneration. Regeneration can fail for any of the following reasons: Invalid or impossible geometry. Missing or broken references between parent/child relationships. Missing models for an assembly. The fact that a model fails regeneration is beneficial, as you would not want to hand off or continue working with a problematic model.

Failure Indications
When a failure occurs, the system alerts you using several methods.
Module 27 | Page 2 2012 PTC

te rn
Figure 3 Regeneration Manager

al

U se

nl y

 The Regeneration Manager icon in the status bar appears red: The Regeneration Caption appears. Before you can continue working, you must acknowledge the failure by clicking OK to accept the failure or Cancel to undo the changes. Note that there are situations in both part and assembly modes where the Cancel option is not available. The system highlights the failed features or components in the model tree. The failed items are shown in bold red text and any children of the failed item are shown in standard red text. In Figure 2, the Chamfer feature is the failing item, and the Round is a child of the failed Chamfer. If possible, the system also highlights failed geometry on the model in red, with child geometry highlighted in blue.

You can activate the Regeneration Manager in several ways: By selecting Regeneration Manager from the Regenerate types drop-down menu in the Operations group. By clicking the icon from the status bar. The icon includes three small circles which are filled in green, yellow, or red depending on the models current status: icon appears with the left circle When the Regeneration Manager filled in green, the model has been successfully regenerated. In this case, the Regeneration Manager dialog box does not open.

Fo r

When the Regeneration Manager icon appears with the middle circle filled in yellow, the model has been modified and some features or components need to be regenerated.

When the Regeneration Manager icon appears with the right circle filled in red, the model has failed regeneration.

Locating Failed Features or Components

Failed features or components are not always immediately identifiable. You can use these additional methods to locate failed features or components: Add the Status column in the model tree. Failed features or components display with a status of Failed or Child of Failed. Search in the model by clicking Find . You can search for features or components that have Failed or Child of Failed statuses.
2012 PTC Module 27 | Page 3

PT

In

te rn

You can then select any of the listed items and right-click to obtain feature information or reference information for that item. This information can be useful in determining the cause of the failure, so you can intelligently resolve the failure.

al

U se

However, the Regeneration Manager is particularly useful during a failure to identify failed features or components. Once activated in a failure situation, the Regeneration Manager lists the failed items and any children of the failed items.

The Regeneration Manager can be used any time changes are made to a model to selectively regenerate certain features or components.

nl y

Using the Regeneration Manager

 Once the failed items are located and selected, you can click Filter Tree from the Options drop-down menu to display only the failed items in the model tree.

Working on Failed Models

Once the failure is acknowledged by clicking OK in the Regeneration Caption, you can continue working normally, or Save or Erase the model to resolve at a later time. However, it is recommended that you promptly resolve the failure by following these three basic steps: Investigate the failure by obtaining feature information or reference information. Resolve the failure using tools such as Edit or Edit Definition on the failed feature(s), parent features, or any feature in the model. You can also select Suppress to remove failing feature(s) from the current regeneration, or Delete to remove them from the model. Regenerate the model to obtain a successful regeneration.

Fo r

Module 27 | Page 4

PT

In

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

Analyzing Geometry Failures

Geometry failures are caused either by geometry that has been made invalid, or geometry that is impossible to create.
Invalid geometry examples: Round radii too small or too large Blend start points mismatch Sweep Radii Rule Extrude Through Until

Figure 1 Round Radius Too Large

When a feature fails due to invalid or impossible geometry, the failing feature and its children highlight in the model tree. A message indicating that the feature geometry could not be constructed displays in the feature information. Some examples of invalid or impossible geometry include:

Fo r

Round radii too small or too large If a round radius becomes too large for the geometry that is being rounded, then it fails. In Figure 1, the round in the left image previews properly because it is small enough to fit on the geometry. In the right image, the round becomes too large for the size of the geometry and cannot be created. Hence, the round preview is no longer available. Sweep radii If a circular section of radius T is swept along a curved trajectory of radius R, the radius R must be greater than or equal to radius T or else the resulting geometry overlaps, resulting in invalid geometry. In Figure 2, the circular section is swept along the curved trajectory, resulting in the cane-shaped geometry. In the middle image, the red cross-section lines in the FRONT view show that the geometry does not overlap. Hence, it is valid and RT. In the right image, however, the cross-section radius T has increased, as shown by the red cross-section lines. As a result, the cross-section lines overlap, and thus the geometry overlaps. As a result, the rule of RT is not valid, and the geometry cannot be created.
2012 PTC Module 27 | Page 5

PT

Analyzing Geometry Failures

In

Figure 2 Sweep Radius Section Radius Comparison

te rn

al
Figure 3 Blend Start Points Mismatch

U se

nl y

 Blend start points mismatch If the start points between blend sections are mismatched by an angle that is too large, the resulting geometry twists upon itself, which cannot occur. In Figure 3, the blend section start points are mismatched by 90 degrees and the resulting geometry twists. If the start points are mismatched by 180 degrees, the feature fails. Extrude Through Until If a feature is extruded to a depth of Through Until, the feature must actually pass through the selected reference. If it does not, the feature fails because the geometry cannot be created.

Fo r

Module 27 | Page 6

PT

In

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

PROCEDURE - Analyzing Geometry Failures

Close Window Erase Not Displayed GEOM-FAILURE.PRT

Resolve_Failures\Part_Invalid-Geometry Task 1:

Resolve geometry failures using the Undo option.

1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. Orient to the named view 3D.

4. Edit the chamfer D value to 2.

5. Click twice in the background to de-select all geometry. 6. Notice the failed chamfer and its children are indicated on the model and in the model tree. 7. Click Cancel in the caption to undo the changes. Task 2:

Resolve geometry failures by fixing the failing feature.

Fo r

3. Edit the R2 dimension to 1, and click twice in the background to de-select all geometry. Editing the trajectory radius to 1 violates the RT rule.

2012 PTC

PT

2. In the model tree, right-click TRAJ_2 and select Edit.

The smallest trajectory radius (R) is 2. The sweep diameter is currently 3, therefore T=1.5, and RT.

1. Orient to the named view FRONT.

In

te rn

al
Module 27 | Page 7

U se

nl y

3. In the model tree, right-click Chamfer 1 and select Edit.

4. Click OK in the caption to accept the changes. 5. Click Regeneration Manager from the status bar. 6. Notice the failed sweep feature and its children, then click Cancel.

7. Select Sweep 1 from the model tree, then right-click and select Edit Definition. 8. Right-click and select Sketch. 9. Orient to the Standard Orientation. 10. Edit the diameter from 3 to 2. 11. Click OK . .

12. Click Complete Feature 13. Orient to the named view FRONT. 14. Notice the model has regenerated successfully.

Task 3:

Resolve geometry failures by fixing a non-failing feature.

1. Press CTRL+D.

Fo r

2. In the model tree, right-click Sweep 1 and select Edit. 3. Edit the diameter from 2 to 3 and click twice in the background to de-select all geometry. 4. Click OK to accept the result. 5. Select TRAJ_2 from the model tree, right-click, and select Edit.

6. Edit the radius to 2 and click twice in the background. 7. Notice the model has regenerated successfully. This completes the procedure.

Module 27 | Page 8

PT

In

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

Analyzing Open Section Failures

Open section failures occur when the open section extends beyond the solid geometry that bounds it.
Open section features must be bounded by other solids. Failure message indicates when a part cannot be intersected with a feature. Figure 1 Open Section Versus Closed Section

Fo r

Most sketches for solid features should be closed sketches. However, when the design intent for a sketch requires an open section, the resulting feature must be bounded by other solid geometry. In Figure 2, the highlighted feature was extruded from an open-section sketch. However, if the depth is extended further than the bounding solid geometry, the feature fails because it is no longer bounded entirely by solid geometry, as shown in Figure 3. When a feature fails due to an open section, the failing feature and its children highlight in the model tree. A message indicating that the part could not be intersected with the feature displays in the feature information.

2012 PTC

PT

Analyzing Open Section Failures

In

Figure 2 Open Section Sketch Feature

te rn

al
Figure 3 Open Section Sketch Failure
Module 27 | Page 9

U se

nl y

PROCEDURE - Analyzing Open Section Failures

Close Window Erase Not Displayed OPEN-SEC_FAIL.PRT

Resolve_Failures\Part_Open-Section Task 1:

Resolve an open-section failure in a part model.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

3. Edit the height from 9 to 11.

4. Click twice in the background to de-select all geometry. 5. Notice the failed feature and its children are highlighted.

6. Click OK in the caption to accept the result.

In

7. From the status bar, click Regeneration Manager

Fo r

9. Notice the system could not intersect the part with the feature, and the feature is unattached.

10. In the Web browser, scroll down to Section Data and notice that the feature was created with an open section.

Module 27 | Page 10

PT

8. Select the failing LEFT_TOOTH feature, right-click, and select Feature Info.

te rn
.

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

2. In the model tree, right-click LEFT_TOOTH and select Edit.

11. Scroll back up to the Children section for RIGHT_TOOTH and click Feature Info . 12. Scroll down to Section Data and notice that this feature does not indicate an open section. 13. Click Web Browser to minimize the Web browser.

18. Enable only the following Sketcher Display types:

In

Fo r

20. Click OK

21. Orient to the Standard Orientation. 22. Click Complete Feature .

23. Notice the model regenerates successfully. Alternatively, you could have resolved this failure by increasing the height of the main cylinder to prevent the open section from falling off the cylinders edge. This completes the procedure.
2012 PTC Module 27 | Page 11

PT

from the 19. Select Concentric Arc types drop-down menu, select the existing arc, and sketch an arc to close the section.

te rn
.

17. Right-click in the graphics window and select Edit Internal Sketch.

al

16. Notice that the open section is not visible in the feature preview. The system cannot create the open section protrusion beyond the existing solid material.

U se

15. Right-click LEFT_TOOTH from the model tree and select Edit Definition.

nl y

14. Click Cancel from the Regeneration Manager.

Analyzing Missing Part Reference Failures

Missing part reference failures occur when a parent feature is changed, and the child feature can no longer find the parent's reference.
Missing part reference failure examples include: Missing axes Missing references for rounds/chamfers Editing a sketch Replace sketched entities Replace Sketcher dimensions

Figure 1 Sketch Feature Referencing Hole Axis

Figure 2 Round Edges

PT

In

Fo r

Analyzing Missing Part Reference Failures

When you modify a parent feature, any children of that feature automatically update. This functionality is highly beneficial and demonstrates Creo Parametrics aptitude for efficiency. However, if a modification to a parent feature results in the inability of a child feature to locate its parent's reference, a failure occurs. When a feature fails due to a missing reference, the failing feature and its children highlight in the model tree. A message indicating that the feature references are missing displays in the feature information. The following are common causes of missing part reference failures: Missing axes In Figure 1, the slot sketch is dimensioned off of the hole axis. If the hole is deleted, its axis is deleted, and therefore the dimensioning reference for the slot is deleted. Thus, the slot feature now fails due to missing part references.
Module 27 | Page 12 2012 PTC

te rn
Figure 3 Editing a Sketch

al

U se

nl y

Using the Replace Function

Fo r

2012 PTC

PT

In

You can also replace dimensions within Sketcher. When you select a dimension to replace, you must create the new dimension. The new dimension maintains the original dimension's sketcher dimension number (sd#), enabling any relations using the sketcher dimension to remain valid.

te rn

One way to help mitigate missing reference failures when editing sketches is to use the Replace function. The Replace function transfers references from an old entity to the new entity you have created. You can click the Operations group drop-down menu and select Replace while in Sketcher to access the Replace function. You then select the original entity that contains the references, and select the new entity to which you want to transfer the references.

al

U se

O
Module 27 | Page 13

nl y

Missing references for rounds or chamfers Occurs if you delete or redefine a feature and remove the edge that a round or chamfer uses. In Figure 2, the edges where the boss intersects the remainder of the part are rounded. If the boss is deleted, the edges are therefore deleted, and the rounds fail. Missing references can also occur if you insert a feature before the round or chamfer that causes the edge to be removed. For example, if you cut material off of an extrude feature, consequently cutting the edge off that a round references, the round fails. Editing a sketch Can result in changed or removed edges and surfaces in a model. If those changed or removed edges and surfaces are parents to other features, failures can occur. In Figure 3, the sketched entity is being deleted because you want to modify the sketch. However, Creo Parametric informs you that this entity is referenced by other entities. If you decide to continue and delete this entity, the child features fail due to the removal of this reference.

PROCEDURE - Analyzing Missing Part Reference Failures

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Resolve_Failures\Part_Missing-Reference MISSING-REF_FAIL.PRT Task 1: Resolve a failure caused by missing part references.

1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. Edit the definition of BASE_PROTRUSION. 3. In the graphics window, right-click and select Edit Internal Sketch. 4. Enable only the following Sketcher Display types: . 5. Select the right-side angled line, right-click, and select Delete. 6. Review the warning message and click Yes.

7. Select 3-Point / Tangent End

9. Click Complete Feature

PT

8. Click OK

from the Arc types drop-down menu and sketch an arc in its place. .

Fo r

10. Notice that SIDE_ROUND and its children fail. 11. Click OK in the caption to accept the result.

12. In the model tree, right-click SIDE_ROUND and select Info > Feature. 13. Notice that SIDE_ROUND is failing because feature references are missing. 14. Click Web Browser the Web browser.
Module 27 | Page 14

In

te rn
. to close

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

15. Edit the definition of SIDE_ROUND. 16. In the dashboard, select the Sets tab, select Set 2, and click in the Driving surface collector. 17. Spin the model and select the surface shown to satisfy the missing reference. 18. Click Complete Feature . 19. Notice the model regenerates successfully. Task 2:

Transfer references using the Replace function to avoid a missing references failure.

1. Edit the definition of BASE_PROTRUSION. 2. In the graphics window, right-click and select Edit Internal Sketch. 3. Click Sketch View In Graphics toolbar.

4. Select the right arc and click

5. Select the left-side angled line. Click the Operations group drop-down menu and select Replace. Select the newly mirrored arc. Click Yes in the Replace Entity dialog box. . . 7. Click Complete Feature

Fo r

6. Click OK

This completes the procedure.

2012 PTC

PT

Using the Replace functionality, you have transferred references to the arc entity, thus avoiding a failure.

Mirror . Select the vertical centerline.

In

te rn
from the
Module 27 | Page 15

al

U se

nl y

Analyzing Missing Component Failures

Missing component failures occur when Creo Parametric cannot locate all of the necessary components to properly open an assembly.
Reasons include: Component renamed on operating system. Component renamed in Creo Parametric without assembly in session. Component located in a different folder on operating system.

Fo r

If an assembly fails regeneration due to a missing component, the failing component and its children highlight in the model tree. A message indicating that the component model is missing displays in the feature information for that component. Reasons for missing components in assemblies include: The component was renamed in the operating system Creo Parametric is not aware if the component was renamed on the operating system. Consequently, the assembly containing this renamed component fails because the assembly searches for the component using its original name. The component was renamed in Creo Parametric without the assembly in session Again, if the assembly containing the component is not in session at the time that one of its components is renamed, the assembly continues to search for the original name. Thus, the assembly fails. The component was moved to a different folder If a component is moved from its original location, Creo Parametric continues to search for the component in its original location. Because the component has been moved, the assembly fails. In Figure 1, component HANDLE.PRT has been moved out of the Assy_Missing-Comp folder and placed into the Handle_Folder. Because the assembly requires this component (as shown in the model tree in Figure 2), it fails when opened.
Module 27 | Page 16 2012 PTC

PT

Analyzing Missing Component Failures

In

Figure 2 Assembly and Model Tree

te rn

al

U se

Figure 1 Folder View of Components

nl y

PROCEDURE - Analyzing Missing Component Failures

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Resolve_Failures\Assembly_Missing-Component MISSING-COMP_FAIL.ASM Task 1: Resolve a missing component failure in an assembly.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

3. Also notice the Message Log indicates that the system cannot retrieve model HANDLE. 4. Click Close Displayed. Click OK.

and click File > Manage Session > Erase Not

6. Click Working Directory

In

5. Click Working Directory from the Navigator. Double-click Handle_Folder. Notice that this sub-folder contains HANDLE.PRT, which is the cause of the failure.

7. Double-click MISSING-COMP_FAIL.ASM to open it. 8. The assembly fails for the same reason.

Fo r

9. From the status bar, click . Regeneration Manager Notice that the HANDLE component within the JAW_SUB assembly has failed.

2012 PTC

PT

te rn
again.
Module 27 | Page 17

al

U se

nl y

2. Notice a failure occurs when opening the assembly.

10. In the Regeneration Manager, right-click HANDLE.PRT and select Feature Info. Notice the handle is failing because the model is missing. to Click Web Browser close the Web browser. 11. Click Cancel from the Regeneration Manager. 12. Click Find from the status bar. Select Component as the Look for option. Select the Status tab, and select Failed as the Value. Click Find Now and then click Close. 13. Notice that HANDLE.PRT is located in the model tree, and then select JAW_SUB.ASM to highlight it.

Fo r

15. Press CTRL+G to regenerate the model. Notice it regenerates successfully. 16. Click Save and click OK. and click File > Manage Session > Erase Not

17. Click Close Displayed. Click OK.

Module 27 | Page 18

PT

14. Right-click HANDLE.PRT and select Retrieve Missing Component. Double-click Handle_Folder, if necessary. Select HANDLE.PRT, and click Open.

In

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

18. Click Working Directory

19. Double-click Handle_Folder. 20. Right-click HANDLE.PRT and select Cut. 21. Click Working Directory from the Navigator, and click in the Web browser to clear the selection of any files.

Fo r

2012 PTC

PT

In

te rn
Module 27 | Page 19

al

U se

This completes the procedure.

23. Double-click MISSING-COMP_FAIL.ASM to verify that the failure has been resolved.

nl y

22. Right-click in the Web browser and select Paste.

Analyzing Missing Component Reference Failures

Missing Component Reference failures occur when you modify a component feature that removes the reference used for its placement or its children's placement in an assembly.
Failure displays as: Failed to regenerate component placement. Feature references are missing.

Figure 1 Parent/Child Relationship Graph

Analyzing Missing Component Reference Failures

If a component's placement cannot be resolved in an assembly, Creo Parametric reports the failure in the message window, indicating that some features failed to regenerate. Remember, this message is displayed within Assembly mode, so the feature it is referring to is actually a failing component in this context. Feature information on the failing component reveals messages indicating that the regeneration of the component placement failed or that there are feature references missing. This type of failure occurs when features in a component that have parents or children in an assembly are modified . If the feature modification removes the reference used in the assembly, this causes either the component or the component's children to fail placement. In Figure 1, the Reference Viewer displays the parent/child relationships for the JAW_SLIDE.PRT component in the assembly. Component LEADSCREW.PRT is a child to the jaw slide component. In referring to the Reference Graph, LEADSCREW.PRT is assembled to surface id 238 of JAW_SLIDE.PRT. As such, if the feature containing surface id 238 in JAW_SLIDE.PRT were modified, it could cause the leadscrew to fail.
Module 27 | Page 20 2012 PTC

Fo r

PT

Figure 2 Model Tree and Assembly

In

te rn

al

U se

nl y

PROCEDURE - Analyzing Missing Component Reference Failures

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Resolve_Failures\Assembly_Missing-Reference JAW_SLIDE.PRT Task 1: Resolve a missing component reference failure.

1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. Select Hole 2. A leadscrew in the assembly mates to the flat base surface of this hole.

3. Edit the definition of Hole 2.

4. In the dashboard, click Drill Hole Profile . Select the Shape tab. Notice that the flat base surface of the hole has been replaced by a drill point.

6. Click Close

PT

5. Click Complete Feature .

In

Fo r

7. Click Working Directory from the Navigator. Double-click MISSING-REFS. ASM to open it. 8. Notice that the assembly fails to regenerate, but still displays all components.

2012 PTC

te rn
.
Module 27 | Page 21

al

U se

nl y

9. From the status bar, click Regeneration Manager

10. Notice that LEADSCREW.PRT within JAW_SUB.ASM is failing.

to close 13. Click Web Browser the Web browser, and click Cancel from the Regeneration Manager. 14. Expand JAW_SUB.ASM in the model tree. 15. Notice that the failed LEADSCREW.PRT and its failing child component are highlighted.

Fo r

16. Right-click JAW_SLIDE.PRT and select Activate. 17. Select Hole 2. 18. Right-click and select Edit Definition. 19. In the dashboard, click Rectangle Hole Profile remove the drill point. to

Module 27 | Page 22

PT

Remember, you can click to start the Search Find tool to search for failing components and features.

In

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

12. Notice that LEADSCREW.PRT is failing due to missing placement references.

nl y

11. Right-click LEADSCREW.PRT and select Feature Info.

20. Click Complete Feature

21. In the model tree, right-click MISSING-REFS.ASM and select Activate. 22. Click Regenerate . 23. Notice that the model regenerates successfully. This completes the procedure.

Fo r

2012 PTC

PT

In

te rn
Module 27 | Page 23

al

U se

nl y

Analyzing Invalid Assembly Constraint Failures

Invalid assembly constraint failures occur when constraints from one set conflict with constraints from another set for a given component.
Reasons include: Parent components modified or deleted. Features in parent components modified or deleted. Resolve the failure: Change constraints. Modify features to satisfy constraints. Suppress or freeze component.

Figure 1 Invalid Assembly Constraints

Fo r

Analyzing Invalid Assembly Constraint Failures

Assembly constraints are based on component references. A component's references can change, and therefore become invalid. This occurs if parent assembly components are modified or deleted, or if the features in parent components are modified or deleted. In Figure 1, the ends of a rod are inserted into holes on each block using Coincident constraints. The holes in the transparent block were then moved outward, without modifying the holes on the other block. Consequently, the holes do not align, and it becomes impossible for the rod ends to be inserted into both holes given the misalignment. The result is that the rod constraints become invalid. A message indicating the failure to regenerate component placement displays in the feature information for the failed component.

Fixing Invalid Assembly Constraint Failures

When assembly constraints become invalid, you can perform one of the following:
Module 27 | Page 24 2012 PTC

PT

Figure 2 Coincident Constraints Disabled

In

te rn
Figure 3 Features Modified to Satisfy Constraints

al

U se

nl y

Fo r

2012 PTC

PT

In

te rn
Module 27 | Page 25

al

U se

nl y

Change constraints You can constrain the component differently so that all constraints are satisfied, or you can disable constraints. Disabling constraints maintains the original references, but sets the constraint inactive for regeneration purposes. In Figure 2, the Coincident constraints for the rods were disabled. Notice that the components are still misaligned with respect to the holes. The disabled constraints can always be re-enabled at a later time. You can also disable constraints to test different assembly scenarios. Modify features to satisfy constraints You can modify either the features in the failing component or in the other components. In Figure 3, the holes in the other two components were moved outward so all constraints are again satisfied. Suppress or freeze the failing component You can then either modify the part or delete it from the assembly at a later time.

PROCEDURE - Analyzing Invalid Assembly Constraint Failures

Close Window Erase Not Displayed

Resolve_Failures\Assembly_Invalid-Constraint INVALID-CONST.ASM Task 1: Resolve invalid assembly constraint failures.

Our goal is to modify the rod spacing by modifying the hole spacing from 10 to 8 for the three block-shaped components. 1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. In the model tree, right-click JAW_FIXED.PRT and select Activate. Select the hole on the right. Right-click and select Edit.

5. Click Regenerate

6. Failures occur. Click OK. 7. Notice that the two ROD.PRT components and their child assembly fails.

Fo r

8. Right-click the first ROD.PRT in the model tree and select Info > Feature. 9. Notice that ROD.PRT failed to regenerate due to component placement.

10. Click Web Browser the Web browser.

PT

Module 27 | Page 26

In

4. Click Windows and select INVALID-CONST.ASM. .

te rn
to close

3. Edit the offset value from 10 to 8.

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

11. Right-click the first ROD.PRT and select Edit Definition. 12. In the dashboard, notice that the constraint STATUS is Constraints Invalid. Select the Placement tab. Placement has failed due to conflicting Coincident constraints. Select the third Coincident constraint and clear the Constraint Enabled check box for testing purposes. 13. Click Complete Component 14. The first ROD.PRT now regenerates successfully. .

15. Right-click the second ROD.PRT and select Edit Definition. 16. Notice the dashboard constraint status. Select the Placement tab. Select the third Coincident constraint and clear the Constraint Enabled check box.

Fo r

17. Click Complete Component 18. The second ROD.PRT now regenerates successfully.

PT

In

2012 PTC

te rn
.
Module 27 | Page 27

al

U se

nl y

19. The JAW_SUB.ASM fails because its hole spacing still needs to be modified. 20. Expand JAW_SUB.ASM. 21. Right-click JAW_SLIDE.PRT and select Activate. 22. Select the lower right hole, right-click, and select Edit. 23. Edit the offset value from 10 to 8. 24. Click Windows and select INVALID-CONST.ASM. 25. Click Regenerate . 26. Collapse JAW_SUB.ASM. 27. Notice the model now regenerates successfully. 28. Zoom in and notice the rod misalignment. Recall that the Coincident constraints were disabled at this end.

Fo r

31. Click Windows and select INVALID-CONST.ASM. . 33. The hole spacing has been resolved for all three block components. The Coincident constraints for this end could now be re-enabled to essentially detect misalignment in the future.

32. Click Regenerate

This completes the procedure.

Module 27 | Page 28

PT

30. Double-click the bottom right hole and edit its offset from 10 to 8.

In

29. In the model tree, right-click HEAD_BLOCK.PRT and select Activate.

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

Understanding Resolve Mode Tools

If desired, you can activate Resolve mode to manage failures.
Activate Resolve mode using: Regeneration Manager preferences Failure Handling No Resolve mode (default) Resolve mode Config.pro option regen_failure_handling no_resolve_mode (default) resolve_mode

Figure 2 Failure Diagnostics Window

Understanding Resolve Mode

If desired, you can activate Creo Parametric's traditional Resolve mode upon a regeneration failure. Resolve mode is a menu-manager driven system that provides tools and diagnostics to resolve the current failure. You can activate Resolve mode by editing preferences in the Regeneration Manager, or by selecting the regen_failure_handling config.pro option.

Fo r

The Resolve Mode Environment

When you activate Resolve mode, the following occurs: The Message Log displays a message about the failure. The failing feature and all subsequent features remain unregenerated and therefore do not display. The Resolve menu appears, which uses the traditional menu manager interface. The Resolve menu is shown in Figure 1. When using Resolve mode, you must specify your intended action first, such as Modify (Edit) or Redefine (Edit Definition), and then select an object, such as a feature or component. The Failure Diagnostics window appears, providing you with information about the failing feature. The Failure Diagnostics window is shown in Figure 2. The option to Save is disabled until the failure is resolved.
2012 PTC Module 27 | Page 29

PT

In

te rn

al

U se

Figure 1 Resolve Menu

nl y

Failure Diagnostics Window

The Failure Diagnostics window prominently displays in front of the graphics window upon entering Resolve mode, and is one of the tools available for resolving or preventing the regeneration problem that has occurred. It displays the following options: Overview Displays help information on the various Resolve mode tools. Feature Info Displays the Feature Information for the failing feature in the Web browser. Resolve Hints If a resolve hint exists, the system displays this link. Click the link for a suggestion on how to fix the problem.

Resolve Menu

Undo Changes Undo all the changes that caused the failure. Current Model/Backup Model For both investigating and fixing the problem, you can opt to work on the current (failed) model or the backup model. The backup model shows all features in their pre-regenerated state, and can be used to modify or restore dimensions of the features that are not displayed in the current (failed) model. You can toggle back and forth between the current and backup model. Investigate Enables you to investigate the cause of the model failure. You can list the changes made to items, show every object referenced by the failed feature, report geometrical misalignments found during the last regeneration, and roll the model back to a specified feature. Quick Fix Enables you to fix the failing feature by performing standard operations including Redefine, Reroute, Suppress, Clip Suppress, and Delete. Reroute enables you to reroute the failing feature's references to prevent failures in subsequent features. Clip Suppress suppresses not only the failing feature, but all subsequent features as well. Depending upon the operation selected, the Undo Changes option may become unavailable. Fix Model Enables you to fix other features in the model to resolve the failing feature. Using fix model enables you to create, delete, suppress, or redefine other features. It also enables you to modify the dimensions of the other non-failing features in the model, as well as restore all modified dimensions to their previous values. Again, depending upon the operation selected, the Undo Changes option becomes unavailable.

Fo r

Yes / No When you have fixed the regeneration failure using Resolve mode, you can click Yes to exit Resolve mode and return to normal operation. You can also click No to remain in Resolve mode if desired.

Module 27 | Page 30

PT

You must click Regenerate in the menu manager after a change is made to the model. While in Resolve mode, the regenerate icon is disabled since the resolve menu contains Regenerate in the menu manager.

In

te rn

al

U se

The Resolve menu is another tool available for resolving or preventing the regeneration problem that has occurred, and contains these main options:

nl y
2012 PTC

Recovering Models
You can recover models in the event of a system crash.
Dialog appears automatically upon restart: Retrieve Opens previous model Continue Starts a new Creo Parametric session

Figure 1 Retrieval Dialog Box

Upon restarting Creo Parametric, you are prompted to either Retrieve the previous model or Continue onto a new Creo Parametric session.

Fo r

Selecting the Retrieve option is very useful for avoiding lost work on your models.

2012 PTC

PT

In the event of a system crash, Creo Parametric captures a snapshot of the models in session, as well as any applied configuration settings.

In

Recovering Models

te rn

al
Module 27 | Page 31

U se

nl y

Using Creo Parametric Help

You can obtain help from various locations, either from Creo Parametric or from links on PTC's Online Resources.
You can obtain help from any of the following locations in Creo Parametric: Creo Parametric Help

Figure 1 Using the Help Center

The Help Center

Fo r

The Help Center provides access to Creo Parametric's help system. Within the Help Center you can find information on specific modeling topics, as well as tutorials, books, and quick links. You can access the Help Center by clicking Creo Parametric Help from the top of the interface. The Help Center is subdivided into various Functional Areas to help narrow your search regarding a given question. Once the Functional Area has been selected, you can further navigate within specific Books. The Functional Areas and Books, respectively, pertaining to the Introduction to Creo Parametric course are: Functional Area Fundamentals Part Modeling
Module 27 | Page 32

PT

Figure 2 Using the Command Search

In

te rn
Figure 3 Online Resource Center Book Fundamentals Part Modeling, Sketcher
2012 PTC

al

U se

nl y

Command Search Online Resources File > Help

Functional Area Detailed Drawings Assembly Design

Book Detailed Drawings Creo Parametric Assembly

Once the desired Functional Area and Book have been selected, you further narrow your search for information by browsing in sub-books. You may also use the Search tab to type specific keywords and return a list of topics that satisfy those keywords. You can also use the Index tab to either browse for index terms or type in a keyword to find.

Command Search

Activate the command search by clicking Command Search

When you cursor over any of the lists results, the system locates and highlights the command in the ribbon. If you select any of the lists results, the command starts.

Click File > Help > Online Resources to launch the Creo Parametric Help dialog box and display links to various information found online on PTC's Web site, as shown in Figure 3. Links to online resources include: New Users Provides some useful videos and tutorials for new users to Creo. Existing Users Provides additional videos and tutorials for more advanced users. Support & Training Provides links for contacting technical support and finding information about additional training available.

Fo r

Additional Resources
The following additional options are available from the File > Help menu:

Search Online Knowledge Base Enables you to search PTCs online knowledge base. Log Support Case Enables you to log a support case to PTC Technical Support for any issues. What's New? Provides information about what is new in the latest release of Creo Parametric.

Obtaining System Information

Clicking File > Help > System Information launches an Information Window dialog box. This dialog box provides the following information: License Information Provides important licensing information that you may find useful if you need to log a call with PTC Technical Support.
2012 PTC Module 27 | Page 33

PT

In

te rn

Online Resources

al

U se

Creo Parametric Help icon. This activates the Command Search field, which enables you to type commands. As you begin typing a command, a list appears and dynamically filters results as you type.

nl y

next to the

 Configured Option Modules Displays which Creo Parametric optional license extensions are being used. Machine Information Provides information about the machine on which Creo Parametric is running. Installation Directories and Command Information Provides information about Creo Parametric software installation directories. Configuration Information Provides information about which config.pro files are read. You can also view information regarding the specific version of Creo Parametric you are running by clicking File > Help > About Creo Parametric. In the dialog box that displays, you can view the Creo Parametric date code and your companys Service Contract Number (SCN). If you need to log a call with PTC Technical Support, you need the SCN.

Fo r

Module 27 | Page 34

PT

In

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

nl y

PROCEDURE - Using Creo Parametric Help

Close Window Interface\Help Task 1: Erase Not Displayed CREATE NEW

Use the Help Center. , select Part, type help as the Name, and click OK.

1. Click New

3. Click Creo Parametric Help

Fo r

6. In the Help Center Search field, type line tangent and click Search.

7. Notice that the system switches to the Search tab automatically and displays a list of results based on the search criteria entered.

8. In the list of results, click To Create a Line Segment Tangent to Two Entities and read the associated information. 9. Close the Creo Parametric Help dialog box.

2012 PTC

PT

5. Scroll through the information on the Profile Rib feature.

Click next to Part Modeling to expand it. Select Part Modeling to expand it. Select Engineering Features to expand it. Select Rib to expand it. Select Profile Rib to expand it. Click About the Profile Rib Feature.

In

te rn
Module 27 | Page 35

al

U se

4. In the Creo Parametric Help next to Creo dialog box, click Parametric to expand it.

nl y

2. Enable only the following Datum Display types:

Task 2:

Use the Command Search functionality. to

1. Click Command Search enable it.

2. In the Command Search field, type she and notice that the commands dynamically filter down.

1. Click File > Help > Online Resources. 2. If prompted, type your PTC username and password. 3. Notice the New Users, Existing Users and Support & Training tabs on the left.

4. Click the Support & Training tab. Click Creo support center. Scroll down the page, and click Contact via Phone along the left side. Scroll to the end of the document, and locate the support number for your location in the PDF file. 5. Close the Creo Parametric Help dialog box.

Fo r

Task 4:

1. Click File > Help > System Information. Notice the information available under the License Information, Configured Option Modules, and Machine Information. Click Close. This completes the procedure.
Module 27 | Page 36 2012 PTC

PT

Use System Information Help.

In

te rn

al

U se

Task 3:

Use the Help Online Resources.

4. Click the X in the Command Search field to collapse it.

nl y

3. Cursor over Shell, and notice its location in the Engineering group.

Module

28
U se O te rn al
Module 28 | Page 1

Project II
Module Overview

Using Creo Parametric and the remainder of the skills learned in this course, complete the following project design tasks.

Objectives

Fo r

2012 PTC

PT

After completing this module, you will be able to: Create the FLANGE.PRT model. Complete the ENGINE_BLOCK.PRT, IMPELLER_HOUSING.PRT, and FRAME.PRT models. Create the PISTON_ASSY.ASM, BLOWER.ASM, ENGINE.ASM., and ENGINE_BLOWER.ASM assemblies. Create the ENGINE-BLOWER_MODELS.DRW drawing. Analyze and resolve interferences.

In

nl y

The Air Circulator

In this project, you create, assemble, and document components of the Air Circulator.
Create from scratch: Part Assembly Drawing Minimal instructions Completed models for reference

Figure 1 Air Circulator

Upon returning from Creo Parametric training, you are assigned to create the AC-40 Air Circulator.

Fo r

Because all tasks in this project are based on topics that you have learned in the course, instructions for each project step are minimal. Detailed picks and clicks are not provided. This enables you to test your knowledge of the materials as you proceed though the project.

Completed Models for Reference

Be sure to save all project models within the Intro-2_working sub-folder of the Projects lab files folder structure. The Projects folder also contains a sub-folder named Intro-2_completed. Here you can find a completed version of each model in the project. These completed models can be used as reference, if required.

Module 28 | Page 2

PT

Minimal Instructions

In

te rn

ACME Incorporated develops and markets several consumer, industrial, and defense goods. The Light Industrial Division of ACME creates a number of products, including industrial fans, heating, air conditioning, and pumps. You are employed by the Light Industrial Division of ACME Inc., which has recently started to use Creo Parametric for its product designs.

al

Project Scenario

U se

O
2012 PTC

nl y

Piston Assembly
These figures illustrate the final piston assembly you create from the previously-created components in this project.

Figure 1 PISTON_PIN.PRT

Fo r

Figure 3 CONNECTING_ ROD.PRT

PT

In

te rn
Figure 4 PISTON_ASSY.ASM

Creating the Piston Assembly

These figures illustrate the final piston assembly you create in this project. This assembly is created using the components that were created in the previous project.

2012 PTC

al
Module 28 | Page 3

U se

Figure 2 PISTON.PRT

nl y

Engine Block and Drawing

These figures illustrate the final engine block and drawing you complete in this project.

Figure 1 CRANKSHAFT.PRT

Fo r

Completing the Engine Block and Engine-Blower Models Drawing

These figures illustrate the final engine block and drawing you complete in this project. The engine block was started in the previous project. The drawing should be a two-sheet drawing referencing both the crankshaft and completed ENGINE_BLOCK models.

Module 28 | Page 4

PT

Figure 3 ENGINE-BLOWER_MODELS.DRW

In

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

Figure 2 ENGINE_ BLOCK.PRT

nl y

Blower Assembly
These figures illustrate the components and final blower assembly you complete in this project.

Figure 1 FLANGE.PRT

PT

Figure 3 IMPELLER_ HOUSING.PRT

In

te rn
Figure 4 BLOWER.ASM

Fo r

Completing the Flange, Impeller, Impeller Housing, and Blower Assembly

These figures illustrate the flange, impeller, impeller housing, and blower assembly you complete in this project. The impeller and impeller housing were started in the previous project.

2012 PTC

al
Module 28 | Page 5

U se

Figure 2 IMPELLER.PRT

nl y

Engine Blower Assembly

These figures illustrate the final frame component, engine assembly, and final engine blower assembly you create in this project.

Figure 1 FRAME.PRT

Fo r

Creating the Frame, Engine Assembly, and Engine Blower Assembly

These figures illustrate the final frame, engine assembly, and engine blower assembly you create in this project. The frame was started in the previous project.

Module 28 | Page 6

PT

Figure 3 ENGINE_BLOWER.ASM

In

te rn

al
2012 PTC

U se

Figure 2 ENGINE.ASM

nl y

Completing the Design

These figures illustrate the bolts assembled in this project. The assembly is then be evaluated for interferences and modified as required.

Figure 1 BOLT.PRT

Figure 3 Assembling the BOLT.PRT

PT

In

te rn
Figure 4 Viewing Interference

Fo r

Inserting the Bolt

In the previous project, you created bolts of various lengths. In this project, they are inserted throughout the assembly. Copy and paste functionality is used to quickly assemble every bolt.

Interference and Collision Detection

Before the design is completed, check for interferences between the components. Design modifications are made to remove the interferences and finalize the design.

2012 PTC

al
Module 28 | Page 7

U se

Figure 2 Assembling the BOLT.PRT

nl y

Copyright
Introduction to Creo Parametric 2.0
Copyright 2012 Parametric Technology Corporation and/or Its Subsidiary Companies. All Rights Reserved.
User and training guides and related documentation from Parametric Technology Corporation and its subsidiary companies (collectively "PTC") are subject to the copyright laws of the United States and other countries and are provided under a license agreement that restricts copying, disclosure, and use of such documentation. PTC hereby grants to the licensed software user the right to make copies in printed form of this documentation if provided on software media, but only for internal/personal use and in accordance with the license agreement under which the applicable software is licensed. Any copy made shall include the PTC copyright notice and any other proprietary notice provided by PTC. Training materials may not be copied without the express written consent of PTC. This documentation may not be disclosed, transferred, modified, or reduced to any form, including electronic media, or transmitted or made publicly available by any means without the prior written consent of PTC and no authorization is granted to make copies for such purposes. Information described herein is furnished for general information only, is subject to change without notice, and should not be construed as a warranty or commitment by PTC. PTC assumes no responsibility or liability for any errors or inaccuracies that may appear in this document. The software described in this document is provided under written license agreement, contains valuable trade secrets and proprietary information, and is protected by the copyright laws of the United States and other countries. It may not be copied or distributed in any form or medium, disclosed to third parties, or used in any manner not provided for in the software licenses agreement except with written prior approval from PTC.

UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT RESTRICTED RIGHTS LEGEND

Parametric Technology Corporation, 140 Kendrick Street, Needham, MA 02494 USA

PRINTING HISTORY Document No. T3902-390-02

Date

05/14/2012

Order Number DT-T3902-390-02 Printed in the U.S.A

Fo r

PT

In

te rn
Description

This document and the software described herein are Commercial Computer Documentation and Software, pursuant to FAR 12.212(a)-(b) (OCT95) or DFARS 227.7202-1(a) and 227.7202-3(a) (JUN95), and are provided to the US Government under a limited commercial license only. For procurements predating the above clauses, use, duplication, or disclosure by the Government is subject to the restrictions set forth in subparagraph (c)(1)(ii) of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software Clause at DFARS 252.227-7013 (OCT88) or Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights at FAR 52.227-19(c)(1)-(2) (JUN87), as applicable. 01012012

Initial Printing of: Introduction to Creo Parametric 2.0

al

Important Copyright, Trademark, Patent, and Licensing Information: See the About Box, or copyright notice, of your PTC software.

U se

UNAUTHORIZED USE OF SOFTWARE OR ITS DOCUMENTATION CAN RESULT IN CIVIL DAMAGES AND CRIMINAL PROSECUTION. PTC regards software piracy as the crime it is, and we view offenders accordingly. We do not tolerate the piracy of PTC software products, and we pursue (both civilly and criminally) those who do so using all legal means available, including public and private surveillance resources. As part of these efforts, PTC uses data monitoring and scouring technologies to obtain and transmit data on users of illegal copies of our software. This data collection is not performed on users of legally licensed software from PTC and its authorized distributors. If you are using an illegal copy of our software and do not consent to the collection and transmission of such data (including to the United States), cease using the illegal version, and contact PTC to obtain a legally licensed copy.

nl y